Owner's Manual

OWNER’S MANUAL Leon 5F0012720BH Inglés (05.17)

5F0012720BH (05.17)

SEAT recommends SEAT recommends

Inglés SEAT GENUINE OIL Castrol EDGE Professional Leon About this manual The equipment marked with an aster- For the sake of the environment isk* is fitted as standard only in certain versions, and is only supplied as op- Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele- This manual contains a description of the vant information concerning environmental tional extras for some versions, or are equipment supplied with the vehicle at the protection. time this manual was published. Some of the only offered in certain countries. units described herein will not be available ® All registered marks are indicated with Note until a later date or are only available in cer- ®. Although the copyright symbol does tain markets. not appear, it is a copyrighted mark. Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information. Because this is a general manual for the LEON >> The section is continued on the follow- range, some of the equipment and functions ing page. that are described in this manual are not in- This manual is divided into six large parts, Important warnings on a given page which are: cluded in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modified depending on Detailed contents on a given page 1. The essentials the technical requirements and on the mar- 2. Safety ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising. General information on a given page 3. Emergencies The illustrations are intended as a general Emergency information on a given page 4. Operation guide and may vary from the equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details. 5. Tips WARNING The steering indications (left, right, forward, 6. Technical data Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor- reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the mation on safety. They warn you about possi- At the end of this manual, there is a detailed SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under- normal driving movements of the vehicle ex- ble dangers of accident or injury. alphabetical index that will help you quickly stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason cept when otherwise indicated. find the information you require. no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. The audiovisual material only is intended to All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error CAUTION help users to understand certain car function- or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print. Texts with this symbol draw your attention to alities better. It does not replace the instruc- potential sources of damage to your vehicle. Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. tion manual. Please use the instruction manu- SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act. al to obtain more comprehensive information and indications. All rights on changes are reserved. ❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose. © SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.05.17 You can access the information in this man- Thank you for trusting in us. Foreword ual using:

This Instruction Manual and its correspond- ● Thematic table of contents that follows the We wish you safe and enjoya- ing supplements should be read carefully to manual’s general chapter structure. ble motoring. familiarise yourself with your vehicle. ● Visual table of contents that uses graphics Besides the regular care and maintenance of to indicate the pages containing “essential” SEAT, S.A. the vehicle, its correct handling will help pre- information, which is detailed in the corre- serve its value. sponding chapters. For safety reasons, always note the informa- ● Alphabetical index with many terms and tion concerning accessories, modifications synonyms to help you find information. and part replacements. WARNING If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board documentation to the new owner, as it Read and always observe safety informa- should be kept with the vehicle. tion concerning the passenger's front airbag ››› page 87, Important information

regarding the front passenger's airbag.

Related videos

››› page 201 Safety: Traffic jam assist, adaptive cruise control, city safety assist, front and rear parking sensors and rear view cam- ››› page 221 era. ››› page 232 ››› page 238

››› page 119 Technology: Kessy keyless access and starting system, with My Beat function, navigation system, wireless charger ››› page 124 and Full Link technology. ››› page 176 ››› Booklet Navigation system Table of Contents

How to jump start ...... 65 Instruments and warning/control lamps . . . . . 108 Table of Contents Changing the wiper blades ...... 67 Instruments ...... 108 Control lamps ...... 113 The essentials ...... 5 Safety ...... 69 Introduction to the Easy Connect system* . . . . 114 Exterior view ...... 5 ...... 69 Safe driving System settings (CAR)* ...... 114 Exterior view ...... 6 Safety first! ...... 69 Communications and multimedia ...... 115 Driver-side general instrument panel (left- Advice about driving ...... 69 Steering wheel controls* ...... 115 hand drive) ...... 7 Correct position for passengers ...... 70 Multimedia ...... 119 Driver-side general instrument panel (right- Pedal area ...... 74 Opening and closing ...... 120 hand drive) ...... 8 ...... 75 Seat belts Central locking system ...... 120 Centre console ...... 9 Why wear a seat belt? ...... 75 Anti-theft alarm system* ...... 128 Passenger-side general instrument panel (left- How to properly adjust your seatbelt ...... 78 hand drive) ...... 10 Rear lid (luggage compartment) ...... 130 Seat belt tensioners ...... 79 Electric windows ...... 131 Passenger-side general instrument panel Airbag system ...... 80 (right-hand drive) ...... 11 Panoramic sliding sunroof* ...... 133 Brief introduction ...... 80 Lights and visibility ...... 135 Interior view ...... 12 Airbag safety instructions ...... 82 How it works ...... 13 Lights ...... 135 Deactivating airbags ...... 84 Visibility ...... 143 Unlocking and locking ...... 13 Transporting children safely ...... 86 Before driving ...... 17 Windscreen wiper and window wiper sys- Safety for children ...... 86 tems ...... 143 Airbags ...... 19 Child seats ...... 88 Child seats ...... 22 Mirror ...... 145 Event Data Recorder ...... 89 Seats and head restraints ...... 147 Starting the vehicle ...... 27 Description and operation ...... 89 Lights and visibility ...... 27 Adjusting the seats and headrests ...... 147 Easy Connect ...... 30 Emergencies ...... 90 Seat functions ...... 149 Driver information system ...... 33 Self-help ...... 90 Transport and practical equipment ...... 152 Status display ...... 38 Vehicle tool kit, anti-puncture kit* ...... 90 Storage compartments ...... 152 Cruise control ...... 42 Tyre repair ...... 90 Storing objects ...... 155 Warning lamps ...... 43 Manual unlocking/locking ...... 92 Roof carrier ...... 164 Gearbox lever ...... 46 Changing the windscreen wiper blades ...... 92 Air conditioning ...... 167 Air conditioning ...... 48 Towing and tow-starting the vehicle ...... 93 Heating, ventilation and cooling ...... 167 Fluid Level control ...... 53 Fuses and bulbs ...... 96 Driving ...... 171 Emergencies ...... 58 Fuses ...... 96 Ignition lock ...... 171 Fuses ...... 58 Changing bulbs ...... 98 Braking and parking ...... 177 Bulbs ...... 59 Change the front bulbs ...... 100 Braking and stability systems ...... 181 Action in the event of a puncture ...... 59 Changing incandescent rear light bulbs ...... 102 Manual gearbox ...... 184 Changing a wheel ...... 61 Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gear- Operation ...... 107 box* ...... 185 Snow chains ...... 64 Controls and displays ...... 107 Run-in and economical driving ...... 192 Emergency towing of the vehicle ...... 64 General instrument panel ...... 106 3 Table of Contents

Engine management and exhaust gas purifica- Engine compartment ...... 268 tion system ...... 194 Engine oil ...... 270 Driving tips ...... 195 Cooling system ...... 272 Driver assistance systems ...... 196 Brake fluid ...... 273 Start-Stop System* ...... 196 Windscreen washer reservoir ...... 274 Auto Hold Function* ...... 199 Battery ...... 275 Cruise control system (CCS)* ...... 200 Wheels ...... 277 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC* ...... 201 Wheels and tyres ...... 277 Area monitoring system (Front Assist) includ- Tyre monitoring systems ...... 281 ing City emergency braking and pedestrian Temporary spare wheel ...... 284 monitoring* ...... 212 Winter service ...... 285 Lane Assist system* ...... 218 Traffic Jam Assist ...... 221 Technical data ...... 287 Emergency Assist ...... 222 Technical specifications ...... 287 SEAT Drive Profile* ...... 224 Important ...... 287 Traffic sign detection system* ...... 228 Vehicle identification data ...... 287 Fatigue detection (break recommendation)* . . 231 Information on fuel consumption ...... 288 Parking aid ...... 232 Trailer mode ...... 289 Rear Assist “Rear View Camera”* ...... 238 Wheels ...... 289 Towing bracket device ...... 241 Engine data ...... 291 Towing bracket device* ...... 241 Dimensions ...... 311 Trailer towing ...... 246 Index ...... 313 Advice ...... 251 Care and maintenance ...... 251 Accessories and modifications to the vehicle ...... 251 Care and cleaning ...... 252 Vehicle exterior care ...... 252 Caring for the vehicle interior ...... 256 Intelligent technology ...... 259 Electromechanical steering ...... 259 Progressive steering ...... 260 Four-wheel drive ...... 260 Power Management ...... 261 Checking and refilling levels ...... 262 Filling the tank ...... 262 Fuel ...... 264 4 The essentials Exterior view

1 ››› page 14 5 ››› page 64 2 ››› page 53 6 ››› page 15 3 ››› page 13 7 ››› page 59 4 ››› page 53 5 The essentials Exterior view

1 ››› page 55 5 ››› page 54 9 ››› page 61 2 ››› page 54 6 ››› page 56 10 ››› page 60 3 ››› page 56 7 ››› page 56 11 ›››  page 158 4 ››› page 58 8 ›››  page 161 6 The essentials Driver-side general instrument panel (left-hand drive)

1 ››› page 28 5 ››› page 18 8 ››› page 43 11 ››› page 27 2 ››› page 42 6 ››› page 16 9 ››› page 29 12 ››› page 19 3 ››› page 13 7 ››› page 15 10 ››› page 33 13 ››› page 58 4 ››› page 27

7 The essentials Driver-side general instrument panel (right-hand drive)

1 ››› page 29 5 ››› page 18 8 ››› page 43 11 ››› page 19 2 ››› page 33 6 ››› page 16 9 ››› page 28 12 ››› page 27 3 ››› page 13 7 ››› page 15 10 ››› page 42 13 ››› page 58 4 ››› page 27

8 The essentials Centre console

1 ››› page 46 3 ››› page 30 5 ››› page 48 2 ›››  page 174 4 ››› page 28

The layout in right-hand drive vehicles is symmetrical.

9 The essentials Passenger-side general instrument panel (left-hand drive)

1 ››› page 19 2 ››› page 16 3 ›››  page 153

10 The essentials Passenger-side general instrument panel (right-hand drive)

1 ››› page 19 2 ››› page 16 3 ›››  page 153

11 The essentials Interior view

1 ››› page 17 5 ››› page 24 2 ››› page 18 6 ›››  page 160 3 ››› page 16 7 ››› page 17 4 ›››  page 145 8 ››› page 20 12 The essentials How it works Locking and unlocking the vehicle using the Unlocking and locking the driver door key Unlocking and locking ● Locking: press the  ››› Fig. 1 button. ● Locking the vehicle without activating the Doors anti-theft system: Press the  ››› Fig. 1 button for a second time within 2 seconds. ● Unlocking: press the  ››› Fig. 1 button. ● Unlocking the rear lid: Hold down the  ››› Fig. 1 button for at least 1 second.

Locking and unlocking with the central locking switch Fig. 3 Driver door lever: hidden lock cylinder. ● Locking: press the  ››› Fig. 2 button. None of the doors can be opened from the outside. If the central locking system should fail to op- The doors can be opened from the inside by erate, the driver door can still be locked and pulling the inside door handle. unlocked by turning the key in the lock. Fig. 1 Remote control key: buttons. ● Unlocking: press the  ››› Fig. 2 button. As a general rule, when the driver door is locked manually all other doors are locked. When it is unlocked manually, only the driver  ››› in Description on page 120 door opens. Please observe the instructions relating to the anti-theft alarm system  ››› page 120 ›››  page 120. ● Unfold the vehicle key blade  ››› page 13, ››› page 14 ›››  page 121. ● Insert the key shaft into the lower opening in the cover on the driver door handle ››› Fig. 3 (arrow) then remove the cover up- Fig. 2 Driver door: central locking switch. wards. ● Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder to unlock or lock the vehicle. »

13 The essentials

Special Characteristics If the central locking system should fail to The rear lid opening system operates electri- ● The anti-theft alarm will remain active when work at any time, doors with no lock cylinder cally. It is activated by using the handle on vehicles are unlocked. However, the alarm will have to be locked separately. the boot lid. will not be triggered ›››  page 120. A mechanical locking device (only visible To lock/unlock, press the button  or button ● After the driver door is opened, you have when the door is open) is provided on the  ››› Fig. 1 on the remote control key. front passenger door. 15 seconds to switch on the ignition. Once A warning appears on the instrument panel this time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered. ● Pull the cap out of the opening. display if the rear lid is open or not properly ● Switch the ignition on. The electronic im- closed.* An audible warning is also given if it ● Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it mobilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and is opened while the vehicle is moving faster to the right as far as it will go (if the door is deactivates the anti-theft alarm system. than 6 km/h (4 mph)*. on the right side) or to the left (if the door is on the left side). Note Opening and closing The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the Once the door has been closed it can no lon- ● Opening the rear lid: pull on the release vehicle is locked manually using the key ger be opened from the outside. Pull the inte- lever and lift it up ››› Fig. 5. The rear lid opens shaft ›››  page 120. rior door handle once to unlock and open the automatically. door. ● Closing the rear lid: Hold it by one of the handles on the interior lining and close it by Manual locking of the doors with no pushing gently. lock cylinder Rear lid ››› in Tailgate automatic lock on  page 130  ››› page 130  ››› page 15, ››› page 15

Fig. 4 Locking the door manually. Fig. 5 Rear lid: opening from the outside.

14 The essentials

Manual release of the rear lid Manual release of the rear lid Bonnet 3 Applies to the model: LEON/LEON SC 3 Applies to the model: LEON ST

Fig. 8 Release lever in the driver's footwell Fig. 6 Luggage compartment: access to man- area. ual release.

The rear lid can be unlocked manually from inside in the event of an emergency.

● Insert the key in the opening in the lining of the tail gate 1 and move the key in the direction of the arrow until the lock is released.

Fig. 7 Luggage compartment: access to manual release. Fig. 9 Cam under the bonnet The rear lid can be unlocked manually from inside in the event of an emergency. ● Opening the bonnet: Pull the lever under ● Remove the cover by inserting a screwdriv- the dashboard ››› Fig. 8 1 . er in groove ››› Fig. 7 A. ● Lift up the bonnet. Press the release catch ● Insert the key into the opening and turn it under the bonnet upwards ››› Fig. 9 2 . The in the direction of the arrow until the latch arrester hook under the bonnet is released. » ››› Fig. 7 B has been released. 15 The essentials

● The bonnet can be opened. Release the Buttons on the driver door bonnet stay and secure it in the fixture de- 1 Window on the front left door signed for this in the bonnet. 2 Window on the front right door ››› in Work in the engine compartment 3 Window on the rear left door (only 5-door  on page 268 vehicles) 4 Window on the right rear door (only 5-  ››› page 268 door vehicles) 5 Safety switch for deactivating the electric window buttons on the rear doors (only 5- door vehicles) Fig. 12 On the interior roof lining: press the Electric windows* button and pull on it to raise and lower the sunroof. ››› in Opening and closing of the elec-  tric windows* on page 131 ● Opening: Turn the switch to position ››› Fig. 11 3 . ››› page 131  ● Convenience position: Turn the switch to position ››› Fig. 11 2 . ● Closing: Turn the switch to position Panoramic roof* ››› Fig. 11 1 . ● To tilt open: Push the switch to position ››› Fig. 12 4 . For an intermediate position, hold down the switch until you reach the desired position. ● Lowering: Pull the switch to position Fig. 10 Detail of the driver door: controls for ››› Fig. 12 5 . For an intermediate position, the windows. hold down the switch until you reach the desired position. ● Opening the window: Press the  button. ● Closing the window: Pull the  button. Fig. 11 On the interior roof lining: use the rotary button for opening and closing

16 The essentials

3 ››› in Opening or closing the panoramic Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel. cushion, press the rear of the button  sliding sunroof on page 133 4 Lumbar support: Press the button in the up/down. corresponding position. Seat forwards/backwards: press the but- ››› page 133  5 Folding down the backrest (only 3-door ton forwards/backwards. vehicles): pull the lever and push the C Backrest further upright/further reclined: backrest forward. press the button forwards/backwards.

Before driving ››› in Manual adjustment of seats on ››› in Electric driver's seat adjustment*  page 147  on page 148 Manually adjusting the front seats

Electric adjustment of the driver's Adjusting the head restraints seat*

Fig. 15 Front seat: adjustment of the head re- Fig. 14 Driver's seat: electric seat adjust- straint. ment. ● Grab the sides of the head restraints with A Adjusting the lumbar support: press the both hands and push upwards to the desired Fig. 13 Front seats: manual seat adjustment. button according to the desired position. position. To lower it, repeat the same action, B Seat up/down: Press the button pressing the 1 button on the side. » 1 Forward/back: pull the lever and move up/down. To adjust the front of the seat the seat forwards or backwards. cushion, press the front of the button 2 Raising/lowering: pull/push the lever. up/down. To adjust the rear of the seat 17 The essentials

››› in Correct adjustment of front head Seat belt tensioners  restraints on page 73 During a collision, the seat belts on the front  ››› page 73, ››› page 148 seats are retracted automatically. The tensioner can be triggered only once.

››› in Service and disposal of belt ten- Adjustment of the seat belt  sioners on page 80  ››› page 79 Fig. 17 Correct seat belt and head restraint positions, viewed from front and the side.

To adjust the seat belt around your should- Adjusting the exterior mirrors ers, adjust the height of the seats. The shoulder part of the seat belt should be well centred over it, never over the neck. The seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the upper part of the body. The lap part of the seat belt lies across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pelvis.

››› page 76 Fig. 18 Detail of the driver door: control for  the exterior mirror.

››› page 78 Fig. 16 Positioning and removing the seat  Adjusting the exterior mirrors: Turn the knob belt buckle. to the corresponding position: L/R Turning the knob to the desired position, adjust the mirrors on the driver

18 The essentials

side (L, left) and the passenger side (R, ››› in Adjusting the steering wheel po- right) to the direction desired.  sition on page 71  Depending on the equipment fitted on the vehicle, the mirrors may be heated according to the outside temperature.  Folding in mirrors. Airbags

››› in Adjusting the exterior rear view Front airbags  mirrors on page 147  ››› page 146

Adjusting the steering wheel

Fig. 21 Front passenger airbag located in dash panel.

The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel ››› Fig. 20 and the airbag for the front passenger is located in the dash panel ››› Fig. 21. Airbags are identified by the word “AIRBAG”. Fig. 19 Lever in the lower left side of the When the driver and front passenger airbags steering column. Fig. 20 Driver airbag located in steering are deployed, the covers remain attached to wheel. the steering wheel and dashboard, respec- ● Adjusting the position of the steering tively ››› Fig. 20 ››› Fig. 21. wheel: Pull the ››› Fig. 19 1 lever down, move the steering wheel to the desired posi- In conjunction with the seat belts, the front tion and lift the lever back up until it locks. airbag system gives the front occupants additional protection for the head and chest in » 19 The essentials

the event of a severe frontal collision ››› in ● Insert the key blade into the slot provided Front airbags on page 82. in the deactivation switch. Their special design allows the controlled es- ● Approximately ¾ of the length of the key cape of the propellant gas when an occupant blade remains inserted (the maximum). puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and ● Turn the key blade, changing its position to chest are protected by the airbag. After the . Do not force it. If you have difficulty, en- collision, the airbag deflates sufficiently to sure that you have inserted the key as far as allow visibility. it will go. ● Finally, check the control lamp on the in- ››› page 82 strument panel where it shows   Fig. 24 On the driver side: radius of action of     the following should appear . the knee airbag.

››› in Front passenger front airbag The knee airbag is located on the driver side Deactivating the front passenger front  switch on page 86 below the dash panel ››› Fig. 23. Airbags are airbag identified by the word “AIRBAG”. ››› page 85  The area framed in red (deployment area) ››› Fig. 24 is covered by the knee airbag when it is deployed. Objects should never be Knee airbag* placed or mounted in this area.

 ››› page 82

Fig. 22 Front passenger front airbag switch.

To deactivate the front passenger front airbag: ● Open the glove compartment on the front Fig. 23 On the driver side: location of the passenger side. knee airbag

20 The essentials

Side airbags* In conjunction with the seat belts, the side The head-protection airbags are located on airbag system provides additional protection both sides in the interior above the doors for the upper body in the event of a severe ››› Fig. 27 and are identified with the text side collision ››› in Side airbags* on “AIRBAG”. page 82. In conjunction with the seat belts, the head- In a side collision, the side airbags reduce protection airbag system gives the vehicle the risk of injury to passengers to the areas occupants additional protection for the head of the body facing the impact. In addition to and upper body in the event of a severe side their normal function of protecting the occu- collision ››› in Curtain airbags* on pants in a collision, the front and rear outer page 83. seat belts also hold the passengers in the event of a side collision; this is how these air- ››› in Curtain airbags* on page 83 Fig. 25 Side airbag in driver's seat. bags provide maximum protection. 

 ››› page 82

Head-protection airbags*

Fig. 26 Illustration of completely inflated side airbags on the left side of the vehicle.

The side airbags are located in the backrest cushions of the driver seat ››› Fig. 25 and the front passenger seat as well as in the backrest of the side rear seats*. The locations are Fig. 27 Location of head-protection airbags. identified by the text “AIRBAG” in the upper region of the backrests.

21 The essentials

Child seats ››› in Important information regarding  the front passenger's airbag on page 87 Important information regarding the front passenger's airbag  ››› page 86

Fig. 29 Airbag stickers - version 2: on the passenger-side sun blind  and on the rear frame of the front passenger's door .

A sticker with important information about the passenger airbag is located on the pas- Fig. 28 Airbag stickers - version 1: on the senger's sun visor and/or on the passenger passenger-side sun blind  and on the rear side door frame. frame of the front passenger's door .

22 The essentials

Securing child seats with the seat belt

Fig. 30 On the rear seats: Possible installations for the child seat.

Figure ››› Fig. 30 A shows the basic child re- is no contact with the child seat in the back straint system mounting using lower retain- in the case that it goes opposite to the direc- ing rings and the upper retaining strap. Fig- tion of the car. In the case of front facing re- ure ››› Fig. 30 B shows the child restraint straint systems, the front backrest must be system mounting using the vehicle seat belt. adjusted so that there is no contact with the child's feet. The seat belt may be used to secure universal type child seats to the vehicle seats To adjust the passenger seat to accommo- marked with a U in the table below. date a child's seat and get the seat belt in a perfect position, adjust the passenger back- If the front passenger seat lacks a height ad- rest as far forward as possible1). justment, child seats cannot be mounted is this location1). Starting with Group 0+ child seats should not be mounted facing backwards in the passen- To correctly use a child seat in the back, the ger seat given that due to the size of some of front backrest must be adjusted so that there them, they can be difficult to install.1). »

1) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats. 23 The essentials

Seating position U: Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group. Weight Front pas- Rear Rear group *: Only compatible for models with adjust- senger side central able seat height. Place the seat in the a) seat seat seat backmost and highest position possi- Group 0 U* U U ble. to 10 kg The systems include the child restraint sys- Group 0+ U* U U tem mounting with an upper retaining strap to 13 kg (Top Tether) and lower anchoring points on the seat. Group I U* U U 9 to 18 kg ››› in Safety instructions on page 88 Group II U* U U  15 to 25 kg

Group III U* U U 22 to 36 kg

a) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats.

“ISOFIX” and Top Tether child seat mounting system*

Child seats can be secured quickly, easily FIX” rings are located between the rear seat To understand the compatibility of the "ISO- and safely on the rear outer seats with the backrest and the seat cushioning. The Top FIX" systems in the vehicle, consult the table “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system. Tether* rings are located at the rear of the below. backrests of the rear seats (behind the seat Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on The body weight permitted and information backrest or in the boot). each rear seat. In some vehicles, the rings regarding sizes A to F is indicated on the la- are secured to the seat frame and, in others, bel on child seats with “universal” or “semi- they are secured to the rear floor. The “ISO- universal” certification.

24 The essentials

Vehicle Isofix positions Weight group Size class Electrical equipment Mounting direction Rear side seats

F ISO/L1 Backward-facing X Baby carrier G ISO/L2 Backward-facing X

Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 Backward-facing IU

E ISO/R1 Backward-facing IU

Group 0+ to 13 kg D ISO/R2 Backward-facing IU

C ISO/R3 Backward-facing IU

D ISO/R2 Backward-facing IU

C ISO/R3 Backward-facing IU

Group I 9 to 18 kg B ISO/F2 Forward-facing IU

B1 ISO/F2X Forward-facing IU

A ISO/F3 Forward-facing IU

Group II 15 to 25 kg ------Forward-facing ---

Group III 22 to 36 kg ------Forward-facing ---

IU: Suitable for ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this weight group. X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class.

 ››› in Safety instructions on page 88

25 The essentials

Attaching the child seat with the Attachment of the child seat with the Securing the Top Tether* to the an- “ISOFIX system” Top Tether* retainer straps chorage point

Fig. 31 ISOFIX securing rings. Fig. 32 Position of the Top Tether rings on the Fig. 33 Retainer strap: correct adjustment back of the rear seat. and fitting. You are obliged to follow the seat manufacturer's instructions. Child seats with the Top Tether system come Securing the retainer strap with a strap for securing the seat to the vehi- ● Follow the manufacturer's instructions to ● Remove the protective caps of the “ISOFIX” cle anchor point, located at the back of the deploy the child seat Top Tether retainer rings by placing a finger in the hole and pull- rear seat backrest and provide greater re- strap. ing up ››› Fig. 31. straint. ● Guide the strap under the rear seat head re- ● Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” re- The objective of this strap is to reduce for- straint (lift the head restraint where taining rings until the child seat can be heard ››› Fig. 33 ward movements of the child seat in a crash, necessary). to engage securely. If the child seat is equip- to reduce the risk of injuries to the head from ● Slide the strap and secure it properly with ped with Top Tether* anchor points, secure it hitting the inside of the vehicle. to the correspondent ring ››› Fig. 32. Observe the anchorage of the backrest ››› Fig. 32. the manufacturer's instructions. Using the Top Tether in rear-facing mounted ● Firmly tighten the strap following the manu- ● Pull on both sides of the child seat to en- seats facturer's instructions. sure that it is properly anchored. Currently, there are very few rear-facing child Releasing the retaining strap Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* safety seats that have Top Tether. Please ● attachment system are available from Techni- carefully read and follow the seat manufac- Loosen the strap following the manufactur- cal Services. turer instructions to learn the proper way to er's instructions. install the Top Tether strap. 26 The essentials

● Push the lock and release it from the an- position. If necessary, press the locking key Start-Stop System* choring support. on the selector lever and release it again. When you stop and release the clutch pedal, ● Unlocking the steering wheel: Put the key the Start-Stop system* turns off the engine. ››› in Safety instructions on page 88 into the ignition and turn it at the same time The ignition remains switched on.  as the steering wheel in the direction indicated by the arrow. If it is not possible to turn ››› in Switching the ignition on and the steering wheel, it may be because it is starting the engine with the key on  page 172 Starting the vehicle locked. Turning on/switching off the ignition, glow  ››› page 171 Ignition lock plugs reheating ● Switch ignition on: Turn the key to the 2 position. Lights and visibility ● Switch ignition off. Turn the key to the 1 position. Light switch ● Diesel vehicles : The glow plugs reheat when the ignition is switched on.

Starting the engine ● Manual gearbox: press the clutch pedal all the way down and move the gearbox lever in- Fig. 34 Ignition key positions. to neutral. Switch ignition on: Place the key in the igni- ● Automatic gearbox: Press the brake pedal tion and start the engine. and move the selector lever to the P position or into N. Locking and unlocking the steering wheel ● Turn the key to the 3 position. The key au- Fig. 35 Dash panel: light control. ● Engaging the steering wheel lock: Remove tomatically returns to the 2 position. Do not press the accelerator. the key from the ignition and turn the wheel ● Turn the switch to the required position until it locks. Depending on the country, in ››› Fig. 35. » vehicles with an automatic gearbox, to remove the key the gear lever must be in the P

27 The essentials

Sym- Ignition switched Ignition is Turn signal and main beam lever Hazard warning lights bol off switched on

Fog lights, dipped Light off or daytime beam and side lights  driving light on. off.

The “Coming home” Automatic control of and “Leaving home” dipped beam and  guide lights may be daytime running switched on. light.

 Side light on.

Dipped beam head- Dipped beam Fig. 36 Turn signal and main beam lever. Fig. 37 Dash panel: switch for hazard warn-  light off switched on. ing lights. More the lever to the required position:  move the switch to the Front fog lights: Switched on, for example: first position, from positions ,  or . 1 Right turn signal: Right-hand parking  Rear fog light: move the switch completely light (ignition switched off). ● When approaching a traffic jam from positions ,  or . 2 Left turn signal: Left-hand parking light ● In an emergency (ignition switched off). ● The vehicle has broken down ● Switching off fog lights: Push the switch or turn it to the  position. 3 Main beam switched on: Control lamp  ● When towing or being towed lit up on the instrument panel. ››› in Side light and dipped beam head- 4 Headlight flasher: lit up when the lever is ››› in Hazard warning lights  on  light on page 135 pushed. Control lamp  lit up.  page 140  ››› page 135 Lever all the way down to switch it off.  ››› page 140 ››› in Turn signal and main beam lever  on page 136  ››› page 136

28 The essentials

Interior lights Knob Function More the lever to the required position:

 Turning the reading light on and off Windscreen wipers interval wipe. Using the control ››› Fig. 39 A adjust the 1 a) Depending on version.  interval (vehicles without rain sensor), or the sensitivity of the rain sensor.  ››› page 142 2  Slow wipe. 3  Continuous wipe.

Short wipe. Brief press, short clean. Hold Windscreen wipers and window wiper 4  the lever down for more time to increase blade the wipe frequency. Fig. 38 Detail of headliner: front interior light- Automatic wipe. The windscreen washer ing. function is activated by pushing the lever 5  forwards, and simultaneously the wind- Knob Function screen wipers start. Interval wipe for rear window. The wiper  Switches interior lights off. 6  will wipe the window approximately every six seconds.  Switches interior lights on. The rear window wash function is activa- Door contact switch-on. 7 ted by pressing the lever, and the rear The interior lights come on automati-  wiper starts simultaneously. cally when the vehicle is unlocked, a Central position door is opened or the key is removed Fig. 39 Operating the windscreen wiper and or from the ignition. rear wiper. ››› page 143 a) The light goes off a few seconds af-  ter all the doors are closed, the vehicle is locked or the ignition is switch- More the lever to the required position: ››› page 67 ed on.  0  Windscreen wiper off.

29 The essentials

Easy Connect

CAR menu settings

Fig. 40 Easy Connect: Main menu. Fig. 41 Easy Connect: CAR menu.

To select the settings menus, depending on ● If the Infotainment System is off, switch it ● To select a function in the menu, press the the version, either press the Easy Connect on. desired button.  button and the SETTINGS function button, ● Press the system's  button, then the  Vehicle When you press the menu button, the last se- OR press the button, then and s Vehicle sy tem's function button ››› Fig. 40 or lected menu will always be displayed. then the SETTINGS function button. the system’s  button to go to the Vehi- The actual number of menus available and cle menu ››› Fig. 41. When the function button check box is activated , the function is active. the name of the various options will depend ● Press the SETTINGS function button to open on the vehicle’s electronics and equipment. the menu Vehicle settings menu Any changes made using the settings menus ››› Fig. 41. are automatically saved on closing the ● Switch the ignition on. BACK  menus.

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

ESC system – Activation of the Electronic Stability Programme (ESC) ››› page 181

Tyre pressure monitoring Tyre pressure storing (Calibration) ››› page 281 Tyres Winter tyres Activation and deactivation of the speed warning. Setting the speed warning value ››› page 285 30 The essentials

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

Activation/deactivation: Gear programme, temporary distance from the vehicle in front (dis- ACC (adaptive cruise control) ››› page 201 tance level)

Front Assist (ambient traffic Activation/deactivation: monitoring system, advance warning, distance warning display ››› page 212 monitoring system)

City emergency braking func- Activation/deactivation of the City emergency braking function. ››› page 216 tion Driver assistance Lane Assist (system warning Activation/deactivation: Lane Assist, Adaptive Lane Guidance ››› page 218 you if you leave the lane)

The following functions can be activated and deactivated: Detection of traffic signs – Display of traffic signs on the multi-function display ››› page 228 – Trailer recognition (display of traffic signs for vehicles with trailer)

Fatigue detection Activation/deactivation ››› page 231

Parking and ma- Automatically activate, front volume, front sound settings, rear volume, rear sound settings, ParkPilot ››› page 232 noeuvring adjust volume

Vehicle interior lighting Instrument and switch lighting, footrest lighting ››› page 142

Coming home/Leaving home ››› page 138 Start time for “Coming home” function, start time for “Leaving home” function function Vehicle lights ››› page 139 Motorway light Activation/deactivation ››› page 141

Headlamp height adjustment Adjusting headlight height and range depending on vehicle load ››› page 141

››› page 18, Mirrors Synchronised regulation, lower the rear-view mirror when reversing, fold in after parking Mirrors/wind‐ ››› page 146 screen wipers Windscreen wipers Automatic windscreen wipers, wipe when reversing ››› page 29

Radio-operated remote control Convenience open function Opening and clos- ››› page 132 ing Central locking system Unlocking doors, automatic locking/unlocking, audible confirmation ››› page 120 »

31 The essentials

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

Current consumption, average consumption, volume to fill up, convenience consumers, Multifunction ECOAdvice, travelling time, distance travelled, digital speed display, average speed, speed- – ››› page 33 display ing warning, oil temperature, coolant temperature, restore data “from start”, restore data “total calculation”

Time source, set the time, automatic summer time (DST) setting, select time zone, time for- Date and time – – mat, set the date, date format

Measurement units – Distance, speed, temperature, volume, consumption –

Service – Chassis number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil change service ››› page 41

All settings can be reset: driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring, lights, rear view mir- Factory settings – – rors and windscreen wipers, opening and closing, multi-function display

 ››› in CAR menu on page 114  ››› page 114

32 The essentials

Driver information system ■ MFD from refuelling Using the menus on the instrument ■ MFD total calculation panel Introduction Assist systems ››› page 37 With the ignition switched on, it is possible Navigation ››› Booklet Navigation system to read the different functions of the display Audio ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Naviga- by scrolling through the menus. tion system In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel, Telephone ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Book- the multifunction display can only be operat- let Navigation system ed with the steering wheel buttons. Vehicle status ››› page 30 The number of menus displayed on the instrument panel will vary according to the ve- WARNING hicle electronics and equipment. Fig. 42 Windscreen wiper lever: control but- Any distraction may lead to an accident, with tons. A specialised workshop will be able to pro- the risk of injury. gramme or modify additional functions, ac- ● Do not operate the instrument panel con- cording to the vehicle equipment. SEAT rec- trols when driving. ommends visiting a SEAT Official Service. Some menu options can only be read when the vehicle is at a standstill. As long as a priority 1 warning is displayed, it will not be possible to read the menus ››› page 38. Some warning messages can be confirmed and made to disappear with the windscreen wiper lever button or the multifunction steering wheel button. Fig. 43 Right side of multifunction steering wheel: control buttons. The information system also provides the following information and displays (depending The driver information system is controlled on the vehicle's equipment): with the multifunction steering wheel buttons ››› Fig. 43 or with the windscreen wiper lever Driving data ››› page 35 ››› Fig. 42 (if the vehicle is not equipped with ■ MFD from departure multifunction steering wheel). » 33 The essentials

Enabling the main menu Making changes according to the menu in the Assist systems menu ● Switch the ignition on. ● With the rocker switch on the windscreen ›››  page 196. ● wiper lever or the thumbwheel of the multi- If a message or vehicle pictogram appears, Activate or deactivate a driver assistance e 1 function steering wheel, make the desired pr ss button ››› Fig. 42 on the windscreen system wiper lever or button  on the multifunction changes. To increase or decrease the values steering wheel ››› Fig. 43. more quickly, turn the thumbwheel faster. ● Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 44 in the direction of the arrow to open the menu As- ● If managed from the windscreen wiper lev- ● Mark or confirm the selection with button sist systems. er: to display the main screen ››› page 34 or ››› Fig. 42 1 on the windscreen wiper lever to return to the main menu from another or button  on the multifunction steering ● Select the driver assistance system and ac- menu hold down the rocker button ››› Fig. 42 wheel ››› Fig. 43. tivate or deactivate it ››› page 33. A mark indi- 2 . cates that driver assistance system is switched on. ● If managed from the multifunction steering wheel: the main menu list is not displayed. Button for the driver assistance sys- To go from point to point in the main menu, tems* press button   or   several times Selection menu ››› Fig. 43. Menu Function Select a submenu Information and possible configura- Driving ● Press the rocker switch Fig. 42 2 on the tions of the multifunction display (MFD) ››› data windscreen wiper lever up or down or turn ››› page 35, ››› page 114. the thumbwheel of the multifunction steering Information and possible configura- Assist wheel ››› Fig. 43 until the desired option ap- tions of the driver assistance systems systems pears marked on the menu. ››› page 37. ● The selected option is displayed between two horizontal lines. In addition, a triangle is Fig. 44 On the turn signal and main beam displayed on the right:  headlight lever: button for the driver assis- ● To consult the submenu option, press but- tance systems ton ››› Fig. 42 1 on the windscreen wiper lever or button  on the multifunction steer- With the turn signal and main beam head- ing wheel ››› Fig. 43. light lever button, you can activate or deactivate the driver assistance systems displayed

34 The essentials

Menu Function Driving data Menu Function

Information instructions from the acti- The MFD (multifunction display) shows differ- Display and storage of the values for vated navigation system: when a route ent values for the journey and the consump- the journey and the consumption from guidance is activated, the turning ar- tion. when the ignition is switched on to rows and proximity bars are displayed. when it is switched off. The appearance is similar to the Easy If the journey is continued in less than MFD from Navigation Connect system. Changing between display modes on the 2 hours after the ignition is switched departure If route guidance is not activated, the MFD off, the new data is added to the data direction of travel (compass) and the already stored in the memory. The ● name of the street along which you are In vehicles without multifunction steering memory will automatically be deleted if driving are shown ››› Booklet Naviga- wheel: Press the rocker switch  on the the journey is interrupted for more than tion system. windscreen wiper lever ››› Fig. 42. 2 hours. ● Station display on the radio. Vehicles with a multifunction steering Display and storage of the values for Track name on the CD. wheel: turn the thumbwheel ››› Fig. 43. MFD from the journey and the consumption. By Audio Track name in Media mode ››› Book- refuelling refuelling, the memory will be erased let Radio or ››› Booklet Navigation sys- Multifunction display memory automatically. tem. The multifunction display is equipped with The memory records the values for a Information and possible configura- three memories that work automatically: MFD specific number of partial trips, up to a tions of the mobile phone preinstalla- total of 19 hours and 59 minutes or 99 Telephone from departure, MFD from refuelling and MFD tion ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Nav- total calculation. On the screen display, you MFD total hours and 59 minutes, or 1999.9 km or igation system. calcula- 9999 km, depending on the model of can read which memory is currently dis- tion instrument panel. On reaching either of In a racing circuit, measurement and played. these limitsa), the memory is automati- memorisation of lap times by the vehi- Lap timer cally erased and starts to count from 0 cle and comparison with previously ● Toggle between memories with the ignition again. measured best times ››› page 37. on and the memory displayed: Press the a) It varies according to the instrument panel version. Display of the current warning or infor-  button on the windscreen wiper lever Vehicle mation texts and other system compo- or the  button of the multifunction steering Erasing a memory manually status nents, depending on the equipment wheel. ››› page 114. ● Select the memory that you wish to erase. ● Hold the  button of the multifunction steering wheel or the  button of the multifunction wheel pressed down for about 2 seconds. »

35 The essentials

Personalising the displays Menu Function Menu Function In the Easy Connect system you can adjust Distance Distance covered in km (m) after Coolant tem- which of the possible displays of the MFD can Digital display of the current temper- covered switching on the ignition. perature ature of the liquid coolant. be shown on the instrument panel display gauge with the  button and the SETTINGS function Whenever you refuel the quality of button ›››  page 114. the natural gas is automatically veri- a) In vehicles with a natural gas engine, range and average con- fied and is displayed when the igni- sumption refer only to data or natural gas consumption. If you tion is switched on. The display is are in “petrol mode”, the information of both data only appears CNG quality Data summary made in a percentage of between on the dash panel and not on the multifunction screen. 70% and 100%. The greater the per- Menu Function centage displayed the lower the con- Storing a speed with the speed warning sumption may be. The current fuel consumption dis- ● Select the display Speed warning at play operates throughout the jour- Current fuel The average speed will be shown af- --- km/h (--- mph) ney, in litres/100 km; and with the ter a distance of about 100 metres consumption ●  engine running and the vehicle Average has been travelled. Otherwise hori- Press the button on the windscreen stopped, in litres/hour. speed zontal lines are displayed. The value wiper lever or the button  on the multifunc- shown is updated approximately ev- tion steering wheel to store the current speed After turning on the ignition, aver- ery 5 seconds. age fuel consumption in li- and activate the warning. tres/100 km will be displayed after Digital dis- ● To switch system on: adjust to the desired travelling about 100 metres. Other- Current speed displayed in digital Average fuel play of speed within 5 seconds using the rocker wise horizontal lines are displayed. format. consumptiona) speed switch  on the windscreen wiper lever or The value shown is updated approxi- by turning the thumbwheel on the multifunc- mately every 5 seconds. Speed warn- If the stored speed is exceeded (be- ACT®*: Depending on the equip- ing at --- tween 30 - 250 km/h, or 19 - tion steering wheel. Next, press the button ment, number of active cylinders. km/h or Speed 155 mph), an audible warning is  or  again or wait several seconds. warning at given together with a visual warn- The speed is stored and the warning activa- Approximate distance in km that can --- mph ing. ted. still be travelled with the fuel re- Operating maining in the tank, assuming the Detection of ● To switch system off: press the but- a) The traffic signs detected are dis- range same style of driving is maintained. traffic ton  or  . The stored speed is de- played. This is calculated using the current signs leted. fuel consumption. Oil tempera- Updated engine oil temperature dig- This indicates the hours (h) and mi- Travelling ture ital display nutes (min) since the ignition was time switched on.

36 The essentials

Assist systems menu Change from one menu to another Menu “Pause” ● Vehicles without multifunction steering Continue The interrupted timer continues. Menu Function wheel: press the rocker switch  in the windscreen wiper lever. A new timer starts. The halted lap ends Display of Adaptive Cruise Control New lap ACC and is included in the statistics. (ACC) ››› page 201. ● Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel: press  or  . The timer of the current lap ends and is Switching the monitoring system Interr. Front Assist cancelled. It is not included in the statis- on and off ››› page 212. lap Menu “Stop” tics. Switching the Lane Assist system Lane Assist* The current timer ends. The lap is inclu- on or off ››› page 220. The timer starts. End If there are existing laps and they are in- ded in the statistics. Detection of Display of traffic signs cluded in the statistics, it will begin with traffic signs ››› page 228: Start the number of laps in question. Menu “Partial time” It is only possible to begin with a new Switching the fatigue detection first lap if the statistics have been reset Fatigue detec- Partial For about 5 seconds a partial time is dis- on or off (pause recommenda- first in the Statistics menu. tion* time played. The timer continues in parallel. tion) ››› page 231. The timer begins when the vehicle sets The timer of the current lap stops and a Since off. new lap starts immediately. The time for New lap start If the vehicle is already moving, the timer the lap you have just completed is inclu- Timer* begins once the vehicle has stopped. ded in the statistics. Statis- The Statistics menu is displayed on You can access the timer via the selection The current lap timer will be interrupted. tics the screen. menu ››› page 34. Stop The lap does not end. The Pause menu is displayed. » It allows you to manually time lap times on a Menu “Lap” racing circuit, memorise them and compare them to the vehicle's previous best times. The timer of the current lap stops and a new lap starts immediately. The time for New lap The following menus can be displayed: the lap you have just completed is included in the statistics. ● Stop Partial For about 5 seconds a partial time is dis- ● Lap time played. The timer continues in parallel. ● Pause The current lap timer will be interrupted. ● Partial time Stop The lap does not end. The Pause menu ● Statistics is displayed. 37 The essentials

Menu “Statistics” Status display Illustra- Key to ››› Fig. 45 tion View of the latest lap times: Bonnet, rear lid and doors open – total time  Do not continue driving! – best lap time A The bonnet is open or is not properly – worst lap time closed ››› page 268. – average lap duration A maximum of 10 laps is possible, and a  Do not continue driving! total duration of 99 hours, 59 minutes B The rear lid is open or is not properly and 59 seconds. closed ››› page 130. If one of the 2 limits is reached, you will have to reset the statistics in order to be-  Do not continue driving! gin a new timer. C, D A vehicle door is open or is not properly closed ››› page 120. Back This returns to the previous menu.

Resetting All the memorised statistical data are re- ››› page 109 to zero set. 

WARNING Do your best to avoid handling the timer Warning and information messages while driving. The system runs a check on certain compo- ● Only set the timer or consult statistics when the vehicle is stationary. nents and functions when the ignition is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. ● While driving, do not handle the timer in Faults in the operation are displayed on the complicated driving situations. screen using red and yellow symbols and Fig. 45 A: bonnet open; B: rear lid open; C: messages on the instrument panel display front left door open; D: rear right door open (›››  page 113) and, in some cases, with (5-door vehicles only). audible warnings. The display may vary according to the type of instrument panel fitted. When the ignition is switched on or when driving, the bonnet, rear lid or doors that are open will be indicated on the instrument panel display, and, as applicable, this will be indicated audibly. The display may vary according to the type of instrument panel fitted. 38 The essentials

Priority 1 warning (red symbols) Gear-change indicator Vehicles with an automatic gearbox* The display is only visible in tiptronic mode Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible  page 187. warnings. ›››  Stop the vehicle! It is dangerous ››› in Warning The following display symbols mean: and control lamps on page 113! Check the function that is faulty and repair it. If necessa- ●  Shifting up a gear ry, request assistance from specialised personnel. ●  Shifting down a gear

Priority 2 warning (yellow symbols) CAUTION Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible The gear-change indicator is intended to help warnings. save fuel, but it is not intended to recom- A faulty function, or fluids which are below the correct Fig. 46 Instrument panel: gear-change indica- mend the right gear for all driving situations. levels may cause damage to the vehicle! ››› in Warn- In certain situations, only the driver can ing and control lamps on page 113 tor (manual gearbox). choose the correct gear (for instance when Check the faulty function as soon as possible. If neces- overtaking, driving up a steep gradient or sary, request assistance from specialised personnel. A gear change will be recommended if the towing a trailer). gear you are in is not the most economical Informative text choice. If no gear-change is recommended, it means that you are already in the most eco- Note Information relating to different vehicle processes. nomical gear. The display disappears from the instrument panel when you press the clutch pedal. Vehicles with a manual gearbox The following display symbols ››› Fig. 46 mean: Outside temperature display ●  Change to a higher gear: the suggested gear appears to the right of the current gear When the outside temperature is below +4°C when a higher gear is recommended. (+39°F), the “ice crystal” symbol (warning of risk of freezing) is also displayed. At first, this  ● Change to a lower gear: the suggested symbol flashes and then it remains lit until gear appears to the left of the current gear the outside temperature rises above +6°C when a lower gear is recommended. (+43°F) ››› in Indications on the display on The gear recommendation may occasionally page 110. » skip a gear (2nd  4th). 39 The essentials

When the vehicle is at a standstill or when Additional electrical appliances Note travelling at very low speeds, the temperature displayed may be higher than the true ● Operation with the windscreen wiper lever*: ● If you hide a saving tip, it will reappear after you switch the ignition on again. outside temperature as a result of the heat Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 42 2 until the produced by the engine. main menu appears. Enter into the section ● The saving tips do not appear in all situa- Driving data. With the rocker switch, tions, but rather with a large separation of The temperatures measured range from move to the display Convenience con- time. -40°C to +50°C (-40°F to +122°F). sumers.

● Operation with the multi-function steering Speed warning device Engine oil temperature display wheel*: Move with the buttons 1 or 2 to Driving data and enter with OK. Turn the The speed warning device warns the driver Vehicles without multifunction steering right thumbwheel until the Convenience when they have exceeded the pre-set speed wheel consumers display appears. limit by 3 km/h (2 mph). An audible warning ● Press the rocker switch Fig. 42 2 until signal sounds, and the warning lamp  and ››› In addition, a scale will inform you of the cur- the main menu appears. Enter into Driving the driver message Speed limit excee- rent sum of all the additional appliances. data. With the button 2 move to the oil ded! will be displayed simultaneously on the temperature gauge. instrument panel. The warning lamp  switches off when reducing speed below the Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel Saving tips stored maximum limit. ● Enter the submenu Driving data and Tips on how to save fuel will be displayed in Speed warning programming is recommen- turn the thumbwheel until the oil tempera- conditions that increase fuel consumption. ded if you wish to be reminded of a maxi- ture display appears. Follow them to reduce consumption. The indi- mum speed, such as when travelling in a cations appear automatically only with the ef- country with different speed limits or for a The engine reaches its operating temperature ficiency programme. After a time, the tips will maximum speed for winter tyres. when in normal driving conditions, the oil disappear automatically. temperature is between 80°C (180°F) and Setting speed limit warning 120°C (250°F). If the engine is required to If you wish to hide a saving tip immediately work hard and the outside temperature is after it appears, press any button on the You can use the radio or the Easy Connect* to high, the engine oil temperature can in- windscreen wiper lever*/multifunction steer- set, alter or cancel the speed limit warning. crease. This does not present any problem as ing wheel*. ● Vehicles with radio: press the button SETUP long as the warning lamps  table on ››› > control button  Driver Assistant > page 45 or  table on page 45 do not ››› Speed warning. appear on the display. 40 The essentials

● Vehicles with Easy Connect: press the but- technological progress, maintenance work Vehicles with text messages: Service in ton Systems or else Vehicle systems > has been greatly reduced. Because of the --- km or --- days will be shown on the Driver assistant > Speed warning. technology used by SEAT, with this service instrument panel display. you only need to change the oil when the ve- The warning limit can be set from 30 to hicle so requires. To calculate this change Service due 240 km/h (20 to 149 mph). The adjustment (max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of When the service date is due, an audible is made at 10 km/h (5 mph) intervals. use and individual driving styles are consid- warning is given when the ignition is switch- ered. The advance warning first appears 20 ed on and the spanner displayed on the Note days before the date established for the cor- screen flashes for a few seconds . ● Please bear in mind that, even with the responding service. The kilometres (miles) speed warning function, it is still important remaining until the next service are always Vehicles with text messages: Service now to keep an eye on the vehicle speed with the rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) will be shown on the instrument panel dis- speedometer and to observe the legal speed and the time is given in complete days. The play. limits. current service message cannot be viewed ● The speed limit warning function in the ver- until 500 km after the last service. Prior to Reading a service notification sion for some countries warns you at a speed this, only lines are visible on the display. With the ignition switched on, the engine off of 120 km/h (75 mph). This is a factory-set and the vehicle at a standstill, the current speed limit. Inspection reminder service notification can be read: When the Service date is approaching, when Press and hold the button ›››  Fig. 120 4 the ignition is switched on a Service remind- Service intervals for more than 5 seconds to consult the serv- er is displayed. ice message. The service interval indication appears on the Vehicles without text messages: a span- When the service date has passed, a minus  instrument panel display ›››  Fig. 120 3 . ner will be displayed on the instrument sign is displayed in front of the number of kil- panel plus an indication in km. SEAT distinguishes between services with en- ometres or days. gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and The kilometres indicated are the maximum Vehicles with text messages: the following services without engine oil change (e.g. In- number of kilometres that can be travelled message is displayed: Service --- km spection). until the next service. After a few seconds, (miles) or --- days ago. the display mode changes. A clock symbol In vehicles with Services established by time appears and the number of days until the The time can also be set via the  button or mileage, the service intervals are already next service is due. and the SETTINGS function button in the Easy pre-defined. Connect system ›››  page 114. » In vehicles with LongLife Service, the intervals are determined individually. Thanks to 41 The essentials

Resetting service interval display Cruise control Operation of the turn signal lever If the service was not carried out by a SEAT ● Switching on the CCS: Move switch dealership, the display can be reset as fol- Operating the cruise control system ››› Fig. 47 1 to . The system is on. If no lows: (CCS)* speed has been programmed, the system will not control it. ● Switch off the ignition, press and hold but- ● Activating the CCS: Press button ››› Fig. 47 ton ›››  Fig. 120 4 . 2 in the  area. The current speed is ● Switch ignition back on. memorised and controlled. ● Release the 4 ›››  Fig. 120 button and ● Temporarily switching off the CCS: Move press it again for the next 20 seconds. switch ››› Fig. 47 1 to  or push the brake. The cruise control system is switched Note off temporarily. ● The service message disappears after a few ● Reactivating the CCS: Press button seconds, when the engine is started or when ››› Fig. 47 2 in . The memorised speed OK/RESET is pressed on the windscreen wiper is saved and controlled again. lever, or OK on the multifunction steering Fig. 47 On the left of the steering column: wheel. switches and controls for operating the CCS ● Increasing stored speed during CCS regulation: press button 2 in . The vehicle ac- ● In vehicles with the LongLife system in which the battery has been disconnected for celerates until the new stored speed. a long period of time, it is not possible to cal- ● Reducing stored speed during CCS regula- culate the date of the next service. Therefore tion: press button 2 in  to lower the the service interval display may not be cor- speed by 1 km/h (1 mph). Speed is reduced rect. In this case, bear in mind the maximum until reaching the new stored speed. service intervals permitted in the ››› Book- ● let Maintenance Programme. Switching off the CCS: Move switch ››› Fig. 47 1 to . The system is disconnec- ● If you reset the display manually, the next ted and the memorised speed is deleted. service interval will be indicated as in vehicles with fixed service intervals. For this reason we recommend that the service interval Operation using the third lever Fig. 48 On the left of the steering column: display be reset by a SEAT authorised Dealer. ● Switching on the CCS: move the third lever third lever to operate the CCS. to  ››› Fig. 48. The system switches on but it does not control the speed as no speed has been programmed.

42 The essentials

● Activating the CCS: press the  ››› Fig. 48 ● Reactivating the CCS: move the lever to button. It memorises and maintains the cur-  ››› Fig. 48 and release it. The memo-  ››› in Operation on page 201 rent speed. rised speed is saved and controlled again. ● Temporarily switching off the CCS: move ● Switching off the CCS: move the third lever  ››› page 200 the lever to  ››› Fig. 48 and release it or to position  ››› Fig. 48. The system is dis- press the brake pedal. The cruise control sys- connected and the memorised speed is de- tem is switched off temporarily. leted.

Warning lamps

On the instrument panel

Fig. 49 Instrument panel, on dash panel. »

43 The essentials

Red warning lamps ››› page it lights up: Press the foot brake! Rear fog light switched on. ››› page  135 flashes: the selector lever locking Central warning lamp: additional  185 button has not engaged.  information on the instrument pan- – lights up or flashes: fault in the ››› page el display  emission control system. 194 it lights up: cruise control activated or speed limiter switched on and  Parking brake on. ››› page it lights up: pre-heating of diesel  active. ››› page 177 engine. 200  Do not continue driving! ››› page ››› page  flashes: the speed set by the The brake fluid level is too low or 195  179 flashes: fault in the diesel engine speed limiter has been exceeded. there is a fault in the brake system. management. green warning lamp: Lane Assist is ››› page Lit up or flashing:  ››› page fault in the petrol engine manage- ››› page switched on and active. 218  Do not continue driving!   259 ment. 195 Fault in the steering. ››› page  Main beam on or flasher on.  lights up or flashes: fault in the ››› page 135  Driver or passenger has not fas- ››› page steering system. 259 tened seat belt. 75 ››› page Tyre pressure too low, or fault in  Natural gas operating mode ››› page 112  Use the foot brake! the tyre pressure monitoring sys-  281 tem.

Yellow warning lamps ››› page Fuel tank almost empty.  108 Central warning lamp: additional  information on the instrument pan- – Fault in airbag system and seat ››› page el display  belt tensioners. 80

 Front brake pads worn. Lane Assist is switched on, but not ››› page  active. 218 it lights up: Fault in the ESC, or disconnection caused by the system.  Other warning lamps flashes: ESC or ASR activated. ››› page 181 ››› page Left or right turn signal. ASR manually deactivated. 135   ESC in Sport mode or OFF ››› page Hazard warning lights on. 140  ABS faulty or does not work. ››› page Trailer turn signals  241 44 The essentials

On the instrument panel display  Do not continue driving! Mobile telephone is connected ››› Book- Engine oil pressure too low. If  via Bluetooth to the original tele- let Radio the warning lamp flashes, stop ››› page phone device. or  driving, even if the oil level is 270 ››› Book- correct. Do not even run the en- Mobile telephone battery charge let Navi- gine at idle speed!  meter. Available only for devices gation pre-installed in factory. system ››› page Fault in the battery.  275 Freezing warning. The outside ››› page temperature is lower than +4°C  39 Driving light totally or partially ››› page (+39°F). faulty. 98   Start-Stop system activated. Fault in the cornering light sys- ››› page ››› page 196 tem. 135 . Start-Stop system unavailable.

››› page ››› page  Diesel particulate filter blocked Low consumption driving status 194  109 Level of windscreen washer fluid ››› page  too low. 143 Fig. 50 On the instrument panel display: door On the instrument panel open. Flashing: Fault in the oil level detection. Control manually. ››› page  270 ››› page Ignition: Insufficient engine oil.  Do not continue driving! 120 ››› page With the corresponding indica- ››› page  Fault in the gearbox.  tion: door(s), rear lid or bonnet 130 191 open or not properly closed. ››› page ››› page 268 Light Assist on.  137 Ignition:  Do not carry on driv- ››› page ing! Engine coolant level too low,  Immobiliser active. coolant temperature too high ››› page 126  272 ››› page Flashing: Fault in the engine  Service interval display coolant system. 41 Fig. 51 Warning lamp for disabling the front passenger airbag. »

45 The essentials

Front passenger front airbag is ● Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot Automatic gearbox* ››› page  disabled (   right down.  80  ). ● Move the gearbox lever to the required position. The front passenger front airbag ››› page   is activated (   80 ● Release the clutch.  ). Selecting reverse gear ››› in Warning and control lamps on ● Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot  page 113 right down. ● ››› page 113 With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it  downwards, move it to the left as far as it will go and then forwards to select reverse Fig. 53 Automatic gearbox: selector lever po- ››› Fig. 52 R . sitions. ● Release the clutch. Gearbox lever P Parking lock R Reverse gear Manual gearbox ››› in Changing gear on page 184  N Neutral (idling) Drive (forward) ››› page 184 D/S  +/– Tiptronic mode: pull the lever forwards (+) to go up a gear or backwards (–) to go down a gear.

››› in Selector lever positions on  page 185  ››› page 185

Fig. 52 Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speed ››› page 47 manual gearbox. 

The position of the gears is indicated on the gearbox lever ››› Fig. 52. 46 The essentials

Manual release of the selector lever ● Unlocking: use the flat part of a screwdriver ● After carrying out the manual release, at- blade. tach the selector lever boot on the gearbox console again. Removing the cover from the selector lever If the power supply should ever fail (e.g. dis- ● Apply the handbrake  ››› to ensure that charged battery) and the vehicle has to be the car does not move. pushed or towed, the selector lever must first ● Carefully pull the corners of the selector be moved to position N, after operating the lever boot and twist it upwards above the lev- manual release mechanism. er handle. WARNING Releasing the selector lever The selector lever may be moved out of position P only when the handbrake is firmly ap- Fig. 54 Selector lever: manual release from ● Using a screwdriver, press and hold the yel- plied. If this does not work, secure the vehi- position P. low unlocking tab sideways ››› Fig. 54. cle with the brake pedal. On a slope the vehi- ● Now press the interlock button on the se- cle could otherwise start to move inadver- Should the power supply be interrupted, lector lever A and move the selector lever to tently after shifting the selector lever out of there is a manual unlocking device located position N. position P - accident risk! under the console of the selector lever, on the right. Releasing the selector lever requires a certain degree of practical skill.

47 The essentials

Air conditioning

How does Climatronic* work?

Fig. 55 In the centre console: Climatronic controls

To switch a specific function on, press the ap- The LED on each control lights up to indicate propriate button. Press the button again to that the respective function of a control has switch off the function. been switched on.

1 The left and right sides can be adjusted separately: Turn the control to adjust the temperature Temperature

2 The power of the fan is automatically adjusted. The fan is also adjusted manually by turning the control. Fan

3 The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort. You can also switch it on manually using the buttons 3 . Air distribution

4 Indications on the temperature display screen selected for the right and left sides.

48 The essentials

 The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen and air recirculation is automatically switched off. To defrost the wind- Defrost function screen more quickly, the air is dehumidified at temperatures over approximately +3°C (+38°F) and the fan runs at maximum output.

 The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.  Air distribution towards the footwell.  Upward air distribution.  Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.  Air recirculation   Seat heating buttons  Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.

Press the button to make maximum cooling capacity available. The recirculation of air and the cooling system turn on automatically and air distri-   bution adjusts automatically to the position .

When the warning light for button  lights up, the settings on the driver side also apply to the passenger side. Press the button or the temper-  ature control on the passenger side

 Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan, and air distribution. Press the button: the warning lamp on the button will light up .

 Press the configuration button : the air conditioning operation menu will be displayed on the Easy Connect system screen.

Switching off Turn the blower control to the  position or press the  button.

 ››› in Introduction on page 167  ››› page 167

49 The essentials

How does the manual air conditioning work*?

Fig. 56 In the centre console: Manual air conditioning controls.

1 Turn the control to adjust the temperature Temperature

2 Setting 0: blower and manual air conditioning switched off Fan Level 6: maximum fan level.

3 Rotate the continuous control to direct the airflow to the desired area. Air distribution

 The airflow is directed at the windscreen. Air recirculation is automatically switched off or is not switched on. Increase the fan power to clear the Defrost function windscreen of condensation as soon as possible. To dehumidify the air, the cooling system will automatically switch on.

 The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.  Distribution of air towards the chest and the footwell area. 50 The essentials

 Air distribution towards the footwell.  Air distribution towards the windscreen and the footwell.  Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.  Air recirculation   Seat heating buttons

Maximum cooling power. The recirculation of air and the cooling system turn on automatically and air distribution adjusts automatically to the   position 

 ››› in Introduction on page 167  ››› page 167

How does the heating and the fresh air system work?

Fig. 57 In the centre console: heating system and fresh air controls. »

51 The essentials

1 Turn the control to adjust the temperature. The temperature cannot be lower than that of the exterior air temperature, as this system cannot cool Temperature or dehumidify the air

2 Setting 0: blower, heating and fresh air systems switched off Fan Level 6: maximum fan level

3 Rotate the continuous control to direct the airflow to the desired area. Air distribution

 The airflow is directed at the windscreen. Defrost function

 The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.  Distribution of air towards the chest and the footwell area.  Air distribution towards the footwell.  Air distribution towards the windscreen and the footwell.  Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes

 Air recirculation ››› page 170   Seat heating buttons

 ››› in Introduction on page 167  ››› page 167

52 The essentials

Fluid Level control Fuel ● Place it in the space on the hinge of the open flap ››› Fig. 58. Filling capacities Closing the fuel tank cap ● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as Tank level far as it will go. 50 l, of which, approx. 7 l reserve ● Close the lid. Petrol and diesel Vehicles with all-wheel-drive: engines 55 l, of which, approx. 8.5 l reserve  ››› in Filling up on page 263 Natural gas en- a) approx. 15 kg gine ››› page 262 Fig. 58 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached.  a) The capacity depends on the efficacy and characteristics of the natural gas pumps. The capacity indicated is based on a minimum loading pressure of 200 bar. The flap that covers the tank cap is unlocked and locked automatically using the central Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid container locking. Versions without headlight washer approx. 3 litres Opening the fuel tank cap system ● Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on the Versions with left side. headlight washer approx. 5 litres ● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left. system

53 The essentials

Oil

Fig. 59 Engine oil dipstick. Fig. 60 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap.

The level is measured using the dipstick loca- ● Zone C : Add oil up to zone B . ● When the oil level reaches at least zone B , ted in the engine compartment unscrew the engine oil filler cap carefully. ›››  page 268. Topping up engine oil The oil should leave a mark between zones ● Unscrew cap from oil filler opening. Engine oil additives A and C . It should never exceed zone A . ● Add oil slowly. No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration caused by these ● ● Zone A : Do not add oil. At the same time, check the level to ensure additives is not covered by the warranty. you do not add too much. ● Zone B : You can add oil but keep the level in that zone.

54 The essentials

Engine oil specifications

Service interval Engine type Specification

1.4l CNG / 1.4l 110kW without ACT VW 502 00 Petrol engines with Set Service Intervals (dependent on 1.0l / 1.2l / 1.4l 92kW / 1.4l 110kW with ACT / 1.8l / 2.0l VW 504 00 time/distance travelled) 1.2l / 1.4l 110kW without ACT / 1.6l / 1.8l / 2.0l VW 502 00a)

1.0l / 1.2l / 1.4l VW 508 00 / VW 504 00b) Petrol engines with Flexible Service Intervals (LongLife) 1.8l / 2.0l VW 504 00

Diesel engines with Set Service and Flexible Service In- With particulate filter (DPF) VW 507 00 tervalsc)

Diesel engines with Set Service Intervals Without particulate filter (DPF) VW 505 01a) / VW 506 01a) a) If the quality of the fuel available in the country does not fulfil the EN 228 (for petrol) and EN 590 (for diesel) standards. b) Use of engine oil compliant with the VW 504 00 specification instead of VW 508 00 may have a slight negative effect on the vehicle’s exhaust gas values. c) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine. Coolant The coolant tank is located in the engine  ››› in Changing engine oil on page 272 compartment ›››  page 268. When the engine is cold, replace the coolant  ››› page 270 when the level is below .

Coolant specifications The engine cooling system is supplied from the factory with a specially treated mixture of water and at least 40 % of the additive G13 (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives the necessary frost protection down to -25°C (-13°F) and protects the light alloy parts of Fig. 61 Engine compartment: coolant expan- the engine cooling system against corrosion. sion tank cap. It also prevents scaling and considerably raises the boiling point of the coolant. » 55 The essentials

To protect the cooling system, the percentage Brake fluid Windscreen washer of additive must always be at least 40 %, even in warm climates where anti-freeze protection is not required. If for weather reasons further protection is necessary, the proportion of additive may be increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise antifreeze protection will diminish and this will worsen cooling. When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture of distilled water and at least 40 % of the G13 or G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive Fig. 62 Engine compartment: brake fluid res- Fig. 63 In the engine compartment: wind- (both are purple) to obtain an optimum anti- ervoir cap. screen washer reservoir top. corrosion protection ››› in Topping up coolant on page 273. The mixture of G13 with The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en- The windscreen washer reservoir is located in G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11 gine compartment ›››  page 268. the engine compartment ›››  page 268. (green-blue) engine coolants will significantly reduce anti-corrosion protection and The level should be between the  and  To top up, mix water with a product recom- should therefore be avoided ››› in Topping marks. If it is below , please visit a Techni- mended by SEAT. cal Service. up coolant on page 273. In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze.

››› in Topping up brake fluid on ››› in Checking and topping up the ››› in Topping up coolant on page 273 page 274   windscreen washer reservoir on  page 274  ››› page 272  ››› page 273  ››› page 274

Battery

The battery is located in the engine compartment ›››  page 268. It does not require

56 The essentials maintenance. It is checked as part of the In- spection Service.

››› in Important safety warnings for  handling a vehicle battery on page 276  ››› page 275

57 The essentials Emergencies Underneath the instrument panel Replacing a blown fuse The fuse box is located behind the storage Fuses compartment ››› Fig. 64. In the engine compartment Fuse location Press the locking tabs to release the fuse box cover ››› Fig. 65.

Identifying fuses situated below the dash panel by colours

Colour Amp rating Fig. 66 Image of a blown fuse. Black 1 Preparation Purple 3 ● Switch off the ignition, lights and all elec- Light brown 5 trical equipment. Fig. 64 On the driver-side dash panel: fuse Brown 7.5 box cover. ● Open the corresponding fuse box  page 97. Red 10 ›››

Blue 15 Identifying a blown fuse Yellow 20 A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured ››› Fig. 66. White or transparent 25 ● Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has Green 30 blown. Orange 40 To replace a fuse ● ››› in Introduction on page 96 Remove the fuse. Fig. 65 In the engine compartment: fuse box  cover. ● Replace the blown fuse by one with an identical amperage rating (same colour and ››› page 96  markings) and identical size.

58 The essentials

● Replace the cover again or close the fuse Rear lights Type ● Have the vehicle tool kit ›››  page 90 box lid. and the spare wheel* ready Retro fog light H21W ›››  page 284. Reverse lights P21W LL ● Observe the applicable legislation for each Bulbs country (reflective vest, warning triangles, etc.). LED rear lights Type Bulbs (12 V) ● All occupants should leave the vehicle and Reverse lights W16W wait in a safe place (for instance behind the The remaining functions work with LEDs roadside crash barrier). Light source used for each function Halogen headlights. Type WARNING ››› page 98 ● Always observe the above steps and pro- Daytime running light/side  P21W SLL light tect yourself and other road users. ● If you change the wheel on a slope, block Dipped beam headlights H7 LL the wheel on the opposite side of the car with a stone or similar to prevent the vehicle from Main beam headlights H7 LL Action in the event of a puncture moving. Turn signal PY21W LL What to do first Full-LED main headlights Type

No bulbs may be replaced. All functions are with LEDs ● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface and in a safe place as far away from traffic as possible. Front fog light Type ● Apply the handbrake. Fog/cornering lights* H8 ● Switch on the hazard warning lights. ● Manual gearbox: select the 1st gear. Rear lights Type ● Automatic gearbox: Move the selector lever Brake light/tail light P21W LL to position P. Side lights 2x W5W LL ● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle. Turn signal PY21W LL

59 The essentials

Repairing a tyre with the anti-punc- ● Remove the lid from the filling tube ● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the ture kit ››› Fig. 67 3 and screw the open end of the valve. tube into the tyre valve. ● Repeat the inflation process. ● With the tyre sealant bottle upside down, ● If the indicated pressure still cannot be fill the tyre with the contents of the sealant reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop bottle. and request assistance from an authorised ● Remove the bottle from the valve. technician. ● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us- ● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew ing the tool ››› Fig. 67 1 . the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve. ● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and Inflating the tyre 2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding ● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube 80 km/h (50 mph). ››› Fig. 67 5 into the tyre valve. ● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes ● Check that the air bleed screw is closed ›››  page 92. Fig. 67 Standard representation: contents of ››› Fig. 67 7 . the anti-puncture kit. ● Start the engine and leave it running. ››› in TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* on  page 90 ● Insert the connector ››› Fig. 67 9 into the The anti-puncture kit is located under the vehicle's 12-volt socket ›››  page 154. floor panel in the luggage compartment.  ››› page 90 ● Turn the air compressor on with the ON/OFF Sealing the tyre switch ››› Fig. 67 8 . ● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use ● Keep the air compressor running until it reaches 2.0 to 2.5 bar the ››› Fig. 67 1 tool to remove the insert. Place it on a clean surface. (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). A maximum of 8 minutes. ● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously ● Disconnect the air compressor. ››› Fig. 67 10 . ● If it does not reach the pressure indicated, ● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 67 3 into the sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve. automatically. ● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is distributed throughout the tyre.

60 The essentials

Changing a wheel Wheel covers* Wheel bolt caps*

Vehicle tool kit

Fig. 69 Remove the wheel cover. Fig. 70 Wheel: wheel bolts with caps.

The wheel covers must be removed for access Removal Fig. 68 Underneath the floor panel of the luggage compartment: vehicle tool kit. to the wheel bolts. ● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools) over the cap until it clicks into place ››› Fig. 70. Removing 1 An adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts* ● Remove the cap with the plastic clip. 2 Towline anchorage ● Remove the wheel cover using the wire hook ››› Fig. 69. 3 Box spanner for wheel bolts* ● Hook this into one of the cut-outs of the 4 Crank handle for jack wheel cover. 5 Jack* 6 Wire hook for pulling off the wheel cov- Fitting ers*/wheel bolt cap clip. ● Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel rim by pressing it firmly.  ››› in What to do first on page 59 ● Put pressure on the point of the cut-out for the valve.  ››› page 90 ● Next fit the rest of the wheel cover.

61 The essentials

Anti-theft wheel bolts Loosening the wheel bolts Lifting the vehicle

Fig. 71 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and Fig. 72 Wheel: loosen the wheel bolts. Fig. 73 Crossbar: marks. adapter. ● Insert the box spanner (vehicle tools) onto ● Remove the wheel cover* or the cap*. the wheel bolt as far as it will go. An adapter ● Insert the special adapter (vehicle tools) is required to unscrew or tighten the anti- onto the anti-theft wheel bolt and push it on theft wheel bolts ››› page 62. as far as it will go. ● Turn the wheel bolt approximately one turn ● Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) onto to the left ››› Fig. 72 (arrow). To apply the re- the adapter as far as it will go. quired torque, hold the wheel brace at the end. If it is not possible to loosen a wheel ● Remove the wheel bolt ››› page 62. bolt, carefully apply pressure with one foot on the end of the box spanner. Hold on to the Note vehicle for support and take care not to slip. Fig. 74 Strut: mounting the jack on the vehi- Make a note of the code number of the anti- cle. theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safe place, WARNING but not in your vehicle. If you need a new ● Slightly loosen the wheel bolts (one turn) be- Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firm adapter, you can obtain it from the SEAT Offi- ground. If necessary use a large, strong cial Service, indicating the code number. fore raising the vehicle with the jack*. If not, an accident may occur. board or similar support. If the surface is slippery (for example tiles) place the jack on a rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slipping ››› .

62 The essentials

● Find the support point on the strut (sunken CAUTION ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit- area) closest to the wheel to be changed ting the wheel. ››› Fig. 73. The vehicle must not be raised on the crossbar. Only place the jack* on the points de- ● Turn the jack*, located below the strut sup- signed for this purpose on the strut. Other- port point, to raise it until tab 1 s››› Fig. 74 i wise, the vehicle may be damaged. Tyres with compulsory direction of ro- below the housing provided. tation ● Align the jack* so that tab 1 “grips” onto A directional tread pattern can be identified the housing provided on the strut and the Removing and fitting a wheel mobile base 2 is resting on the ground. The by the arrows on the sidewall that point in the direction of rotation. Always observe the base plate 2 should fall vertically with re- Change the wheel after loosening the wheel direction of rotation indicated when fitting spect to the support point 1 . bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack. the wheel to guarantee optimum properties ● Continue turning the jack* until the wheel of this type of tyres with regard to grip, Taking off the wheel is slightly lifted off the ground. noises, wear and aquaplaning. ● Unscrew the wheel bolts using the box WARNING spanner and place them on a clean surface. If it is absolutely necessary to fit the spare tyre* against the direction of rotation, drive ● Make sure that the jack* remains stable. If ● Take off the wheel. with care as this means the tyre does not of- the surface is slippery or soft, the jack* could fer optimum driving properties. This is of par- slip or sink, respectively, with the resultant Putting on the spare wheel risk of injury. ticular importance when the road surface is When fitting tyres with a compulsory rotation wet. ● Only raise the vehicle with the jack* supplied by the manufacturer. Other vehicles direction, observe the instructions in To return to directional tread tires, replace could slip, with the consequent risk of injury. ››› page 63. the punctured tyre as soon as possible and ● Only mount the jack* on the support points ● Mount the wheel. restore the obligatory direction of rotation of designed for this purpose on the strut, and all tyres. ● always align the jack correctly. If you do not, Screw on the wheel bolts in position and the jack* could slip as it does not have an ad- tighten them loosely with a box spanner. equate grip on the vehicle: risk of injury! ● Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*. Subsequent work ● The height of the parked vehicle can ● Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonal pairs change as a result of variations in tempera- using the wheel brace. ● Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps. ture and loading. The wheel bolts should be clean and turn ● Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect ››› page 61. » the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa-

63 The essentials

● Return all tools to their proper storing loca- If there is a danger of being trapped despite Emergency towing of the vehi- tion. having mounted the chains, it is best to disa- cle ● If the replaced wheel does not fit in the ble the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC spare wheel housing, store it safely in the ›››  page 182, Switching on/off the ESC luggage compartment ›››  page 155. and ASR. Towing ● Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun- Snow chains will improve braking ability as ted tyre as soon as possible. well as traction in winter conditions. ● In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indi- For technical reasons snow chains may only cator, adjust the pressure and store the read- be used with the following wheel rim/tyre ing in the radio/Easy Connect system* combination. ›››  page 281. ● Have the tightening torque of the wheel 195/65 R15 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm bolts checked as soon as possible with a tor- 205/55 R16 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm que wrench (it should be 120 Nm). Mean- while, drive carefully. 225/45 R17 Chains with links of maximum 9 mm ● Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as 225/40 R18 Chains with links of maximum 9 mm Fig. 75 Right side of the front bumper: tow- possible. line anchorage screwed in. Remove wheel covers and any integral trim ring before fitting snow chains. Snow chains Remove the chains when roads are free of snow. Driving characteristics worsen, and the Use wheels become damaged quickly and may even be rendered unusable. Snow chains should only be used on the front wheels. Check that they are correctly seated after driving for a few yards; correct the position if necessary, in accordance with the manufac- Fig. 76 Right side of the rear bumper: towline turer's fitting instructions. Keep your speed anchorage screwed in. below 50 km/h (30 mph).

64 The essentials

Towline anchorages Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle Tow-starting Attach the bar or rope to the towline ancho- and take care to avoid jerking the tow rope. rages. When towing on an unpaved road, there is al- If the engine will not start, first try starting it ways a risk of overloading and damaging the using the battery of another vehicle The towline anchorages are located under anchorage points. ››› page 65. You should only attempt to tow- the floor panel in the luggage compartment, start a vehicle if charging the battery does Switch on the ignition so that the turn sig- next to the vehicle tools ›››  page 90. not work. This is done by leveraging wheel nals, windscreen wipers and windscreen movement. Screw the towline anchorage into the screw washer can work. Ensure that the steering connection ››› Fig. 75 o ››› Fig. 76 and tighten wheel is unlocked and moves freely. When tow-starting a vehicle with a petrol en- it with the wheel brace. gine, do not tow it more than a short dis- Place the gear lever in neutral on vehicles tance, otherwise unburned fuel can enter the with a manual gearbox. With an automatic Tow rope or tow bar catalytic converter. gearbox, place the lever in N. The tow bar offers increased safety and a ● Engage 2nd or 3rd gear before moving off. lower risk of damage. To brake, press the brake pedal firmly. The brake servo does not work when the engine ● Press the clutch and hold the pedal down. The tow rope is recommended when there is is switched off. ● Switch the ignition on. no tow bar. It must be elastic so that it does not damage the vehicle. The power steering only works when the igni- ● Once both vehicles are moving, release the tion is switched on and the vehicle is moving, clutch. provided that the battery is sufficiently charg- Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle ● As soon as the engine has started, press ed. Otherwise, it will need more force. ● The tow rope must be taut before you drive the clutch and move the gear lever to neutral. off. Ensure that the tow rope remains taut at all times. ● Release the clutch very carefully when starting the vehicle (manual gearbox), or acceler- How to jump start ate gently (automatic gearbox).  ››› in General information on page 93 Jump leads Driving style  ››› page 93 Towing requires some experience, especially The jump lead must have a sufficient wire when using a tow rope. Both drivers should cross section. realise how difficult it is to tow a vehicle. In- If the engine fails to start because of a dis- experienced drivers should not attempt to charged battery, the battery can be connec- tow. ted to the battery of another vehicle to start the engine. » 65 The essentials

Jump leads must comply with standard DIN 5. Connect the other end of the black jump 72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc- lead X to a solid metal component bolted tions). The wire cross section must be at least to the engine block or to the engine block 25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. 35 mm2 for diesel engines. Do not connect it to a point near the battery A . Note 6. Position the leads in such a way that they ● The vehicles must not touch each other, cannot come into contact with any moving otherwise electricity could flow as soon as parts in the engine compartment. the positive terminals are connected. ● The discharged battery must be properly Fig. 78 Diagram of connections for vehicles Starting connected to the on-board network. with Start Stop system 7. Start the engine of the vehicle with the Jump lead terminal connections boosting battery and let it run at idling speed. How to jump start: description 1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles ››› . 8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes until 2. Connect one end of the red jump lead to the engine is running. the positive + terminal of the vehicle with the flat battery A ››› Fig. 77. Removing the jump leads 3. Connect the other end of the red jump 9. Before you remove the jump leads, switch lead to the positive terminal + in the ve- off the dipped beam headlights if they are hicle providing assistance B . switched on. 4. For vehicles without Start-Stop system: 10.Turn on the heater blower and heated rear connect one end of the black jump lead to window in the vehicle with the flat battery. the negative terminal – of the vehicle This helps minimise voltage peaks which Fig. 77 Diagram of connections for vehicles providing the current B ››› Fig. 77. are generated when the leads are discon- without Start Stop system – For vehicles with Start-Stop system: connected. nect one end of the black jump lead X to a 11.When the engine is running, disconnect suitable ground terminal, to a solid piece of the leads in reverse order to the details metal in the engine block, or to the engine given above. block itself ››› Fig. 78.

66 The essentials

Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient ● Never attach the negative cable to fuel sys- Changing the wiper blades metal-to-metal contact with the battery termi- tem components or the brake lines in the oth- nals. er vehicle. Windscreen wipers service position If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec- ● The non-insulated parts of the battery onds, switch off the starter and try again after clamps must not be allowed to touch. The about 1 minute. jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit. WARNING ● Position the leads in such a way that they ● Please note the safety warnings referring to cannot come into contact with any moving working in the engine compartment parts in the engine compartment. ›››  page 268. ● Do not lean on the batteries. This could re- ● The battery providing assistance must have sult in chemical burns. the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on battery). Failure to comply could result in Note Fig. 79 Wipers in service position. an explosion. The vehicles must not touch each other, oth- ● Never use jump leads when one of the bat- erwise electricity could flow as soon as the The wiper arms can be raised when the wip- teries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even af- positive terminals are connected. ers are in service position ››› Fig. 79. ter the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery ● Close the bonnet ›››  page 268. freezes, it should be replaced. ● Switch the ignition on and off. ● Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes ● Press the windscreen wiper lever down- away from batteries, danger of explosion. wards briefly 4 ››› page 29. Failure to comply could result in an explosion. Before driving, always lower the wiper arms. ● Observe the instructions provided by the Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind- manufacturer of the jump leads. screen wiper arms return to their initial posi- ● Do not connect the negative cable from the tion. other vehicle directly to the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the ››› page 92 battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of  explosion.

67 The essentials

Changing the windscreen and rear Cleaning windscreen wiper blades ● Replace the wiper arm on the rear window. window wiper blades ● Raise the wiper arms. ››› in Changing the windscreen and ● Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt  rear window wiper blades on page 93 from the windscreen wiper blades. ● If the blades are very dirty, a sponge or  ››› page 92 damp cloth may be used ››› in Changing the windscreen and rear window wiper blades on page 93.

Changing the windscreen wiper blades ● Lift and unfold the wiper arms. ● Press and hold release button ››› Fig. 80 1 Fig. 80 Changing the windscreen wiper and pull gently on the wiper blade in the di- blades rection of the arrow. ● Fit a new wiper blade of the same length and design on to the wiper arm and hook it into place. ● Rest the wiper arms back onto the windscreen.

Changing the rear wiper blade ● Raising/lowering the wiper arm. ● Turn the blade slightly ››› Fig. 81 (arrow A ). Fig. 81 Changing the rear wiper blade ● Hold down the release button 1 while Raising and lowering windscreen wiper arms gently pulling the blade in the direction of arrow B . ● Place the windscreen wipers in the service ● Insert a new blade of the position ››› page 67. same length and type in the rear wiper arm in the opposite di- ● Grip the wiper arms only by the blade's fas- rection to the arrow B and hook into place tening point. button 1 . 68 Safe driving

– Ensure that all windows provide a clear and cumstance, you endanger yourself as well as Safety good view of the surroundings. others on the road ››› , for this reason: – Make sure all luggage is secured – Always pay attention to traffic and do not Safe driving ››› page 155. get distracted by passengers or telephone calls. Safety first! – Make sure that no objects can interfere data Technical with the pedals. – Never drive when your driving ability is impaired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs). WARNING – Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors properly according to your size. – Observe traffic laws and speed limits. ● This manual contains important informa-

tion about the operation of the vehicle, both – Ensure that the passengers in the rear – Always reduce your speed as appropriate Advice for the driver and the passengers. The other seats always have the head restraints in for road, traffic and weather conditions. sections of the on-board documentation also the in-use position ››› page 73. contain further information that you should – When travelling long distances, take be aware of for your own safety and for the – Instruct passengers to adjust the head re- breaks regularly - at least every two hours. straints according to their height. safety of your passengers. – If possible, avoid driving when you are tired ● Ensure that the on-board documentation is – Protect children with appropriate child or stressed. kept in the vehicle at all times. This is espe- seats and properly applied seat belts Operation cially important when lending or selling the ››› page 86. WARNING vehicle to another person. – Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct When driving safety is impaired during a trip, your passengers also to assume a proper the risk of injury and accidents increases. sitting position ››› page 70. Advice about driving – Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your passengers also to fasten their seat belts Safety equipment Emergencies Before starting every trip properly ››› page 75. Never put your safety or the safety of your For your own safety and the safety of your passengers in danger. In the event of an acci- passengers, always note the following points dent, the safety equipment may reduce the before every trip: What affects driving safety? risk of injury. The following list includes most

of the safety equipment in your SEAT: Safety – Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn As a driver, you are responsible for yourself signals are working properly. and your passengers. When your concentra- ● three-point seat belts, tion or driving safety is affected by any cir- – Check tyre pressure. ● belt tension limiters for the front and rear side seats, » 69 Safety

● Belt tensioners for the front seats, Correct position for passengers mend the following adjustments for the driv- ● front airbags, er: ● knee airbags, Correct sitting position for driver – Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a dist ● side airbags in the front seat backrests, ance of at least 25 cm between the steering wheel and the centre of your chest ● Side airbags in the rear seat backrests*, ››› Fig. 82. ● head-protection airbags, – Move the driver's seat forwards or back- ● “ISOFIX” anchor points for child seats in wards so that you are able to press the ac- the rear side seats with the “ISOFIX” system, celerator, brake and clutch pedals to the ● height-adjustable front head restraints, floor with your knees still slightly angled . ● rear head restraints with in-use position ››› and non-use position, – Ensure that you can reach the highest point ● adjustable steering column. of the steering wheel. Fig. 82 The proper distance between driver – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper The safety equipment mentioned above and steering wheel. edge is at the same level as the top of your works together to provide you and your pas- head, or as close as possible to the same sengers with the best possible protection in level as the top of your head ››› Fig. 83. the event of an accident. However, these safety systems can only be effective if you – Move the seat backrest to an upright posi- and your passengers are sitting in a correct tion so that your back rests completely position and use this equipment properly. against it. Safety is everyone's business! – Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 75. – Keep both feet in the footwell so that you have the vehicle under control at all times.

Adjustment of the driver's seat ››› page 147. Fig. 83 Correct head restraint position for the driver. WARNING ● An incorrect sitting position of the driver For your own safety and to reduce the risk of can lead to severe injuries. injury in the event of an accident, we recom-

70 Safe driving

● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at Adjusting the steering wheel position – Move the seat backrest to an upright posi- least 25 cm distance between the centre of tion so that your back rests completely the chest and the centre of the steering Read the additional information carefully against it. wheel Fig. 82. If you are sitting closer than ›››  page 19. ››› – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you edge is at the same level as the top of your properly. WARNING data Technical head, or as close as possible to the same ● If your physical constitution prevents you ● Never adjust the position of the steering level as the top of your head ››› page 73. from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 wheel when the vehicle is moving, as this cm, contact a specialised workshop. The could cause an accident. – Always keep both feet in the footwell in workshop will help you decide if special spe- front of the front passenger seat. ● Move the lever up firmly so the steering

cific modifications are necessary. Advice wheel position does not accidentally change – Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 75. ● When driving, always hold the steering during driving. risk of accident! wheel with both hands on the outside of the ● Make sure you are capable of reaching and It is possible to deactivate the front passen- ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. firmly holding the upper part of the steering ger airbag in exceptional circumstances This reduces the risk of injury when the driver wheel: risk of accident! ››› page 84. airbag is triggered. ● If you adjust the steering wheel so that it Adjusting the front passenger seat ● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 points towards your face, the driver airbag ››› page 147.

o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. Operation will not protect you properly in the event of in the centre of the steering wheel). In such an accident. Make sure that the steering cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sus- WARNING wheel points towards your chest. tain injuries to the arms, hands and head. ● An incorrect sitting position of the front ● To reduce the risk of injury to the driver passenger can lead to severe injuries. during sudden braking manoeuvres or an ac- ● Adjust the front passenger seat so that cident, never drive with the backrest tilted far Correct sitting position for front pas- there is at least 25 cm between your chest back! The airbag system and seat belts can senger and the dash panel. If you are sitting closer Emergencies only provide optimal protection when the than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect backrest is in an upright position and the For your own safety and to reduce the risk of you properly. driver is wearing his or her seat belt correct- injury in the event of an accident, we recom- ● If your physical constitution prevents you ly. mend the following adjustments for the front from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 ● Adjust the head restraint properly to ach- passenger: cm, contact a specialised workshop. The ieve optimal protection. Safety – Move the front passenger seat back as far workshop will help you decide if special spe- as possible ››› . cific modifications are necessary. »

71 Safety

● Always keep your feet in the footwell when – Always keep both feet in the footwell in – Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the front of the rear seat. sitting position in the vehicle while travelling ››› . dash panel, out the window or on the seat. An – Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 75. incorrect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in case of a sudden – Use an appropriate child restraint system The following list contains examples of sit- braking or an accident. If the airbag is trig- when you take children in the vehicle ting positions that could be dangerous for all gered, you could sustain severe injuries due ››› page 86. vehicle occupants. The list is not complete, to an incorrect sitting position. but we would like to make you aware of this ● To reduce the risk of injury to the front pas- WARNING issue. senger in events such as sudden braking ma- ● If the passengers in the rear seats are not Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion: noeuvres or an accident, never travel with the sitting properly, they could sustain severe in- backrest tilted far back! The airbag system juries. ● Never stand in the vehicle. and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrest is in an upright po- ● Adjust the head restraint correctly in order ● Never stand on the seats. sition and the front passenger is wearing his to achieve maximum protection. ● Never kneel on the seats. or her seat belt properly. The further the seat ● Seat belts can only provide optimal protec- ● Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear. backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater tion when seat backrests are in an upright the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning position and the vehicle occupants are wear- ● Never lean against the dash panel. of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting po- ing their seat belts correctly. If passengers In ● Never lie on the rear bench. sition! the rear seats are not sitting in an upright po- ● Never sit on the front edge of a seat. ● Adjust the head restraint correctly in order sition, the risk of injury due to incorrect posi- to achieve maximum protection. tioning of the seat belt increases. ● Never sit sideways. ● Never lean out of a window. ● Never put your feet out of a window. Examples of incorrect sitting posi- Correct sitting position for rear seat ● Never put your feet on the dash panel. passengers tions ● Never put your feet on the surface of a seat. To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a Seat belts can provide optimal protection on- ● Do not allow anyone to travel in the foot- sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident, ly when the belt webs are properly posi- well. tioned. Incorrect sitting positions substan- passengers on the rear seat bench must con- ● Never travel without wearing the seat belt. sider the following: tially reduce the protective function of seat belts and increase the risk of injury due to in- ● Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug- – Sit up straight. correct seat belt position. As the driver, you gage compartment. – Adjust the head restraint to the correct po- are responsible for all passengers, especially sition ››› page 73. children. 72 Safe driving

WARNING Properly adjusted head restraints are an im- Correct adjustment of rear head re- portant part of passenger protection and can straints ● Any incorrect sitting position increases the reduce the risk of injuries in most accident risk of severe injuries. Sitting in an incorrect situations. position exposes the vehicle occupants to severe injuries if airbags are triggered, by strik- ● Adjust the head restraint so that its upper Technical data Technical ing a vehicle occupant who has assumed an edge is, as far as possible, at the same level incorrect sitting position. as the top of your head, or at the very least, ● Before the vehicle moves, assume the prop- at eye level ››› Fig. 84. er sitting position and maintain it throughout the trip. Before every trip, instruct your pas- WARNING sengers to sit properly and to stay in this po- Advice sition during the trip ››› page 70, Correct posi- ● Travelling with the head restraints removed tion for passengers. or improperly adjusted increases the risk of severe injuries. An improper adjustment of the head restraints may cause death in an ac- Fig. 85 Head restraints in the correct posi- cident and increase the risk of suffering inju- tion. Correct adjustment of front head re- ries during abrupt braking actions or unex- straints pected manoeuvres. Operation ● The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the height of the passenger. Emergencies

Fig. 86 Head restraint position warning label.

Fig. 84 Correctly adjusted head restraint as Properly adjusted head restraints are an im- viewed from the front and the side. portant part of the passenger protection and Safety can reduce the risk of injuries in most acci- Read the additional information carefully dent situations » ›››  page 17.

73 Safety

Rear head restraints Pedal area ● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor cov- – The rear head restraints have 2 positions: erings over the original floor mats. This use and non-use. Pedals would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals. Risk of accident. – One position for use (head restraint raised) – Ensure that you can always press the accel- ● Never place objects in the driver footwell. ››› Fig. 85. In this position, the head re- erator, brake and clutch pedals unimpaired An object could move into the pedal area and straints are used normally, protecting pas- to the floor. impair pedal operation. In the event of a sud- sengers along with the rear seat belts. den driving or braking manoeuvre, you will – Ensure that the pedals can return unim- – And one position for non-use (head re- not be able to operate the brake, clutch or ac- paired to their initial positions. straint lowered). celerator pedal. Risk of accident! – Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas- – To fit the head restraints in position for use, tened during the trip and do not obstruct pull on the edges with both hands in the the pedals ››› . direction of the arrow. Only use floor mats which leave the pedals WARNING clear and which are secured to prevent them ● Under no circumstances should the rear from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor passengers travel while the head restraints mats from a specialised dealership. Fasten- are in the non-use position. See the warning ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells. label located on the rear side fixed window ››› Fig. 86. If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be pressed down thoroughly in order to stop ● Do not swap the centre rear head restraint the vehicle. with either of the outer seat rear head restraints. Risk of injury in case of an accident! Wear suitable footwear

CAUTION Always wear shoes which support your feet properly and give you a good feeling for the Note the instructions on the adjustment of pedals. the head restraints ››› page 148. WARNING ● Restricting pedal operation can lead to critical situations while driving.

74 Seat belts Seat belts Seat belt lamp*  of more than approximately 25 km/h (15 mph) or if the seat belts are unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. The warning Why wear a seat belt? light will also flash . The  lamp goes out when the driver and Number of seats data Technical passenger seat belts are fastened with the ignition switched on. Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front and three in the rear. Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt. Rear seat belts fastened display*

Depending on the model version, when the Advice In some versions, your vehicle is approved ignition is switched on, the seat belt status only for four seats. Two front seats and two display ››› Fig. 87 on the instrument panel in- rear seats. Fig. 87 Instrument panel: right rear seat occupied and corresponding seat belt fastened forms the driver whether the passengers in the rear seats have fastened their seat belts. WARNING display. The  symbol indicates that the passenger in ● Never transport more than the permitted The control lamp illuminates to remind the this seat has fastened “his or her” seat belt. amount of people in your vehicle. driver to fasten his seat belt. When a seat belt in the rear seats is fastened Operation ● Every vehicle occupant must properly fas- or unfastened, the seat belt status is dis- ten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or Before starting the vehicle: played for approximately 30 seconds. The in- her seat. Children must be protected with an – Fasten your seat belt securely. appropriate child restraint system. dication can be hidden by pressing the – Instruct your passengers to fasten their 0.0/SET button on the dash panel. seat belts properly before driving off. The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of 30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats – Protect children by using a child seat ac- Emergencies cording to the child's height and weight. is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. An audible warning will also be heard if the When the ignition is switched on, the control vehicle is travelling at over 25 km/h lamp  in the instrument panel lights up (de- (15 mph). pending on the model version) if the driver or passenger have not fastened their seat belts. Safety An audible warning signal will sound for a few seconds if the seat belts are not fastened as the vehicle drives off and reaches a speed 75 Safety

The protective function of seat belts Ensure that your passengers wear their seat WARNING belts as well. Accident statistics have shown that wearing seat belts is an effective means ● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at of substantially reducing the risk of injury all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The optimal protection from seat belts can be and improving the chances of survival when achieved only if you use them properly. involved in a serious accident. Furthermore, properly worn seat belts improve the protec- ● Fasten your seat belt before every trip - tion provided by airbags in the event of an even when driving in town. Other vehicle occupants must also wear the seat belts at all accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt times, otherwise they run the risk of being in- is required by law in most countries. jured. Although your vehicle is equipped with air- ● The seat belt cannot offer its full protection bags, the seat belts must be fastened and if the seat belt is not positioned correctly. Fig. 88 Drivers with properly worn seat belts worn. The front airbags, for example, are only ● Never allow two passengers (even children) will not be thrown forward in the event of sud- triggered in some cases of head-on collision. to share the same seat belt. den braking. The front airbags will not be triggered during ● Always keep both feet in the footwell in minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli- Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in sions, rollovers or accidents in which the air- motion. in the proper position. They also help prevent bag trigger threshold value in the control unit ● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi- uncontrolled movements that may result in is not exceeded. serious injury and reduce the risk of being cle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury. thrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci- Therefore, you should always wear your seat ● The seat belt must never be twisted while it dent. belt and ensure that all vehicle occupants is being worn. have fastened their seat belts properly before ● The seat belt should never lie on hard or Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts you drive off! correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries. belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition, the front part of your vehicle and other pas- ● Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or sive safety features (such as the airbag sys- Safety instructions on using seat jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges. tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener- belts ● Never wear the seat belt under the arm or gy released in a collision. Taken together, all in any other incorrect position. – Always wear the seat belt as described in these features reduce the releasing kinetic ● Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat this section. energy and consequently, the risk of injury. over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and func- This is why it is so important to fasten seat – Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened tion of the seat belts, reducing their capacity belts before every trip, even when "just driv- at all times and are not damaged. to protect. ing around the corner". 76 Seat belts

● The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be Head-on collisions and the laws of called “kinetic energy” is created both in the blocked with paper or other objects, as this physics passengers and inside the vehicle. can prevent the latch plate from engaging se- The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on curely. the speed of the vehicle and the weight of ● Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings or the vehicle and its passengers. The higher similar items to alter the position of the belt they are, the more energy there is to be “ab- data Technical webbing. sorbed” in the event of an accident. ● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors or parts of the The most significant factor, however, is the buckle could cause severe injuries in the speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles event of an accident. Therefore, you must from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h Advice check the condition of all seat belts at regular (30 mph), for example, the corresponding ki- intervals. netic energy is multiplied by four.

● Seat belts which have been worn in an acci- Fig. 89 A driver not wearing a seat belt is Given that the passengers of the vehicle in dent and stretched must be replaced by a thrown forward violently. our example do not have their seat belts fas- specialised workshop. Renewal may be nec- tened, in the event of a collision the entire essary even if there is no apparent damage. amount of the passengers' kinetic energy will

The belt anchorage should also be checked. Operation be only absorbed by the mentioned impact. ● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re- Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to moved or modified in any way. 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod- ● The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne retractors may not work properly. (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are even higher.

Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are Emergencies not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on collision, they will move forward at the same Fig. 90 The unbelted passenger in the rear seat is thrown forward violently, hitting the speed their vehicle was travelling just before driver who is wearing a seat belt. the impact. This example applies not only to

head-on collisions, but to all accidents and Safety It is easy to explain how the laws of physics collisions. work in the case of a head-on collision: when Even at low speeds the forces acting on the a vehicle starts moving, a type of energy body in a collision are so great that it is not »

77 Safety

possible to brace oneself with one's hands. How to properly adjust your In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers are thrown forward and will make violent con- seatbelt tact with the steering wheel, dash panel, windscreen or whatever else is in the way Fastening and unfastening the seat ››› Fig. 89. belt It is also important for rear passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they could otherwise be thrown forward violently through the vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in the rear seats who do not use seat belts endanger not only themselves but also the front Fig. 92 Position of seat belt during pregnan- occupants ››› Fig. 90. cy.

Read the additional information carefully ›››  page 18. Fasten your seat belt The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the seat belt is not positioned correctly.

● Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly. ● To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly across your chest and lap. ● Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the Fig. 91 Positioning and removing the seat appropriate seat and push it down until it is belt buckle. securely locked with an audible click ››› Fig. 91 A. ● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in the buckle.

78 Seat belts

The seat belts are equipped with an automat- ● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi- overturns, or in accidents where no major ic retractor on the shoulder strap. Full free- cle is in motion. If you do, you increase the forces act on the vehicle. dom of movement is permitted when the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries. shoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, dur- ● An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause se- Note ing sudden braking, during travel in steep vere injuries in the event of an accident. ● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a areas or bends and during acceleration, the data Technical ● For pregnant women, the lap part of the fine dust is produced. This is normal and it is automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is seat belt must lie as low as possible over the not an indication of fire in the vehicle. locked. pelvis, never across the stomach, and always ● The relevant safety requirements must be The automatic belt retractors on the front lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the observed when the vehicle or components of seats are fitted with seat belt tensioners abdomen ››› Fig. 92. the system are scrapped. Specialised work- ››› page 79. ● Always engage the retractor lock when you shops are familiar with these regulations, Advice are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1 which are also available to you. Releasing the seat belt ››› page 86. ● Press the red button on the belt buckle ● Read and observe the warnings ››› page 76. ››› Fig. 91 B. The latch plate is released and Service and disposal of belt tension- springs out ››› . ers

● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls Seat belt tensioners The belt tensioners are components of the Operation up easily and the trim is not damaged. seat belts that are installed in the seats of How the seat belt tensioner works your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension- Positioning seat belts ers or remove and install parts of the system Seat belts offer their maximum protection on- Read the additional information carefully when performing other repair work, the seat ly when they are properly positioned. ›››  page 18. belt may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the belt

The seat belts for the occupants in the front Emergencies WARNING tensioners function incorrectly or may not seats are equipped with belt tensioners. Sen- function at all. ● The seat belts offer best protection only sors will trigger the belt tensioners only dur- when the backrests are in an upright position ing severe head-on, lateral and rear-end colli- So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten- and the seat belts have been fastened prop- sions and only if the seat belt is worn. This sioner is not reduced and that removed parts erly. retracts and tightens the seat belts, reducing do not cause any injuries or environmental Safety ● Never put the latch plate in the buckle of the forward motion of the occupants. pollution, regulations, which are known to another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will the specialised workshops, must be ob- The belt tensioners will not be triggered in not protect you properly and the risk of injury served. » is increased. the event of minor collisions, if the vehicle

79 Safety

WARNING Airbag system airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag may inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occu- ● Improper use or repairs not carried out by pant. This also applies to children. qualified mechanics increase the risk of se- Brief introduction vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may Always maintain the greatest possible dis- fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong cir- tance between yourself and the front airbag. Why is it so important to wear a seat cumstances. This way, the front airbags can completely ● Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or belt and to sit correctly? deploy when triggered, providing their maxi- install parts of the belt tensioners or seat mum protection. belts. For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the seat belt must always be worn The most important factors that will trigger ● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and auto- properly and the correct sitting position must an airbag are: the type of accident, the angle matic retractor cannot be repaired. be assumed. of collision and the speed of the vehicle. ● Any work on the belt tensioners and seat belts, including the removal and refitting of The airbag system is not a substitute for seat Whether or not the airbags are triggered de- system parts in conjunction with other repair belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration work, must be performed by a specialised overall passive safety system. Please bear in rate resulting from the collision and detected workshop only. mind that the airbag system can only work ef- by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration ● The belt tensioners will only provide pro- fectively when the vehicle occupants are occurring during the collision and measured tection for one accident and must be changed wearing their seat belts correctly and have by the control unit remains below the speci- if they have been activated. adjusted the head restraints properly. There- fied reference values, the front, side and/or fore, it is most important to properly wear the curtain airbags will not be triggered. Take in- seat belts at all times, not only because this to account that the visible damage in a vehi- is required by law in most countries, but also cle involved in an accident, no matter how for your safety ››› page 75, Why wear a seat serious, is not a determining factor for the belt?. airbags to have been triggered. The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so WARNING if you are not properly seated when the airbag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju- ● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assum- ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle ing an incorrect sitting position can lead to occupants assume a correct sitting position critical or fatal injuries. while travelling. ● All vehicle occupants, including children, who are not properly belted can sustain criti- Sharp braking before an accident may cause cal or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered. a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be Children up to 12 years old should always thrown forward into the area of the deploying 80 Airbag system

travel on the rear seat. Never transport ● Head airbag WARNING children in the vehicle if they are not restrain- ●  Airbag control lamp on the instrument ● The seat belts and airbags can only provide ed or the restraint system is not appropriate panel maximum protection if the occupants are for their age, size or weight. ● Key-operated switch for front passenger air- seated correctly ››› page 70, Correct position ● If you are not wearing a seat belt, or if you bag for passengers. lean forward or to the side while travelling or data Technical ● If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, assume an incorrect sitting position, there is ● Control lamp to disconnect/connect the have the system checked immediately by a a substantially increased risk of injury. This front airbag. specialised workshop. Otherwise there is a increased risk of injury will be further in- danger that during a collision, the system creased if you are struck by an inflating air- The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag control lamp will il- may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.

bag. Advice luminate for a few seconds every time the ig- ● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating nition is switched on (self-diagnosis). airbag, always wear the seat belt properly ››› page 75. Airbag activation There is a fault in the system if the control ● Always adjust the front seats properly. lamp : The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within ● does not light up when the ignition is thousandths of a second, to provide additional protection in the event of an accident.

switched on, Operation Description of the airbag system A fine dust may develop when the airbag de- ● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition ploys. This is normal and it is not an indica- Read the additional information carefully is switched on, tion of fire in the vehicle. ›››  page 19. ● turns off and then lights up again after the The airbag system is only ready to function ignition is switched on, The airbag system is not a substitute for the when the ignition is on. seat belts. The airbag system offers addition- ● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is In special accidents instances, several air-

al protection for the driver and passenger in moving. Emergencies combination with the seat belts. bags may activate at the same time. The airbag system is not triggered if: In the event of minor head-on and side colli- The airbag system comprises the following ● the ignition is switched off sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll- modules (as per vehicle equipment): over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate. ● there is a minor frontal collision

● Electronic control unit Safety ● there is a minor side collision Activation factors ● Front airbags for driver and passenger ● there is a rear-end collision The conditions that lead to the airbag system ● Knee airbag for the driver ● the vehicle turns over. activating in each situation cannot be gener- ● Side airbags alised. Some factors play an important role, » 81 Safety

such as the properties of the object the vehi- In an accident with airbag activation: Knee airbag* cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle ● the interior lights switch on (if the interior speed, etc. light switch is in the courtesy light position); Read the additional information carefully ›››  page 20. Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti- ● the hazard warning lights switch on; vation. ● all doors are unlocked; WARNING The control unit analyses the collision trajec- ● the fuel supply to the engine is cut. ● The knee airbag is deployed in front of the tory and activates the respective restraint driver's knees. Always keep the deployment system. areas of the knee airbags free. If the deceleration rate is below the prede- ● Never not fix objects to the cover or in the fined reference value in the control unit the Airbag safety instructions deployment area of the knee airbag. airbags will not be triggered, even though ● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is a the accident may cause extensive damage to Front airbags distance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) between the car. your knees and the location of the this air- Read the additional information carefully bag. If your physical constitution prevents ›››  page 19. The following airbags are triggered in seri- you from meeting these requirements, make ous head-on collisions sure you contact a specialised workshop. WARNING ● Driver airbag. ● The deployment space between the front ● Front passenger front airbag passengers and the airbags must not in any Side airbags* ● Knee airbag for the driver. case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects. Read the additional information carefully The following airbags are triggered in seri- ● The airbags provide protection for just one ›››  page 21. ous side-on collisions accident; replace them once they have deployed. ● Front side airbag on the side of the acci- WARNING ● dent. It is also important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or telephone ● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean ● Rear side airbag on the side of the acci- mountings to the surfaces covering the air- forward, or are not seated correctly while the dent. bag units. vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk of injury if the side airbag system is triggered ● ● Do not attempt to modify components of Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac- in an accident. cident. the airbag system in any way. ● In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting

82 Airbag system position must always be maintained with ● Under no circumstances should protective scribed sitting position must always be main- seat belts fastened while travelling. covers be fitted over seats with side airbags tained with seat belts fastened while travel- ● In a side-on collision the side airbags will unless the covers have been approved for use ling. not work if the sensors do not correctly meas- in your vehicle. Because the airbag deploys ● For safety reasons, the curtain airbag must ure the pressure increase on the interior of from the side of the backrest, the use of con- be disabled in those vehicles fitted with a the doors, due to air escaping through the ventional seat covers would obstruct the side screen dividing the interior of the vehicle. data Technical areas with holes or openings in the door pan- airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effec- See your technical service to make this ad- el. tiveness. justment. ● Never drive if the interior door panels have ● Any damage to the original seat upholstery ● There must be no other persons, animals or been removed or if the panels have not been or around the seams of the side airbag units objects between the occupants of the outer correctly fitted. must be repaired immediately by a special- seats and the deployment space of the head- Advice ised workshop. ● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers protection airbags so that the head-protec- in the door panels have been removed, un- ● The airbags provide protection for just one tion airbag can deploy completely without re- less the holes left by the loudspeakers have accident; replace them once they have de- striction and provide the greatest possible been closed properly. ployed. protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have not been expressly approved for use in your ● Always check that the openings are closed ● Any work on the side airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag compo- vehicle may not be attached to the side win- or covered if loudspeakers or other equip- dows ment are fitted inside the door panels. nents for other repairs (such as removal of Operation the front seat) should only be performed by a ● The built-in coat hooks should be used only ● Occupants of the outer seats must never specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any carry any objects or pets in the deployment occur during the airbag system operation. heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. space between them and the airbags, or al- ● Do not attempt to modify components of Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hang- low children or other passengers to travel in ers. this position. It is also important not to at- the airbag system in any way. tach any accessories (such as cup holders) to ● The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have de- the doors. This would impair the protection Emergencies ployed. offered by the side airbags. Curtain airbags* ● The built-in coat hooks should be used only ● Any work on the head-protection airbag for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any Read the additional information carefully system or removal and installation of the air- heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. ›››  page 21. bag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lining) should only be per- ● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, formed by a specialised workshop. Other- Safety WARNING must not be exerted upon the backrest bol- wise, faults may occur during the airbag sys- ster because the system may be damaged. In tem operation. this case, the side airbags would not be trig- ● In order for the head-protection airbags to gered. provide their maximum protection, the pre- ● Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way. » 83 Safety

The disabling of airbags is only carried out in ● The side and head airbags are managed  It lights up on the combi-in- through sensors located in the interior of the strument certain cases, i.e. if: front doors. To ensure the correct operation of ● a child seat is required in the front passen- Fault in airbag the side and curtain airbags neither the Have the system checked immedi- ger seat with the child facing in the opposite system and seat doors nor the door panels should be modified ately by a specialised workshop. belt tensioners. direction to the direction of travel (in some in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the countries, due to divergent legal require- front door is damaged, the airbag system ments, facing in the direction of travel) may not work correctly. All work carried out   It lights up on the dash panel on the front door must be done in a special- ››› page 88; ised workshop. Fault in the air- Have the system checked immedi- ● despite the driver's seat being in the cor- bag system. ately by a specialised workshop. rect position, a minimum distance of 25 cm Front passenger cannot be maintained between the centre of Check whether the airbag should re- front airbag dis- the steering wheel and the driver's torso, main disabled. Deactivating airbags abled. ● installation of special devices is required in the steering wheel area due to a physical dis- Deactivation of front airbag   It lights up on the dash panel ability, ● if you have special seats installed (e.g. an The control lamp switches off about Front passenger 60 seconds after the ignition is orthopaedic seat without side airbags). front airbag ena- turned on or after enabling of the bled. front passenger front airbag with the The front passenger front airbag can be disa- key lock switch. bled using the switch ››› page 85. We recommend that you contact an author- Several warning and control lamps light up ised SEAT dealer for the disabling of other air- for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- bags. ed on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few sec- Airbag system control onds. Fig. 93 Control lamp for disabling the front The airbag system availability is controlled passenger front airbag on the dash panel If the front passenger airbag is deactivated, electronically, regardless of whether an air-      the lamp does not re- bag is disabled. main lit, or if it is lit together with the control lamp  on the dash panel, there may be a fault in the airbag system ››› .

84 Airbag system

If an airbag was disabled using a diagnostics CAUTION system: Always pay attention to any lit control lamps ●  the airbag system warning lamp illumi- and to the corresponding descriptions and in- nates after switching on the ignition for structions to avoid damage to the vehicle. about 4 seconds, and then flashes for about

12 seconds. data Technical Note If the airbag has been disabled with the air- ● Follow the current legislation in your coun- bag switch on the side of the dash panel: try regarding the disabling of airbags. ● the airbag control lamp  will illuminate ● At your authorised SEAT dealer you can find for about 4 seconds after the ignition is information on which vehicle airbags can be Fig. 95 Warning lamp for disabling the front Advice switched on, disabled. passenger airbag. ● The airbag is disabled, signalled with the warning lamp   which lights up with the Read the additional information carefully word      placed in the cen- Front passenger front airbag switch ›››  page 20. tre part of the dash panel ››› Fig. 94. The switch disables only the front passenger front airbag. WARNING Operation In the event of a fault in the airbag system, Switching on the airbag the airbag may not trigger correctly, may fail – Switch the ignition off. to trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly, leading to severe or fatal injuries. – Open the glove compartment on the front ● Have the airbag system checked immedi- passenger side. ately by a specialised workshop. – Insert the key into the slot of the switch for Emergencies ● Never mount a child seat in the front pas- deactivating the front passenger airbag senger seat or remove the mounted child ››› Fig. 94. About 3/4 of the key should en- seat! The front passenger front airbag may Fig. 94 Front passenger front airbag switch. ter, as far as it will go. deploy during an accident in spite of the fault. – Then turn the key gently to the ON position.

Do not force it if you feel resistance, and Safety make sure you have inserted the key fully. – Close the passenger side storage compartment. » 85 Safety

– Check, with the ignition switched on, that the system immediately checked by an Offi- Transporting children safely the control lamp   ››› Fig. 95 does not cial Service. light up, with the word      in the centre part of the dash panel. Safety for children – The warning lamp   is illuminated for Introduction 60 seconds in the centre part of the dash panel. For safety reasons, as we have learned from Control lamp with the word    accident statistics, we recommend that chil-   (front passenger airbag disabled) dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear seats. Depending on their age, height and If the front passenger front airbag is disa- weight, children travelling in rear seats must bled, after switching on the ignition, the con- use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea- trol lamp will light up for several seconds, sons, the child seat should be installed in the then it will switch off for about 1 s and then rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or switch on again. in the centre back seat. If the control lamp is flashing, there is a fault The physical laws involved and the forces in the disabling of the airbag system ››› . acting in a collision apply also to children Please go immediately to an Official Service. ››› page 77. But unlike adults, children do not have fully developed muscle and bone struc- WARNING tures. This means that children are subject to ● The driver of the vehicle is responsible for a greater risk of injury. disabling or switching on the airbag. To reduce the risk of injuries, children must ● Always switch off the ignition before disa- always use special child restraint systems bling the front passenger airbag! Failure to do when travelling in the vehicle. so could result in a fault in the airbag deactivation system. We recommend the use of child safety prod- ● Never leave the key in the airbag disabling ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro- switch as it could get damaged or enable or gramme, which includes systems for all ages disable the airbag during driving. made by “Peke” (not for all countries). ● If the   (airbag disabled) control lamp These systems have been especially de- flashes, the front passenger front airbag will signed and approved, complying with the not trigger in the event of an accident! Have ECE-R44. regulation.

86 Transporting children safely

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and bled with a key-operated switch ››› page 85. ● Never hold children or babies on your lap, observe any statutory requirements when in- When transporting children, use a child seat this can result in potentially fatal injuries to stalling and using child seats. Always read suitable for the age and size of each child the child! and note ››› page 87. ››› page 88. ● Never allow a child to be transported in a We recommend you always carry the manu- vehicle without being properly secured, or to

WARNING data Technical facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to- stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. gether with the on-board documentation. ● If a child seat is secured to the front pas- In an accident, the child could be flung senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain- through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal in- ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an juries to themselves and to the other vehicle accident increases. occupants. Important information regarding the ● ● If children assume an improper sitting posi- Advice front passenger's airbag An inflating front passenger airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat and project it tion when the vehicle is moving, they expose with great force against the door, the roof or themselves to greater risk of injury in the Read the additional information carefully the backrest. event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an ›››  page 22. accident. This is particularly important if the ● Never install a child seat facing backwards child is travelling on the front passenger seat on the front passenger seat unless the front Read and always observe the safety informa- and the airbag system is triggered in an acci- passenger front airbag has been disabled. tion included in the following chapters: dent; as this could cause serious injury or

Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! Operation even death. ● Safety distance with respect to the passen- However, if it is necessary, in exceptional ca- ger airbag ››› page 80. ses, to transport a child in the front passen- ● A suitable child seat can protect your child! ger seat, the front passenger front airbag ● ● Objects between the passenger and the Never leave a child alone in the child seat must always be disabled ››› page 84. If the or inside the vehicle because depending on passenger side airbag in Front airbags ››› passenger seat has a height adjustment op- the season, very high temperatures may be on page 82. tion, move it to the highest, most upright po- reached inside a parked vehicle, which could sition. If you have a fixed seat, do not install be fatal. The passenger side front airbag, when ena- Emergencies any child restraint system in this location. bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing ● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall backward since the airbag can strike the seat ● For those vehicles that do not include a key must not wear a normal seat belt without a with such force that it can cause serious or lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehi- child seat, as this could cause injuries to the cle must be taken to a technical service. fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old abdominal and neck areas during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident. should always travel on the rear seat. ● All vehicle occupants, especially children, must assume the proper sitting position and ● Do not allow the seat belt to become twis- Safety Therefore we strongly recommend you to be properly belted in while travelling. ted and the seat belt should be properly in transport children on the rear seats. This is place ››› page 75. the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative- ● Only one child may occupy a child seat ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa- ››› page 88, Child seats. » 87 Safety

● When a child seat is mounted in the rear WARNING Group 3: From 22 to 36 kg (over around 7 seats, the door child-proof lock should be ac- years old) An undue installation of the safety seat will tivated ››› page 128. increase the risk of injury in the event of a Child seats that have been tested and ap- crash. proved under the ECE R44 standard bear the ● Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle Child seats luggage compartment. with the test number below it). ● Never secure or tie luggage or other items Follow the manufacturer's instructions and Safety instructions to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or the upper observe any statutory requirements when in- ones (Top Tether). stalling and using child seats. Read the additional information carefully ›››  page 22. We recommend you to always include the Categorisation of child seats into manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual together with the on-board documentation. WARNING groups When travelling, children must be secured in SEAT recommends you use child seats from the vehicle with a restraint system suitable Use only child seats that are officially ap- the Original Accessories Catalogue. These for age, weight and size. proved and suitable for the child. child seats have been designed and tested for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the ● Read and always observe information and Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE- right child seat for your model and age group warnings concerning the use of child seats R 44. ECE-R stands for: Economic Commis- at SEAT dealers. ››› page 87. sion for Europe Regulation. The child seats are grouped into 5 catego- WARNING ries: The retaining rings are designed only for use with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system child Group 0: Up to 10 kg (up to around 9 seats. months) ● Never secure other child seats that do not Group 0+: Up to 13 kg (up to around 18 have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* system, or months) retaining belts or objects to the fastening rings - this can result in potentially fatal inju- Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg (up to approx. 4 ries to the child. years old) ● Ensure that the child seat is secured correctly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* se- Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg (up to approx. 7 curing rings. years old)

88 Event Data Recorder Event Data Recorder Depending on vehicle equipment, this in- tem quality. Any data used for the purposes cludes data from systems such as: of research will be treated anonymously (in other words, no reference will be made to the Description and operation ● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer). ● Front Assist. Your vehicle has an event data recorder (EDR). ● Park Pilot system data Technical ● The EDR’s function is to record data in the Lane Assist event of a mild or serious accident. These da- The EDR data are only recorded in specific ac- ta are used to support the analysis of how cident situations. No data are recorded in different vehicle systems behaved. normal driving conditions. Advice The EDR records, over a reduced time range No audio or video data inside or around the (normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driv- vehicle are recorded. Under no circumstances ing data and data from the restraint systems, are personal data such as name, age, or gen- such as: der recorded. Nevertheless, third parties ● How different vehicle systems worked. (such as criminal proceedings authorities) may relate the contents of the EDR data to Operation ● Whether the driver and the occupants were other data sources and create a personal ref- wearing their seatbelts. erence in the context of an accident investi- ● How hard the acceleration or brake pedal gation. was pressed. In order to read the EDR data it is necessary ● Vehicle speed. to access (if legally permitted to do so) the vehicle's ODB (“On-Board-Diagnose”) inter- These data will provide a better understand- face while the vehicle is switched on. Emergencies ing of the circumstances of the accident. SEAT will not have access to EDR data unless Data from the driving assist systems are also the owner (or, in “Leasing” cases, the lessee recorded. This includes data such as whether or hirer) gives their consent. There may be ex- the systems were inactive or active and if ceptions to this, depending on legal or con-

such action had an impact on the vehicle’s Safety tractual provisions. dynamic behaviour, changing its path in the aforementioned situations, accelerating or Due to legal requirements in safety-related decelerating the vehicle. products, SEAT may use the EDR data for field research and in order to improve vehicle sys- 89 Emergencies

Note ● In the event of cuts or perforations in the Emergencies tyre greater than 4 mm. The jack does not generally require any maintenance. If required, it should be greased us- ● If you have been driving with very low pres- Self-help ing universal type grease. sure or a completely flat tyre. ● If the sealant bottle has passed its use by Vehicle tool kit, anti-puncture kit* date.

The tools and anti-puncture kit* are stored Tyre repair WARNING under the floor panel in the luggage compartment. Using the tyre mobility system can be dan- TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* gerous, especially when filling the tyre at the To access the vehicle tools: roadside. Please observe the following rules Read the additional information carefully to minimise the risk of injury: – Lift up the floor surface by the plastic han- ›››  page 60 dle until it is fastened to the tabs on both ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. sides. The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System) Park it at a safe distance from surrounding will reliably seal punctures caused by the traffic to fill the tyre. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the an- penetration of a foreign body of up to about ● Ensure the ground on which you park is flat ti-puncture kit* is located under the floor 4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign ob- and solid. panel in the luggage compartment. jects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre. ● All passengers and particularly children The tool kit includes: After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre, must keep a safe distance from the work area. you must again check the tyre pressure about ● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn ● Jack* 10 minutes after starting the engine. other road users. ● Wire hook for pulling off the wheel cov- You should only use the tyre mobility set if ● Use the tyre mobility system only if you are er*/wheel bolt cap clip. the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are familiar with the necessary procedures. Oth- erwise, you should seek professional assis- ● Box spanner for wheel bolts* familiar with the procedure and you have the tance. ● Towline anchorage necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you should seek professional assistance. ● The tyre mobility set is intended for tempo- ● Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts* rary emergency use only until you can reach the nearest specialised workshop. ● Towing bracket device Do not use the tyre sealant in the following cases: ● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre mo- Some of the items listed are only provided in bility set as soon as possible. certain model versions, or are optional ex- ● If the wheel rim has been damaged. tras. ● In outside temperatures below -20°C (-4°F).

90 Self-help

● The sealant is a health hazard and must be Note 4 Air compressor cleaned immediately if it comes into contact Take into account the separate instruction 5 Tube for inflating tyres with the skin. manual of the tyre mobility set* manufactur- 6 Warning provided by tyre pressure moni- ● Always keep the tyre mobility set out of the er. toring system (it can also be integrated in reach of small children. the compressor). Technical data Technical ● Never use an equivalent jack, even if it has 7 Air bleed screw (in its place, the compres- been approved for your vehicle. Contents of the tyre mobility system* sor may have a button). ● Always stop the engine, apply the hand- 8 ON/OFF switch brake lever firmly and engage gear if using a manual gearbox, in order to reduce the risk of 9 12 volt connector Advice vehicle involuntary movement. 10 Bottle of sealant 11 Spare tyre valve WARNING 1 A tyre filled with sealant does not have the The valve insert remover has a gap at the same performance properties as a conven- lower end for a valve insert. The valve insert tional tyre. can only be screwed or unscrewed in this way. This also applies to its replacement part ● Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph). Operation 11 . ● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering. WARNING ● Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum When inflating the wheel, the air compressor speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check Fig. 96 Standard representation: contents of and the inflator tube may become hot. the tyre. the anti-puncture kit. ● Protect hands and skin from hot parts.

The anti-puncture kit is located underneath ● Emergencies For the sake of the environment Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube or the floor covering in the luggage compart- hot air compressor on flammable material. Dispose of used or expired sealant observing ment. It includes the following components ● Allow them to cool before storing the de- any legal requirements. ››› Fig. 96: vice. 1 Tyre valve remover ● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at Note least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is Safety 2 Sticker indicating maximum speed “max. A new bottle of sealant can be purchased at too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph” SEAT dealerships. good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con- 3 Filler tube with cap tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance. »

91 Emergencies

CAUTION ● Seek specialist assistance. WARNING Switch off the air compressor after a maxi- Getting in the way of the doors and the rear mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid over- lid is dangerous and can lead to serious in- heating! Before switching on the air compres- Manual unlocking/locking jury. sor again, let it cool for several minutes. ● Open and close the doors and the rear lid only when there is nobody in the way. Introduction

Check after 10 minutes of driving Read the additional information carefully CAUTION ›››  page 14, ›››  page 15. Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 96 5 again When opening and closing in an emergency, and check the pressure on the gauge 6 . carefully disassemble components and then The doors, rear lid and panoramic tilting sun- reassemble them carefully to avoid damage roof can be locked manually and partially to the vehicle. 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower: opened, for example if the key or the central ● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be sealed locking is damaged. sufficiently with the tyre mobility set. WARNING ● You should obtain professional assistance Changing the windscreen wiper ››› . Opening and closing doors carelessly can blades cause serious injury. 1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher: ● If the vehicle is locked from outside, the Changing the windscreen and rear doors and windows cannot be opened from ● Set the tyre pressure to the correct value window wiper blades the inside. again. ● Never leave children or disabled people Read the additional information carefully ● Carefully resume your journey until you alone in the car. They could be trapped in the ›››  page 68. reach the nearest specialised workshop with- car in an emergency and will not be able to out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). get themselves to safety. The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as ● Have the damaged tyre replaced. ● Depending on the time of the year, temper- standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is atures inside a locked and closed vehicle can responsible for ensuring that the wipe is si- WARNING be extremely high or extremely low resulting lent. If the graphite layer is damaged, the in serious injuries and illness or even death, noise of the water as it is wiped across the Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous particularly for young children. and can cause accidents and serious injury. windscreen will be louder. ● Do not continue driving if the tyre pressure Check the condition of the wiper blades regu- is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower. larly. If the wipers scrape across the glass,

92 Self-help they should be changed if they are damaged, CAUTION the Keyless Access system, the steering or cleaned if they are dirty ››› . wheel could lock up. ● To prevent damage to the bonnet and the Damaged wiper blades should be replaced wiper arms, only leave them in the service WARNING immediately. These are available from quali- position. fied workshops. ● Before driving, always lower the wiper If the vehicle has no electrical power, the Technical data Technical arms. brake lights, turn signals and all other lights WARNING will no longer function. Do not have the vehicle towed away. Failure to follow this instruc- Worn or dirty wiper blades reduce visibility tion could result in an accident. and increase the risk of accident and serious injury. Towing and tow-starting the ve- WARNING Advice ● Always replace damaged or worn blades or hicle blades which do not clean the windscreen The risk of accidents is high when tow-start- correctly. General information ing, for example, the towed vehicle can easily be driven into the towing vehicle. CAUTION Read the additional information carefully ›››  page 64. CAUTION ● Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the glass. Tow-starting means starting the engine of If there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubricant Operation ● If products containing solvents, rough the vehicle while another pulls it. in the automatic transmission the car may sponges or sharp objects are used to clean only be towed with the driven wheels lifted Towing means one vehicle pulling another clear of the road, or transported on a special the blades, the graphite layer will be dam- that is not roadworthy. aged. car transporter or trailer. ● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access thinner or similar products to clean the win- system, towing is only allowed with the igni- CAUTION tion on! Emergencies dows. Do not tow a vehicle for more than 50 m in at- ● In icy conditions, always check that the The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle is tempt to start it. There is risk of damage to wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be- towed with the engine switched off and the the catalytic converter. fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it may ignition connected. Depending on the battery help to leave the vehicle parked with the wip- charge status, the drop in voltage may be so Note  Safety ers in service position ››› page 67. large, even after just a few minutes, that no ● Please observe related legal requirements. » electrical device in the vehicle may work e.g. the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with

93 Emergencies

● Switch on the hazard warning lights of both ● Keep the clutch pressed down. Anchoring the front tow line vehicles. However, observe any regulations ● Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn- to the contrary. ing lights. ● The tow rope must not be twisted. Other- ● Once both vehicles are moving, release the wise the front tow line anchorage could be clutch. pulled off the vehicle. ● Once the engine starts, press the clutch and disengage the gear to avoid colliding with the towing vehicle. Indications for tow-starting Note Vehicle's should not generally be tow-started. The jump start should be used instead The vehicle can only be tow-started if the ›››  page 65. electronic parking brake and, if appropriate, Fig. 97 Right side of the front bumper: tow- the electronic lock of the steering column are line anchorage screwed in. For technical reasons, towing the following deactivated. If the vehicle has no power sup- vehicles is not allowed: ply or there is an electric system fault, the The front towline anchorage is only mounted engine must be tow-started to deactivate the if the vehicle has to be towed. ● Vehicles with an automatic gearbox. electronic parking brake and the electronic ● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be- lock of the steering column. There is a cover with an opening into which cause in vehicles with the Keyless Access the towline anchorage is screwed on the right locking and ignition system the steering re- part of the front bumper. mains locked and the electronic parking – To open the cover, press the left side. brake cannot be deactivated nor can the electronic lock of the steering column be re- – Take the towline anchorage out of the vehi- leased if they are activated. cle tool kit ››› page 90. ● If the battery is flat, it is possible that the – Screw the towline anchorage into the screw engine control units may not operate correct- connection as far as it will go ››› Fig. 97 and ly. tighten with the wheel brace. After use, unscrew the towline anchorage However, if the vehicle must absolutely be and fit the cover back on the bumper. Put the tow-started (in the case of manual gearbox- towline anchorage back in the vehicle tool es): kit. The towline anchorage should always be ● Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear. kept in the vehicle.

94 Self-help

Rear towline anchorage Vehicles with towline anchorage Towing vehicles with a manual gear- On the right of the rear bumper there is a cov- box er which covers a threaded hole. Towing is relatively straightforward. – Take the towline anchorage out of the vehi- Please observe the relevant instructions cle tool set ››› page 90. data Technical ››› page 93. – To open the cover, press the top right side ››› Fig. 98. The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar or tow rope in the normal way, with all four – Screw the towline anchorage into the screw wheels on the road; it can also be towed with connection as far as it will go ››› Fig. 99 and either the front or rear wheels lifted off the Advice tighten with the wheel brace. road. The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h (30 mph). Fig. 98 Right side of the rear bumper: cover- After use, unscrew the towline anchorage cap. and put it back in the vehicle tool kit. Replace the cover on the bumper. The towline anchorage should always be kept in the vehicle. Towing a vehicle equipped with automatic gearbox WARNING Operation Certain restrictions must be observed when ● If the towline anchorage is not screwed in towing your vehicle. as far as the stop, there is a risk of the screw connection shearing off during towing (acci- Please observe the relevant instructions dent risk). ››› page 93. ● If your car has a towing bracket, only use The vehicle can be towed with a tow bar or special towing ropes. Risk of accident! tow rope in the normal way, with all four Emergencies wheels on the ground. When doing so, Fig. 99 Right side of the rear bumper: towline CAUTION anchorage screwed in. please note the following points: In vehicles fitted with a towing bracket, only ● Make sure the selector lever is in the N po- The rear towline anchorage should only be use special tow bars to prevent damage to sition. mounted if you wish to tow another vehicle. the ball joint. These tow bars have been spe- Safety cially approved for use with towing brackets. ● The vehicle must not be towed faster than 50 km/h (30 mph). ● The vehicle must not be towed further than 50 km (30 miles). Reason: when the engine » 95 Emergencies

is not running, the gearbox oil pump does Fuses and bulbs ● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only not work and the gearbox is not adequately replace fuses with a fuse of the same amper- lubricated for higher speeds or longer distan- Fuses age (same colour and markings) and size. ces. ● Never repair a fuse. If the vehicle has to be towed with a break- Introduction ● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, staple down truck, it must only be suspended at the or similar. front wheels. Reason: the drive shafts are lo- In general, a fuse can be assigned to various cated on the front wheels. If the car is towed electrical components. Likewise, an electrical CAUTION with the rear wheels lifted off the road (I.e. component can be protected by several ● To prevent damage to the vehicle's electric travelling backwards), the drive shafts also fuses. system, before replacing a fuse always turn turn backwards. The planetary gears in the off the ignition, the lights and all electrical automatic gearbox then turn at such high Only replace fuses when the cause of the problem has been solved. If a newly inserted elements and remove the key from the igni- speeds that the gearbox will be severely tion. damaged in a short time. fuse blows after a short time, you must have the electrical system checked by a special- ● If you replace a fuse with higher-rating ised workshop as soon as possible. fuse, you could cause damage to another part Note of the electrical system. ● If it is not possible to tow the vehicle in the WARNING ● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre- normal way, or if it has to be towed further vent the entry of dust or humidity as they can The high voltages in the electrical system can than 50 km (30 miles), it must be transported damage the electrical system. on a special car transporter or trailer. give serious electrical shocks, causing burns and even death! ● Should the power supply to the selector Note lever be interrupted in position P, the selector ● Never touch the electrical wiring of the igni- lever will be locked. Before the vehicle can be tion system. ● One component may have more than one recovered/manoeuvred you must manually ● Take care not to cause short circuits in the fuse. release the selector lever ›››  page 47. electrical system. ● Several components may run on a single fuse. WARNING Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or bridging a current circuit without fuses can cause a fire and serious injury.

96 Fuses and bulbs

Vehicle fuses Opening and closing the fuse box situated No. Consumers/Amps below the dash panel ● Opening: fold the cover down ››› Fig. 100. 12 Radio 20 ● Closing: push back the cover it in until it 14 Air conditioner fan 40 clicks into place. 15 KESSY 10 data Technical

To open the engine compartment fuse box 16 Connectivity Box. 7.5 ● Open the bonnet  ››› page 268. 17 Instrument panel 5 ● Press the locking tabs to release the fuse 18 Rear camera 7.5 box cover ››› Fig. 101. Advice 19 KESSY 7.5 ● Then lift the cover out. Fig. 100 On the driver-side dash panel: fuse ● 21 4x4 Haldex Control Unit 15 box cover. To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box. Push the locking tabs down until they click 22 Trailer 15 audibly into place. 23 Sunroof 30 Fuses in the vehicle interior 24 Right lights 40 Operation No. Consumers/Amps 25 Left door 30 4 Taxis 3 26 Heated seats 20 5 Gateway 5 27 Interior light 30 6 Automatic gearbox lever 5 28 Trailer 25 Air conditioning and heating control Emergencies Fig. 101 In the engine compartment: fuse box 7 10 Parking aid control unit, front camera, panel, heating the back window. 32 7.5 cover. radar Diagnosis, handbrake switch, light 8 10 33 Airbag 5 Read the additional information carefully switch, reverse light, interior lighting ›››  page 58 Reverse switch, clima sensor, electro- 9 Steering column 5 34 7.5 Safety chromic mirror Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same 10 Radio display 7.5 amperage (same colour and markings) and Diagnosis, headlight control unit, 35 10 » size. 11 Left lights 40 headlight adjuster

97 Emergencies

No. Consumers/Amps No. Consumers/Amps CAUTION

36 Right LED headlight 10 7 Engine power supply 5/10 ● Always carefully remove the fuse box covers and refit them correctly to avoid problems 37 Left LED headlight 10 8 Lambda probe 10/15 with your vehicle. ● 38 Trailer 25 9 Engine 5/10/20 Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and humid- 39 Right door 30 10 Fuel pump control unit 10/15/20 ity inside fuse boxes can cause damage to the electrical system. 40 12V socket 20 11 PTC 40

42 Central locking 40 12 PTC 40 Note 44 Trailer 15 13 Automatic gearbox control unit 15/30 ● In the vehicle, there are more fuses than those indicated in this chapter. These should 45 Electric driver's seat 15 15 Horn 15 only be changed by a specialised workshop. 47 Rear window wiper 15 16 Fuel pump control unit 5/15/20 ● Positions not containing a fuse do not appear in the following tables. 49 Starter motor; clutch sensor 5 17 Engine control unit 7.5 ● Some of the equipment listed in the tables 52 Driving mode. 15 18 Terminal 30 (positive reference) 5 below pertain only to certain versions of the model or are optional extras. 53 Heated rear window 30 19 Front windscreen washer 30 ● Please note that the above lists, while cor- Fuse arrangement in engine compartment 20 Alarm horn 10 rect at the time of printing, are subject to change. No. Consumers/Amps 22 Engine control unit 5 23 Starter motor 30 1 ESP control unit 25 24 PTC 40 2 ESP control unit 40/60 Changing bulbs 31 Electronic differential CUPRA 15 Engine control unit (diesel/pet- 3 30/15 Topic introduction rol) 33 Automatic gearbox pump 30 4 Engine sensors 5/10 Read the additional information carefully ›››  page 59. 5 Engine sensors 7.5/10 Changing bulbs requires a certain degree of 6 Brake light sensor 5 practical skill. 98 Fuses and bulbs

If you choose to change the engine compart- WARNING ● Before changing a bulb, make sure you ment lamps yourself, remember that it is a have the correct new bulb. dangerous area ››› in Work in the engine ● Take particular care when working on components in the engine compartment if the en- ● Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with compartment on page 268. gine is warm. Risk of burns. your bare hands, use a cloth or paper towel instead, since the fingerprints left on the Always use identical bulbs with the same ● Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The glass will vaporise as a result of the heat gen- data Technical designation. The name can be found on the glass can break when you touch the bulb, erated by the bulb, they will be deposited on base of the bulb holder. causing injury. the reflector and will impair its surface. ● When changing bulbs, please take care not Depending on how equipped the vehicle is, ● Depending on the level of equipment fitted to injure yourself on sharp edges, in particu- there are different sets of headlights and tail in the vehicle, LEDs may be used for part or lar on the headlight housing. lights: all of the interior and/or exterior lighting. Advice LEDs have an estimated life that exceeds than ● Halogen headlights. CAUTION that of the car. If an LED light fails, go to an ● Full-LED main headlights* authorised workshop for its replacement. ● Remove the ignition key before working on ● Halogen headlights with LED daytime run- the electric system. Otherwise, a short circuit ning lights* could occur. ● Rear bulb light ● Switch off the lights and the parking light before changing a bulb. Operation ● LED rear light* ● Take good care to avoid damaging any com- Full-LED headlight system* ponents. Full-LED headlights handle all light functions (daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped For the sake of the environment beam and route light) with light emitting di- Please ask your specialist retailer how to dis- odes (LEDs) as a light source. pose of used bulbs in the proper manner. Emergencies Full-LED headlights are designed to last the lifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot be Note replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to ● Please check at regular intervals that all an authorised workshop to have it replaced. lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on your vehicle is functioning properly. This is Safety not only in the interest of your own safety, but also that of all other road users.

99 Emergencies

Change the front bulbs – Remove connector ››› Fig. 103 2 from the Turn signal bulb bulb. Dipped headlight bulb – Unclip the retainer spring ››› Fig. 103 3 pressing inwards to the right. – Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that the lug on the base fits into the recess on the reflector.

Day light bulb

Fig. 105 Turn signal bulb.

Fig. 102 Dipped beam headlights.

Fig. 104 Day light bulb.

– Raise the bonnet. Fig. 106 Turn signal bulb. – Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 104 1 to the – Raise the bonnet. Fig. 103 Dipped beam headlights. left and pull. – Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb – Move the loop ››› Fig. 105 1 in the direc- – Raise the bonnet. holder and turning it anti-clockwise at the tion of the arrow and remove the cover. – Move the loops ››› Fig. 102 1 in the direc- same time. – Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 106 2 anti- tion of the arrow and remove the cover. – Installation involves all of the above steps clockwise and pull. in reverse sequence.

100 Fuses and bulbs

– Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb – Raise the bonnet. Fog light bulb* holder and turning it anti-clockwise at the – Move the loop ››› Fig. 107 1 in the direc- 3 Valid only for versions with incandescent bulbs same time. tion of the arrow and remove the cover. – Installation involves all of the above steps – Slide connector ››› Fig. 108 2 to the left or in reverse sequence.

right and pull. data Technical – Remove the bulb by disconnecting the con- Main beam headlight bulb nector. – Installation involves all of the above steps

in reverse sequence. Advice Operation

Fig. 107 Main beam headlight bulb.

Fig. 109 Fog light: extracting the grille. » Emergencies Safety

Fig. 108 Main beam headlight bulb.

101 Emergencies

Note The table corresponds to a right-hand traffic vehicle. The position of lights may vary ac- ● Due to the difficulty of accessing fog light cording to the country. bulbs, have them replaced at a Technical Service or specialised workshop. ● LED fog lights should only be replaced by specialised personnel.

Changing incandescent rear Fig. 110 Fog light: remove the bulb holder light bulbs Follow the steps indicated: Rear lights summary 1. Remove the screw ››› Fig. 109 1  from the fog light grille using a screwdriver Tail lights on side panel and extract the grille. Turn signal PY21W NA LL 2. Remove the 3 screws ››› Fig. 109 2 . 3. Remove the metal clip situated on the Side light and brake light P21W LL upper part of the fog light by pulling away from the vehicle 3  and extract Tail lights on the rear lid the fog light. Left side 4. Remove the connector ››› Fig. 110 1 from the bulb. Side lights 2x W5W LL 5. Turn the bulb holder 2 anti-clockwise Fog lights H21 W and pull. 6. Remove the bulb by pressing on the Right side bulb holder and turning it anticlockwise Side lights 2x W5W LL at the same time. 7. Installation involves all of the above Reverse light P21W LL steps in reverse sequence. 8. Check that the bulb works properly. 102 Fuses and bulbs

Rear bulbs (in the side panel) CAUTION Take care when removing the rear light unit to make sure there is no damage to the paintwork or any of its components. Technical data Technical Note Make sure you have a soft cloth ready to place under the glass on the rear light unit, to avoid any scratches.

Fig. 112 Retaining tabs on reverse side of tail Advice light.

– Check which of the bulbs is defective. – Open the rear lid. – Remove the cover by prying the flat side of

a screwdriver into the recess and remove Operation the cover from the opening ››› Fig. 111 1 . – Carefully loosen the screw located behind the cover with a screwdriver, turning it anti- clockwise (arrows) ››› Fig. 111 2 . Fig. 111 Luggage compartment: location of the bolt securing the tail light unit. Remove – Tilt the light in the direction of the arrows the rear light unit from side panel. until it comes out of its housing (positions Emergencies 3 and 4 ) ››› Fig. 111. – Remove the bulb holder ››› Fig. 112 unlocking the retaining tabs 1 . – Change the damaged bulb. Safety – To refit follow the steps in reverse order, taking special care when fitting the bulb holder. The securing tabs must click into place. 103 Emergencies

Rear light bulbs (in the rear lid) – Reinstall the bulb holder, making sure that locking clips A ››› Fig. 113  are properly clipped on. – Replace the cover of the rear lid lining.

Rear LED light bulb (in the rear lid)

Fig. 114 Position of the bulbs in the bulb holder

The rear lid must be open to change the bulbs. – Remove the rear lid cover in the direction indicated ››› Fig. 113 . – Unlock the retaining tabs A of the bulb holder, following the direction of arrows 1 Fig. 115 Remove the cover from the rear lid and 2 ››› Fig. 113 . – Remove the bulb holder, moving it in the Fig. 113 Remove the cover from the boot lid direction of arrow 3 ››› Fig. 113 . and detach the bulb holder. – Lightly press the defective bulb into the bulb holder 1 , then turn it to the left 2 and remove it ››› Fig. 114. – Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb holder and turn it to the right as far as it will go.

– Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from Fig. 116 Remove the bulb holder. the glass part of the bulb. – Check that the new bulb works properly. 104 Fuses and bulbs

The rear lid must be open to change the Note bulbs. Depending on how equipped the vehicle is, – Remove the rear lid cover in the direction the number plate lights may be LEDs. LEDs indicated ››› Fig. 115. have an estimated life that exceeds than that of the car. If a light with LEDs fails, go to an

– Turn the reverse lights bulb holder anti- data Technical authorised workshop for replacement. clockwise in the direction of the arrow 1 ››› Fig. 116. – Remove the bulb holder from its housing 2 . Fig. 118 Number plate light: Remove the bulb Advice – Change the defective bulb and reinstall the holder. bulb holder in its housing, following these instructions in reverse order. Follow the steps indicated: – Check that the new bulb works properly. 1. Press the number plate light in the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 117.

Changing number plate light bulbs 2. Remove the number plate light. Operation 3. Turn the connector lock ››› Fig. 118 in the direction of arrow 1 and pull on the connector. 4. Rotate the bulb holder in the direction of arrow 2 and extract it with the bulb.

5. Replace the defective bulb with a new Emergencies bulb with the same features. 6. Insert the bulb holder in the number plate light and turn in the opposite direction of arrow 2 until it stops. Fig. 117 In the rear bumper: number plate Safety light. 7. Plug the connector into the bulb holder.

105 Operation

Fig. 119 Instruments and controls.

106 Controls and displays Operation 9 Control lever for: 18 Depending on the equipment: – Windscreen wipers and washer . . 143 – USB/AUX-IN input ...... 119 Controls and displays – Wipe and wash system ...... 143 – Connectivity Box/Wireless Charg- – On-board computer ...... 33 er* ...... 119

– Storage compartment data Technical General instrument panel 10 Depending on equipment fitted: radio or display for Easy Connect 19 Depending on equipment fitted, 1 Door release lever (navigation, radio, TV/video) ...... 114 gear lever or selector lever for: 2 Central locking switch ...... 123 11 Depending on the equipment, but- – Manual gearbox ...... 184 3 tons for: – Automatic gearbox ...... 185 Electric control to adjust exterior Advice mirrors ...... 146 – SEAT driving modes ...... 224 20 Electronic parking brake switch . . . 177 4 Air outlets ...... 170 – Start-Stop system ...... 196 21 Auto Hold switch ...... 199 5 Control lever for: – Park assist system ...... 232 22 Starter button (Keyless Access lock- – Turn signals and main beam – Hazard warning lights ...... 140 ing and ignition system) ...... 174 headlights ...... 136 – Tyre pressure switch ...... 283 23 Driver's seat heating control ...... 149

– Lane Assist ...... 218 – Airbag off display ...... 85 24 Ignition lock (vehicles without Key- Operation – Main beam assist ...... 137 12 Depending on the equipment, less Access) ...... 171 – Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . 200 glove compartment with: ...... 153 25 Knee airbag ...... 20 6 Depending on equipment fitted: – CD player* and/or SD card* 26 Adjustable steering column ...... 19 Booklet Radio – Lever for cruise control ...... 200 ››› 27 Storage compartment 13 Tyre pressure switch ...... 283 7 Steering wheel with horn and 28 Bonnet lock release ...... 269 14 Front passenger airbag switch . . . . 85 Emergencies – Driver airbag ...... 19 29 Headlight range control ...... 141 15 Front passenger airbag ...... 19 – On-board computer controls . . . . 33 30 Headlight switch ...... 135 16 Passenger seat heating control . . . . 149 – Controls for radio, telephone, 31 Electric windows ...... 131 navigation and speech dialogue 17 Depending on the equipment, con-

system ››› Booklet Radio trols for: Note Safety – Paddle levers for tiptronic gear- – Heating and ventilation system or ● Some of the equipment listed in this sec- shift (automatic gearbox) ...... 187 manual air conditioner ...... 51, 50 tion is only fitted on certain models or are optional extras. » 8 Instrument panel ...... 108 – Automatic air conditioner ...... 48 107 Operation

● A separate Instructions Manual is enclosed ● The arrangement of switches and controls ››› page 106. However, the symbols used to if the vehicle is equipped with a factory-fitted on right-hand drive models* may be slightly identify the controls are the same. radio, CD player, AUX IN connection or navi- different from the layout shown in gation system.

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Instruments

View of instrument panel

Fig. 120 Instrument panel, on dash panel.

Details of the instruments ››› Fig. 120: 1 Revolution counter (with the engine run- The beginning of the red zone of the rev ning, in hundreds of revolutions per mi- counter indicates the maximum speed in nute). any gear after running-in and with the 108 Instruments and warning/control lamps

engine hot. However, it is advisable to For the sake of the environment ● Active cylinder management display change up a gear or move the selector (ACT®)* ››› page 193 lever to D (or lift your foot off the acceler- Changing up a gear in time reduces fuel consumption and noise. ● Signs recognised by the traffic signal de- ator) before the needle reaches the red tection system ››› page 228 zone ››› . ● Low consumption driving status (ECO) Technical data Technical 2 Engine coolant temperature display ››› page 110 ››› page 111 or the natural gas level indi- Indications on the display ● Identifying letters on engine (MKB). cator in vehicles with natural gas engine A variety of information can be viewed on the (CNG) ››› page 112. instrument panel display ››› Fig. 120 3 , de- Distance travelled 3 Displays on the screen ›››  page 38, pending on the vehicle equipment: ››› page 109. The odometer registers the total distance Advice ● travelled by the car. 4 Adjuster button and display Bonnet, rear lid and doors open ››› page 111. ›››  page 38. The odometer (trip) shows the distance ● travelled since the last odometer reset. The 5 Speedometer. Warning and information messages ›››  page 38. last digit of the trip recorder indicates distan- 6 Fuel gauge ››› page 112. ● Distance travelled ››› page 111. ces of 100 metres or one tenths of a mile.

WARNING ● Time ››› page 109. ● Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 120 4 to re- Operation Any distraction may lead to an accident, with ● Navigation instructions. set the trip recorder to 0. the risk of injury. ● Outside temperature ›››  page 39. ● Keep the button 4 pressed for about 3 seconds and the previous value will be dis- ● Do not operate the instrument panel con- ● Compass ››› page 110. trols when driving. played. ● Shift lever position ››› page 185. ● Time CAUTION Recommended gear (manual gearbox) Emergencies ›››  page 39. ● To set the time, keep the button Fig. 120 ● To prevent damage to the engine, the rev ››› ● counter needle should only remain in the red Multifunction display (MFD) and menus 4 pressed for more than 3 seconds to select zone for a short period of time. with different setting options ›››  page 33. the hour or minute display. ● When the engine is cold, avoid high revs ● Service interval display ›››  page 41. ● To continue setting the time, press the up- and heavy acceleration and do not make the ● Second speed display ›››  page 33. per or lower part of the button 4 . Hold but- Safety engine work hard. ton down to scroll through the numbers ● Speed warning function  . ››› page 40 quickly. » ● Start-Stop system status display ››› page 196. 109 Operation

● Press the button 4 again in order to finish The second speed display can be adjusted in letters of the vehicle engine (MKB). To do setting the time. the Easy Connect system via the  button this, the ignition must be switched on and and the SETTINGS function button the engine switched off. The time can also be set via the  button ››› page 114. and the SETTINGS function button in the Easy WARNING Connect system ››› page 114. Speed warning Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning and control lamps on page 113. Compass When the speed setting is exceeded, this will be indicated on the instrument panel display. With the ignition on and the navigation sys- This is very useful, for example when using WARNING tem on, the cardinal point corresponding to winter tyres that are not designed for driving the direction of travel of the vehicle is dis- at the maximum speed of the vehicle Even though outside temperatures are above freezing, some roads and bridges may be icy. played on the instrument panel. ›››  page 40. ● At outside temperatures above +4°C Selector lever position The speed warning settings can be adjusted (+39°F), even when the “ice crystal symbol” in the Easy Connect system via the  button is not visible, there may still be patches of ice The selected gear is displayed on the side of and the SETTINGS function button on the road. the selector lever and on the instrument pan- ››› page 114. ● el display. In positions D and S, and with the Do not rely on the outside temperature indicator! Tiptronic, the corresponding gear is also dis- Start-Stop operating display played. Updated information relating to the status is Note displayed on the instrument panel Recommended gear (manual gearbox) ● Different versions of the instrument panel ››› page 196. The recommended gear in order to save fuel are available and therefore the versions and instructions on the display may vary. In the is displayed on the instrument panel while Low consumption driving status (ECO)* you are driving ›››  page 39. case of displays without warning or informa- Depending on the equipment, when driving, tion texts, faults are indicated exclusively by the warning lamps. Second speed display (mph or km/h) the “ECO” display appears on the instrument panel when the vehicle is in low consump- ● Depending on the equipment, some set- In addition to the speedometer, the speed tion status due to active cylinder manage- tings and instructions can also be carried out can also be displayed in a different unit of ment (ACT®)* ››› page 193. in the Easy Connect system. measurement (in miles or in km per hour). ● When several warnings are active at the This option cannot be deactivated in models Identifying letters on engine (MKB) same time, the symbols are shown succes- sively for a few seconds and will stay on until destined for countries in which the second 4 Hold the button ››› Fig. 120 down for more the fault is rectified. speed must always be visible. than 15 seconds to display the identifying 110 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Revolution counter For the sake of the environment The trip recorder shows the distance that has been travelled since it was last reset. It is The rev counter indicates the number of en- Changing up a gear early will help you to save used to measure short trips. The last digit of fuel and minimise emissions and engine gine revolutions per minute ››› Fig. 120 1 . the trip recorder indicates distances of 100 noise. metres or tenths of a mile. Together with the gear-change indicator, the rev counter offers you the possibility of using The trip recorder can be set to zero by press- data Technical the engine of your vehicle at a suitable Odometer ing 0.0/SET ››› Fig. 121. speed. The start of the red zone on the dial indicates Fault display

the maximum engine speed which may be If there is a fault in the instrument panel, the Advice used briefly when the engine is warm and af- letters DEF will appear in the trip recorder ter it has been run in properly. Before reach- display. Have the fault repaired immediately, ing this range, you should change to a higher as far as is possible. gear for vehicles with a manual gearbox or for automatic gearboxes put the selector lever in “D” or take your foot off the accelerator ped- Coolant temperature gauge

al. Operation We recommend that you avoid high revs and For vehicles with no coolant temperature  that you follow the recommendations on the Fig. 121 Instrument panel: odometer and re- gauge, a control lamp appears for high gear-change indicator. Consult the additional set button. coolant temperatures ››› page 272. Please information in ›››  page 39, Gear-change note ››› . The distance covered is displayed in “kilome- indicator. The coolant temperature gauge 2 tres” or miles “m”. It is possible to change ››› Fig. 120 only works when the ignition is

the measurement units (kilometres Emergencies CAUTION switched on. In order to avoid engine dam- “km”/miles “m”) in the radio/Easy Connect*. age, please read the following notes for the Never allow the rev counter needle 1 Please refer to the Easy Connect* Instructions different temperature ranges. ››› Fig. 120 to go into the red zone on the Manual for more details. scale for more than a very brief period, otherwise there is a risk of engine damage. Engine cold Odometer/trip recorder If only the diodes in the lower part of the Safety The odometer shows the total distance cov- scale light up, this indicates that the engine ered by the vehicle. has not yet reached operating temperature. »

111 Operation

Avoid high revs and heavy acceleration and and high engine loads, there is a risk of the The green warning lamp  lights up when the do not make the engine work hard. engine overheating. vehicle is running in natural gas operating mode. ● The front spoiler also ensures proper distri- Normal temperature bution of the cooling air when the vehicle is The green warning lamp  switches off when If in normal operations, the diodes light up moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can re- the natural gas is exhausted. The engine until the central zone, it means that the en- duce the cooling effect, which could cause changes to operate with petrol. gine has reached operating temperature. At the engine to overheat. Seek specialist assis- Problem: If the vehicle is left parked for a high outside temperatures and when making tance. long time immediately after refuelling, the the engine work hard, the diodes may contin- natural gas level indicator may not accurately ue lighting up and reach the upper zone. This indicate the same level shown after refuelling is no cause for concern, provided the control Fuel - Gas level when the vehicle is started up again. This is lamp  does not light up on the instrument not due to a leak in the system, but to a drop panel digital display. in pressure in the gas tank for technical reasons after a cooling phase just after refuel- Heat range ling. When the diodes light up in the upper area of the display and the control lamp appears  on the instrument panel display, the coolant Fuel level - Petrol/Diesel temperature is excessive ››› page 272.

CAUTION ● To ensure a long useful life for the engine, Fig. 122 Fuel gauge. avoid high revs, driving at high speed and making the engine work hard for approximately the first 15 minutes when the engine Displays 2 and 6 ››› Fig. 120 only work is cold. The phase until the engine is warm al- when the ignition is switched on. When the so depends on the outside temperature. If display reaches the reserve mark, the lower necessary, use the engine oil temperature* diode lights up in red and the control lamp  ›››  page 40 as a guide. appears ››› page 108. When the fuel level is ● Additional lights and other accessories in very low, the lower diode flashes in red. Fig. 123 Fuel gauge. front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect The yellow control lamp  lights up when the of the coolant. At high outside temperatures reserve level has been reached. The display 6 ››› Fig. 120 only works when the ignition is switched on. When the display 112 Instruments and warning/control lamps reaches the reserve mark, the lower diode Depending on the model, additional text ● In any vehicle, the engine compartment is a lights up in red and the control lamp  ap- messages may be viewed on the instrument hazardous area and could cause severe inju- pears ››› page 108. When the fuel level is very panel display. These may be purely informa- ries ››› page 268. low, the lower diode flashes in red. tive or they may be advising of the need for action ››› page 108, Instruments. The distance to empty fuel level is displayed CAUTION Technical data Technical 3 on the instrument panel ››› Fig. 120. Depending upon the equipment fitted in the Failure to heed the control lamps and text vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some- The capacity of the fuel tank of your vehicle is messages when they appear may result in times a symbol may be displayed on the in- given in the Technical data section faults in the vehicle. strument panel. ›››  page 53.

When certain control and warning lamps are Advice CAUTION lit, an audible warning is also heard. Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An irregular fuel supply could cause misfiring. In WARNING this way the unburned fuel can reach the ex- If the warning lamps and messages are ignor- haust system, which could cause the catalytic ed, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may converter to overheat resulting in damage. cause accidents and severe injuries.

● Never ignore the warning lamps or text Operation messages. Control lamps ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. ● Park the vehicle away from traffic and en- Warning and control lamps sure that there are no highly flammable materials under the vehicle that could come into contact with the exhaust system (e.g. dry

Read the additional information carefully Emergencies ›››  page 43. grass, fuel). ● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci- The control and warning lamps are indicators dent for the driver and for other road users. If of warnings, ››› , faults ››› or certain func- necessary, switch on the hazard warning tions. Some control and warning lamps come lamps and put out the warning triangle to ad- on when the ignition is switched on, and vise other drivers. Safety switch off when the engine starts running, or ● Before opening the bonnet, switch off the while driving. engine and allow it to cool.

113 Operation

Introduction to the Easy Function buttons in the Page vehicle settings Connect system* menu System settings (CAR)* ESC system ››› page 181 Tyres ››› page 281 CAR menu Driver assistance ››› table on page 30

Read the additional information carefully Parking and manoeuvring ››› page 232 ›››  page 30 Vehicle lights ››› table on page 30 To select the settings menus, depending on the version, either press the Easy Connect Mirrors and windscreen wipers ››› table on page 30  button and the SETTINGS function button, Opening and closing ››› table on page 30 OR press the  button, then Vehicle and then the SETTINGS function button. Multifunction display ››› table on page 30 The actual number of menus available and Date and time ››› table on page 30 the name of the various options in these me- Units ››› table on page 30 nus will depend on the vehicle’s electronics and equipment. Service ››› page 109

Pressing the menu button will always take Factory settings ››› table on page 30 you to the last menu used. When the function button check box is activa- WARNING ted , the function is active. Any distraction may lead to an accident, with Pressing the menu button  will always take the risk of injury. Operating the Easy Connect system while driving could distract you from you to the last menu used. traffic. Any changes made using the settings menus are automatically saved on closing those menus.

114 Communications and multimedia Communications and multimedia

Steering wheel controls* Technical data Technical General information

The steering wheel includes a multifunction module from where it is possible to control the audio, telephone and radio/navigation Advice functions without needing to distract the driver. There are two versions of the multifunction module:

● Audio system + telephone without voice control version (MID): for controlling the au- Operation dio functions available (radio, audio CD, MP3, iPod®1), USB1), SD1)) and Bluetooth system from the steering wheel. ● Audio system + telephone with voice control version (HIGH): for controlling the audio

functions available (radio, audio CD, MP3, Emergencies iPod®1), USB1), SD1)) and Bluetooth system from the steering wheel. Safety

1) Depending on the vehicle equipment. 115 Operation

Operating the telephone and audio system without voice control (MID)

Fig. 124 Controls on the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone Navigation

Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down A Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute

Short press: answer/hang up calls, enable/open the tele- Short press: access to the tele- Short press: access to the tele- Short press: access to the tele- Short press: access to the telephone menu. B phone menu in the instrument phone menu in the instrument phone menu in the instrument phone menu in the instrument Hold down: reject an incoming panela). panela). panela). panela). call/switch to private mode/rediala).

Short press: switch to the previ- C Search for last station ous song No function No function No function Hold down: quick rewind

Short press: switch to the next D Search for the next station song No function No function No function Hold down: fast forward

Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument E , F panela) panela) panela) panela) panela)

G MID: change source MID: change source MID: change source MID: change source MID: change source

116 Communications and multimedia

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone Navigation

Turn: Changes menu or memory Turn: Next/previous presetb) Turn: Next/previous songb) Turn: No function Turn: Acts on the MFD on instrument panel H Press: Acts on the MFD Press: Acts on the MFD Press: Acts on the MFD Press: Confirm Press: Operates on instrument panel Technical data Technical a) According to the vehicle's equipment package. b) Only if the dash panel is in audio menu.

Operating the telephone and audio system with voice control (HIGH) Advice Operation

Fig. 125 Controls on the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa) Emergencies Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down A Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute

Short press: answer/hang up Short press: access to the tele- Short press: access to the tele- Short press: access to the tele- calls, enable/open the tele- Short press: access to the telephone menu on the dash pan- phone menu on the dash pan- phone menu on the dash pan- phone menu. phone menu on the dash pan- B Safety ela). ela). ela). Hold down: reject an incoming ela). Hold down: rediala) Hold down: rediala) Hold down: rediala) call/switch to private/redial Hold down: rediala) » mode

117 Operation

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

Short press: switch to the previ- Radio/media functionality (ex- C Search for last station ous song No function No functionb) cept AUX ) Hold down: quick rewind

Short press: switch to the next Radio/media functionality (ex- D Search for the next station song No function No functionb) cept AUX ) Hold down: fast forward

Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument E , F panel panel panel panel panel

G Enable/disable voice controla) Enable/disable voice controla) Enable/disable voice controla) No functionb) Enable/disable voice control

Turn: Acts upon the dash panel Turn: Acts upon the dash panel Turn: Acts upon the dash panel Turn: Next/previous presetc) Turn: Next/previous songc) menu depending on where it is menu depending on where it is menu depending on where it is Press: Acts on the MFD or con- Press: Acts on the MFD or con- located located located H firms the menu option of the firms the menu option of the Press: Acts on the MFD or con- Press: Acts on the MFD or con- Press: Acts on the MFD or con- dash panel depending on the dash panel depending on the firms the menu option of the firms the menu option of the firms the menu option of the menu option menu option dash panel depending on the dash panel depending on the dash panel depending on the menu option menu option menu option

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package. b) When a call is being made, radio/media functionality (except AUX). c) Only if the dash panel is in audio menu.

118 Communications and multimedia

Multimedia Connectivity Box* / Wireless Charger* With the Wireless Charger you only have the wireless charging function if your mobile de- USB/AUX-INPort vice has Qi technology. The Connectivity Box/Wireless Charger is in the storage compartment area of the centre console ››› Fig. 128. data Technical The operating description is located in the re- Fig. 127 Related video spective Instruction Manuals of the audio system or the navigation system. Advice Note Your mobile device must support the Qi wireless inductive charging interface standard for proper operation. Fig. 126 Centre console: USB/AUX-IN input.

Depending on the special characteristics and the country, the vehicle may have a Operation USB/AUX-IN port. The USB/AUX-IN port can be found in the Fig. 128 Centre console: Connectivity Box. storage compartment area of the centre console ››› Fig. 126. Depending on the features and the country, the vehicle may have one of these two op- The operating description is located in the re- tions: Connectivity Box or Wireless Charger. spective Instruction Manuals of the audio Emergencies system or the navigation system. With the Connectivity Box you can charge your mobile device wirelessly with Qi1) technology, while also reducing the radiation in the vehicle and getting better reception. Safety

1) Qi technology allows you to charge your mobile phone wirelessly. 119 Operation Opening and closing The vehicle is unlocked again when the igni- the alarm from being triggered accidentally tion key is removed. Alternatively, the vehicle ››› page 130. can also be unlocked via the central locking Central locking system switch or by pulling one of the inside door Turn signals handles. The Auto Lock function can be The turn signals will flash twice when the ve- switched on and off on the sound system or Description hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicle on the Easy Connect* system . ››› page 123 is locked. Read the additional information carefully In the event of an accident in which the air- ›››  page 13 If it does not flash, this indicates that one of bags inflate, the doors will be automatically the doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is not The vehicle can be locked and unlocked via unlocked to facilitate access and assistance. closed correctly. the central locking system. There are several methods, depending on the vehicle equip- Anti-theft alarm system* ment: Accidental lock-out If the anti-theft alarm system senses interfer- The central locking system prevents you from ence with the vehicle it triggers an audible ● key with remote control ››› page 122, being locked out of the vehicle in the follow- and visible alarm. ● lock on driver door (emergency opening ing situations: ›››  page 13) or The anti-theft alarm system is automatically ● If the driver door is open, the vehicle can- ● interior central locking switch ››› page 123. switched on when locking the vehicle. It switches off when the vehicle is unlocked not be locked with the central locking switch ››› page 123. Unlocking one side of the vehicle only from a distance. When you lock the vehicle with the key, the When the driver door is unlocked with the Lock the vehicle with the remote control key, doors and the rear lid are locked. When you key, you should switch on the ignition within when all the doors and the rear lid have been open the door, you can either unlock only the 15 seconds. Otherwise the alarm will be trig- closed. This prevents the accidental locking driver door, or all the vehicle doors. To select gered. On some export versions, the alarm is of the vehicle. the required option, use Easy Connect* triggered immediately when you open a door. WARNING ››› page 123. To deactivate the alarm, press the button  on the remote control key, or switch on the Do not leave anyone (especially children) in Automatic locking (Auto Lock)* ignition. After a certain time, the alarm will the vehicle if it is locked from the outside and automatically switch off. the anti-theft security system* is enabled, as The Auto Lock function locks the doors and the doors and windows cannot then be the rear lid when the vehicle exceeds a speed Switch off the vehicle interior monitoring and opened from the inside. Locked doors could of about 15 km/h (9 mph). tow-away protection if you wish to prevent delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.

120 Opening and closing

Note a longer period the control lamp flashes several times, such as in convenience opening. ● Never leave any valuable items in the vehicle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is not a If the vehicle key control lamp does not light safe. up when the button is pressed, replace the ● If the diode on the driver door sill lights up key's battery ››› page 127. Technical data Technical for about 30 seconds when the vehicle is locked, the central locking system or anti- Unfolding and folding the key shaft theft alarm* is not working properly. You Press button 1 ››› Fig. 129 or ››› Fig. 130 to should have the fault repaired at a SEAT Offi- unlock and unfold the key shaft. cial Service or specialised workshop. ● The vehicle interior monitoring of the anti- Fig. 130 Vehicle key with alarm button. To fold the shaft away, press button 1 and Advice theft alarm* system will only function as in- fold the key shaft in until it locks in place. tended if the windows and the sunroof* are Vehicle key closed. With the vehicle key the vehicle may be Alarm button* locked or unlocked remotely ››› page 120. Only press alarm button 2 in the event of an The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat- emergency! When the alarm button is press- Car key ed, the vehicle horn is heard and the turn sig- tery. The receiver is in the interior of the vehi- Operation cle. The range of the vehicle key with remote nals are switched on for a short time. When control and new battery is several metres the alarm button is pressed again, the alarm around the vehicle. is switched off.

If it is not possible to open or close the vehi- Spare key cle using the remote control key, this should be re-synchronised ››› page 127 or the bat- To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys, tery changed ››› page 127. the vehicle chassis number is required. Emergencies Different keys belonging to the vehicle may Each new key contains a microchip which be used. must be coded with the data from the vehicle electronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not work if it does not contain a microchip or the Fig. 129 Vehicle key Control lamp on the vehicle key microchip has not been encoded. This is also Safety When a button on the vehicle key is pressed, true for keys which are specially cut for the the control lamp flashes ››› Fig. 129 (arrow) vehicle. » once briefly, but if the button is held down for

121 Operation

The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be against overloading. The vehicle is then un- ● Other functions of the remote control key obtained from a SEAT Official Service, a spe- locked. Lock it if necessary. ››› page 132, Convenience opening/closing. cialised workshop or an approved key service qualified to create this kind of key. New keys or spare keys must be synchron- Unlocking/Locking by remote control Selective unlocking system ised before use ››› page 127. Read the additional information carefully The selective unlocking system allows you to CAUTION ›››  page 13 only unlock the driver door and the fuel tank flap. All other doors and the rear lid remain All of the vehicle keys contain electronic com- The vehicle will be locked again automatical- locked. ponents. Protect them from damage, impacts ly if you do not open one of the doors or the and humidity. rear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking the car. This function prevents the vehicle from Unlocking the driver door and tank flap Note remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is – Press button  on the remote control key pressed by mistake. This does not apply if once, or turn the key once to open. ● Only use the key button when you require you press the button  for at least one sec- the corresponding function. Pushing the button unnecessarily could accidentally unlock ond. Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and the tank flap simultaneously. the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is also pos- In vehicles with a security central locking sible even when you are outside the radius of feature (selective unlocking of side doors) – Within 5 seconds, press button  on the action. ››› page 122, when the button  is pressed remote control key twice, or turn the key to ● Key operation can be greatly influenced by once, only the driver door and the fuel tank open twice within 5 seconds. overlapping radio signals close to the vehicle flap are unlocked. When the button is press- working in the same range of frequencies, for ed a second time, all the vehicle doors are The anti-theft security system* and the anti- example, radio transmitters or mobile tele- unlocked. theft alarm* are immediately disabled if you phones. unlock only the driver door, without unlock- ● Obstacles between the remote control and WARNING ing the other doors. the vehicle, bad weather conditions and dis- Observe the safety warnings ››› in Descrip- In vehicles with Easy Connect*, you can pro- charged batteries can considerably reduce gramme the security central locking system the range of the remote control. tion on page 120. directly ››› page 123. ● If the buttons of the vehicle key are pressed ››› Fig. 129 or ››› Fig. 130 or one of the cen- Note tral locking buttons ››› page 123 is pressed ● Do not use the remote control key until the repeatedly in short succession, the central vehicle is visible. locking briefly disconnects as protection

122 Opening and closing

Programming the central locking sys- when you unlock the vehicle. In all the op- ● You can open the doors individually from tem tions, the fuel tank flap is also unlocked. the inside by pulling the inside door handle. With the Driver setting, when you press the ● In the event of an accident in which the air- You can use Easy Connect* to select which  button on the remote control key only the bags inflate, doors locked from the inside will doors are unlocked with the central locking door on the driver's side is unlocked. If that be automatically unlocked to facilitate access system. Using the radio or the Easy Connect* button is pressed twice, the rest of the doors and assistance. data Technical system, you can select whether the vehicle and the rear lid will be unlocked. automatically closes with the “Auto Lock” WARNING programme at speeds of more than 15 km/h In vehicles with a conventional key, turn the ● The central locking switch also operates (9 mph). key in the door lock, in the direction of open- when the ignition is switched off and auto-

ing, twice within 2 seconds. Advice matically locks all the vehicle doors when the Programming the unlocking of the doors (ve- If the button  is pressed, all the vehicle button  is pressed. hicles with Easy Connect) doors are locked. At the same time, a confir- ● The central locking switch does not operate – Select:  button > SETTINGS function mation signal* is heard. if the vehicle is locked from the outside and button > Opening and closing > Cen- Auto Lock/Locking while driving. If the anti-theft security system is switched on. tral locking > Unlocking doors. you select on, all the vehicle doors are ● Locked doors could delay assistance in an locked at speeds above 15 km/h (9 mph). emergency, potentially putting lives at risk. Programming the Auto Lock (vehicles with Do not leave anyone, especially children, in Operation Easy Connect) the vehicle. – Select:  button > SETTINGS function Central locking switch button > Opening and closing > Cen- Note tral locking > Locking while Read the additional information carefully Your vehicle will lock automatically when it driving. ›››  page 13 reaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph)

(Auto Lock) ››› page 120. You can unlock the Emergencies Programming the Auto Lock (vehicles with Please note the following when using the vehicle again using button  on the central radio) central locking switch to lock your vehicle: locking switch. – Select: SETUP button > control button  ● It is not possible to open the doors or the Central locking > Locking while rear lid from the outside (for safety reasons,

driving. e.g. when stopped at traffic lights). Safety ● Unlocking doors You can choose to un- The LED in the central locking switch lights lock all the doors or only the driver door up when all the doors are closed and locked.

123 Operation

Related video Keyless Access Once the doors have been locked, they cannot be opened again immediately. This will enable you to check that the doors are properly closed. If you wish, when unlocking, you can unlock only the corresponding door or the entire vehicle. The necessary adjustments can be per- Fig. 131 Technology formed in vehicles with a driver information system ›››  page 30.

Fig. 133 Keyless Access locking and ignition General information Unlocking and locking the vehicle system: sensor surface A for unlocking in- with Keyless Access* side the door handle and sensor surface B If a valid key is in the proximity of the car for locking on the exterior of the handle. ››› Fig. 132, the Keyless Access locking and starting system gives the key entry as soon Depending on the equipment, the vehicle as one of the sensor surfaces on the front may have the Keyless Access system. door handles is touched. The following features are then available without having to Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni- use the vehicle key actively: tion system to unlock and lock the vehicle without actively using its key. To do this, all ● Keyless-Entry: unlocking the vehicle using that is required is to have a valid vehicle key the handles of the front doors or the soft- in the detection area where you are attempt- touch/handle on the rear lid. ing to access the vehicle ››› Fig. 132 and to ● Keyless-Exit: locking the vehicle using the touch one of the sensor surfaces on the door sensor of the driver or passenger door han- Fig. 132 Keyless Access locking and ignition handles ››› Fig. 133 ››› . dle. system: In the proximity of the car. The vehicle can be unlocked and locked via ● Press & Drive: keyless starting of the en- the front doors only. When doing so, the re- gine with the starter button ››› page 171. mote control key must be no further than approx. 1.5 m from the door handle. The central locking and locking systems operate in the same way as a normal locking and It does not matter where you carry the key, for unlocking system. Only the controls change. instance whether it is in your jacket pocket or in a briefcase.

124 Opening and closing

Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a ● Touch (once) the locking sensor surface B blocked for engine ignition ››› page 171. In double flash of the indicator lights; locking (arrow) on one of the front door handles. The order to enable engine ignition, the button by a single flash. door that is used must be closed. on the key  inside the vehicle needs to be pressed. If the vehicle is locked and then all doors and the rear lid are closed leaving the last key On vehicles with a “Safe” security system: used inside the vehicle and none outside, shutting and locking doors (Keyless-Exit) Automatically disabling sensors data Technical the vehicle will not lock immediately. All the ● Switch the ignition off. If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a vehicle's indicator lights will flash four times. ● Close the driver's door. long period of time, the proximity sensors on The vehicle will lock again after a few sec- the passenger doors are automatically disa- ● Touch (once) the sensor surface B (arrow) onds if you fail to open any door or the rear bled.

on one of the front door handles. The vehicle Advice lid. locks with the “Safe” ››› page 126 system. If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han- If you unlock the vehicle but fail to open any The door that is used must be closed. dles is often activated in an unusual manner with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branches door or the rear lid, the vehicle will lock again ● Touch (twice) the sensor surface B (arrow) of a bush rubbing against it), all proximity after a few seconds. of one of the front door handles to lock the sensors are disabled for a certain period of vehicle without activating the “Safe” security time. Unlocking and opening the doors (Keyless- system ››› page 126.

Entry) Sensors will again be enabled: Operation ● Grip one of the front door handles. In doing Unlocking and locking the rear lid ● After a time. this, the sensor surface ››› Fig. 133 A (arrow) When a locked vehicle is opened, the rear lid on the handle is touched and the vehicle un- automatically unlocks if there is a valid vehi- ● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but-  locks. cle key in the proximity ››› Fig. 132. ton on the key. ● Open the door. ● OR: if the rear lid is open. Open or close the rear lid normally.

● Emergencies On vehicles with selective opening or info- OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually with After closing, the rear lid locks automatically. the key. tainment system configuration, pulling the If the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear door handle twice will unlock all doors. lid will not lock automatically after closing it. Keyless Access temporary disconnection function On vehicles without a “Safe” security sys- What happens when locking the vehicle with tem: shutting and locking doors (Keyless-Ex- a second key There is a sequence of actions to be followed Safety it) if you wish to temporarily deactivate Keyless If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and ● Switch the ignition off. Access. First of all, lock the vehicle with the it is locked from the outside with a second key. As of this moment, you have 5 seconds » ● Close the driver's door. vehicle key, the key inside the vehicle is 125 Operation

to perform the second locking action through (arrow) on one of the handles is activated ● If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a lay- the door handle sensor. continuously, all windows will close. er of salt, the correct functioning of the sen- If this second action is performed more than sors on the door handles may be affected. In this case, clean the vehicle. 5 seconds after the vehicle is locked with the Note key, it will not be possible to deactivate Key- ● If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic ● If the vehicle battery has little or no charge, less Access. gearbox, it may only be locked in the gear or the vehicle key battery is almost or entire- stick is in position P. Once Keyless Access has been temporarily ly out of charge, you will probably not be able deactivated, the vehicle can only be unlocked to lock or unlock the vehicle with the Keyless using the key. The Keyless Access function Access system. The vehicle can be unlocked will be reactivated once it has been unlocked. or locked manually ››› page 92. Anti-theft security system (Safelock)* ● To control the proper locking of the vehicle, The following message is displayed on the in- Convenience functions the release function is disabled for approx. 2 seconds. strument panel to remind the driver that To close all the electric windows and the sun- when the vehicle is closed from the outside, ● If the message Keyless access system roof using the convenience function, keep a the anti-theft security system is switched on. faulty is displayed on the screen of the  finger for a few seconds on the locking sen- dash panel, abnormalities may occur in the Do not forget the Safelock. sor surface ››› Fig. 133 B (arrow) of the door operation of the Keyless Access system. Con- Please see Instruction Manual. The handle until the windows and roof have tact a specialised workshop. SEAT recom- vehicle cannot be opened from inside. This closed. mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this. makes it more difficult for unauthorised persons to break into the vehicle in De- The doors opened by touching the sensor ● Depending on the function set on the info- ››› scription on page 120. surface of the door handle depend on the tainment system for the mirrors, the exterior settings that have been activated in the info- mirrors will unfold and the surround lighting The anti-theft security system can be switch- tainment system with the  button and the will come on when unlocking the vehicle used off each time the vehicle is locked: ing the sensor surface on the driver and pas- SETTINGS and Opening and closing function but- senger door handles ››› page 145. tons. ● Turn the key a second time to the lock posi- ● If there is no valid key inside the vehicle or tion, in the door lock, within two seconds. If CAUTION the system fails to detect one, a warning will necessary, remove the protective cover on display on the dash panel screen. This could the driver door handle ›››  page 13 or The sensor surfaces on the door handles happen if any other radio frequency signal in- ● Press  on the remote control key for a could engage if hit with a water jet or high terferes with the key signal (e.g. from a mo- pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle key bile device accessory) or if the key is covered second time within 2 seconds. in the proximity. If at least one of the electric by another object (e.g. an aluminium case). windows is open and the sensor surface B The flashing frequency of the diode in the door sill immediately confirms the process. Initially, the diode flashes in a fast sequence 126 Opening and closing for a brief period, then it stops for approxi- The battery is located to the rear of the vehi- For the sake of the environment mately 30 seconds and, lastly continues cle key, under a cover. flashing slowly. Please dispose of your used batteries correctly and with respect for the environment. Changing the battery ● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 121. Replacing the battery data Technical ● Remove the cover from the back of the ve- Synchronising the vehicle key hicle key ››› Fig. 134 in the direction of the arrow ››› . If the button  is pressed frequently outside ● Extract the battery from the compartment of the vehicle range, it is possible that the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us- using a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 135. Advice ing the key. In this case, the key must be re- ● Place the new battery in the compartment synchronised as described below: as shown ››› Fig. 135, pressing in the opposite direction to that shown by the arrow ● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 121. ››› . ● If necessary, remove the cover from the ● Fit the cover as shown ››› Fig. 134, pressing driver door lever ›››  page 13. it onto the vehicle key casing in the opposite

● Press the button  on the vehicle key. For Operation Fig. 134 Vehicle key: opening the battery direction to that shown by the arrow until it this, it must remain with the vehicle. compartment. clicks into place. ● Open the vehicle within one minute using CAUTION the key blade. The key has been synchronised. ● If the battery is not changed correctly, the vehicle key may be damaged. ● If necessary, fit the cap.

● Use of unsuitable batteries may damage Emergencies the vehicle key. For this reason, always replace the dead battery with another of the same voltage, size and specifications. ● When fitting the battery, check that the polarity is correct. Safety

Fig. 135 Vehicle key: removing the battery.

SEAT recommends you ask a specialised workshop to replace the battery. 127 Operation

Childproof lock anti-clockwise for the right hand side ● The turn signal light will flash once on clos- doors. ing and activating the alarm. 3 Applies to vehicles with 5 doors:

Deactivating the childproof lock When does the system trigger an alarm? – Unlock the vehicle and open the door The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered for whose childproof lock you want to deacti- about 30 seconds accompanied by sound vate. and optical (flashing) warning signals and will be repeated about ten times when the – With the door open, rotate the groove in vehicle is locked and the following unauthor- the door using the ignition key, anti-clock- ised actions are attempted: wise for the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 136 and clockwise for the right hand side ● Opening a door that is mechanically un- doors. locked using the vehicle key without switching on the ignition in the next 15 seconds (in Fig. 136 Childproof lock on the left hand side Once the childproof lock is activated, the certain markets, such as the Netherlands, door. door can only be opened from the outside. there is no 15 second waiting time and the The childproof lock can be activated or deac- alarm is activated immediately on opening The childproof lock prevents the rear doors tivated by inserting the key in the groove the door). from being opened from the inside. This sys- when the door is open, as described above. tem prevents minors from opening a door ac- ● A door is opened. cidentally while the vehicle is running. ● The bonnet is opened. This function is independent of the vehicle ● The rear lid is opened. electronic opening and locking systems. It Anti-theft alarm system* ● When the ignition is switched on with a only affects rear doors. It can only be activa- non-authorised key. ted and deactivated manually, as described Description below: ● When the vehicle battery is disconnected. The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to ● Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicles break into the vehicle or steal it. Activating the childproof lock with interior monitoring ››› page 130). – Unlock the vehicle and open the door in The anti-theft alarm is automatically turned ● When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles with which you wish to activate the childproof on when the vehicle is locked with the key. anti-tow system ››› page 130). lock. ● The turn signal light will flash twice on ● When the vehicle is raised (in vehicles with – With the door open, rotate the groove in opening and deactivating the alarm. anti-tow system ››› page 130). the door using the ignition key, clockwise for the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 136 and 128 Opening and closing

● When the vehicle is transported on a ferry ● If the vehicle battery is run down or flat – Press the button  on the remote control or by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system or then the anti-theft alarm will not operate cor- twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sen- vehicle interior monitoring ››› page 130). rectly. sors will be deactivated. The alarm system ● When a trailer connected to the anti-theft ● Vehicle monitoring remains active even if remains activated. alarm system is disconnected. the battery is disconnected or not working for The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- any reason. data Technical tow system are automatically switched on How to turn OFF the alarm ● The alarm is triggered immediately if one of again next time the vehicle is locked. Unlock the vehicle with the unlocking button the battery cables is disconnected while the The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow on the key or turn on the ignition with a valid alarm system is active. sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch- key. ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched Advice on. In order to activate it, all the doors and Note Vehicle interior monitoring and anti- the rear lid must be closed. ● After 28 days, the indicator light will be tow system* switched off to prevent the battery from ex- If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior hausting if the vehicle has been left parked It is a monitoring or control function incorpo- monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must for a long period of time. The alarm system rated in the anti-theft alarm* which detects be done each time that the vehicle is locked; remains activated. unauthorised vehicle entry by means of ultra- if not, they will be automatically switched on. sound. Operation ● If, after the audible warning goes off, an- The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- other monitored area is accessed (e.g. the tow system should be switched off if animals rear lid is opened after a door has been Activation are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise, opened), the alarm is triggered again. – It is automatically switched on when the their movements will trigger the alarm) or ● The anti-theft alarm is not activated when anti-theft alarm is activated. when, for example, the vehicle is transported the vehicle is locked from within using the or has to be towed with only one axle on the central locking button  . Deactivation ground. Emergencies ● If the driver door is unlocked mechanically – Open the vehicle with the key, either me- False alarms with the key, only the driver door is unlocked, chanically or by pressing the  button on the rest of the doors remain locked. Only Interior monitoring will only operate correctly the remote control. The time period from when the ignition has been turned on will the if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob- when the door is opened until the key is in- other doors be available - but not unlocked - serve related legal requirements. and the central locking button will be activa- serted in the contact should not exceed 15 Safety ted. seconds, otherwise the alarm will be triggered. The following cases may cause a false alarm: ● Open windows (partially or fully). »

129 Operation

● Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially or Deactivating the vehicle interior moni- Rear lid (luggage compart- completely). toring and anti-tow systems* ment) ● Movement of objects inside the vehicle, such as loose papers, items hanging from When the vehicle is locked, the alarm will be the rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc. triggered if movements are detected in the Tailgate automatic lock interior (e.g. by animals) or if the vehicle's in- Where the vehicle has been locked by press- Note clination is changed (e.g. during transport). You can prevent the alarm from being trig- ing the  button on the remote control with ● If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm is gered accidentally by switching off the vehi- the rear lid open, the rear lid will lock auto- activated without the volumetric sensor func- matically when closed. tion, relocking will activate the alarm with all cle interior monitoring and/or tow-away pro- its functions, except the volumetric sensor. tection. The automatic tailgate locking time extension This function is reactivated when the alarm is function can be activated. Where this func- ● To switch off the interior monitoring and switched on again, unless it is deliberately tion is activated and once the rear lid has tow-away protection, switch off the ignition switched off. been unlocked by pressing the  button on and, using the Infotainment system, select: ● If the alarm has been triggered by the volu- the remote control key ››› page 122, the rear  button > SETTINGS function button > Open- metric sensor, this will be indicated by a lid can be re-opened for a certain length of ing and closing > Central locking > Switch off flashing of the warning lamp on the driver time. alarm. door when the vehicle is opened. The flash is Where required, the automatic tailgate lock- different to the flash indicating the alarm is ● When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicle activated. interior monitoring and the tow-away protec- ing time extension function can be activated or deactivated at an Authorised SEAT Service, ● tion are switched off until the next time the The vibration of a mobile phone left inside which will provide all the necessary informa- the vehicle may cause the vehicle interior door is opened. tion. monitoring alarm to trigger, as both sensors react to movements and shakes inside the ve- If the anti-theft security system (Safelock)* Before the vehicle locks automatically, there hicle. ››› page 126 is switched off, the vehicle interi- is a risk of intruders getting into the vehicle. or monitoring and the tow-away protection ● If on activating the alarm, any door or the Therefore, we recommend you always lock rear lid is open, only the alarm will be activa- are automatically switched off. the vehicle by pressing the  button on the ted. The vehicle interior monitoring and the remote control or by using the central locking anti-tow system will only be activated once WARNING button. all the doors are closed (including the rear Observe the safety warnings ››› in Descrip- lid). tion on page 120. WARNING Observe the safety warnings ››› in Intro- duction on page 92.

130 Opening and closing

 ● Always close the rear lid properly. Risk of Electric windows Safety switch * (only in 5-door vehicles) accident or injury. Safety switch 5 on the driver door can be ● The rear lid must not be opened when the Opening and closing of the electric used to disable the electric window buttons reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may windows* in the rear doors. damage the tail lights.

Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear data Technical ● Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down doors are activated. with your hand on the rear window. The glass could smash. Risk of injury! Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors ● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it. are deactivated. If not, it may open unexpectedly while driv- The safety control symbol  lights up in yel- Advice ing. low if the buttons on the rear doors are ● Closing the rear lid without observing and switched off. ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury to you and to third parties. Make sure that no WARNING one is in the path of the rear lid. Observe the safety warnings ››› in Intro- ● Never drive with the rear lid open or half- Fig. 137 Detail of the driver door: controls for duction on page 92. closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the the windows (5-door vehicle with front and ● Incorrect use of the electric windows can Operation interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning! rear electric windows). result in injury. ● If you only open the rear lid, do not leave the key inside. The vehicle cannot be opened Read the additional information carefully ● Never close the rear lid without observing if the key is left inside. ›››  page 16 and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and third parties. The front and rear electric windows can be Make sure that no one is in the path of a win- operated by using the controls on the driver dow.

door. The other doors each have a switch for ● The engine may accidentally be started and Emergencies their own window. be out of control. Always close the windows fully if you park ● If the ignition is switched on, the electric the vehicle or leave it unattended ››› . equipment could be activated with risk of injury, for example, in the electric windows.

You can use the electric windows for approx. ● The doors can be locked using the remote Safety 10 minutes after switching off the ignition if control key. This could become an obstacle neither the driver door nor the front passen- for assistance in an emergency situation. » ger door has been opened and the key has not been removed from the ignition. 131 Operation

● Therefore always take the key with you ● If the window is still obstructed, the win- – First unlock the vehicle using button  on when you leave the vehicle. dow will stop at this point. the remote control key and then keep the key in the driver door lock until all the win- ● The electric windows will work until the ig- ● If there is no obvious reason why the win- nition has been switched off and one of the dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by dows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* have front doors has been opened. pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win- reached the required position. ● If necessary, use the safety switch to disa- dow closes with maximum force. The roll- ble the rear electric windows. Make sure that back function is now deactivated. Convenience close function they have been disabled. ● If more than 10 seconds pass, the window – Press and hold button  on the remote will open fully when you operate one of the control key until all the windows and the Note buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated. sliding/tilting sunroof* are closed ››› , or If the window is not able to close because it – Keep the key in the driver door in the "lock" WARNING is stiff or because of an obstruction, the win- position until all the windows and the slid- dow will automatically open again Observe the safety warnings ››› in Opening ing/tilting sunroof* are closed. ››› page 132. If this happens, check why the and closing of the electric windows* on window could not be closed before attempt- page 131. Programming convenience opening in the ing to close it again. ● The roll-back function does not prevent fin- Easy Connect* gers or other parts of the body getting – Select: function button CAR > control but- pinched against the window frame. Risk of ton Vehicle systems* > Vehicle set- accident. Roll-back function tings > Central locking > Open the window by holding button down or The roll-back function reduces the risk of in- else > Front window on/off or else jury when the electric windows close. Convenience opening/closing Roof on/off*. ● If a window is obstructed when closing au- Use the convenience opening/closing func- WARNING tomatically, the window stops at this point tion to easily open/close all the windows and ● and lowers immediately ››› . the sliding/tilting sunroof* from the outside. Take care when closing the sliding/tilting ● Next, check why the window does not close sunroof* and windows. There is a risk of suffering injury. before attempting it again. Convenience open function ● For safety reasons, you should only use the ● If you try within the following 10 seconds – Press and hold button  on the remote remote control open and close functions with- and the window closes again with difficulty control key until all the windows and the in about 2 metres of the vehicle. To avoid in- or there is an obstruction, the automatic clos- sliding/tilting sunroof* have reached the juries, always keep an eye on the windows ing will stop working for 10 seconds. desired position, or

132 Opening and closing

and the sliding/tilting sunroof* when press- – Release the switch and then lift it again for ● Only open or close the panoramic sliding ing the button to close them. The windows 1 second. This will re-enable the automatic sunroof and the sun blind* when nobody is in stop moving as soon as the button is re- function. the way. leased. If you push (or pull) a button to the first ● The panoramic sliding sunroof can be oper- stage, the window will open (or close) until ated for up to about ten minutes after the ignition has been switched off, provided the data Technical you release the button. If you push or lift the One-touch opening and closing* driver door and the front passenger door are button briefly to the second stage, the win- not opened. dow will open (one-touch opening) or close One-touch opening and closing means you (one-touch closing) automatically. If you op- do not have to hold down the button. erate the button while the window is opening CAUTION Advice Buttons ››› Fig. 137 1 , 2 , 3 and 4 have or closing, it stops at this position. Check that when the rear lid is open, it does two positions for opening windows and two not touch loads carried on the roof. When a for closing them. This makes it easier to open roof carrier is fitted, DO NOT open the panoramic roof*. and close windows to the desired position. Panoramic sliding sunroof* One-touch closing Note Opening or closing the panoramic – Pull up the window button briefly up to the sliding sunroof ● Leaves and other loose objects that accu- Operation second position. The window closes fully. mulate on the sun roof rails should be regularly cleaned away either by hand or with a Read the additional information carefully vacuum. One-touch opening ›››  page 16 – Push down the window button briefly up to ● In case of a fault in the operation of the The panoramic sliding sunroof will only work the second position. The window opens panoramic sliding sunroof, the anti-trap func- with the ignition on. It can be opened or tion will not operate correctly. Contact a spe- fully.

closed for a few minutes after the ignition cialised workshop. Emergencies has been switched off, provided the driver Resetting one-touch opening and closing door and the front passenger door are not The automatic open and close function will opened. not work if the battery has been temporarily disconnected. The function can be restored WARNING Safety as follows: Careless or uncontrolled use of the panoram- – Close the window as far as it will go by lift- ic sliding sunroof can cause serious injuries. ing and holding the electric window switch.

133 Operation

Opening and closing the sun blind* Convenience closing of the panoramic ● Check why the panoramic sliding sunroof or the sun blind does not close. 3 Valid for vehicles: with sun blinds sliding sunroof ● Try and close them again. The panoramic sliding sunroof can be ● If the panoramic sliding sunroof or sun opened or closed from outside the vehicle blind is still obstructed, it will stop at the cor- using the vehicle key: responding position. Close it without the an- ● Keep the vehicle unlocking or locking but- ti-trap function. ton pressed. The panoramic sliding sunroof is adjusted or closes. Closing without the roll-back function ● Release the unlock or lock button to stop ● The switch should be in the “closed posi- the function. tion” ›››  page 16 1 . ● Panoramic sliding sunroof: Within five sec- During convenience closing, the windows onds of triggering the anti-trap function, pull Fig. 138 On the interior roof lining: switches and the panoramic sliding sunroof close at for the sun blind. the control all the way back ›››  page 16 the same time. (arrow 5 ) until the panoramic sliding sunroof closes fully. Function Action Note ● Sun blind: Within five seconds of triggering Opening com- The rotary button of the panoramic sliding the anti-trap function, press button pletely (automatic Press button ››› Fig. 138 1 briefly. sunroof remains in the last position selected ››› Fig. 138 2 until the sun blind closes fully. function) if the roof is closed using convenience closing from outside the vehicle, and will have to ● The panoramic sliding sunroof and sun Stop automatic Press button 1 or button 2 be re-positioned the next time you drive. blind close without the anti-trap function. operation briefly. ● If the panoramic sliding sunroof still cannot To set the inter- Press button 1 or button 2 until be closed, visit a specialised workshop. mediate position the correct position is set. Roll-back function of the panoramic Closing complete- sliding sunroof and the sun blind* WARNING ly (automatic Press the button 2 briefly. Closing the panoramic sliding sunroof or sun function) The anti-trap function reduces the risk of in- blind without the anti-trap function can cause jury when opening and closing the panoram- serious injuries. Once the ignition has been switched off, you ic sliding sunroof and sun blind ››› . When can still open or close the sun blind for a few ● Always close the panoramic sliding sunroof it encounters an obstacle while closing, it carefully. minutes provided the driver door and the rolls back and opens again. front passenger door are not opened.

134 Lights and visibility

● Nobody should be in the way of the panor- Lights and visibility WARNING amic sliding sunroof or sun blind, especially If the headlights are set too high and not when they are closed without the anti-trap used correctly, there is a risk of dazzling or function. Lights distracting other road users. This could result ● The anti-trap function does not prevent fin- in a serious accident. gers or other parts of the body getting Side light and dipped beam headlight data Technical ● Always make sure that the headlights are pinched against the window frame and caus- correctly adjusted. ing injury. Read the additional information carefully ›››  page 27 Note Note The driver is personally responsible for the correct use and adjustment of the lights in all The legal requirements regarding the use of Advice The anti-trap function is activated if the win- vehicle lights in each country must be ob- dows and the panoramic sliding sunroof are situations. served. closed from the outside of the vehicle using the ignition key for convenience closing Audible warnings to advise the driver that ››› page 132. the lights have not been switched off If the key is not in the ignition and the driver Daytime running lights door is open, an audible warning signal is Operation heard in the following cases: this is a remind- The daytime running lights consist of individ- er to turn off the lights. ual lights, integrated in the front headlights. With the daylight driving lights on, only these ● When the parking light is on ››› page 136. lights switch on ››› . ● When the light switch is in position  or The daytime running lights switch on every . time the ignition is switched on, if the switch

is in positions  or , according to the level Emergencies WARNING of exterior lighting. The side lights or daytime running lights are  not bright enough to illuminate the road When the light switch is in position , a ahead and to ensure that other road users are light sensor automatically switches dipped able to see you. beam on and off (including the control and instrument lighting) or the daytime running Safety ● Always use your dipped beam head lights if it is raining or if visibility is poor. lights depending on the level of exterior lighting. »

135 Operation

WARNING In vehicles that do not have the correspond- ● If a trailer turn signal malfunctions, the ing menu, this function can be deactivated in control lamp will stop flashing (trailer turn ● Never drive with daytime lights if the road a specialised workshop. signals) and the vehicle turn signal will flash is not well lit due to weather or lighting con- at double speed. ditions. Daytime lights do not provide WARNING enough light to illuminate the road properly ● The main beam headlights can only be or be seen by other road users. Improper or lack of use of the turn signals, or switched on if the dipped beam headlights are already on. ● The rear lights do not come on with the forgetting to deactivate them can confuse daytime driving light. A vehicle which does other road users. This could result in a seri- ● In cold or damp weather conditions, the not have the rear lights on may not be visible ous accident. headlights, tail lights and turn signals may to other drivers in the darkness, in the case ● Always give warning when you are going to mist up inside temporarily. This is normal and of heavy rain or in conditions of poor visibili- change lane, overtake or when turning, acti- in no way effects the useful life of the vehicle ty. vating the turn signal in good time. lighting system. ● As soon as you have finished changing lane, overtaking or turning, switch the turn Turn signal and main beam lever signal off. Automatic dipped beam control *

Read the additional information carefully WARNING The automatic dipped beam control is merely ›››  page 28 Incorrect use of the headlights may cause ac- intended as an aid and is not able to recog- Push the lever all the way down to turn off cidents and serious injury, as the main beam nise all driving situations. the corresponding function. may distract or dazzle other drivers. When the light switch is in position , the vehicle lights and the instrument panel and Convenience turn signals Note switch lighting switch on and off automatically in the following situations in Daytime For the convenience turn signals, move the ● If the convenience turn signals are operat- ››› lever as far as possible upwards or down- ing (three flashes) and the other convenience running lights on page 136: wards and release the lever. The turn signal turn signals are switched on, the active part will flash three times. stops flashing and only flashes once in the Automatic switching Automatic switching new part selected. on off The convenience turn signals are activated and deactivated in the Easy Connect system ● The turn signal only works when the igni- The photo sensor detects When adequate lighting is via the  button and the SETTINGS function tion is switched on. The hazard warning darkness, for example, detected. button ››› page 114. lights also work when the ignition is switch- when driving through a ed off. tunnel.

136 Lights and visibility

Automatic switching Automatic switching beam when passing through a town, for ex- ● On tight bends and steep slopes (bumps) on off ample. and when oncoming vehicles are partially ob- scured. The rain sensor detects When the windscreen wip- Switching the main beam assist on and off ● When the drivers of other oncoming vehi- rain and activates the ers have been inactive for windscreen wipers. a few minutes. cles (such as a truck) can see over a guard

Func- Use data Technical rail in the centre of the road. tion WARNING ● If the camera is damaged or the power sup- – Switch the ignition on and turn the light ply is cut off. If the road is not well lit and other road users switch to position . ● In fog, snow and heavy rain. cannot see the vehicle well enough or at all, Activate: – From the base position, move the main

accidents may occur. beam and turn signal lever forwards ● With dust and sand turbulence. Advice  ››› page 136. When the warning lamp  is ● The automatic dipped beam control () ● With loose gravel in the field of vision of only switches on the dipped beam when displayed on the instrument panel display, the main beam assist is switched on. the camera. there are no changes in brightness, and not, ● When the field of vision of the camera is for example when it is foggy. – Switch off the ignition. – OR: turn the light switch to a different po- misted up, dirty or covered by stickers, snow, sition to  ››› page 135. ice, etc. To switch Main beam assist* – OR: with main beam on, move the main Operation system beam and turn signal lever backwards. WARNING off: – OR: move the main beam and turn the The convenience features of the main beam Main beam assist (Light Assist) signal lever forwards to manually switch assist should not encourage the taking of The main beam assist acts within the limits the main beam on. The main beam assist will then be deactivated. risks. The system is not a replacement for of the system and depending on environmen- driver concentration. tal and traffic conditions. Once switched on, ● You are always in control of the main beam the system is activated as of a speed of Malfunctions

and adapting it to the light, visibility and traf- Emergencies about 60 km/h (37 mph) and is deactivated The following conditions may prevent the fic conditions. below about 30 km/h (18 mph) ››› . main beam headlight control from turning off ● It is possible that the main beam headlight When the system is activated and the camera the headlights in time or from turning off al- control does not recognise all driving situa- detects other vehicles that may be dazzled, together: tions and is limited under certain circumstan- the main beam is automatically switched off. ces. ● In poorly lit towns with highly reflective Safety Otherwise, the main beam is automatically ● signs. When the field of vision of the camera is switched on. dirty, covered or damaged, operation of the ● Other insufficiently lit road users (such as main beam control may be affected. This also The main beam assist generally detects illu- pedestrians or cyclists). applies when changes are made to the » minated areas and deactivates the main 137 Operation

vehicle lighting system, for example, if addi- Fog lights Note tional headlights are installed. The rear fog light can dazzle drivers behind you. You should use the rear fog light only CAUTION when visibility is very poor. For this reason, if you exceed approximately 60 km/h (38 mph), To avoid affecting the operation of the sys- the instrument panel will display the follow- tem, take the following points into considera- ing warming: Switch off the fog tion: light! ● Clean the field of vision of the camera regularly and make sure it is free of snow and ice. ● Do not cover the field of vision of the cam- Cornering lights*1) era. ● Check that the windscreen is not damaged Fig. 139 Dash panel: light control. When turning slowly or on very tight bends, in the area of the field of vision of the camera. the cornering lights are activated automati- The warning lamps  or  also show, on the cally. The cornering lights may be integrated light switch or instrument panel, when the Note in the fog lights and are switched on only at fog lights are on. Main beam and headlight flasher can be speeds of less than 40 km/h (25 mph). turned on and off manually at any time with ● Switching on front fog lights* : pull the When reverse gear is engaged, the cornering the turn signal and main beam lever light switch to the first point ››› Fig. 139 1 , lights on both sides of the vehicle switch on, ››› page 136. from positions ,  or . in order to better illuminate the area for park- ● Switching on the rear fog light : coming. pletely pull the light switch 2 from position ,  or . ● To switch off the fog lights, press the light Function “Coming home” switch or turn it to position . This function may be connected/disconnected through the radio menu. The “Coming Home” and/or “Leaving Home” delay time may also be set (default: 30 sec).

1) This function is not available on vehicles equipped with full-LED headlights and bulb fog lights. 138 Lights and visibility

Vehicle with In the “Coming Home” function, the day- ● When the car door is opened, the “Coming Vehicle with In the “Leaving Home” function, the dip- halogen time running lights (DRL), the rear side Home” lighting comes on. The headlights are full-LED ped beams, the daytime running lights headlights lights and the licence plate lights are turned off 60 seconds after the vehicle door headlights (DRL), the rear side lights and the li- turned on. is opened. cence plate lights are switched on. Vehicle with In the “Coming Home” function, the dip- full-LED ped beams and the daytime running Deactivation Activation data Technical headlights lights (DRL), the rear side lights and the ● If no door has been closed, they go out au- ● When the vehicle is unlocked using the re- licence plate lights are switched on. tomatically after 60 seconds. mote control. ● After the last door has been closed, the ● Automatic* activation of “Coming Home” The “Leaving Home” function is only activa- headlights will be switched off after the ted when the rotary light switch is in position Advice For vehicles with a light and rain sensor (rota- “Coming Home” delay (as established in the  and the light sensor detects darkness. ry light switch in position ). radio menu) has elapsed. ● Switch off the engine and remove the key ● On turning the light switch to position  Deactivation from the ignition with the rotary light switch ›››  page 27. ● When the “Leaving Home” delay period in position  ›››  page 27. ● When the ignition is switched on (when ends (default: 30 sec). ● The automatic “Coming Home” function is starting the engine). ● When the vehicle is locked using the re- only active when the light sensor detects mote control. Operation darkness. ● When the light control is switched into a ● When the car door is opened, the “Coming Function “Leaving Home” position other than . Home” lighting comes on. The “Leaving Home” function is only availa- ● With the ignition is switched on. ble for vehicles with a light and rain sensor Manual “Coming Home” activation (rotary light switch in position ).

For vehicles with a light and rain sensor (rota- Emergencies ry light switch without position ). This function may be connected/disconnected through the radio menu. The “Leaving ● Switch off the engine and remove the key Home” function switch-off delay may also be from the ignition. set (default: 30 sec). ● Activate the headlight flashers for approxi- Safety mately 1 second. Vehicle with In the “Leaving Home” function, the day- halogen time running lights (DRL), the rear side ● Activated for any position of the rotary light headlights lights and the licence plate lights are switch. switched on.

139 Operation

Hazard warning lights  6. Use the warning triangle to draw the atten- into contact with highly inflammable materi- tion of other road users to your vehicle. als, for example dry grass or spilt petrol. This 7. Always take the vehicle key with you when could start a fire. you leave the vehicle. Note All turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are switched on. ● The battery will run down if the hazard The two turn signal turn signal lamps   warning lights are left on for a long time, even if the ignition is switched off. and the turn signal lamp in the switch  will flash at the same time. The simultaneous ● The use of the hazard warning lights de- hazard warning lights also work when the ig- scribed here is subject to the relevant statu- nition is switched off. tory requirements. Fig. 140 Dash panel: switch for hazard warning lights. Emergency braking warning  If the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu- Parking lights Read the additional information carefully ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50  page 28 When the parking light is switched on, (right ››› mph), the brake light flashes several times or left turn signal), the front side light and The hazard warning lights are used to draw per second to warn the vehicles driving be- the rear light on the corresponding side of the attention of other road users to your vehi- hind. If you continue braking, the hazard the vehicle stay lit. The parking lights can on- cle in emergencies. warning lights will come on automatically ly be activated with the ignition switched off when the vehicle comes to a standstill. They If your vehicle breaks down: and the turn signal and main beam lever in switch off automatically when the vehicle the central position, before being triggered. 1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from starts to move again. moving traffic. WARNING 2. Press the button to switch on the hazard Parking light on both sides warning lights ››› . ● The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Always use the hazard 3. Switch the ignition off. With the ignition switched off and the light warning lights and a warning triangle to draw switch in position , when locking the vehi- 4. Apply the handbrake. the attention of other road users to your stacle from the outside, the parking lights on tionary vehicle. 5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear; both sides of the vehicle light up. In doing ● Due to the high temperatures that the cata- so, only the side lights of both headlights for an automatic gearbox, move the gear lytic converter can reach, never park in an lever to P. light up, and additionally the tail lights will area where the catalytic converter could come do so partially. 140 Lights and visibility

Motorway light* The light distribution that the halogen and The headlights can only be adjusted when full-LED headlights of the SEAT Leon range the dipped beam is switched on. The motorway light is available on vehicles have allows the specific “tourist light” values To reset, turn switch ››› Fig. 141: equipped with full-LED lights. to be met without the need for stickers or changes in the settings. The function is connected/disconnected via Value Vehicle load statusa) the corresponding Easy Connect system data Technical Note Two front occupants, luggage compart- menu. – “Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. If ment empty ● Activation: when going above 110 km/h you are planning a long stay in a country that All seats occupied, luggage compartment 1 (68 mph) for more than 30 seconds, the dip- drives on the other side, you should take the empty ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv- vehicle to an Authorised Technical Service to Advice er's visibility distance. change the headlights. All seats occupied, luggage compartment 2 full. With trailer and minimum drawbar ● Deactivation: when reducing the speed of load. the car below 100 km/h (62 mph), the dip- Driver only, luggage compartment full With ped beam returns to its normal position. Headlight range control 3 trailer and maximum drawbar load.

a) If the vehicle load does not correspond to those shown in the Driving abroad table, it is possible to select intermediary positions. Operation

The light beam of the dipped beam lights is OR: asymmetric: the side of the road on which Using the radio menu (see Easy Connect you are driving is lit more intensely. > Adjusting Lights > Headlamp When a car that is manufactured in a country height adjustment ›››  page 30).

that drives on the right travels to a country Emergencies Two front occupants, luggage compart- that drives on the left (or vice versa), it is nor- Setting 0 ment empty mally necessary to cover part of the headlight Fig. 141 Next to the steering wheel: Head- bulbs with stickers or to change the adjust- All seats occupied, luggage compart- light range control Setting 1 ment of the headlights to avoid dazzling oth- ment empty er drivers. The lights range control adapts according to All seats occupied, luggage compart- Safety In such cases, the regulations specify certain the value of the headlight beam and the ve- Setting 2 ment full. With trailer and minimum light values that must be complied with for hicle load status. This offers the driver opti- drawbar load. » designated points of the light distribution. mum visibility and the headlights do not daz- This is known as “Tourist light”. zle oncoming drivers ››› . 141 Operation

Driver only, luggage compartment full With the ignition on and without light activa- on when the doors are opened and will de- Setting 3 Driving with trailer and minimum draw- tion, the instrument panel lighting remains crease in intensity while driving. The intensity bar load. activated in daytime light conditions. The of these lights can be adjusted using the ra- lighting is reduced as the exterior light di- dio menu (see Easy Connect > Light Dynamic headlight range control minishes. In some cases, e.g. when driving Settings > Interior lighting through a tunnel without the  function ›››  page 30). The control is not mounted in vehicles with active, the instrument panel lighting may dynamic headlight range control. The head- even switch off. The objective of this function Ambient light* light range is automatically adjusted accord- is to provide the driver with a visual indica- ing to the vehicle load status when they are The ambient lighting in the door panels may tion that he or she should activate the dip- switched on. change colour. The intensity of these lights ped beam. can be adjusted using the radio menu (see WARNING Easy Connect > Light Settings > Interior lighting ›››  page 30). Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean that Interior and reading lights1) the headlights dazzle and distract other driv- Note ers. This could result in a serious accident. Read the additional information carefully ● Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load ›››  page 29 The reading lights switch off when the vehi- status so that it does not blind other drivers. cle is locked using a key or after several minutes if the key is removed from the ignition. Glove compartment and luggage compart- This prevents the battery from discharging. ment lighting* Lighting of the instrument panel, When opening and closing the glove com- screens and controls partment on the front passenger side and the rear lid, the respective light will automatically Depending on the model, the lighting of the switch on and off. instrument panel and controls can be adjusted in the Easy Connect system, using the  Footwell lighting* button and the SETTINGS function button ›››  page 30. The lights in the footwell area below the dash (driver and front passenger sides) will switch

1) Depending on the level of equipment fitted in the vehicle, LEDs can be used for the following interior lights: front courtesy light, rear courtesy light, footwell light, sun blind and glove compartment light. 142 Lights and visibility

Visibility The lamp goes out when the vanity mirror Rear window sun blind* cover is closed or the sun visor is pushed – Pull out the visor and hook it into the hooks Sun visors back up. in the centre of the top of the door frame ››› Fig. 143. WARNING

Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility. data Technical ● Always store sun blinds and visors in their housing when not in use. Windscreen wiper and window wiper systems

Note Advice Window wiper lever The light above the sun visor automatically switches off after a few minutes in certain Read the additional information carefully conditions. This prevents the battery from ›››  page 29 discharging. Fig. 142 Sun visor CAUTION Options for adjusting driver and front pas- If the ignition is switched off with the wind- Operation senger sun visors: Sun blind* screen wipers active, they complete their ● Lower the sun visor towards the wind- 3 Applies to the model: LEON ST wipe before returning to the rest position. screen. Ice, snow and other obstacles on the windscreen may damage the wiper and the wind- ● The sun visor can be pulled out of its screen wiper motor. mounting and turned towards the door ● If necessary, remove snow and ice from the ››› Fig. 142 1 . windscreen wipers before starting your jour- ● Swing the sun visor towards the door, lon- ney. Emergencies gitudinally backwards. ● Carefully lift the frozen windscreen wipers from the glass. SEAT recommends a de-icer Vanity mirror light spray for this operation. There may be a vanity mirror, with a cover, on ● Do not switch on the windscreen wipers if Safety the rear of the sun visor. When the cover is the windscreen is dry. Cleaning with the opened 2 a light comes on. Fig. 143 Rear window: sun blind. windscreen wipers while dry can cause damage. »

143 Operation

● In icy conditions, always check that the Windscreen wiper performance in different sit- Note wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be- uations The wiper will try to wipe away any obstacles fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it may that are on the windscreen. The wiper will help to leave the vehicle parked with the wip- Intervals between wipes depend on the vehicle's speed. The high- stop moving if the obstacle blocks its path. ers in service position ›››  page 67. For the interval wipe er the vehicle speed the shorter Remove the obstacle and switch the wiper the intervals. back on again. Note ● The windscreen and window wipers only Heated windscreen washer jets function when the ignition is switched on and The heating only thaws the frozen jets, it the bonnet or rear lid, respectively, are closed. does not thaw the water in the washer hoses. When the ignition is switched on the heated ● The interval wipe speed varies according to windscreen washer jets automatically adjust the vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle is the heat depending on the ambient tempera- moving, the more often the windscreen is cleaned. ture. ● The rear wiper is automatically switched on Headlight wash/wipe system when the windscreen wiper is on and the car is in reverse gear. The headlight washers/wipers clean the headlight lenses. After the ignition is switched on, the first and Windscreen wiper functions every fifth time the windscreen washer is switched on, the headlights are also washed. Windscreen wiper performance in different sit- Therefore, the windscreen wiper lever should uations be pulled towards the steering wheel when the dipped beam or main beam are on. Any The activated position provision- If the vehicle is at a incrusted dirt (such as insects) should be ally changes to the previous posi- standstill cleaned regularly (e.g. when refuelling). tion. To ensure the headlight washers work cor- The air conditioner comes on for rectly in winter, any snow which has got into approximately 30 seconds in air During automatic recirculation mode to prevent the the bumper jet supports should be cleaned wipe smell of the windscreen washer away. If necessary, remove snow with an anti- fluid entering the inside the vehi- icing spray. cle. 144 Lights and visibility

Rain sensor* Move the lever to the required position reduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor or ››› Fig. 144: make it react more slowly, later or not at all. ● Cracked windscreen: the impact of a stone 0 Rain sensor off. will trigger a single wipe cycle with the rain 1 Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces- sensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the sary. reduction in the sensitive surface area and data Technical A Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor adapts accordingly. The behaviour of the sen- – Set control to the right: highly sensi- sor will vary with the size of the damage tive. caused by the stone.

– Advice Set control to the left: less sensitive. WARNING When the ignition is switched off and then The rain sensor may not detect enough rain Fig. 144 Windscreen wiper lever: adjusting back on, the rain sensor stays on and starts to switch on the wipers. the rain sensor A operating again when the windscreen wipers ● If necessary, switch on the wipers manually are in position 1 and the vehicle is travel- when water on the windscreen obstructs visi- ling at more than 16 km/h (10 mph). bility. Operation Rain sensor modified behaviour Note Possible causes of faults and mistaken read- ● Clean the sensitive surface of the rain sen- ings on the sensitive surface ››› Fig. 145 of sor regularly and check the blades for dam- the rain sensor include: age ››› Fig. 145 (arrow). ● Damaged blades: a film of water on the ● To remove wax and coatings, we recom- damaged blades may lengthen the activation mend a window cleaner containing alcohol. Emergencies time, reduce the washing intervals or result Fig. 145 Rain sensor sensitive surface in a fast and continuous wipe. ● Insects: insects on the sensor may trigger The rain sensor controls the frequency of the Mirror the windscreen wiper. windscreen wiper intervals, depending on the amount of rain ››› . The sensitivity of the ● Salt on roads: in winter, salt spread in the Anti-dazzle rear view mirror Safety rain sensor can be adjusted manually. Man- roads may cause an extra long wipe when the ual wipe ››› page 143. windscreen is almost dry. Your vehicle is fitted with an interior rear vi- ● Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotus sion mirror with a manual or automatic* con- effect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may trol for anti-dazzle position. » 145 Operation

Interior rear vision mirror with manual set- automatic adjustment for anti-dazzle posi- ● Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. The ting for anti-dazzle position tion. right exterior mirror will be adjusted at the ● Position the small lever of the lower edge same time (synchronised). of the mirror to face towards the rear. ● If necessary the right exterior mirror adjust- Adjusting the exterior rear view mir- ment may need correcting. turn the control to 1) WARNING rors position R . In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle ● In the Easy Connect system the exterior mir- rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte fluid rors can be adjusted using the  button may leak. This could cause irritation to the and the SETTINGS function button. skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If you come into contact with this liquid, it must be Tilt function for front passenger exterior mir- rinsed with large quantities of water. If neces- ror* sary, get medial help. When parking backwards, and in order to be able to see the kerb, the passenger side mir- CAUTION ror can be automatically tilted towards the In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle passenger to provide a better view of the rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte fluid kerb. The control must be in the position R1) may leak. This liquid attacks plastic surfaces. Fig. 146 Driver door: control for the exterior for this feature to be operational. Clean it with a wet sponge as soon as possi- mirror. ble. The mirror returns to its original position as Read the additional information carefully soon as you drive forward at over 15 km/h ›››  page 18 (9 mph) or switch off the ignition. It also re- Note turns to its original position if the position of ● If the light incident in the interior rear vi- Synchronized regulation of the exterior mir- the control is adjusted. sion mirror is obstructed (e.g. with the sun rors blind*), the anti-dazzle rear vision mirror with ● Storing the rear view mirror settings for the automatic setting will not operate perfectly. In the Settings - Convenience menu, select whether or not the exterior mirrors tilt function ● When the interior lights are on or reverse should move in synchronisation. ● Switch the ignition on. gear engaged, the mirrors do not darken with ● Turn the knob to position L1).

1) Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is symmetrical. 146 Seats and head restraints

● Access the Easy Connect system, Menu WARNING Seats and head restraints CAR , function “Rear view mirrors and windscreen wipers” and select “lower while re- Convex or wide-angle* exterior mirrors give a larger field of vision. However, they make ob- versing” ››› page 114. Adjusting the seats and headr- jects look smaller and further away than they ● Select the R1) position on the control. really are. If you use these mirrors to esti- ests Technical data Technical ● Select reverse gear. mate the distance to vehicles behind you when changing lane, you could misjudge the ● Manual adjustment of seats Adjust the front passenger exterior mirror distance. Risk of accident! so that you can see, for example, the kerb Read the additional information carefully area well. CAUTION ›››  page 17 ● Release the reverse gear. Advice ● If one of the mirror housings is knocked out ● WARNING The adjusted position for the rear view mir- of position (e.g. when parking), the mirrors ror is stored. must first be fully retracted with the electric The safe driving chapter contains important control. Do not readjust the mirror housing by information, tips, suggestions and warnings Fold in the exterior mirrors after parking hand, as this will interfere with the mirror ad- that you should read and observe for your (convenience function)* juster function. own safety and the safety of your passengers ››› page 69. The Easy Connect system, Menu CAR , func- ● Before washing the vehicle in an automatic Operation tion “Rear view mirrors and windscreen wip- car wash, please make sure to retract the ex- ers” can be used to have the exterior mirrors terior mirrors to prevent them from being WARNING damaged. Electrically retractable exterior fold in when the vehicle is parked ● Adjust the front seats only when the vehi- mirrors must not be folded in or out by hand. ››› page 114. cle is stationary. Failure to follow this instruc- Always use the electrical power control. When the vehicle is locked with the remote tion could result in an accident. control, by pressing for more than approxi- ● Be careful when adjusting the seat height. Note mately 1 second the exterior mirrors are fol- Careless or uncontrolled adjustment can Emergencies ded in automatically. When the vehicle is If the electrical adjustment should fail to op- cause injuries. opened with the remote control, the exterior erate, both of the mirrors can be adjusted by ● The front seat backrests must not be re- mirrors are deployed automatically. hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mir- clined for driving. Otherwise, seat belts and ror glass. the airbag system might not protect as they should, with the subsequent danger of injury. Safety

1) Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is symmetrical. 147 Operation

Electric driver's seat adjustment* Adjusting the front head restraints Adjusting the head restraints – To set the head restraint higher, grasp the Read the additional information carefully Read the additional information carefully sides with both hands and move it up- ›››  page 17 ›››  page 17 wards, until you see it engage. Adjust the head restraint ›››  page 17 so WARNING – To set the head restraint lower down, press that as far as possible the top of the head re- the 1 ››› Fig. 147 button and move it ● If the electric front seats are used negli- straint is level with the top of your head. downwards. gently or without paying due attention, it can When this is not possible, try to get as close cause serious injury. as possible to this position. Removing the head restraint ● The front seats can also be electrically adjusted when the ignition is switched off. Nev- To remove the head restraint, the correspond- er leave a child or any other person who may Adjusting the rear head restraints ing backrest must be partially folded forward. need help in the vehicle. – Unlock the backrest ››› page 151. ● In the event of an emergency, electrical adjustment can be stopped by pressing any – Move the head restraint upwards until it ar- control. rives to the top. – Press button 1 ››› Fig. 147, while simulta- CAUTION neously pressing on the security hole 2 To avoid damaging the electrical components ››› Fig. 147 with a flat screwdriver a maxi- of the front seats, please refrain from kneel- mum of 5 mm wide, and remove the head ing on the seat or applying sharp pressure at restraint. a single point to the seat cushion and back- – Move the backrest until it engages properly rest. ››› . Fig. 147 Rear centre head restraint: release Note point. Fitting the head restraint ● It may not be possible to electrically adjust When transporting people in the back seat, To mount the external head restraints, the the seat if the vehicle battery is very low. place the head restraints of the occupied corresponding backrest must be partially fol- ● If the engine is started while the seats are seats at a minimum of the next socket up ded forward. being electrically adjusted, the adjustment ››› . – Unlock the backrest . will stop. ››› page 151 – Insert the head restraint bars into the guides until they perceptibly engage. It

148 Seats and head restraints

should not be possible to remove the head Seat heating Adjusting the heating output restraint from the backrest. Press the button  or  repeatedly until the – Move the backrest until it engages properly desired intensity level is reached. ››› . Deactivating Technical data Technical WARNING Press the button  or  until all warning ● Please observe the general notes lamps switch off. ››› page 73. ● Remove the rear head restraints only when WARNING

it is necessary for the placement of a child People who, because of medications, paraly- Advice seat ››› page 86. After removing a child seat, sis or chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes) cannot remount the head restraint immediately. Fig. 148 In the centre console: front seats perceive pain or temperature, or have a limi- Travelling with the head restraints removed heating switch ted perception thereof, may suffer burns to or improperly adjusted increases the risk of the back, buttocks or legs when using seat severe injuries. The seat cushions can be heated electrically heating, an occurrence that may entail a very lengthy recovery period or from which it may when the ignition is switched on. The back- not be possible to recover fully. Seek medical

rest is also heated in some versions. Operation advice if you have doubts regarding your Seat functions The seat heating should not be engaged in health. any of the following conditions: ● People with limited pain and temperature Introduction thresholds must never use seat heating. ● The seat is unoccupied. ● WARNING The seat has a covering. WARNING ● There is a child seat installed in the seat. Emergencies Inappropriate use of the seat functions can If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can ad- cause severe injuries. ● The seat cushion is wet or damp. versely affect the operation of the seat heat- ● Assume the proper sitting position before ● The indoor or outdoor temperature is great- ing, increasing the risk of burns. your trip and remain in it throughout. This al- er than 25°C (77°F). ● Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior to so applies to the other occupants. using the seat heater. ● Always keep hands, fingers, feet and other Activate ● Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is Safety parts of the body away from the operating ra- wet or damp. dius and the adjustment of seats. Press the button  or . Seat heating is switched on fully. ● Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp on the seat. »

149 Operation

● Do not spill liquid on the seat. The armrest can be moved backwards and Folding down and raising the rear seat forwards. backrest CAUTION 3 Applies to the model: LEON/LEON SC ● To avoid damaging the heating elements of Folding down the passenger seat the seat heaters, please do not kneel on the backrest* seat or apply sharp pressure to a single point on the seat cushion or backrest. 3 Applies to the model: LEON / LEON ST ● Liquids, sharps objects and insulating materials (e.g. covers or child seats) can damage the seat heating. ● In the event of smells, switch off the seat heating immediately and have it inspected by a specialised workshop.

Fig. 150 Clip to support the seat belt. For the sake of the environment The seat heating should remain on only when needed. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste. Fig. 149 Front passenger seat: lever for folding down the backrest.

Front centre armrest The front passenger seat can be folded down to increase the storage space. The centre armrest can be adjusted to various ● Pull lever 1 Fig. 149 and push the seat levels. ››› backrest 2 until the backrest is horizontal.

Adjusting the centre armrest Fig. 151 Backrest release lever. WARNING – To adjust the tilt, lift the armrest from the When the front passenger seat is folded starting position so that it is engaged. The backrests can be folded forward individu- down it cannot be occupied. ally or together. – To return the armrest to the starting position, remove the armrest from the upper fixed position and lower it.

150 Seats and head restraints

Folding the backrest forwards compartment will not fly forward through the – Place the side seat belts in the trim clip interior during sudden braking. ››› Fig. 150. – Slide the head restraint(s) downwards CAUTION

››› page 148. ● With the backrest inclined there is a danger data Technical of damaging the rear head restraints when – Press the release lever ››› Fig. 151 1 in the adjusting the front seats backwards. direction of the arrow. ● When folding the backrest forwards, make – Fold the backrest forwards. sure to place the side seat belts in the trim

clip to prevent them from being damaged by Advice Fig. 153 In the luggage compartment: levers Converting the table to a seat becoming trapped in the backrest lock. for remote release of the left part 1 and right – Raise the backrest until it engages in its part 2 of the rear seat backrest. upright position ››› . The red marking on the tab ››› Fig. 151 2 should no longer be Folding down and lifting the rear seat The rear seat backrest is split and each part visible when the backrest is properly se- backrest be lowered separately to extend the luggage cured. compartment. 3 Applies to the model: LEON ST When the rear seat backrest is lowered no- Operation WARNING body else can travel in the corresponding The safe driving chapter contains important seats (not even a child). information, tips, suggestions and warnings that you should read and observe for your Lowering the rear seat backrest with the un- own safety and the safety of your passengers lock button ››› page 69.

● Lower the head restraint properly. Emergencies

WARNING ● Push the unlock button ››› Fig. 152 1 forwards and at the same time lift the backrest. ● Make sure that the rear backrest is securely locked in position so that the seat belt can ● The rear seat backrest is not engaged when provide proper protection on the centre rear Fig. 152 On the rear seat backrest: release the red marking of the button 2 is visible. seat. catch 1 ; red mark 2 . Safety ● The rear backrest must always be securely Lowering the rear seat backrest with the re- latched so that objects stored in the luggage mote release lever ● Lower the head restraint properly. » 151 Operation

● Open the rear lid. must be properly engaged. This is particular- Transport and practical ● Pull the remote release lever of the left part ly important in the case of the centre rear ››› Fig. 153 1 or right part 2 of the backrest seat. If someone is seated in a seat whose equipment in the direction of the arrow. The released backrest is not properly engaged they will fly part of the rear seat backrest is folded auto- forward, along with the backrest, during an Storage compartments matically down and forwards. accident or a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre. ● If this occurs, close the rear lid. Storage areas under the front seats* ● A red signal on the button 2 warns that The rear seat backrest is not engaged when the backrest is not engaged. Always check that the red marking is not visible when the the red marking of the button ››› Fig. 152 2 backrest is in the upright position. is visible. ● When the rear seat backrest is lowered or is Folding up the rear seat backrest not properly engaged nobody else can travel in the corresponding seats (not even a child). ● Lift the backrest and press it firmly into the lock until it engages ››› . CAUTION ● It should not be possible to see the red Serious damage can be caused to the vehicle mark of the unlock button 2 . and other objects if the rear seat backrest is ● The backrest must be properly engaged. lowered or lifted without due care and atten- Fig. 154 Storage compartment under the tion. front seats. WARNING ● Before lowering the rear seat backrest, al- Serious injuries can be caused if the rear seat ways adjust the front seats so that neither There is a storage compartment with a cover backrest is lowered or lifted without due care the head restraints nor the cushions of the under each front seat. and attention. rear backrest can hit them. The drawer* is opened by pulling on the han- ● Never lower or lift the rear seat backrest dle of the cover ››› Fig. 154. while driving. ● Do no trap or damage the seat belt when To close the drawer, press the cover until it raising the rear seat backrest. locks into position. ● When lowering or lifting the rear seat backrest, keep your hands, fingers, feet and other WARNING body parts out of its path. ● The drawers will hold a maximum weight of ● For the rear seat belts to offer the necessa- 1.5 kg. ry protection all the parts of the rear backrest 152 Transport and practical equipment

● Do not drive with the drawer cover open. ● Do not put hot drinks in the drink holders. WARNING There is an injury risk for passengers if the During normal or sudden driving manoeuvres, ● Do not place any hot drinks in the drink cargo is released in case of sudden braking or sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink holder while the vehicle is moving. Hot drinks an accident. could be spilled. Danger of scalding. could spill and cause burns, which may cause an accident. Technical data Technical CAUTION ● Do not use hard china cups or glasses. Folding table* When driving, do not leave open cans in the These could cause injury in the event of an 3 Applies to the model: LEON ST cup holders. The drink might be spilt on brak- accident. ing, for example, and could damage the vehicle.

CAUTION Advice You should avoid putting open drinks con- tainers in the drink holders. The drinks could Drink holders otherwise spill over and cause damage to e.g. the electrical equipment or the seat covers.

Glove compartment Operation

Fig. 155 Left-hand front seat: folding table.

– To open the tray, open it up in the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 155. Emergencies WARNING Fig. 156 Centre console: front drink holders. ● The folding trays may not be folded down whilst the vehicle is in motion and anyone is Front drink holders seated on the second row of seats. There is a – risk of injury during a sudden braking ma- Place drinks in the holder ››› Fig. 156. noeuvre! The tray must therefore be closed Placement of two drinks is possible. There Fig. 157 Glove compartment » Safety and properly secured whilst the vehicle is in is also the possibility of placing larger plas- motion. tic bottles in the trims of the doors.

153 Operation

Opening/closing load of the compartment should not exceed Power sockets – To open the glove compartment, pull the 0.2 kg. handle in the direction of the arrow. ● Coat hooks in the door frames ››› . – To close the glove compartment, move the ● Other storage compartments are found in cover upwards until it engages. the rear seat, to the left and the right of the seats. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the CD player is located in the glove compartment. WARNING Separate operating instructions are enclosed ● Please make sure that any items of clothing for this equipment in the corresponding In- hanging from the coat hooks do not obstruct struction Manual. your view to the rear. ● The coat hooks should only be used for WARNING Fig. 158 Centre console: front/rear 12-volt lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy power socket. The cover of the glove compartment should or sharp objects in the pockets. always be closed while driving. Failure to fol- ● Do not use clothes hangers to hang up the low this instruction could result in an acci- clothing, as this could interfere with the func- dent. tion of the head-protection airbags.

Other storage compartments

You will find more object holders, compartments and supports in other parts of the vehicle:

● In the top of the glove compartment in ve- Fig. 159 Detailed view of the side trim in the hicles that do not have a CD reader. The load luggage compartment: 12-volt power socket of the compartment should not exceed (applies only to the LEON ST model). 1.2 kg. In the centre console ● In the centre console under the centre armrest*. – Remove the connector located in the centre console of the power socket ››› Fig. 158. ● In the driver side panel there is a remova- ble box for access to fuses and relays. The 154 Transport and practical equipment

– Insert the plug of the electrical appliance Storing objects if a loose object is struck by an inflating air- into the power socket. bag. If this happens, objects may shoot out- Loading the luggage compartment ward like a missile. Risk of fatal injury. In the luggage compartment (applies only to ● Please note that the centre of gravity may the LEON ST model) All luggage and other loose objects must be shift when transporting heavy objects; this – Lift the power socket cover ››› Fig. 159. safely secured in the luggage compartment. may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac- data Technical Unsecured objects which shift back and forth cident. Therefore, it is essential to adjust – Insert the plug of the electrical appliance could impair the driving safety or driving your speed and driving style accordingly, to into the power socket. characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the avoid accidents. ● Electrical equipment can be connected to the centre of gravity. Never exceed the allowed axle weights or allowed maximum weight. If said weights are Advice 12 volt power socket. The appliances connec- – Distribute the load evenly in the luggage exceeded, the driving characteristics of the ted to each power socket must not exceed a compartment. vehicle may change, leading to accidents, in- power rating of 120 Watt. – Place heavy objects as far forward as possi- juries and damage to the vehicle. ● Never leave your vehicle unattended, espe- WARNING ble in the luggage compartment. cially when the rear lid is open. Children The power socket works only when the igni- – Place the heavy objects first. could climb into the luggage compartment, tion is on. Improper use may cause serious – Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening closing the door behind them; they will be Operation injury or even fire. Children should therefore rings ››› page 161. trapped and run the risk of death. not be left in the vehicle unattended if the ● Never allow children to play in or around button is also left behind. Otherwise there is WARNING the vehicle. Close and lock all the doors and a possibility that they may be injured. rear lid when you leave the vehicle. Before ● Loose luggage and other objects in the lug- you lock the vehicle, make sure that there are gage compartment could cause serious inju- CAUTION no adults or children in the vehicle. ries. Emergencies Always use the correct type of plugs to avoid ● Always stow objects in the luggage com- Note damaging the sockets. partment and secure them on the fastening rings. ● Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce Note ● Use suitable straps to secure heavy ob- fogging of the windows. Used air escapes through ventilation slits in the side trim of The use of electrical appliances with the en- jects.

the luggage compartment. Ensure that the Safety gine switched off will cause a battery dis- ● During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, ventilation slots are never covered. charge. loose objects can be thrown forward, injuring vehicle occupants or passers-by. This in- ● Straps for securing the load to the fasten- creased risk of injury will be further increased ing rings are commercially available.

155 Operation

Luggage compartment cover Removing Retractable rear shelf 3 Applies to the model: LEON/LEON SC ● Detach the cord loops ››› Fig. 160 B from 3 Applies to the model: LEON ST their hooks A . ● Remove the rear shelf from the side supports ››› Fig. 161 by pulling it upwards and then take it out. ● If necessary, the rear shelf can be stored under the luggage compartment variable floor ››› page 157

Fitting ● Insert the cover horizontally so that the “re- Fig. 160 In the luggage compartment: remov- cess” fits onto the axis of the supports ing and installing the rear shelf. ››› Fig. 161 and press down until it engages. ● Hook the loops ››› Fig. 160 B to the rear lid ››› .

WARNING ● The luggage compartment cover must always be fixed properly (risk of accident). ● The luggage compartment cover should not be used as a storage shelf. Articles placed on Fig. 162 In the luggage compartment: open- this cover could cause injury to vehicle occu- ing and retracting the rear shelf. pants in an accident or if the brakes are applied suddenly. Fig. 161 In the luggage compartment: removing and installing the rear shelf.

The luggage compartment cover blocks the view into the luggage compartment.

156 Transport and practical equipment

● The rear shelf can be stored under the lug- Storing the rear shelf gage compartment variable floor when the 3 Applies to the model: LEON/LEON SC latter is in the top position (except for vehicles equipped with natural gas engine CNG) ››› page 158. Technical data Technical Fitting the rear shelf ● Place the rear shelf in the housing provided in the left side cover. ● Engage the support of the rear shelf Advice Fig. 163 In the luggage compartment: remov- ››› Fig. 163 1 in the right housing. ing the rear shelf. ● Check that the support ››› Fig. 163 1 is properly engaged. Opening the rear shelf Fig. 164 In the luggage compartment: covers ● for storing the rear shelf. Pull evenly on the rear shelf using its han- WARNING dle ››› Fig. 162 1  in a backwards direction until it audibly clicks into place. Animals, loose or unsecured or objects carried on the rear shelf can cause serious injury Operation in case of sudden manoeuvring or braking or Retracting the rear shelf in case of an accident. ● Press on the handle of the rear shelf in the ● Do not leave hard, sharp or heavy objects direction of the arrow to release it ››› Fig. 162 or in bags on the rear shelf. . ● Never carry animals on the rear shelf. The shelf will automatically move towards the Emergencies end and will retract completely. CAUTION To retract the rear shelf, press on its handle Fig. 165 In the luggage compartment: fitting Removing the rear shelf in a downwards only direction; if you press it the storage compartment shelf. ● Press the rear shelf support ››› Fig. 163 1 upwards it may lead to its axles breaking. in the direction of the arrow. The rear shelf can be stored under the lug- Safety ● Remove the rear shelf through the support gage compartment variable floor. and upwards. ● Remove the left and right covers ››› Fig. 164. » 157 Operation

● Press the rear shelf until it engages in its Use of the net partition behind the housing ››› Fig. 165. front seat* ● Put the left and right covers in their original 3 Applies to the model: LEON ST position.

Storing the rear shelf 3 Applies to the model: LEON ST

Fig. 167 In the luggage compartment: housing for storing the rear shelf.

The rear shelf can be stored under the luggage compartment variable floor. Fig. 168 In the luggage compartment: pulling out and securing the net partition. ● Remove covers ››› Fig. 166 A left and right. ● Press the head of the rear shelf in the direction of the arrow until it engages in its housing ››› Fig. 167. Fig. 166 In the luggage compartment: housing for storing the rear shelf. ● Put the left and right covers in their original position.

Fig. 169 In the luggage compartment: removing the net partition.

Pulling out and securing the net partition ● Pull up handle ››› Fig. 168 2 to remove the net from the casing 4 . 158 Transport and practical equipment

● Hook in the net partition on the right side WARNING 3 (magnified image). ● Always secure objects, even when the net ● Hook in the net partition in the left side partition is properly assembled. housing 1 pulling the rod. ● There should be nobody behind the assembled partition when the vehicle is moving. The net partition is properly assembled when data Technical the T-shaped ends are firmly secured in the corresponding housings 3 and 1 . CAUTION Incorrect handling of the net partition could Retracting the net partition cause damage. ● Unhook the rod from the housings 3 and ● Do not “release” the net partition when Advice 1 . lowering it, as the net and other vehicle parts Fig. 171 In the luggage compartment: net could be damaged. Roll down the net parti- ● Roll up the net into the casing 4 lowering partition hooked into the rear seat backrests. it with your hand. tion by hand. Fitting the net partition Removing the net partition ● Use of the net partition with the rear Fold the rear seat backrests forward. ● Fold the rear seat backrests forward. Operation seat backrests lowered ● Remove the net partition from the side sup- ● Press the left or right release catch ports. 3 Applies to the model: LEON ST ››› Fig. 169 in the direction of the arrow 1 . ● Place the net casing in the rail slots in the ● Remove the casing from the support in the direction of the arrows ››› Fig. 170 1 . direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 169 2 . ● Push the casing towards the left side of the vehicle in the direction of arrow ››› Fig. 170 Fitting the net partition 2 and as far as it will go. Emergencies ● Fold the rear seat backrests forward. ● Check that the net is secure. ● Fit the casing in the right and left supports. ● Press the casing into the left and right sup- Pulling out and securing the net partition ports in the opposite direction to the arrow ● Pull up handle ››› Fig. 171 2 to remove the ››› Fig. 169 2 until it engages. net from the casing ››› Fig. 171 4 . Safety The red markings on the release buttons Fig. 170 Assembling the net partition in the ● Hook in the net partition on the right side should no longer be visible. rear seat backrests. ››› Fig. 171 3 (magnified image). »

159 Operation

● Hook in the net partition in the left side WARNING housing ››› Fig. 171 1 pulling the rod. The rear seat backrests should only be lifted The net partition is properly assembled when again once the net partition has been disas- the T-shaped ends are firmly secured in the sembled. corresponding housings ››› Fig. 171 3 and 1 . CAUTION Incorrect handling of the net partition could Retracting the net partition cause damage. ● Remove the rod from the housings in the ● Do not “release” the net partition when trims of the roof side members. lowering it, as the net and other vehicle parts Fig. 173 In the luggage compartment: open- ● Roll up the net into the casing ››› Fig. 171 could be damaged. Roll down the net parti- ing the tailboard. 4 lowering it with your hand. tion by hand. On the rear seat, behind the central armrest, Removing the net partition there is a tailboard for transporting long items in the interior, such as skis. ● Pull the net casing out approximately 5 cm Tailboard for transporting long items* in the opposite direction to the arrow To avoid soiling the interior, dirty objects ››› Fig. 170 2 . should be wrapped (e.g. in a blanket) before they are inserted through the tailboard. ● Remove the casing from the rails by pulling in the opposite direction to the arrows When the armrest is down, nobody may trav- ››› Fig. 170 1 . el in the centre rear seat. ● Lift the rear seat backrests. Opening the tailboard WARNING ● Lower the centre armrest. During a sudden driving or braking manoeu- ● Pull the release lever in the direction of the vre, or in the event of an accident, objects arrow and push the tailboard cover could be flung though the interior and cause Fig. 172 On the rear seat backrest: opening ››› Fig. 172 1 down and forwards. serious or fatal injuries. the tailboard. ● Open the rear lid. ● Always secure objects, even when the net partition is properly assembled. ● Insert the long objects through the gap from the luggage compartment. ● There should be nobody behind the assembled partition when the vehicle is moving. ● Secure the objects with the seatbelt.

160 Transport and practical equipment

● Close the rear lid. Fastening rings* In the front and rear part of the luggage compartment there are fastening rings to secure Closing the tailboard the luggage ››› Fig. 175. ● Lift the tailboard cover until it engages. The In order to use the fastening rings, they must red mark on the luggage compartment side be lifted beforehand1). should never be visible. data Technical ● Close the rear lid. WARNING ● Lift the centre armrest if necessary. If unsuitable or damaged belts or retaining straps are used, they could break in the event of braking or an accident. Objects could then

Note Advice be launched across the passenger compart- The tailboard can also be opened from the ment and cause serious or fatal injuries. luggage compartment. To do so, press the re- Fig. 174 In the luggage compartment: fasten- ● Always use belts or retaining straps that lease lever down, in the direction of the ar- ing rings (LEON/LEON SC model except ver- are suitable and in a good condition. row, and the cover upwards ››› Fig. 173. sions with spare wheel and CNG). ● Belts and retaining straps should be securely fastened to the fastening rings.

● Objects in the luggage compartment that Operation are unsecured could move suddenly and modify the handling of the vehicle. ● Secure all objects, little and large. ● Never exceed the maximum tensile load of the fastening ring when securing objects. ● Never secure a child seat to the fastening rings. Emergencies

Fig. 175 In the luggage compartment: fasten- Note ing rings (LEON ST model). ● The maximum tensile load that the fastening rings can support is 3.5 kN. » Safety

1) Valid only for the LEON ST model. 161 Operation

● Belts and securing systems for the appro- Net bag* priate load can be obtained from specialised dealerships. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this. ● The fastening rings are rendered unusable for versions with spare wheel and CNG.

Retaining hooks

Fig. 177 In the luggage compartment: retaining hooks (LEON ST model). Fig. 178 In the luggage compartment: net At the rear of the luggage compartment, on bag hooked up at floor level (LEON ST model). the left and right, there are fixed retaining hooks ››› Fig. 177. The retaining hooks have been designed to secure light shopping bags. In the front and rear part of the luggage compartment there are fastening rings to secure Fig. 176 In the luggage compartment: retain- the luggage ››› Fig. 174 and ››› Fig. 175. ing hooks (LEON/LEON SC model). WARNING Never use the retaining hooks as fastening rings. In case of sudden braking or an acci- Fig. 179 In the luggage compartment: rings dent, the hooks could break. 1 and hooks 2 for securing the net bag (LEON ST model). CAUTION The luggage compartment prevents light lug- Each hook is designed for a maximum load of gage from moving. The net bag has a zip and 2.5 kg. can be used to store small objects.

162 Transport and practical equipment

The net bag can be hooked up to the luggage up it is taut. If the net bag is hooked up or un- compartment in different ways. hooked incorrectly the hooks could cause injuries. Hooking the net bag into the luggage com- ● Always secure the net hooks properly so partment floor that they do not suddenly release from the ● As applicable, lift the front fastening rings fastening rings when hooking or unhooking data Technical ››› Fig. 178 2 . them. ● Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings ● On hooking or unhooking them, protect your eyes and face in case the hooks are re- 2 ››› . The bag zip should be facing up- leased suddenly. wards. ● Always hook up the net bag hooks in the Fig. 181 Luggage compartment: variable Advice ● Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings described order. If a hook is unexpectedly re- floor 1 . leased the risk of injury is increased. Variable floor in the tilted position Hook the net bag next to the load threshold When the variable floor is tilted you can ac- ● Secure the short net hooks to the fastening Luggage compartment variable floor cess the spare wheel/anti-puncture kit area. rings ››› Fig. 179 1 ››› . The bag zip should

3 Applies to the model: LEON/LEON SC Operation be facing upwards. ● Lift the variable floor using handle Fig. 180 1 , pull it back and push the ● Secure the straps in the bag hooks 2 . ››› backrest of the rear seat until the movable part of the floor is resting on it. Removing the net bag ● Rest the floor on its housings ››› Fig. 181 The hooked up net bag is taut . ››› (arrows). ● Remove the hooks and the net bag straps Emergencies from the fastening rings and from the bag hooks. ● Store the net bag in the luggage compartment. Fig. 180 Luggage compartment: variable Safety WARNING floor To secure the elastic net bag on the fastening rings it must be stretched out. Once hooked

163 Operation

Luggage compartment variable floor ● Move the floor forward over the supports as ● Always secure objects, even when the lug- far as the rear seat backrest and then lower 3 Applies to the model: LEON ST gage compartment floor is properly lifted. the floor with the handle 1 . ● Only objects that do not protrude more than 2/3 the height of the floor may be car- Variable floor in the low position ried between the rear seat and the raised lug- ● Lift the floor using handle ››› Fig. 182 1 gage compartment floor. and pull it back until the front of the floor has ● Only objects that do not weigh than ap- fully passed the supports 2 . proximately 7.5 kg may be carried between ● Now match the front part with the lower the rear seat and the raised luggage compartment floor. grooves of the supports and slide the floor forwards as far as the rear seat backrest and lower the floor at the same time with the han- CAUTION dle 1 . ● The maximum weight that can be loaded on Fig. 182 Luggage compartment variable the luggage compartment variable floor in floor: positions. Variable floor in the tilted position the top position is 150 kg. When the variable floor is tilted you can ac- ● Do not let the luggage compartment floor cess the spare wheel/anti-puncture kit area. fall when closing it. Always carefully guide it downwards in a controlled manner. Other- ● Lift the variable floor using handle wise, the lining and the floor of the luggage ››› Fig. 182 1 and pull it back until the front compartment could be damaged. of the floor has fully passed the tilted grooves ››› Fig. 183 3 . Note ● Run the floor through these grooves with SEAT recommends the use of straps to secure the help of handle 1 as the rear seat back- objects to retaining rings. rest and until the floor is resting in the grooves. Fig. 183 Luggage compartment variable floor: grooves tilted. WARNING Roof carrier Variable floor in the high position During a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, or in the event of an accident, objects Introduction ● Lift the floor using handle ››› Fig. 182 1 could be flung though the interior and cause and pull it back until the front of the floor has serious or fatal injuries. The vehicle roof has been designed to opti- fully passed the supports 2 . mise aerodynamics. For this reason, cross 164 Transport and practical equipment bars or conventional roof carrier systems can- CAUTION Attach the cross bars and the roof car- not be secured to the roof water drains. ● Remove the cross bars and the roof carrier rier system As the roof water drains are integrated in the system before entering a car wash. roof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap- ● Vehicle height is increased by the installa- proved cross bars and roof carrier systems tion of cross bars or a roof carrier system and Technical data Technical can be used. the load secured on them. For this purpose, check that your vehicle's height does not sur- Cases in which cross bars and the roof carri- pass the headspace limit, for example, for un- er system should be disassembled. derpasses or for entering garage doors. ● ● Cross bars, a roof carrier system and the When they are not used. Advice load secured on them should not interfere ● When the vehicle is washed in a car wash. with the roof aerial or hamper the path of the ● When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi- panoramic sun roof ››› page 133 and the rear mum height, for example, in some garages. lid. ● On opening the rear lid make sure that it WARNING does not knock into the roof load. When heavy or bulky loads are transported Operation on the roof carrier system, car driving per- For the sake of the environment formance is affected, as the centre of gravity shifts and there is greater wind resistance. When cross bars and a roof carrier system are installed, the increased air resistance means ● Always secure the load properly using belts that the vehicle uses more fuel. or retaining straps that are suitable and in a good condition. ● Fig. 184 Leon/Leon SC: attachment points for

Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a neg- Emergencies ative effect on aerodynamics, the centre of the roof railings for the roof carrier system. » gravity and driving performance. ● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf- Safety fic conditions.

165 Operation

rear attachment points 3 are marked on the Note top edge of the glass with arrow heads ››› Fig. 184 B. Always read the assembly instructions that come with the crossbars and the roof carrier system carefully and keep them in the vehi- LEON ST model cle. The crossbars are assembled on the roof railings. The attachment points can be seen on bottom of the roof railing ››› Fig. 185. Loading the roof carrier system

WARNING The load can only be secured if the crossbars Fig. 185 Leon ST: attachment points for the Incorrect attachment and use of the cross- and the roof carrier system are properly in- roof railings for the roof carrier system. bars and the roof carrier system may cause stalled ››› . the whole system to detach from the roof and The crossbars are the basis of a series of spe- cause an accident and injuries. Maximum authorised roof load cial roof carrier systems. For safety reasons, ● Always take the manufacturer assembly in- special fixtures must be used to safely trans- The maximum permissible roof load is 75 kg. structions into account. port luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards or This figure comes from the combined weight boats on the roof. Suitable accessories can ● Use only crossbars and the roof carrier sys- of the roof carrier, the cross bars and the load be acquired at SEAT dealerships. tem when they are in perfect condition and itself on the roof ››› . are properly secured. Always check the weight of the roof carrier Always secure the crossbars and the roof car- ● Secure the crossbars and the roof carrier rier system properly. Always take the assem- system properly. system, the cross bars and the weight of the bly instructions that come with the crossbars load to be transported and weigh them if ● Check threaded joints and attachments and the roof carrier system in question into necessary. Never exceed the maximum au- travelling and if necessary tighten them after thorised roof load. account. you have travelled a short distance. When making long trips, check the threaded joints If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier LEON model whenever you stop for a rest. with a lower weight rating, you will not be The front and rear attachment points 1 and ● Always fit the special roof carrier systems able to carry the maximum authorised roof 2 are only visible when the doors are open correctly for wheels, skis and surfboards, etc. load. In this case, do not exceed the maxi- ››› Fig. 184 A. ● Do not modify or repair the crossbars or mum weight limit for the roof carrier which is roof carrier system. listed in the fitting instructions. Leon SC model The front and rear attachment points 1 are only visible when the doors are open. The 166 Air conditioning

Distributing a load Air conditioning WARNING Distribute loads uniformly and secure them Reduced visibility through the windows incorrectly ››› . Heating, ventilation and cool- creases the risk of serious accidents. ● Always ensure that all windows are free of Check attachments ing ice and snow, and that they are not fogged, Technical data Technical Once the cross bars and roof carrier system so as to maintain good visibility of everything have been installed, check the bolted con- Introduction outside. nections and attachments after a short jour- ● The maximum heat output required to de- Read the additional information carefully ney and subsequently with a certain frequen- frost windows as quickly as possible is only ›››  page 48 cy. available when the engine has reached its normal running temperature. Only drive when Advice WARNING Viewing Climatronic information you have good visibility. On the screen of Climatronic control unit and ● Always ensure that you use the heating Exceeding the maximum authorised roof load system, fresh air system, air conditioner and can result in accidents and considerable vehi- on the screen of the factory-fitted Easy Con- the heated rear window to maintain good visi- cle damage. nect system, the theoretical values of the temperature zones are shown. bility to the outside. ● Never exceed the maximum authorised ● Never leave the air recirculation on for a load on the roof and on the axles or the vehi- The unit of temperature measurement can be Operation long period of time. If the cooling system is cle's maximum authorised weight. changed in the Easy Connect system. switched off and air recirculation mode ● Never exceed the load capacity of the cross switched on, the windows can mist over very bars and the roof carrier system, even if the Dust and pollen filter quickly, considerably limiting visibility. maximum authorised roof load has not been The dust and pollen filter with its activated ● Switch air recirculation mode off when it is reached. charcoal cartridge serves as a barrier against not required. ● Secure heavy items as far forward as possi- impurities in the air taken into the vehicle in- ble and distribute the vehicle load uniformly. Emergencies terior. WARNING The dust and pollen filter must be changed WARNING Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and re- regularly so that air conditioner performance duce driver concentration possibly resulting If the load is loose or not secured, it could fall is not adversely affected. in a serious accident. from the roof carrier system or cause acci-

● Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or Safety dents and injuries. If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to use in areas with very high levels of air use the air recirculation for long periods of ● Always use belts or retaining straps that time; the air in the vehicle interior will not be are suitable and in a good condition. pollution, the filter must be changed more frequently than stated in the Service Sched- refreshed. » ● Secure the load properly. ule. 167 Operation

CAUTION Adjust using the Easy Connect sys- Function Function ● Switch the air conditioner off if you think it tem* button may be broken. This will avoid additional 3 Applies to vehicles with a Media System Switch off and switch on the Climatron- Touch/Colour. OFF damage. Have the air conditioner checked by ic. a specialised workshop. In the Easy Connect system it is also possible ● Repairs to the air conditioner require spe- The air conditioning settings submenu to perform various adjustments to the Clima- cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT rec- is opened. It is possible to make the fol- tronic. lowing adjustments: ommends visiting a SEAT Official Service. Function button Air conditioning profile. : to Open the air conditioner menu adjust the level of the fan in AUTO mode. You can choose between low, Note SETUP ● Press the  button on the Climatronic medium and high. ● When the cooling system is turned off, air control panel. Function button Automatic air recirculation coming from the outside will not be dried. To to switch on and off automatic air recir- prevent fogging of the windows, SEAT recom- ● OR: press the MENU button in Easy Con- culation ››› page 170. mends leaving the cooling system (compres- nect. With the rotating switch select the air BACK  function button to close the sor) turned on. To do this, press the button conditioner menu and open it. submenu.  . The button lamp should light up. On the touch screen you can see and change ● The maximum heat output required to de- the current settings, for example, the temper- frost windows as quickly as possible is only ature set for the driver and passenger sides, Adjust using the Easy Connect sys- available when the engine has reached its tem* normal running temperature. the air distribution and the fan speed. With button  the driver and passenger side 3 Applies to vehicles with a Media System Plus/Navi ● Keep the air intake slots in front of the temperatures are synchronised ››› Book- System. windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to en- let Media System Touch/Colour, chapter Air sure heating and cooling are not impaired, conditioning. In the Easy Connect system it is also possible and to prevent the windows from misting to perform various adjustments to the Clima- over. To switch a function on or off, or to select a tronic. submenu, you must press the corresponding function button. Open the air conditioner menu For more information about functions ● Press the  button on the Climatronic ››› page 114. control panel.

On the top of the screen you can see and change the current settings, such as, for example, the temperature set for the driver side 168 Air conditioning and for that of passenger. Temperatures up Function The cooling system cannot be activated Function to +22°C (+72°F) are shown with blue arrows, button If the air conditioning system cannot be and temperatures over +22°C (+72°F) with switched on, this may be caused by the fol- red arrows. Activate/deactivate the automatic acti- lowing: vation of the supplementary heating for To switch a function on or off, or to select a colder countries (only for engines with Automatic ● The engine is not running. data Technical submenu, you must press the corresponding supplementary heating). With the option supplemen- deactivated, depending on the outside ● The fan is switched off. function button. tary heating temperature the heating may need more ● The air conditioner fuse has blown. time than normal to reach a comfortable Function Function temperature. ● The outside temperature is lower than ap- button

proximately +3°C (+38°F). Advice Air condi- Adjust the fan level in AUTO mode. You ● The air conditioner compressor has been tioning pro- can choose between low, medium and Air conditioning user instructions temporarily switched off because the engine file high. coolant temperature is too high. OFF Climatronic is switched off. The interior cooling system only works when ● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air the engine is running and fan is switched on. ON Climatronic is switched on. conditioner checked by a specialised work- The air conditioner operates most effectively shop. The air conditioning settings submenu with the windows and the panoramic sliding Operation is opened. It is possible to make the fol- sunroof closed. However, if the vehicle has Special Characteristics lowing adjustments: Function button Air conditioning profile. : to heated up after standing in the sun for some If the humidity and temperature outside the adjust the level of the fan in AUTO time, the air inside can be cooled more quick- vehicle are high, condensation can drip off mode. You can choose between low, me- ly by opening the windows and the panoram- SETUP the evaporator in the cooling system and dium and high. ic sliding sunroof briefly. form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is Function button Automatic air recirculation

to switch on and off automatic air recir- normal and does not indicate a leak! Emergencies Climatronic: change the temperature unit on culation ››› page 170. BACK  function button to close the the screen of the radio or on the factory-fit- Note submenu. ted navigation system After starting the engine, any residual humid- Changing the temperature display from Cel- ity in the air conditioner could mist over the sius to Fahrenheit on radio or on the factory- windscreen. Switch on the defrost function as Safety fitted navigation system is done using the soon as possible to clear the windscreen of menu on the instrument panel condensation. ›››  page 33.

169 Operation

Air outlets

Fig. 186 On the dash panel: air vents

Air vents Note When the outside temperature is very high, selecting manual air recirculation mode for a To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti- Food, medicine and other heat or cold sensi- lation in the vehicle interior, air vents short period refreshes the vehicle interior tive objects should never be placed in front of more quickly. ››› Fig. 186 1 should remain open. the air outlets as they may be damaged or made unsuitable for use by the air coming For safety reasons, air recirculation mode is ● Turn the corresponding thumbwheel (de- from the air vents. switched off when the button  is press- tail) in the required direction to open and ed or the air distributor turned to . close the air vents. When the thumbwheel is in the  position, the corresponding air vent Switching the manual air recirculation mode is closed. Air recirculation mode on and off  ● Change the air direction using the ventila- Basic points To switch system on: press the  button un- tion grille lever. Air recirculation: til the warning lamp lights up. There are other additional, non-adjustable air To switch system off: press the  button un- Manual recirculation vents in the dash panel 2 , in the footwell  til the warning lamp goes off. and in the rear area of the interior. Air recirculation mode prevents the ambient air from entering the interior. 170 Driving

Functioning mode of automatic air recircula- ● If the cooling system is switched off and air Driving tion (air conditioning menu) recirculation mode switched on, the windows With the automatic air recirculation mode ac- can mist over very quickly, considerably limit- Ignition lock tivated, the entry of fresh air into the cabin ing visibility. interior is enabled. If the system detects a ● Switch air recirculation mode off when it is high concentration of hazardous substances not required. Switching the ignition on and starting data Technical in the ambient air, air recirculation mode is the engine with the key switched on automatically. When the level of CAUTION impurities drops to within a normal range, recirculation mode is switched off. Do not smoke when air recirculation is

switched on in vehicles with an air condition- Advice The system is unable to detect unpleasant er. The smoke taken in could lie on the cool- smells. ing system vaporiser and on the activated charcoal cartridge of the dust and pollen fil- The air recirculation will not connect auto- ter, leading to a permanently unpleasant matically in versions without humidity sensor smell. and in the following external conditions:

Note ● The outside temperature is lower than +3°C Operation (+38°F). Climatronic: air recirculation mode is activa- Fig. 187 Ignition key positions. ● The cooling system is switched off and the ted to prevent exhaust gas or unpleasant outside temperature is below +10°C (+50°F). odours from entering the vehicle interior Read the additional information carefully when it is in reverse and while the automatic ● ›››  page 27 The cooling system is switched off, the out- windscreen wiper is working. side temperature is below +15°C (+59°F) and Diesel engines can take a few seconds longer the windscreen wipers are switched on.

than usual to start on cold days. Therefore Emergencies Activation/deactivation of automatic air recir- the clutch pedal (manual gearbox) or the culation is done in the air conditioner menu, brake pedal (automatic gearbox) must re- under Configuration. main pressed until the engine starts up. Dur- ing preheating, the warning lamp  remains lit.

WARNING Safety Observe the safety warnings ››› in Intro- The preheating time depends on the coolant duction on page 167. and exterior temperatures. With the engine at operating temperature, or at outside temperatures above +8°C, the warning lamp  will » 171 Operation

light up for about one second. This means Select N or P WARNING that the engine starts immediately. This message appears if you try to start or ● Never run the engine in confined spaces, as If the engine does not immediately start up, stop the engine when the selector lever of the exhaust gases are poisonous. interrupt the starting process and try again the automatic gearbox is not in position P or after 30 seconds. To start the engine again, N. The engine can only start or stop in certain CAUTION return the key to position 1 . positions. Avoid high engine speeds, full throttle and Start-Stop System* Engage position P; the vehicle extreme load conditions until the engine has can move; doors can only close in reached its normal operating temperature, If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop position P. otherwise this can damage the engine. system* switches off the engine, the ignition remains switched on. For safety reasons, this driver message appears and an audible warning sounds if the For the sake of the environment Automatic gearbox: before leaving the vehi- selector lever of the automatic gearbox is not Do not warm up the engine by idling it. You cle, make sure that the ignition is switched in position P after you switch off the ignition. should drive off as soon as you start the en- off and the selector lever is in position . P Put the selector lever in position P, otherwise gine. This will help avoid unnecessary ex- the vehicle could roll away. haust emissions. Driver messages on the instrument panel display Gear change: selector lever in Note the drive position! Press the clutch ● If it is difficult to turn the ignition key to This driver message is displayed when the the position 1 , turn the steering wheel to This message appears on vehicles with a selector lever is not in the position P when both sides to release the steering lock. manual gearbox if the driver tries to start the the driver door is opened. Additionally, a ● When starting from cold, the engine may be engine without having the clutch pedal buzzer will sound. Put the selector lever in a little noisy for the first few seconds until oil pressed. The engine will only start if you position P, otherwise the vehicle could roll pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve press the clutch pedal. away. lifters. This is quite normal, and no cause for concern. Press the brake Ignition is switched on ● If the vehicle battery is disconnected and This message appears on vehicles with an This driver message is displayed and a buz- reconnected, the key must remain in the posi- automatic gearbox if the driver tries to start zer is sounded when the driver door is tion 1 for around 5 seconds before starting up. the engine without having the brake pedal opened with the ignition switched on. pressed.

172 Driving

● Depending on the country, vehicles with an As you cannot steer and brake in the normal ● If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop automatic gearbox: after switching off the ig- manner, there is a greater risk of accidents system* switches off the engine, the ignition nition, you can only remove the ignition key if and serious injury. remains switched on. Make sure that the igni- the selector lever is in position “P” (parking ● Never remove the key from the ignition if tion is switched off before leaving the vehi- lock). Next, the selector lever is locked. the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer- cle, otherwise the battery could discharge. ing could suddenly lock, making it impossible data Technical to steer the vehicle: risk of accident! Switching off the engine with the key ● Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle. This is particularly impor- Switching off the engine tant if there are children in the vehicle, as

they might otherwise be able to start the en- Advice – Stop the vehicle. gine or use power-operated equipment (e.g. – Turn the ignition key to position 1 the electric windows), which could cause in- ››› Fig. 187. juries.

Engaging the steering wheel lock CAUTION In vehicles with automatic gearbox, the igni- If the engine has been running under high tion key can only be removed when the selec- load for a long time, there is a risk of heat Operation tor lever is in position P. building up in the engine compartment after it has been switched off; this could cause en- – Remove the key from the ignition in posi- gine damage. For this reason, you should idle tion 1 ››› Fig. 187 ››› . the engine for approximately 2 minutes be- – Turn the steering wheel until you hear it en- fore you switch it off. gage. Emergencies Possible vehicle theft is prevented with the Note steering lock engaged. ● After the engine is switched off the radiator fan may run on for up to 10 minutes, even if WARNING the ignition is switched off. It is also possible that the fan turns itself on once more if the ● Never switch the engine off until the vehi- Safety coolant temperature increases due to the cle is stationary. The brake servo and power heat accumulated in the engine compartment steering functions will not be completely cov- or due to its prolonged exposure to solar ra- ered under warranty. More force may also be diation. needed to turn the steering wheel or to brake. 173 Operation

Starter button* Opening the driver's door when exiting the trim of the steering column ››› Fig. 189, as vehicle activates the electronic lock on the close as possible to the Kessy logo. steering column if the ignition is disabled. ● The ignition connects and the engine starts automatically. Switching the ignition on/off manually Briefly push the starter button without touch- Emergency disconnection ing the brake or clutch pedal ››› . If the engine does not switch off after briefly For vehicles with both manual and automatic pressing the starter button, an emergency transmission, the starter button text disconnect will be required: START ENGINE STOP flashes like a heartbeat ● Press the starter button twice within 3 sec- when the system is preset for switching the onds or press it once for more than 1 sec- ignition on and off. Fig. 188 In the lower part of the centre con- ond ››› . sole: starter button. Automatic ignition switch-off ● The engine turns off automatically. If the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the ve- Engine restart feature hicle key with them but leaving the ignition on, the ignition is switched off automatically If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle after a certain time. If at that time the dipped after the engine stops, you will only have 5 beam is on, the parking lights will stay on for seconds to restart it. A warning will display approx. 30 minutes. The side light can be on the dash panel screen. turned off by blocking the vehicle After this interval, it will not be possible to ››› page 120 or manually ››› page 135. start the engine without a valid key inside the vehicle. Emergency starting function Fig. 189 On the right of the steering column: If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle, Automatic deactivation of the ignition on ve- emergency start. an emergency start-up will be required. The hicles with the Start-Stop system relevant message will appear in the dash The ignition is switched off automatically The vehicle engine can be started with a panel display. This may happen when, for ex- when the vehicle is stopped and the auto- starter button (Press & Drive). To do so, there ample, the battery of the vehicle key button matic engine shutdown is active, if: must be a valid key inside the vehicle in the is very low or flat: area of the front or rear seats. ● The driver's seat belt is not fastened, ● Immediately after pushing the starter but- ● ton, keep the vehicle key next to the right the driver does not step on any pedal, 174 Driving

● the driver door is opened. ● If the vehicle is stationary for a long time Starting the engine with the starter with the ignition on, the vehicle battery Step After automatically turning off the ignition, if button ››› page 174. might be discharged and it might not be pos-  the dipped beam is on, the side light re- sible to start the engine. Briefly press the starter button ››› Fig. 188 mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if the bat- without pressing the accelerator. For the en- ● In diesel vehicles, there may be a delay in tery is sufficiently charged). If the driver locks gine to start there must be a valid key in the the engine starting if it requires preheating. data Technical the vehicle or manually turns off the light, the 3. vehicle. side light goes out. ● If during the STOP phase you press the After starting the engine, the light of the START ENGINE STOP button, the ignition is START ENGINE STOP button changes to a fixed switched off and the button flashes. light indicating that the engine has started. WARNING ● If the indication “Start-Stop system deacti- If the engine does not start, stop and wait for

Any accidental movement of the vehicle could Advice vated: Start the engine manually” is dis- approx. 1 minute before trying again. If nec- 4. result in serious injury. played on the dash panel display, the essary, perform an emergency start ● When switching on the ignition, do not START ENGINE STOP button will blink. ››› page 174. press the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise Disconnect the parking brake when you are the engine could start immediately. 5. about to start driving ››› page 177. Starting the engine WARNING WARNING

3 Valid for vehicles: with starter button Operation If vehicle keys are used negligently or with- Never leave the vehicle with the engine run- out due care, this may cause accidents and Starting the engine with the starter Step ning, especially if a gear or gear range is en- serious injury. button ››› page 174. gaged. The vehicle could then suddenly move ● Never leave any key inside the vehicle or something strange could happen that Press and hold the brake pedal until step 5 when exiting. Otherwise, a child or unauthor- 1. would cause damage, fire or serious injury. ised person could lock the vehicle, start the is performed. engine or connect the ignition and, in this In vehicles with a manual gearbox: press WARNING Emergencies way, operate electronic equipment (e.g. the 1a. and hold the clutch down until the engine windows). starts. Cold start sprays could explode or cause a sudden increase in the engine speed. Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the selec- 2. ● Never use sprays to cold start the engine. Note tor lever in position P or N. ●

Before leaving the vehicle, always discon- Safety nect the ignition manually and, if appropri- CAUTION ate, take into account the instructions on the ● The starter motor or the engine may be screen of the dash panel. damaged if you try to start the engine while »

175 Operation

driving or if you restart it immediately after Stopping the engine ● Power steering does not work when the en- switching it off. 3 Valid for vehicles: with starter button gine is not running. You need more strength ● If the engine is cold, avoid high engine to steer when the engine is switched off. speeds, pushing the engine too hard and rap- Switch off the engine with the starter ● If the ignition is switched off, the steering Step id acceleration. button ››› page 174. column could be locked, making it impossible ● Do not start the engine by pushing the ve- to control the vehicle. 1. Stop the vehicle completely ››› . hicle or towing it. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it. Press and hold the brake pedal until the step CAUTION 2. 4 is performed. If the engine is made to work hard for a long Note If you are driving an automatic vehicle, place time, it may overheat after being switched 3. ● Do not wait until the engine warms up with the selector lever in position P. off. To prevent damage to the engine before switching it off, leave it idle for approx. 2 mi- the vehicle stationary; if you have good visi- Connect the electronic parking brake 4. nutes in neutral. bility through the windows, start driving im- ››› page 177. mediately. This helps the engine reach operating temperature faster and reduces emis- Briefly press the start-up button ››› Fig. 188. Note The START ENGINE STOP button blinks again. If sions. 5. the engine fails to switch off, perform an After switching off the engine, the cooling fan ● Electrical components with a high power emergency disconnect ››› page 174. may continue to operate in the engine com- consumption are switched off temporarily partment for a few more minutes, even with when the engine starts. If the vehicle is equipped with a manual 6. the ignition off. The radiator fan is automati- ● When starting with a cold engine, noise gearbox, put it into 1st or reverse. cally switched off. levels may briefly increase. This is quite normal, and no cause for concern. WARNING ● When the outside temperature is below Never switch off the engine while the vehicle “My Beat” Function +5°C (+41°F), if the engine is diesel, some is moving. This could cause loss of control of smoke may appear under the vehicle when the vehicle, accidents and serious injury. the fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on. ● The airbags and belt tensioners do not work when the ignition is switched off. ● The brake servo does not work with the engine off. Therefore, you need to press the break pedal harder to brake the vehicle. Fig. 190 Related video

176 Driving

For vehicles with a convenience key there is ● When the engine cannot be stated again ● Pull and hold the  ››› Fig. 191 button. the “My Beat” function. This feature provides with the Start-Stop system, ››› page 196, and ● The parking brake is activated when the an additional indication of the vehicle igni- needs to be started manually, the control light of the ››› Fig. 191 button (arrow) tion system. START ENGINE STOP button flashes to indicate and the red  control light of the display in this fact. When accessing the vehicle, e.g. by opening the dash panel are on. Technical data Technical the doors with the remote control, the ● Release the button. START ENGINE STOP button flashes, calling attention to the relevant starter system button. Braking and parking Releasing the electronic parking brake Upon switching the ignition on/off, the light ● Switch the ignition on.

START ENGINE STOP Electronic parking brake* Advice of the button flashes. With ● Press the button  ››› Fig. 191. At the same the engine switched off, after a few seconds, time step hard on the brake pedal or, if the the STOP ENGINE START button stops flashing engine is running, press the accelerator ped- and goes out. al slightly. With the engine running, the ● The control light of the ››› Fig. 191 button START ENGINE STOP button light stays on, indi- (arrow) and the red  control light of the dis- cating that the engine is running. The time play in the dash panel go out. that lapses between the moment the user Operation starts the engine with the START ENGINE STOP Automatic release of the electronic parking button and the lighting changes from flash- brake on starting the engine ing to fixed will depend on specific engine size characteristics. Upon switching the igni- The electronic parking brake is automatically tion off with the START ENGINE STOP button, it Fig. 191 In the lower part of the centre con- switched off when starting if, after the driv- starts flashing again. sole: electronic parking brake button. er's door is closed and the driver's seat belt

fastened, any of the following situations take Emergencies In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the The electronic parking brake replaces the place: “My Beat” function also offers additional in- handbrake. formation: ● On vehicles with an automatic gearbox: A Activating the electronic parking brake gear range is engaged or the vehicle is ● When the engine stops during the Stop switched to another one and the accelerator phase, the light of the START ENGINE STOP but- The electronic parking brake can be activated pedal is lightly pressed. Safety ton stays on, since, even though the engine whenever the vehicle is at a standstill, even ● In vehicles with a manual gearbox: The is off, the Start-Stop system is active. when the ignition is switched off. Activate it whenever you leave or park the vehicle. clutch pedal is pressed fully before starting »

177 Operation

off and the accelerator is pedal lightly ● Pull and hold the  ››› Fig. 191 button in ● If the vehicle battery is flat, it will not be pressed. this position to forcefully stop the vehicle. At possible to disconnect the electronic parking ● To facilitate certain manoeuvres there are the same time, an acoustic warning can be brake. Use the jump-start ›››  page 65. exceptions that allow the automatic parking heard. ● When the electronic parking brake is ap- brake to be released without the driver's seat ● To stop the braking process, release the plied or released, noises may be heard. belt being fastened. button or press the accelerator. ● The system performs automatic and audible tests sporadically in the parked vehicle if The parking brake can be prevented from be- WARNING some time elapses without the electronic ing automatically released by continuously parking brake being used. pulling up the  ››› Fig. 191 switch when The improper use of the electronic parking starting off. brake can cause accidents and serious injury. ● Never use the electronic parking brake to The electronic parking brake is not discon- stop the vehicle, unless it is an emergency. Using the handbrake nected until the  button is released. This The braking distance may be considerably can facilitate starting off when a heavy load longer. Always use the foot brake. is towed ››› page 241. ● Never accelerate from the engine when a gear range or a gear is engaged and the en- Automatic activation of the electronic park- gine is running. The vehicle could move, even ing brake when exiting the vehicle incorrect- if the electronic parking brake is activated. ly In vehicles with automatic transmission, the CAUTION electronic parking brake is activated auto- To prevent the vehicle from unintentionally matically when exiting the vehicle incorrectly moving when parking it, first apply the elec- if: tronic parking brake and then remove your foot from the brake pedal. Fig. 192 Handbrake between the front seats. ● The selector lever is in the D/S or R position or in the Tiptronic selection track. The handbrake should be applied firmly to Note ● AND: the vehicle is stationary. prevent the vehicle from accidentally rolling ● ● AND: the driver door is open. In vehicles with a manual gearbox, releas- away. ing the clutch and accelerating at the same time automatically disconnects the electronic Always apply the handbrake when you leave Emergency braking function parking brake. your vehicle and when you park. Only use the emergency brake function if you are unable to stop the vehicle with the foot brake ››› . 178 Driving

Applying the handbrake system and could lead to an accident. This al- ● If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turn – Pull the handbrake lever up firmly so causes premature wear on the rear brake the front wheels so that they point away from ››› Fig. 192. pads. the kerb. ● Secure the vehicle as usual by applying the Releasing the handbrake CAUTION handbrake firmly and putting it in 1st gear. Technical data Technical – Pull the lever up slightly and press the re- Always apply the handbrake before you leave WARNING lease knob in the direction of the arrow the vehicle. Put it in 1st gear as well. ››› Fig. 192 and guide the handbrake lever ● Take measures to reduce the risk of injury down fully ››› . when you leave your vehicle unattended. ● Never park where the hot exhaust system Parking Advice Always pull the handbrake all the way up, so could ignite inflammable materials, such as there is less risk of driving off with it still en- The handbrake should always be firmly ap- dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc. gaged ››› . plied when the vehicle is parked. ● Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in The handbrake warning lamp  lights up the vehicle when it is locked. They would be Always note the following points when park- when the handbrake is applied and the igni- unable to open the vehicle from the inside, ing the vehicle: tion switched on. The warning lamp turns off and could become trapped in the vehicle in an emergency. In the event of an emergency,

when the handbrake is released. – Use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle. Operation locked doors will delay assistance to vehicle If you drive faster than 6 km/h (4 mph) with – Apply the handbrake. occupants. the handbrake on, the following message* – Put it in 1st gear. ● Never leave children alone in the vehicle. will appear on the instrument panel: HAND- They could set the vehicle in motion, for ex- BRAKE ON. You will also hear an audible – Switch the engine off and remove the key ample, by releasing the handbrake or the warning. from the ignition. Turn the steering wheel gearbox lever. slightly to engage the steering lock. ● Depending on weather conditions, it may WARNING Emergencies – Never leave a vehicle key in the vehicle. become extremely hot or cold inside the vehi- ● Never use the handbrake to stop the vehicle. This can be fatal. cle when it is in motion. The braking distance Additional notes on parking the vehicle on is considerably longer, because braking is gradients: only applied to the rear wheels. Risk of acci- Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle Brakes dent! Safety rolls against the kerb if it started to roll. ● If the handbrake is only partially released, New brake pads this will cause the rear brakes to overheat, ● If the vehicle is parked facing downhill, For the first 400 km (250 miles), new brake which can impair the function of the brake turn the front wheels so that they point to- pads have not yet reached their maximum » wards the kerb. 179 Operation

braking capacity, and need to be “run in” The effectiveness of the brakes can also be Low brake fluid level first. However, you can compensate for the temporarily reduced if the vehicle is driven Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if slightly reduced braking effect by applying for some distance without using the brakes the brake fluid level is too low. The brake flu- more pressure on the brake pedal. Avoid when there is a lot of salt on the road in win- id level is monitored electronically. overloading the brakes while running them ter. The layer of salt that accumulates on the in. discs and pads can be removed by gently ap- Brake servo plying the brakes a few times. Wear The brake servo increases the pressure you Corrosion apply to the brake pedal. It works only when The rate of wear on the brake pads depends the engine is running. a great deal on how you drive and the condi- There may be a tendency for corrosion to tions in which the vehicle is operated. This is form on the discs and dirt to build up on the WARNING a particular problem in urban traffic and brake pads if the vehicle is used infrequently short stretches, or with very sporty driving. or the brakes are not used very often. ● Apply the brakes heavily to clean the brake system only in a suitable traffic situation. Do Depending on the speed, the braking force If the brakes are not used frequently, or if not put other road users in danger: there is and the environmental conditions (for exam- rust has formed on the disks, it is advisable risk of causing an accident. ple, the temperature, air humidity, etc.) to clean off the pads and disks by braking ● Ensure the vehicle does not move while in noises may be produced on braking. firmly a few times at a moderately high speed neutral, when the engine is stopped. Failure ››› . to follow this instruction could result in an Wet roads or road salt accident. In certain situations (for example, on driving Fault in the brake system ● If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and is through flooded areas, in severe downpours If the brake pedal travel should ever increase subjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles can or after washing the vehicle) the braking ac- suddenly, this may mean that one of the two form in the brake system. This reduces the ef- tion could be delayed if the discs and pads brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately ficiency of the brakes. are damp, or frozen in winter. In this case the to the nearest specialised workshop and brakes should be “dried” by pressing the have the fault repaired. Drive there slowly CAUTION brake pedal several times. and remember that you will have to apply ● Never let the brakes “drag” by leaving your more pressure on the brake pedal and allow At high speed and with the windscreen wip- foot on the pedal when it is not necessary to for longer stopping distances. ers activated, the brake pads will briefly brake. This overheats the brakes, resulting in touch the brake discs. This takes place, al- longer stopping distances and greater wear. though unnoticeable to the driver, at regular ● Before driving down a long, steep gradient, intervals to improve the response time of the it is advisable to reduce speed and select a brakes when they are wet. lower gear. This makes use of engine braking

180 Driving

and relieves the brakes. If you still have to ESC includes the Anti-lock brake system Electronic differential lock (EDL) use the brakes, it is better to brake firmly at (ABS), the brake assist system, the traction When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakes intervals than to apply the brakes continu- control system (ASR), electronic differential the spinning wheel and directs the power to ously. lock (EDL), electronic self-locking*, selective the other driven wheel. This function is active torque control* and tractor-trailer sway miti- up to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph).

gation*. ESC also helps stabilise the vehicle data Technical Note by changing the torque. To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel ● If the brake servo is out of action, for exam- from overheating, the EDL cuts out automati- ple when the car is being towed, you will Anti-lock brake system (ABS) cally if subjected to excessive loads. The ve- have to press the brake pedal considerably hicle can still be driven. The EDL will switch harder than normal to make up for the lack of ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un- on again automatically when the brake has Advice servo assistance. der braking until the vehicle has reached a cooled down. ● If you wish to equip the vehicle with acces- virtual standstill. You can continue to steer the vehicle even when the brakes are on full. sories such as a front spoiler or wheel covers, Tractor-trailer sway mitigation* it is important that the flow of air to the front Keep your foot on the brake pedal and do not wheels is not obstructed, otherwise the pump the brakes. You will feel the brake ped- If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will control brakes can overheat. al pulsate while the ABS is working. the following: Tractor-trailers tend to sway. When the swaying of the trailer is felt by the

Brake assist system vehicle and detected by the ESC, it will auto- Operation matically brake the towing vehicle within the Braking and stability systems The brake assist system can reduce the re- limits of the system and mitigate the sway. quired braking distance. The braking force is Tractor-trailer sway mitigation is not available automatically boosted if you press the brake in all countries. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) pedal quickly in an emergency. You must keep pressing the brake pedal until the dan- The ESC helps to improve safety. It reduces Electronic torque management (XDS) ger has passed. the tendency to skid and improves the stabil- When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen- Emergencies ity and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESC Traction control system (ASR) tial mechanism allows the outer wheel to turn detects critical handling situations, such as at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In vehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheelspin In the event of wheelspin, the traction control this way, the wheel that is turning faster (out- on the driving wheels. It stabilises the vehi- system reduces the engine torque to match er wheel) receives less drive torque than the cle by braking individual wheels or by reduc- the amount of grip available. This helps the inner wheel. This may mean that in certain Safety ing the engine torque. The warning lamp will car to start moving, accelerate or climb a gra- situations the torque delivered to the inner flash on the instrument panel when the ESC dient. wheel is too high, causing the wheels to  is intervening . spin. On the other hand, the outer wheel is receiving a lower drive torque than it could » 181 Operation

transmit. This causes an overall loss of lateral ● When the braking pressure through press- Note grip on the front axle, resulting in understeer ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys- or “lengthening” of the trajectory. tem’s braking pressure the vehicle will brake ● The ABS and ASR will only operate correctly automatically. if the four wheels have identical tyres. Any The XDS system can detect and correct this differences in the rolling radius of the tyres effect via the sensors and signals of the ESC. ● Multi-collision braking will not be available can cause the system to reduce engine power if ESC is malfunctioning. when this is not desired. Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside wheel and counter the excess driving torque ● The regulating processes of the systems WARNING can make noises when they intervene. of that wheel. This means that the driver's desired trajectory is much more precise. ● The ESC, ABS, ASR, EDL, electronic self- ● If the warning lamp  lights up, or  alter- locking differential or selective torque control natively, there could be a fault ››› page 113. The XDS system works in combination with systems cannot exceed the limits imposed by the ESC and is always active, even when ASR the laws of physics. Always bear this in mind, traction control is disconnected, or the ESC in especially on wet or slippery roads. If you no- Sport mode or disconnected. tice the systems cutting in, you should re- Switching on/off the ESC and ASR duce your speed immediately to suit the road Multi-collision brake and traffic conditions. Do not be encouraged to take risks by the presence of more safety In an accident, the multi-collision brake can systems. If you do, an accident may occur. help the driver by braking to avoid the risk of ● Please remember that the accident risk al- skidding during the accident, which could ways increases if you drive fast, especially in lead to further collisions. corners or on a slippery road, or if you follow The multi-collision brake works for front, side too close behind the vehicle in front of you. or rear accidents, when the airbag control The ESC, ABS, brake assist, EDL, electronic self-locking and selective torque control sys- unit records its activation level and the acci- tems cannot prevent accidents: risk of accident takes place at a speed of over 10 km/h dents! (6 mph). The ESC automatically brakes the Fig. 193 Centre console: Button for switching ● vehicle, as long as the accident has not dam- Accelerate with caution on slippery surfa- on/off the ESC and ASR ces (for example, icy or snow-covered). De- aged the ESC, the brake hydraulics or the on- spite the control systems, the driven wheels board network The ESC is switched on automatically when could spin, affecting the stability of the vehi- the engine is started, and only works when The following actions control automatic brak- cle: risk of accident! the engine is running and includes the ABS, ing during the accident: EDS and ASR systems. ● When the driver presses the accelerator, the automatic braking does not take place. 182 Driving

The ASR and ESC function should only be Disable ASR ● OR: activate or deactivate the ASR or ESC switched off in situations in which traction is The Easy Connect system menu is used to function in the Easy Connect system using  insufficient, among others: switch off the ASR ››› page 114. The traction the button and the SETTINGS and ESC System function buttons. ● When driving in deep snow or on surfaces control system will be disabled. that are not very firm. The control lamp  lights up. For vehicles WARNING data Technical ● with a driver information system* the driver To “free” the vehicle if it gets stuck. You should switch on the ESC Sport mode on- will be informed that ASR is disabled. ly if the traffic conditions and your driving Then switch the ASR and ESC function back ability allow you to do so safely: risk of skid- on. Activate ASR ding!

Depending on finishes and versions, it is The Easy Connect system menu ››› page 114 ● With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising Advice possible either to disconnect only the ASR or is used to switch on the ASR. The traction function will be limited to allow for a sportier else activate ESC Sport mode. control system will be enabled. drive. The driving wheels could spin and the vehicle could “skid”. The control lamp  switches off. For vehicles ESC in “Sport” mode with a driver information system* the driver ● If the ESC/ASR is deactivated, the vehicle stabilisation function is not available. Sport mode can be connected via the Easy will be informed that ASR is enabled. Connect ››› page 114 system menu. The ac- Operation tion of the ESC and the ASR is limited ››› . Disconnection of the ESC Note The control lamp  lights up. For vehicles In some versions of the model, besides the If the ASR is disconnected or the ESC’s Sport with a driver information system*, the driver traction control system (ASR), the electronic mode is selected, cruise control* will be will be shown the electronic stability stability programme (ESC) can also be switched off. control (ESC) option: sport. switched off. Warning! Limited stability. ● Press the button  Fig. 193 for approxi- ››› Hill driving assistant Emergencies Disable ESC “Sport” mode mately 1 second to switch off the ASR function. Through the Easy Connect system menu The hill driving assistant helps the driver to ●  ››› page 114. The warning lamp  will switch Press the button ››› Fig. 193 for approxi- move off and upward on a hill when the vehi- off. For vehicles with a driver information sys- mately 3 seconds to switch off the Electronic cle is stationary. Stability programme (ESC), including the ASR tem*, the driver will be shown the elec- The system maintains brake pressure for ap- Safety function. tronic stability control (ESC) proximately two seconds after the driver option: on. ● The ASR and ESC function are reconnected takes his foot off the brake pedal to prevent by pressing the button  ››› Fig. 193. the vehicle from lurching backward when it is started. During these 2 seconds, the driver » 183 Operation

has enough time to release the clutch pedal Note WARNING and accelerate without the vehicle moving and without having to use the handbrake, The Official Service or a specialist workshop When the engine is running, the vehicle will making start-up easier, more comfortable can tell you if your vehicle is equipped with start to move as soon as a gear is engaged this system. and the clutch released. This is also the case and safer. with the electronic parking brake switched These are the basic operation conditions: on. ● Never engage reverse gear when the vehi- ● being on a ramp or hill/slope, Manual gearbox cle is moving. ● doors closed, ● vehicle completely stationary, Changing gear WARNING ● engine running and foot on the brake, Read the additional information carefully If the gear is changed down inappropriately ● besides having a gear engaged or being in ›››  page 46 by selecting a gear that is too low, you may neutral for manual gear change and with the lose control of the vehicle, causing an acci- In some countries the clutch pedal must be selector lever at position S, D or R for an au- dent and serious injuries. fully pressed down for the engine to start. tomatic gearbox. CAUTION This system is also active when reversing up- Selecting reverse gear When travelling at high speeds or at high en- hill. ● Engage reverse gear only when the vehicle gine speeds, selecting a gear that is too low is stopped. can cause considerable damage to the clutch WARNING and the gearbox. This can also occur if the ● If you do not start the vehicle immediately Changing down gears clutch pedal is pressed and held and it does after taking your foot off the brake pedal, the While driving, changing down a gear must al- not engage. vehicle may start to roll back under certain ways be done gradually, i.e. to the gear di- conditions. Depress the brake pedal or use rectly below and when the engine speed is CAUTION the hand brake immediately. not too high ››› . Changing down while by- ● If the engine stalls, depress the brake ped- To prevent damage and avoid premature passing one or various gears at high speeds wear, please observe the following: al or use the hand brake immediately. or at high engine speeds can damage the ● ● When following a line of traffic uphill, if you clutch and the gearbox, even if the clutch Do not rest your hand on the gear lever while driving. The pressure applied by your want to prevent the vehicle from rolling back pedal remains depressed ››› . accidentally when starting off, hold the brake hand is transmitted to the gearbox selector pedal down for a few seconds before starting forks. off. ● Always ensure that the vehicle is completely stopped before engaging the reverse gear. 184 Driving

● Always press the clutch to the floor when gearbox positions G, D, E and S, the engaged or Sport (S) mode. To select Sport mode (S), changing gears. gear is also indicated on the display. move the selector lever backwards. Moving the lever again will select normal mode (D). ● Never hold the vehicle “on the clutch” on hills with the engine on. P – Parking lock The selected driving mode is shown on the instrument panel display. When the selector lever is in this position, the driven wheels are locked mechanically. In normal mode (D), the gearbox automatical- data Technical The parking lock must be engaged only when ly selects the best gear ratio. This depends Automatic gearbox/DSG auto- the vehicle is stationary ››› . on the engine load, the road speed and the dynamic gear control programme (DCP). matic gearbox* The interlock button (the button on the selec-

tor lever handle) must be pressed in and si- Sport mode (S) must be selected for a sporty Advice Introduction multaneously the brake pedal must be de- driving style. This setting makes use of the pressed before moving the selector lever ei- engine's maximum power output. When ac- Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical- ther in or out of position P. celerating the gear shifts will be noticeable. ly controlled manual gearbox. Torque be- Press the brake pedal to move the selector tween the engine and the gearbox is trans- R – Reverse gear mitted via two independent clutches. They re- lever from N to D/S when the vehicle is sta- place the torque converter found on conven- Reverse gear must be engaged only when the tionary or at speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph) tional automatic gearboxes and allow for vehicle is stationary and the engine is idling ››› . Operation ››› . smooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve- Under certain circumstances (e.g. when driv- hicle. To move the selector lever to position R, the ing in mountains) it can be advantageous to The tiptronic system allows the driver to interlock button must be pressed in and at switch temporarily to tiptronic mode change gears manually if desired the same time the brake pedal must be de- ››› page 187, in order to manually select gear ››› page 187, Changing gears in tiptronic pressed. The reverse lights come on when ratios to suit the driving conditions. the selector lever is in the R position with the mode*. Emergencies ignition on. WARNING ● Take care not to accidentally press the ac- N – Neutral (idling) Selector lever positions celerator pedal when the vehicle is stopped. With the selector lever in this position, the The vehicle could otherwise start moving immediately (in some cases even if the parking

Read the additional information carefully gear is in neutral. Safety ›››  page 46 brake is engaged) resulting in the risk of an D/S – Permanent drive (forward) position accident. » The selector lever position engaged is highlighted on the display in the instrument clus- The selector lever in the D/S position enables ter. With the selector lever in the manual the gears to be controlled in normal mode (D) 185 Operation

● Never move the selector lever to R or P Note Automatic selector lever lock when driving. Failure to follow this ● If the selector lever is moved accidentally With the ignition switched on, the selector instruction could result in an accident. to N when driving, release the accelerator and lever is locked in the positions P and N. The ● With selector lever in any position (except let the engine speed drop to idling before se- brake pedal must be pressed to release the P) the vehicle must always be held with the lecting gear range D or S again. lever while pressing the release button if the foot brake when the engine is running. This is ● Should the power supply to the selector selector lever is in the position P. As a re- because an automatic gearbox still transmits lever be interrupted in position P, the selector minder for the driver, with the lever in posi- power even at idling speed, and the vehicle lever will be locked. If this should happen the tions P or N the following message will be tends to “creep”. The accelerator pedal must manual release can be used ›››  page 47. shown on the display: on no account be pressed inadvertently when a gear is engaged with the vehicle stationary. When stationary, apply footbrake The vehicle could otherwise start moving im- while selecting a gear. mediately (in some cases even if the parking Selector lever lock brake is engaged) resulting in the risk of an Level lock only engages with the vehicle sta- accident. tionary and at speeds of up to 5 km/h (3 mph). At speeds of over 5 km/h (3 mph) ● While you are selecting a gear and the vehi- the lever lock is automatically deactivated in cle is stopped with the engine running, do not accelerate. Failure to follow this instruc- position N. tion could result in an accident. The selector lever lock is not engaged if the ● As a driver you should never leave your ve- selector lever is moved quickly through posi- hicle if the engine is running and a gear is en- tion N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). This gaged. If you have to leave your vehicle while makes it possible, for instance, to rock the the engine is running, you must apply the vehicle “backwards and forwards” if it is handbrake and engage the parking lock (P). stuck. The selector lever lock engages auto- ● To avoid accidents, apply the handbrake Fig. 194 Selector lever lock. matically if the brake pedal is not depressed and put the selector lever in position P before and the lever is in position N for more than opening the bonnet and working on the vehi- The selector lever lock prevents gears from about two seconds. cle with the engine running. Please always being engaged inadvertently, so that the ve- observe the important safety warnings Interlock button ››› page 268, Work in the engine compart- hicle is not set in motion unintentionally. ment. The selector lever lock is released as follows: The interlock button on the selector lever handle prevents the driver from inadvertently – Switch the ignition on. engaging certain gears. Press the button in – Press the brake pedal and at the same time to disengage the selector lever lock. The se- press in the interlock button. lector lever positions in which the interlock 186 Driving button has to be pressed are shown in the il- function. Seek specialist assistance and The tiptronic gives the driver the option to lustration, highlighted in colour ››› Fig. 194. have the system checked. change gears manually.

Safety interlock for ignition key Changing gear manually with the selector lever Once the ignition has been turned off, the Changing gears in tiptronic mode* key may be removed only if the gear selector It is possible to change to tiptronic mode, data Technical is in position P. While the key is not in the ig- both when the vehicle is stopped and while nition, the selector lever is locked in position driving. P. – To switch to tiptronic mode, move the se-

lector lever from position D/S to the right. Advice Note As soon as the change is made the selector ● If the selector lever lock does not engage, level will be shown in the position M on the there is a fault. The transmission is interrup- instrument panel display (for example M4 ted to prevent the vehicle from accidentally means that the fourth gear is engaged). moving. Follow the procedure below in order for the selector lever lock to engage again: – Move the selector lever forwards + to select a higher gear ››› Fig. 195. – With a 6-speed gearbox: press the brake Fig. 195 Centre console: changing gear with Operation pedal and release it again. tiptronic – Move the selector lever backwards – to – With a 7-speed gearbox: press the brake select a lower gear. pedal. Move the selector lever to position P or N and subsequently engage a Changing gear manually with the gearshift gear. paddles* ● Despite a gear being engaged, the vehicle The gearshift paddles can be used when the does not move forwards or back. Proceed to selector lever is in the position D/S or M. Emergencies the next mode: – When the vehicle does not move in the – Press the gearshift paddle + to select a required direction, the system may not higher gear ››› Fig. 196. have the gear range correctly engaged. – Press the gearshift paddle – to select a Press the brake pedal and engage the

lower gear. Safety gear range again. Fig. 196 Steering wheel: automatic gearbox – If the vehicle still does not move in the levers – With the selector lever in position D/S, if no required direction, there is a system mal- paddle is operated during a short period of time, the gearbox control system switches »

187 Operation

back to automatic mode. To switch to per- for instance D ››› page 185, and release the Moving off uphill in vehicles without Hill manent manual gear change using the interlock button. start assistant* gearshift paddles, move the selector lever – Wait for the gearbox to engage the gear (a – Apply the handbrake. from position D/S to the right. slight movement can be felt). – Once you have engaged a gear press the When accelerating, the gearbox automatical- – Release the brake and press the accelerator accelerator carefully and disengage the ly shifts up into the next gear shortly before ››› . handbrake. the maximum engine speed is reached. If you select a lower gear, the automatic gear- Stopping briefly Moving off uphill in vehicles with Hill start assistant* box will not shift down until there is no risk of – Apply the foot brake to hold the vehicle over-revving the engine. briefly when stationary (for instance at traf- – Once you have engaged a gear, release the When the kick-down feature is used, the fic lights). Do not press the accelerator. footbrake and press the accelerator gearbox shifts down to a lower gear, depend- ››› page 183, Hill driving assistant. Stopping/Parking ing on road speed and engine speed. Driving down hills: in some situations (on If the driver door is opened and the selector mountain roads or when towing a trailer or lever is not in position P, the vehicle could caravan) it can be advantageous to switch Driving tips move. The driver message will be:  Gear temporarily to the manual gearbox pro- change: selector lever in the gramme so that the gear ratios can be selec- The gearbox changes gear ratios automatical- drive position!. Additionally, a buzzer ted manually to suit the driving conditions ly as the vehicle moves. will sound. ››› . The engine can only start with the selector – Press and hold the brake pedal ››› . On level ground it is sufficient to move the lever in the position P or N. At low tempera- – Apply the handbrake. selector lever to position P. On slopes, first tures, below -10°C (50°F), the engine can on- engage the parking brake and then put the ly start with the selector lever in the position – Move the selector lever to position P. selection lever into the P position. This P. avoids overloading the locking mechanism Holding the car on a hill and it will be easier to move the selector lev- Starting the vehicle – Always apply the brake pedal firmly to pre- er from position P. – Press and hold the brake pedal. vent the vehicle from “moving backwards; if necessary, apply the handbrake” ››› . WARNING – Press and hold the interlock button (the Do not try to stop the vehicle “rolling back” button on the selector lever handle), move Observe the safety warnings ››› in Selector by increasing the engine speed when a the selector lever to the desired position, lever positions on page 185. gear is engaged (pressing the accelerator) ››› . 188 Driving

● Never allow the brake to rub and do not use Kick-down feature The engine speed for launch-control is differ- the brake pedal too often or for long periods. ent on petrol and diesel engines. To use the Constant braking causes overheating in the The kick-down feature allows maximum ac- launch-control you must disconnect the anti- brakes. This could significantly reduce brak- celeration to be reached. slip regulation (ASR) through the Easy Con- ing power, increase braking distance or even nect system menu page 114. The warning When the accelerator pedal is pressed right ››› result in the total failure of the brake system. lamp  will stay switched on or will flash data Technical down past the point of resistance at full throt- slowly depending on whether or not the vehi- ● To avoid rolling back on gradients always tle, the gearbox will shift down to a lower cle has a driver information system*. hold the vehicle with the footbrake or hand- gear, depending on road speed and engine brake if you have to stop. speed. The upshift to the next higher gear is On vehicles with the driver information sys- delayed until the engine reaches maximum tem, the ESC lamp lights up permanently and CAUTION rpm. the corresponding text message Stability Advice ● If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, do not control deactivated (temporary) ap- attempt to stop it from rolling by depressing WARNING pears on the instrument panel to indicate the the accelerator when a gear has been selec- Please note that if the road surface is slip- deactivation status. ted. This could cause overheating and dam- pery or wet, the kick-down feature could – When the engine is running, switch off the age the automatic gearbox. Apply the hand- cause the driving wheels to spin, which could traction control (ASR)1). brake firmly or press the brake pedal in order result in skidding. to prevent the vehicle from rolling back. – Turn the selector lever to the position “S” Operation ● If you allow the car to roll with the selector or tiptronic, or else select the sport driving mode from the SEAT Drive Profile* lever in position N with the engine switched Launch control programme off, the automatic gearbox will be damaged ››› page 224. as it will not be lubricated. 3 Valid for vehicles: with Launch-Control/6-Speed DSG with diesel engines superior to 125 kW and pet- – Press the brake pedal firmly with your left ● In certain driving situations or traffic condi- rol engines superior to 140 kW. foot and hold it down for at least one sections, such as frequently starting, prolonged

ond. Emergencies “creeping” of the vehicle or traffic jams with The Launch control programme enables maxi- continuous stoppages, the gearbox could mum acceleration. – With your right foot, press the accelerator overheat causing damage! If the warning down to the full throttle or kick-down posi- lamp  lights up, stop the vehicle as soon as Important: the engine must have reached option. The engine speed will stabilise at possible and wait for the gearbox to cool erating temperature and the steering wheel about 3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about ››› page 191. must not be turned. 2,000 rpm (diesel engine). » Safety

1) Vehicles without driver information system: the warning lamp flashes slowly/Vehicles with driver information system: the warning lamp stays on. 189 Operation

– Take your left foot off the brake pedal. Downhill speed control* maintained constant in all situations. Always be prepared to use the brakes! WARNING The downhill speed control function helps ● Always adapt your driving style to the traf- the driver when driving down steep gradients. fic conditions. Inertia mode ● Only use the launch control programme Downhill speed control is activated when the when road and traffic conditions permit, and selector lever is in D/S and the driver applies The inertia mode enables the kinetic energy make sure your manner of driving and accel- the foot brake. The automatic gearbox auto- of the vehicle to be harnessed enabling cer- erating the vehicle does not inconvenience or matically engages a lower gear that is suita- tain stretches to be driven without using the endanger other road users. ble for the slope. The downhill speed control accelerator. This enables fuel to be saved. ● Make sure that the ESC remains switched function attempts to maintain the speed at Use the inertia mode to “let the vehicle roll” on. Please note that when the ASR and ESC which the vehicle was travelling when the before, for example, arriving in a town. are deactivated, the wheels may start to spin, foot brake was applied (subject to the laws of causing the vehicle to lose grip. Risk of acci- physics and technical drive limitations). It Switching on inertia mode dent! may be necessary to adjust the speed again Important: selector lever must be in position ● After putting the vehicle into gear, the using the foot brake in certain situations. Giv- D, gradients below 12 %. “sport” mode of the ESC should be deactiva- en that the downhill speed control can only ted again by briefly pressing the OFF but- change down to 3rd gear, on very steep de- – Select, in SEAT Drive Profile*, Eco mode ton. scents the tiptronic mode may be required. In ››› page 224. this case, manually reduce the tiptronic to – Take your foot off the accelerator. Note 2nd or 1st gear to use the engine brake and The driver message Inertia will be dis- ● reduce the charge on the brakes. After using the Launch control programme, played. At speeds higher than 20 km/h (12 the temperature in the gearbox may have in- Downhill speed control is deactivated as mph), the gearbox will automatically disen- creased considerably. In this case, the pro- soon as the road levels out again or you gage and the vehicle will roll freely, without gramme could be disabled for several mi- press the accelerator pedal. nutes. The programme can be used again af- the effect of the engine brake. While the vehi- ter the cooling phase. On vehicles with cruise control system* cle rolls, the engine runs at idling speed. ● Accelerating with the Launch control pro- ››› page 200, downhill speed control is acti- gramme places a heavy load on all parts of vated when you set a cruising speed. Stopping inertia mode the vehicle. This can result in increased wear – Press the brake or the accelerator pedal. and tear. WARNING To make use of the braking force and switch The downhill speed control cannot defy the off the engine again, simply press the brake laws of physics. Therefore, speed cannot be pedal briefly. 190 Driving

Applying both the inertia mode (= prolonged Backup programme and the driver message do not switch off, do section with less energy) and the switching not continue driving. Seek specialist assis- off using inertia (= shorter section without A backup programme is in place if a fault tance. the need for fuel) facilitates improved fuel should occur in the control system. consumption and emission balance. If all the positions of the selector lever are shown over a light background on the instru- Gearbox malfunctions data Technical WARNING ment panel display, there is a system fault ● If the inertia mode has been switched on, and the automatic gearbox will operate in  Gearbox: Fault! Stop the ve- take into account, when approaching an ob- with the backup programme. When the back- hicle and place the lever in the stacle and releasing the accelerator pedal, up programme is activated, it is possible to position P.

that the vehicle will not decelerate in the usu- Advice drive the vehicle, however, at low speeds and There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi- al manner: risk of accident! within a selected range of gears. In some ca- cle in a safe place and do not continue driv- ● When using inertia mode while travelling ses driving in reverse gear may not be possi- ing. Seek specialist assistance. down hills, the vehicle can increase speed: ble. risk of accident!  Gearbox: System fault! You ● If other users drive your vehicle, warn them CAUTION may continue driving. about inertia mode. If the gearbox operates with the backup pro- Have the fault corrected by a specialised Operation gramme, take the vehicle to a specialised workshop without delay. Note workshop and have the fault repaired without  Gearbox: System fault! You delay. ● Inertia mode is only available in eco (SEAT can continue driving with re- Drive Profile*) driving mode. strictions. Reverse gear disa‐ ● The driver message Inertia is only dis- bled Clutch played with the current consumption. In iner- Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop

tia mode the gear will no longer be displayed Emergencies and have the fault repaired without delay. (for example “E” will appear instead of “E7”).  Clutch overheating! Please ● On downhill sections with gradients above stop!  Gearbox: System fault! You 15 %, the inertia mode will automatically be The clutch has overheated and could be dam- can continue driving in D until switched off temporarily. aged. Stop the vehicle and wait for the gear- switching off the engine

box to cool with the engine at idling speed Stop the vehicle in a safe place well away Safety and the selector lever in position P. When the from moving traffic. Seek specialist assis- warning lamp and the driver message switch tance. » off, have the fault corrected by a specialised workshop without delay. If the warning lamp 191 Operation

 Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your How the vehicle is driven for the first 1,500 ● Use of compatible plastics in the same part driving accordingly km influences the future engine perform- if its components are not easily separated. ance. Subsequently, also drive at a moderate Continue driving at moderate speeds. When ● Use of recycled materials and/or materials rate, especially when the engine is still cold: the warning lamp switches off, you can con- originating from renewable sources. this will lead to less engine wear and tear tinue driving in a normal manner. ● and will prolong its useful life. Reduction of volatile components, includ-  Gearbox: press the brake and ing odour, in plastic materials. You should also avoid driving with the engine engage a gear again. ● Use of CFC-free coolants. speed too low. Change down to a lower gear If the fault was caused by a gearbox with a when the engine no longer runs “smoothly”. Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions high temperature, this driver message will be If the engine revs too much, cut fuel injection dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive displayed when the gearbox has cooled to protect the engine. 2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexa- again. valent chromium.

Environmental compatibility Manufacturing methods ● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the Run-in and economical driving Environmental protection is a top priority in protective wax for cavities. the design, choice of materials and manufac- Running-in the engine ture of your new SEAT. ● Use of plastic film as protection during vehicle transport. A new vehicle should be run in over a dis- Constructive measures to encourage recy- ● Use of solvent-free adhesives. tance of 1500 km (1000 miles). For the first cling 1,000 km the engine speed should not ex- ● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys- ceed 2/3 of the maximum permissible engine ● Joints and connections designed for easy tems. speed. In doing so, do not accelerate at full dismantling. ● Recycling and energy recovery from resi- throttle and do not drive with a trailer! From ● Modular construction to facilitate disman- dues (RDF). 1000 to 1500 km (600 to 1000 miles) you tling. ● Improvement in the quality of waste water. can gradually increase the engine rpm and ● Increased use of single-grade materials. road speed. ● Use of systems for the recovery of residual ● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels, During its first few hours of running, the in- accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and etc.). ternal friction in the engine is greater than ISO 1629. ● The use of water-soluble paints. later on when all the moving parts have bed- ded down. Choice of materials ● Use of recycled materials. 192 Driving

Economical and environmentally- brakes and tyres. Emissions and fuel con- and at traffic lights that remain red for long friendly driving sumption will drop to zero due to the overrun periods of time. When an engine has reached fuel cut-off. operating temperature, and depending on Fuel consumption, environmental pollution the cylinder capacity, keeping it switched off and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres de- Changing gear to save energy for a minimum of about 5 seconds already

saves more than the amount of fuel necessa- data Technical pends largely on driving style. Fuel consump- An effective way of saving is to change in ad- ry for restarting. tion can be reduced by 10-15% with an eco- vance to a higher gear. Running the engine at nomical driving style and proper anticipation high rpm in the lower gears uses an unneces- The engine takes a long time to warm up of traffic conditions. The following section sary amount of fuel. when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu- gives you some tips on lessening the impact tant emissions are also especially high dur-

Manual gearbox: shift up from first to second Advice on the environment and reducing your oper- ing this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore gear as soon as possible. In any case, we rec- ating costs at the same time. best to drive off immediately after starting ommend that you change to a higher gear the engine. Avoid running the engine at high ® upon reaching 2,000 rpm. Choosing the right Active cylinder management (ACT )* speed. gear enables fuel savings. Select the highest Depending on vehicle equipment, the active possible gear appropriate for the driving sit- ® cylinder management (ACT ) may automati- uation (the engine should continue function- Regular maintenance cally deactivate some of the engine cylinders ing with cyclical regularity). Regular servicing helps in saving fuel even Operation if the driving situation does not require too before the engine is started. A well-serviced Automatic gearbox: accelerate gradually and much power. When it is switched off, no fuel engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel without reaching the “kick-down” position. is injected into these cylinders, hence total efficiency as well as maximum reliability and fuel consumption may be reduced. The num- an enhanced resale value. A badly serviced Avoid driving at high speed ber of active cylinders can be seen on the in- engine can consume up to 10% more fuel strument panel display ›››  page 34. Avoid travelling at top speed, whenever pos- than necessary. sible. Fuel consumption, emission of harmful Emergencies Foresight when driving gases and noise pollution multiply dispropor- Avoid short journeys tionately as speed is increased. Driving at Acceleration causes the vehicle to consume The engine and catalytic converter need to moderate speeds will help to save fuel. more fuel. If you think ahead when driving, reach their optimal operating temperature in you will need to brake less and thus acceler- order to minimise fuel consumption and ate less. Wherever possible, let the car roll Reduce idling time

emissions. Safety slowly to a stop, with a gear engaged (for in- In vehicles with the Start-Stop system idling A cold engine consumes a disproportionate stance when you can see that the next traffic is automatically reduced. In vehicles without amount of fuel. The engine reaches its work- lights are red). This takes advantage of the the Start-Stop system it is worth switching off ing temperature after about four kilometres engine braking effect, reducing wear on the the engine, for example, at level crossings » 193 Operation

(2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will re- a high setting, the rear window heating or Catalytic converter turn to a normal level. the seat heating*. 3 Applies to vehicles with petrol engine

Check tyre pressure The vehicle must only be used with unleaded Always make sure the tyres are inflated to the Engine management and ex- petrol, otherwise the catalytic converter will correct pressures ››› page 278 to save fuel. If be irreparably damaged. the pressure is below half bar, fuel consump- haust gas purification system Never drive until the tank is empty; an irregu- tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greater lar supply of fuel can cause faulty combus- rolling resistance, under-inflation also increa- Introduction tion. In these cases, unburned fuel reaches ses tyre wear and impairs handling. the exhaust system, which can overheat and WARNING Do not use winter tyres all year round as they damage the catalytic converter. increase fuel consumption by up to 10%. ● Because of the high temperatures which can occur in the exhaust purification system Avoid carrying unnecessary loads (catalytic converter or diesel particulate fil- Diesel particulate filter ter), do not park the vehicle where the ex- 3 Applies to vehicles with diesel engine Given that every kilo of extra weight will in- haust can come into contact with flammable crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable materials under the car (e.g. on grass or at The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates to always check the luggage compartment to the forest edge). Fire hazard! most of the soot from the exhaust gas sys- make sure that no unnecessary loads are be- ● Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle tem. Under normal driving conditions, the fil- ing transported. around the area of the exhaust system: Fire ter cleans itself. The diesel particulate filter is Since the luggage rack increases the aerody- hazard! cleaned automatically without need for indi- namic drag of the vehicle, you should remove cation by the warning lamp . This may be it when not needed. At speeds of 100-120 Note noticed because the engine idle speed increases and an odour may be detected. km/h (62-75 mph), this will save 12% of fuel. While the control lamps , ,  or  remain lit, there may be engine problems, fuel If automatic filter purification cannot be car- Save electrical energy consumption may increase and the engine ried out (because only short trips are taken, The engine drives the alternator, thereby gen- may lose power. for example), soot will accumulate on the fil- erating electricity. This implies that any inter and the Diesel particulate filter warning crease in power consumption also increases lamp will  switch on. fuel consumption! For this reason, switch off Facilitate the automatic filter cleaning proc- any unneeded electrical devices. Devices that ess by driving in the following manner: drive use a lot of electricity includes the blower at for approximately 15 minutes at a minimum speed of 60 km/h (37 mph) in 4th or 5th gear 194 Driving

(automatic gearbox: gear S). Maintain the en- The control lamp  lights up: Driving tips gine speed at approximately 2,000 rpm. The If a fault has developed during driving which rise in temperature causes the soot on the fil- has reduced the quality of the exhaust gas Driving through flooded roads ter to burn. On completion of the cleaning (e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and the warning lamp will switch off. If the warn- drive carefully to the nearest specialised To prevent damage to the vehicle when driving lamp does not switch off, go immediately workshop to have the engine checked. ing through water, for example, along a floo- data Technical to a specialised workshop to rectify the prob- ded road, please observe the following: lem. ● The water should never come above the Engine pre-heating/fault system*  lower edge of the bodywork.

Engine management*  The warning lamp lights up to show that the ● Drive at pedestrian speed. Advice glow plugs are preheating the diesel engine. This warning lamp monitors the engine man- WARNING agement system for petrol engines. The control lamp  lights up After driving through water, mud, sludge, The warning lamp  (Electronic Power Con- If the control lamp  lights up when the en- etc., the braking effect can be delayed slight- trol) lights up when the ignition is switched gine is started it means that the glow plugs ly due to moisture build-up on the discs and on while system operation is being verified. It are preheating. The engine can be started brake pads. Applying the brakes carefully several times will remove the moisture and Operation should go out once the engine is started. straight away when the lamp switches off. restore the full braking effect. If there is a fault in the electronic engine management system while you are driving, Control lamp  flashes CAUTION this warning lamp will light up. Take the vehi- If a fault develops in the engine management cle to a specialised workshop as soon as system while you are driving, the glow plug ● Driving through flooded areas may severely possible and have the engine checked. system lamp will flash . Take the vehicle to damage vehicle components such as the en-

a specialised workshop as soon as possible gine, transmission, running gear or electrical Emergencies system. and have the engine checked. Emission control system*  ● Whenever driving through water, the Start- Stop system* must be switched off Control lamp  flashes: ››› page 196.

When there is misfiring that can damage the Safety catalytic converter. Reduce speed and drive Note carefully to the nearest specialised workshop ● Check the depth of the water before enter- to have the engine checked. ing the flooded zone. »

195 Operation

● Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse, or Driver assistance systems ● The bonnet must be closed. stop the engine in any situation. ● The engine must have reached a minimum ● Note that vehicles travelling in the opposite Start-Stop System* service temperature. direction may splash water that could exceed ● The reverse gear must not be engaged. the maximum permitted water height for your ● vehicle. Description and operation The vehicle must not be on a very steep slope. ● Avoid driving through salt water (corro- The Start-Stop system helps save fuel and re- sion). duce CO2 emissions. WARNING In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automati- ● Never switch the engine off until the vehi- cally switch off when the vehicle stops or is cle is stationary. The brake servo and power stopping; for example when stopping at traf- steering functions will not be completely cov- fic lights. The ignition remains switched on ered under warranty. More force may also be during the stopping phase. The engine auto- needed to turn the steering wheel or to brake. As you cannot steer and brake in the normal matically switches back on when required. In manner, there is a greater risk of accidents this situation, the light of the and serious injury. START ENGINE STOP button stays on1). ● Never remove the key from the ignition if As soon as the ignition is switched on, the the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer- Start-Stop function is automatically activa- ing could lock making it impossible to steer ted. the vehicle. Further information about the Start-Stop sys- ● To avoid injury, make sure that the Start- tem can be found in the Easy Connect sys- Stop system is switched off when working in the engine compartment ››› page 198. tem: by pressing the  button in the Vehi- cle status menu. CAUTION Basic requirements for the Start-Stop mode The Start-Stop system must always be ● The driver door must be closed. switched off when driving through flooded areas ››› page 198. ● The driver must have their seat belt fastened.

1) Only in vehicles with Keyless Access. 196 Driver assistance systems

Stopping/Starting the engine Additional information related to the auto- again by immediately pressing the clutch matic gearbox pedal. Vehicles with a manual gearbox The engine stops when the selector lever is in – Before stopping the vehicle or when it is the positions P, D, N and S, in addition to stopped, put it into neutral and release the when in manual mode. With the selector lev- General notes clutch pedal. The engine will switch off. The er in position P, the engine will also remain data Technical warning lamp  will appear on the instru- switched off when you take your foot off the The system can interrupt the Start-Stop mode ment panel display. The engine may stop brake pedal. In order to start the engine up frequently for different reasons. before the vehicle comes to a halt in the again the accelerator must be pressed, or an- deceleration phase (at 7 km/h). other gear engaged or the brake released. The engine does not switch off Advice – When the clutch pedal is pressed the en- If the selector lever is placed in position R Before the stopping phase, the system veri- gine will start up again. The warning lamp during the stopping phase, the engine will fies whether certain conditions are met. The will switch off. start up again. engine does not switch off, in the following Change from position D to P to prevent the situations for example: Vehicles with an automatic gearbox engine from accidentally starting when ● The engine has not yet reached the mini- – Use the foot brake to bring the vehicle to a changing and passing by position R. mum required temperature for the Start-Stop stop and keep the brake pedal pressed mode. Operation down with your foot. The engine will switch Note off. The warning lamp  will appear in the ● The interior temperature selected for the air ● In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, you conditioner has not yet been reached. display. The engine may stop before the ve- can control whether the engine should switch ● hicle comes to a halt in the deceleration off or not by reducing or increasing the brake The interior temperature is very high/low. phase (at 7 km/h or 2 km/h, depending on force applied. While the vehicle remains stop- ● Defrost function button activated the vehicle’s gearbox). ped, the engine will not stop if the brake ped- ›››  page 48. al is slightly pressed, in traffic jams with fre- Emergencies – When you take your foot off the brake pedal ● The parking aid* is switched on. quent stopping and starting for example. As the engine will start up again. The warning soon as strong pressure is applied to the ● The battery is very low. lamp will switch off. In vehicles with the Au- brake pedal, the engine will stop. to Hold* system, when the system is active, ● The steering wheel is overly turned or is be- ● the engine will not start if you remove your In vehicles with manual gearbox, during ing turned.

the stopping phases the brake pedal must re- Safety foot from the brake pedal. The car starts ● If there is a danger of misting. main depressed to prevent the vehicle from when you press the accelerator pedal. moving. ● After engaging reverse gear. ● If the engine “stalls” in vehicles with man- ● In case of a very steep gradient. » ual gearbox, it can be directly started up 197 Operation

The indication . is shown on the instrument Manually switching on/off the Start- Driver messages on the instrument panel display, and in addition, the driver in- Stop system panel display formation system* shows, . Start-Stop system deactivated. The engine starts by itself Start the engine manually During a stopping phase the normal Start- This driver message is displayed when cer- Stop mode can be interrupted in the follow- tain conditions are not met during the stop- ing situations: The engine restarts by itself ping phase and the Start-Stop system cannot without involvement from the driver. restart the engine. The engine must be started manually. ● The interior temperature differs from the value selected on the air conditioner. Start-Stop system: Fault! Func- ● Defrost function button activated tion not available ›››  page 48. Fig. 197 Centre console: Start-Stop system There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Take ● The brake has been pressed several times button. the vehicle to a workshop to have the fault consecutively. repaired. If you do not wish to use the system, you can ● The battery is too low. switch it off manually. ● High power consumption. – To manually switch on/off the Start-Stop  Note system, press the button . The button symbol remains lit up yellow when the sys- In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, if the tem is switched off. selector lever is placed in position D, N or S after engaging reverse gear, the vehicle must Note be driven at a speed faster than 10 km/h (6 mph) for the system to return to conditions in The system is automatically switched on each which the engine can be stopped. time the engine is deliberately stopped during a stopping phase. The engine will start automatically.

198 Driver assistance systems

Auto Hold Function* After detecting that the vehicle is stationary Automatically engaging and disengaging the and the brake pedal has been released, the Auto Hold function Description and operation Auto Hold function holds the vehicle. The If the Auto Hold function was switched on driver can lift their foot off the brake pedal. with the  button before disengaging the ig- When the driver touches the accelerator ped- nition, the function will remain on after the al or accelerates slightly to continue driving, ignition is re-engaged. data Technical the Auto Hold function releases the brake. If the Auto Hold function was not switched The vehicle moves according to the slope of on, it will automatically remain off next time the road. the ignition is engaged.

If the vehicle is stationary and one of the con- Advice ditions required by the Auto Hold function is The Auto Hold function is automatically impaired, it disconnects itself and the but- switched on if the following conditions are ton's control light goes out ››› Fig. 198. The met: electronic parking brake connects automati- Fig. 198 In the lower part of the centre con- cally, if necessary, to park the vehicle safe- All conditions must be met at the same time sole: Auto Hold function button. ly ››› . ››› :

 Manual gearbox Automatic gearbox Operation The control light of the ››› Fig. 198 button Conditions for keeping the vehicle stationary remains on when the Auto Hold function is with the Auto Hold function 1. The vehicle is kept stationary with the brake ped- connected. al on a flat surface or on a slope. ● The driver door must be closed. Once connected, the Auto Hold function as- ● The driver's seat belt must be fastened. 2. The engine rotates “correctly”. sists the driver in keeping the vehicle stationary at repeated intervals or for a certain peri- ● The engine is running. Upon pressing the Upon accelerating, the clutch and accelerating brake releases gradu- od of time with the engine running, for exam- Emergencies at the same time, the ally. » ple, when going up a slope, when stopped at Switching the Auto Hold function on and off brake releases gradu- traffic lights or in heavy traffic with intermit- Press the button  ››› . The control lamp on ally. tent stops. the button goes out when the Auto Hold func- When connected, the Auto Hold function au- tion is switched off. tomatically prevents the vehicle from rolling Safety when stationary without pressing the brake pedal.

199 Operation

The Auto Hold function is automatically ● The Auto Hold function cannot always keep Read the additional information carefully turned off if the following conditions are the vehicle stationary uphill or downhill or ›››  page 42 met: stop it sufficiently, for example, on slippery The cruise control system (CCS) is able to or frozen surfaces. Manual gearbox Automatic gearbox maintain the set speed from 20 km/h (15 mph). If any of the conditions mentioned on Note ››› page 199, Conditions for keeping the vehicle The CSS only reduces vehicle speed by ceas- 1. stationary with the Auto Hold function are no lon- Before entering a car wash, always switch off ing to accelerate, not by actively braking the ger met. the Auto Hold function, because if the elec- vehicle ››› . tronic parking brake is automatically connec- If the engine is running irregularly or an anomaly 2. ted, it may cause damage. is detected. Control lamp When the warning lamp  is lit, cruise con- If the engine is turned If the engine is switch- 3. off or stalls. ed off. trol is active. Cruise control system (CCS)* The clutch and the ac- Several warning and control lamps light up If the accelerator is 4. celerator are pressed at for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- pressed. the same time. Operation ed on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few sec- If any of the tyres has onds. only minimal contact 5. with the ground, e.g. in the case of axle articu- Displayed on the CCS screen lation. Status Fig. 199:

WARNING A CCS temporarily switched off. The set speed is displayed in small figures. The smart technology incorporated into the Auto Hold function cannot defy the laws of B System error. Contact a specialised work- physics; it only works within the limits of the shop. system. The greater convenience provided by C CCS switched on. The speed memory is the Auto Hold function should never tempt empty. you to take any risk that may compromise safety. D The CCS is switched on. The set speed is ● Never leave the vehicle running and with Fig. 199 Instrument panel display: CCS status displayed in large figures. the Auto Hold function switched on. indications.

200 Driver assistance systems

WARNING Operating the cruise control system* Adaptive Cruise Control ACC* Use of the cruise control could cause acci- Read the additional information carefully Related video dents and severe injuries if it is not possible ›››  page 42 to drive at a constant speed maintaining the safety distance. The value indicated in the table in brackets Technical data Technical ● Do not use the cruise control in heavy traf- (in mph, miles per hour) only refers to instru- fic, if the distance from the vehicle in front is ment panels with indications in miles. insufficient, on steep roads, with several bends or in slippery circumstances (snow, Changing gear in CCS mode ice, rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads.

The CCS decelerates as soon as the clutch Fig. 200 Safety Advice ● Never use the CCS when driving off-road or pedal is pressed, intervening again automati- on unpaved roads. cally after a gear is engaged. ● Always adapt your speed and the distance Introduction to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility, Travelling down hills with the CCS weather conditions, the condition of the road and the traffic situation. When travelling down hills the CCS cannot maintain a constant speed. Slow the vehicle ● To avoid unexpected operation of the cruise control system, turn it off every time you fin- down using the brake pedal and reduce Operation ish using it. gears if required. ● It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the prevailing road, traffic or Automatic off weather conditions. The cruise control system (CCS) is switched ● When travelling down hills, the CCS cannot off automatically or temporarily: maintain a constant speed. The vehicle tends ● Emergencies to accelerate under its own weight. Select a If the system detects a fault that could af- lower gear or use the foot brake to slow the fect the working order of the CCS. Fig. 201 Detection area. vehicle. ● If you press and maintain the accelerator pedal for a certain time, driving faster than The adaptive cruise control (ACC) is an exten- WARNING the stored speed. sion of the normal cruise control system (CCS) ››› . Safety Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning ● If the dynamic driving control systems in- and control lamps on page 113. tervene (e.g. ASR or ESC). The ACC function allows the driver to estab- ● If the airbag is triggered. lish a cruise speed of between 30 and 210 km/h (18 and 150 mph), as well as the » 201 Operation

temporary distance required with regard to ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to the CAUTION the vehicle in front. The ACC function will vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi- If you have the sensation that the radar sen- adapt the vehicle's cruise speed at all times, bility, weather, road and traffic conditions. maintaining a safe distance with the vehicle sor is damaged, disconnect the ACC. This will ● Do not use the ACC when visibility is bad, avoid possible damage. If this occurs have it in front. on steep roads, with several bends or in slip- adjusted. pery circumstances such as snow, ice, rain or The ACC function is based on a radar sensor ● Repairs to the radar sensor require special- loose gravel, or on flooded roads. that can measure the distance to the vehicles ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom- in front. ● Never use the ACC when driving off-road or mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur- on unpaved roads. The ACC has been de- pose. If the vehicle is equipped with automatic signed for use on paved roads only. gearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle until ● The ACC does not react on approaching a it stops completely if a vehicle in front of it Note fixed obstacle, such as the tail of a traffic stops. jam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stopped ● If the ACC system does not work as descri- at the traffic lights. bed in this chapter, do not use it until it has Driver intervention prompt been checked by a specialised workshop. ● The ACC only reacts to people if a pedes- SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership During driving, the ACC is subject to certain trian monitoring system is available. In addi- for this purpose. limitations inherent in the system. In other tion, the system does not react to animals or words, in certain circumstances the driver will vehicles crossing your path or approaching ● Maximum speed with the ACC activated is have to adjust speed him or herself, as well head-on down the same lane. limited to 210 km/h (150 mph). as the distance from other vehicles. ● If the ACC does not reduce speed sufficient- ● When the ACC is switched on, strange ly, brake the vehicle immediately by applying noises may be heard during automatic brak- In this case, the instrument panel screen will the pedal. ing cause by the braking system. warn you to intervene by applying the brake and a warning tone will be heard ● If you are driving using the spare wheel, the ACC system could automatically switch ››› page 203. off during the journey. Switch off the system when starting off. WARNING ● If the vehicle continues to move involuntar- The intelligent technology in the ACC cannot ily after a driver intervention prompt, brake overcome the system's inherent limitations the vehicle by applying the pedal. or change the laws of physics. If used negli- ● If the dash panel displays a driver interven- gently or involuntarily, it may cause serious tion prompt, adjust the distance yourself. accidents and injuries. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. ● The driver should be ready to accelerate or brake by him/herself at all times.

202 Driver assistance systems

Indications on the display, warning 2 Distance margin selected, the ACC is in-  The ACC is active. and control lamps active. No vehicle is detected in front. The programmed speed 3 Vehicle detected in front. The ACC is ac- remains constant. tive. 4 Adjustment of the temporary distance If the symbol is white: the ACC is ac- data Technical from the vehicle in front with a program-  tive. med speed. 5 Temporary distance adjustment from the A vehicle in front has been detected. The ACC adjusts vehicle in front with a programmed speed and distance from the vehicle in front.

speed. Advice  If the symbol is grey: the ACC is not Warning and control lamps active. The system is switched on, but is not adjusting. ››› in Warning and control lamps on page 113.  It lights up green The speed reduction by the ACC to The ACC is active. Operation  maintain the distance from the vehicle in front is not sufficient. Some warning and control lamps will light up Brake! apply the foot brake! Driver intervention prompt. briefly when the ignition is switched on to check certain functions. They will switch off after a few seconds.  The ACC is not currently available.a) Fig. 202 On the instrument panel display: (A)

WARNING Emergencies ACC temporarily inactive, vehicle detected in With the vehicle stationary, switch off the engine and front, temporary distance adjusted. (B) ACC start it up again. Check the radar sensor visually for dirt, Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning active, vehicle detected in front, temporary ice or knocks. If it is still unavailable, refer to a special- and control lamps on page 113. ised workshop to have the system inspected. distance adjusted. a) The symbol on the instrument panels with colour display is in Note

Status display colour. Safety When the ACC is connected, the indications Indications on the display ››› Fig. 202: on the instrument panel screen may be con- 1 Vehicle in front, the ACC is inactive. cealed by warnings from other functions, such as an incoming call.

203 Operation

Radar sensor presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails on the mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur- road or sheets used in road works). pose. The area in front of and around the radar sen- ● Clean away the snow with a brush and the sor should not be covered with adhesives, ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer additional or similar headlights, as this may spray. negatively affect ACC operation. If structural modifications are made to the vehicle, for example, if the suspension is lowered or the front spoiler is modified, ACC operation may be affected. So structural modifications should only be made by specialised workshops. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT Fig. 203 On the front bumper: radar sensor. dealership for this purpose. A radar sensor is installed on the front bump- If work is done incorrectly on the front of the er to determine the traffic situation vehicle, the radar sensor could be damaged ››› Fig. 203 1 . or lose its settings, and ACC operation may The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired be affected. So repair work should only be by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in- made by specialised workshops. SEAT recom- fluences such as rain or mist. In this case the mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur- adaptive cruise control (ACC) does not work. pose. The instrument panel displays the following CAUTION message: ACC: No sensor vision! If necessary clean the radar sensor ››› . If you have the sensation that the radar sensor is damaged or has lost its settings, dis- When the radar sensor begins to operate connect the ACC. This will avoid possible properly again, the ACC will automatically be damage. If this occurs have it adjusted. available again. The message on the instru- ● The sensor may become damaged or lose ment panel screen will switch off and the ACC its settings when knocked, for example, dur- will be reactivated again. ing a parking manoeuvre. This may compro- ACC operation may be affected by a strong ra- mise the system's efficacy or disconnect it. dar reverse reflection. This may occur, for ex- ● Repairs to the radar sensor require special- ample, in a closed car park or due to the ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom-

204 Driver assistance systems

Operating the Adaptive Cruise Control When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is The following settings can also be adjusted: ACC connected, the green control lamp  will light up on the instrument panel, and the ● Distance. programmed speed and ACC status will be ● Driving Programme. displayed ››› Fig. 202. ● Driving style. Technical data Technical Conditions for the adaptive cruise control to Activating/Deactivating be activated Any speed1) between 30 and 210 km/h (19 ● The selector lever must be at the D or S po- and 150 mph) can be adjusted. sition or in the tiptronic selection track. In Advice manual gearbox any forward gear must be Activating the ACC engaged, except the 1st gear. ● Pull the lever to position 1 ››› Fig. 204. ● In vehicles with manual gearbox, if there is ACC standby will be shown on the instrument Fig. 204 On the left of the steering column: no programmed speed, drive at least at panel display. third lever for operating the Adaptive Cruise 30 km/h (18 mph). Control. Programme speed and activate control Speed control ● Press the SET ››› Fig. 205 button to pro- Operation When the ACC is connected, speed can be gramme current speed. programmed and adjusted. The programmed speed must be different from the speed at ● Automatic gearbox: apply the brake pedal which the vehicle travels if the distance is be- to activate control with the vehicle stationary. ing adjusted at the time. Deactivating the ACC

What functions can be operated? ● Move the lever to position 0 until it en- Emergencies If you activate the ACC the current speed can gages. The text ACC: off appears. be programmed as the “control speed”. Altering speed Fig. 205 On the left of the steering column: During driving, control can be operated at third lever for operating the Adaptive Cruise any time and the speed also modified. ● To increase or reduce speed step by step, Control. press the lever up/down briefly ››› Fig. 205. » Safety

1) Different speed limits apply in each country and depend on the unit indicated on the speedometer. 205 Operation

Any modification to the programmed speed The following driving programmes items can tion by the ACC will not suffice. In this case is shown on the bottom left part of the instru- be selected: the brake pedal should be applied immedi- ment panel display. ately. ● Normal ● The ACC may not be able to detect all situa- Adjusting distance level ● Sport tions properly. The distance according to speed with regard ● Eco ● “Stepping” on the accelerator may cause to the vehicle in front can be controlled on the ACC not to intervene in braking. Driver the Easy Connect system on 5 levels In vehicles without the driving profile selec- braking will have priority over intervention by tion function, acceleration behaviour can be ›››  page 30. the speed control or adaptive cruise control. influenced by selecting a driving programme ● Always be ready to use the brakes! In wet road conditions, you should always set on the Easy Connect system using the  a larger distance with regard to the vehicle in button and the SETTINGS and Driver assistance ● Observe country-specific provisions gov- front than when driving in dry conditions. function buttons ›››  page 30. erning obligatory minimum distances between vehicles. The following distances can be preselected: The following conditions may lead the ACC ● Very short not to react: Note ● Short ● If the accelerator is pressed. ● The programmed speed is erased once the ignition or the ACC are switched off. ● Media ● If there is no gear engaged. ● When the traction control system (ASR) is ● Long ● If the ESC is controlling. deactivated during acceleration or else the ● Very long ● If the driver is not wearing his/her seat ESC is activated in Sport* Mode belt. (››› page 114), the ACC switches off automati- In the Easy Connect system you can adjust cally. the distance level that will be applied when ● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec- ● In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the  trically connected trailer are damaged. the ACC is connected using the button engine switches off automatically during the ● and the SETTINGS and Driver assistance function If the vehicle is reversing. ACC stopping phase and restarts automatical- buttons ›››  page 30. ● Driving faster than 210 km/h (150 mph). ly to begin driving.

Adjusting the driving programme WARNING In vehicles with driving profile selection There is a danger of rear collision when the Vehicles with an automatic gearbox (SEAT Drive Profile), the profile selected can minimum distance to the vehicle in front is influence acceleration behaviour exceeded and the speed difference between If the vehicle is equipped with automatic ››› page 224. both vehicles is so great that a speed reduc- gearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle until

206 Driver assistance systems it stops completely if a vehicle in front of it Interrupting control ● To resume control, apply the brake and turn stops. the lever to position 2 . The ACC will still be available for a few sec- WARNING onds. The vehicle will restart by itself if the vehicle in front moves (traffic jam assistant). It is dangerous to activate control and resume the programmed speed if the road, traffic or data Technical Disconnection criteria weather conditions do not permit this. Risk of accident! The ACC will switch off if the driver applies the brake pedal or the driver's door is

opened. Advice Setting the distance

Restarting the vehicle with the ACC manually Fig. 206 On the left of the steering column: The ACC can be activated again by moving third lever for operating the Adaptive Cruise the lever to position 2 ››› Fig. 206. Control.

CAUTION Important: the ACC is active. ● If your vehicle with ACC does not start up Operation Interrupting control during driving as expected, you can drive off by briefly stepping on the accelerator. ● Move the lever to the position 3 . The ACC ● The Start-Stop system usually acts if you standby message is displayed to the driver. are driving with ACC. or ● Brake. Fig. 207 Control lever: setting the distance.

● To resume the programmed speed, turn the Emergencies ● To display the distance currently program- lever to position 2 . med, briefly press the rocking button ››› Fig. 207. Interrupt speed control with the vehicle stationary ● To increase/reduce the distance one level, press the rocking button again towards the Applies to vehicles with automatic gearbox: Safety left/right. The instrument panel display ● Move the lever to the position 3 . The ACC modifies the distance between both vehicles. standby message is displayed to the driver. If the vehicle approaches another vehicle detected in front of it, the ACC reduces the » 207 Operation

speed accordingly and then controls the ad- example, to leaves, snow, heavy fog or dirt.  ACC: speed limit justed distance. If the vehicle detected in Clean the sensor. The message for the driver is displayed if, in front accelerates, the adaptive cruise control vehicles with manual gearbox, the current will also accelerate up to the target speed  ACC: currently not available. Gradient too speed is too low for the ACC mode. programmed at most. steep The speed to be stored must be at least The greater the speed, the greater the dis- The maximum road slope has been excee- 30 km/h (18 mph). The speed limiter tance in metres should be ››› . We recom- ded, hence safe ACC operation cannot be switches off if the speed falls below 20 km/h mend the setting Distance 3. guaranteed. The ACC cannot be switched on. (12 mph).

WARNING  ACC: only available in D, S or M  ACC: available as of the 2nd gear With regard to distance setting, the driver is Select the D/S or M position on the selector The ACC is operational as of the 2nd gear responsible for observing country-specific lever. (manual gearbox). legislation.  ACC: parking brake applied  ACC: engine speed The ACC is deactivated if the parking brake is Driver messages The message for the driver is displayed if, applied. The ACC is available once again after when the ACC accelerates or brakes, the driv- the parking brake is released.  ACC not available er does not shift up or down a gear in time, which means exceeding or not reaching the  The system can no longer continue to guar- ACC: currently not available. Intervention permissible engine speed. The ACC switches antee safe vehicle detection and will be de- of stability control itself off. A buzzer warning is heard. activated. The sensor has lost its setting or is The message for the driver is displayed when damaged. Take the vehicle to a specialised the electronic stability control (ESC) inter-  ACC: clutch pressed workshop and have the fault repaired. venes. In this case, the ACC is automatically Vehicles with a manual gearbox: pressing the switched off.  ACC: currently not available. No sensor vi- clutch pedal for longer abandons control mode. sion  ACC: Take action!  ACC and Front Assist: currently not availa- The message for the driver is displayed if, Door open ble. No sensor vision when the vehicle starts up on a hill with a Vehicles with automatic gearbox: the ACC mild slope, the vehicle rolls back even al- This message will be displayed to the driver if cannot be activated with the vehicle station- though the ACC is activated. Apply the brake ary and the door open. the radar sensor's vision is impaired due, for to stop the vehicle from moving/colliding with another vehicle. 208 Driver assistance systems

Function for preventing overtaking in Deactivating the Adaptive Cruise Con- Note an inside lane trol ACC temporarily in certain situa- If you do not switch off the ACC in the afore- tions mentioned situations, you may commit a legal offence. In the following situations the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) should be deactivated data Technical due to the system's limitations ››› : ● When changing lanes, on tight bends and roundabouts, in acceleration and decelera-

tion lanes on motorways or in sections with Advice road works to prevent involuntary acceleration to reach the programmed speed.

Fig. 208 On the instrument panel display: ● When going through a tunnel, as operation ACC active, vehicle detected in an outer lane. could be affected. ● On roads with several lanes, when other ve- The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has a func- hicles are driving more slowly in the overtak- tion that helps avoid overtaking while driving ing lane. In this case, slower vehicles will be Operation in inside lanes at certain speeds. overtaken on the right. If another vehicle is detected travelling at a ● In case of heavy rain, snow or spray, as the slower speed in an outer lane, it is displayed vehicle in front might not be detected proper- on the multifunction display ››› Fig. 208. ly or, in certain circumstances, might not be detected at all. To avoid overtaking while driving in an inside lane the system will gently brake, and in ac- Emergencies WARNING cordance with the speed will prevent the car from overtaking. The driver can override this If the ACC does not switch off in the situa- function at any time. tions described, serious accidents and injuries may occur. ● Always switch off the ACC in critical situa- Safety tions.

209 Operation

Special driving situations Overtaking When the turn signal lights up before the vehicle begins an overtaking manoeuvre, the ACC accelerates the vehicle automatically and thus reduces the distance from the vehicle in front. When the vehicle enters the overtaking lane, if the ACC does not detect another vehicle in front, it accelerates until it reaches the programmed speed and maintains it. System acceleration can be interrupted at any time by pressing the brake or moving the third lever backwards ››› page 205.

Fig. 210 (C) Vehicle changing lanes. (D) One Driving through a bend vehicle turning and another stationary. On entering or exiting bends, the radar sen- Fig. 209 (A) Vehicle on a bend. (B) Motorcy- sor may no longer determine the vehicle in clist ahead out of range of the radar sensor. The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has certain front or react to a vehicle in the adjacent lane physical limitations inherent in the system. ››› Fig. 209 A. In these situations the vehicle For example, certain reactions of the ACC, in may brake unnecessarily or fail to react to re- certain circumstances, may be unexpected or act to the vehicle in front. In this case, the come late from the driver's point of view. So driver has to intervene by accelerating or in- pay attention in order to intervene if necessa- terrupting the braking process by applying ry. the brake or pushing the third lever back- For example, the following traffic situations wards ››› page 205. call for the utmost attention: Driving in tunnels Starting driving after a stopping phase (only When driving through tunnels the radar sen- vehicles with automatic gearbox) sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in tun- After a stopping phase the ACC may begin nels. driving automatically when the vehicle in front drives off. 210 Driver assistance systems

Narrow or misaligned vehicles ››› Fig. 210 D. In these cases, you should Trailer mode The radar sensor can only detect narrow or brake as necessary. When driving with trailer the ACC controls misaligned vehicles when they are within less dynamically. range ››› Fig. 209 B. This applies particularly Vehicles driving in the opposite direction to narrow vehicles such as motorbikes. In and vehicles crossing your path Overheated brakes these cases, you should brake as necessary. data Technical The ACC does not react to vehicles approach- If the brakes overheat, for example after ing from the opposite direction or vehicles abrupt braking or in long and steep slopes, Vehicles with special loads and accessories crossing your path. the ACC may be deactivated temporarily. The Special loads and accessories of other vehi- relevant text message will appear in the dash cles that jut out over the sides, backwards or Metal objects panel display. In this case, adaptive cruise Advice over the top may be out of the ACC's range. Metal objects, e.g. rails on the road or sheets control cannot be activated. Switch off the ACC when driving behind vehi- used in road works, can confuse the radar Adaptive cruise control can be reactivated cles with special loads and accessories or sensor and cause the ACC to react wrongly. once brake temperature has cooled suffi- when overtaking them. In these cases, you ciently. The message will disappear from the should brake as necessary. Factors that may affect how the radar sensor instrument panel display. If the message ACC operates not available remains on for quite a long

Other vehicles changing lanes If laser sensor operation is impaired, due to time it means that there is a fault. Contact a Operation specialised workshop. SEAT recommends vis- Vehicles changing lanes a short distance heavy rain, spray, snow or mud, the ACC is iting a SEAT dealership. away from your own can only be detected deactivated temporarily. The relevant text when they are within range of the sensors. message will appear in the dash panel dis- WARNING Consequently, the ACC will take longer to re- play. If necessary, clean the radar sensor. act ››› Fig. 210 C. In these cases, you should When the radar sensor begins to operate If the message ACC ready to start ap- brake as necessary. properly again, the ACC will automatically be pears on the instrument panel display and Emergencies available again. The message on the instru- the vehicle in front starts up, the vehicle will Stationary vehicles ment panel screen will switch off and the ACC start up automatically. In this case the radar will be reactivated again. sensor may not detect obstacles on the road. The ACC does not detect stationary objects This could cause an accident and serious in- while driving, such as traffic tails or damaged ACC operation may be affected by a strong ra- juries. vehicles. dar reverse reflection, for example in a closed ● Before driving off, check that the road is Safety If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns or car park. clear. If necessary, apply the brake. moves over and there is a stationary vehicle in front of it, the ACC will not react to it

211 Operation

Area monitoring system (Front The warning moment varies depending on contribute to reducing the consequences of the traffic situation and driver behaviour. an accident. Assist) including City emergency braking and pedestrian Advance warning Front assist monitoring* If the system detects a possible collision with If the Front Assist notices that the driver is the vehicle in front, it may warn the driver by not braking sufficiently in case of a collision Introduction means of an audible warning and an indica- hazard, the system can increase braking ef- tion on the instrument panel when driving at fect and thus avert the collision when driving The Front Assist system including City emer- a speed of between approximately 30 km/h at a speed of between approximately 4 km/h gency braking and pedestrian monitoring can (18 mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph) (2.5 mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph). Front help avoid collisions. ››› Fig. 211. assist only acts while the brake pedal is pressed down hard. The Front Assist system may warn the driver, The warning moment varies depending on the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At within the constraints of the system, of im- WARNING pending collisions, prepare the vehicle for the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a emergency braking in case of danger, provide possible emergency braking ››› . The intelligent technology in the Front Assist support during braking and apply automatic cannot change the laws of physics. The driver is always responsible for braking in time. If braking. Critical warning the Front Assist issues a warning, then, de- The City emergency braking and pedestrian If the driver fails to react to the advance pending on the traffic circumstances, you monitoring functions are an integral part of warning, the system may actively intervene in must brake immediately or dodge the obsta- the Front Assist system. the brakes when driving at a speed of be- cle. tween approximately 30 km/h (18 mph) and ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to the The Front Assist is not a replacement for 250 km/h (156 mph), generating a brief jolt vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi- driver awareness. to warn of the imminent collision. bility, weather, road and traffic conditions. ● The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci- Distance warning Automatic braking dents and serious injuries. If the system detects that safety is endan- If the driver also fails to react to the advance ● In complex driving situations, the Front As- gered by the proximity of the vehicle in front, warning, the system may brake the vehicle sist may issue unnecessary warnings and in- it may warn the driver by means of a message automatically, by progressively increasing tervene unnecessarily in braking, such as in on the instrument panel when driving at a braking effect driving at a speed of between traffic islands. speed of between approximately 60 km/h approximately 4 km/h (2.5 mph) and ● If the operation of the Front Assist is im- (37 mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph) 250 km/h (156 mph). By reducing speed in paired, for example, by dirt or because the ra- ››› Fig. 211. case of a possible collision, the system may dar sensor has lost its settings, the system

212 Driver assistance systems may issue unnecessary warnings and On-screen warning lamps and mes- Radar sensor intervene inopportunely in the braking. sages ● During driving, the Front Assist does not react to people or animals or vehicles crossing your path or which approach you head-on in the same lane. data Technical ● The driver must always be ready to take over the control of the vehicle.

Note Advice ● When the Front Assist causes a braking, the brake pedal is “harder”. Fig. 212 On the front bumper: radar sensor. ● Automatic interventions by the Front Assist Fig. 211 On the instrument panel display: on the brakes may be interrupted by pressing Warning indications. A radar sensor is installed on the front bump- the clutch, accelerator or moving the wheel. er to determine the traffic situation ● If the Front Assist does not work as descri- Distance warning ››› Fig. 212 1 . bed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes several Operation If the safe distance with regard to the vehicle times unnecessarily), switch it off. Have the The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired in front is exceeded, the relevant warning will system checked by a specialised workshop. by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in- SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership. appear on the instrument panel display fluences such as rain or mist. In this case the . Front Assist monitoring system does not work. The instrument panel displays the fol- WARNING lowing message: Front Assist: No sensor vision! If necessary clean the ra- Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning Emergencies and control lamps on page 113. dar sensor ››› . When the radar sensor begins to operate Note properly again, the Front Assist will automatically be available again. The message will When the Front Assist is connected, the indi-

cations on the instrument panel screen may disappear from the instrument panel display. Safety be concealed by warnings from other func- Front Assist operation may be affected by a tions, such as an incoming call. strong radar reverse reflection. This may occur, for example, in a closed car park or due »

213 Operation

to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur- Switching the Front Assist on and off on the road or sheets used in road works). pose. With the ignition switched on, the Front As- The area in front of and around the radar sen- ● Clean away the snow with a brush and the sist can be switched on and off as follows: sor should not be covered with adhesives, ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer ● Select the corresponding menu option us- additional or similar headlights, as this may spray. ing the button for the driver assistance sys- negatively affect Front Assist operation. tems ›››  page 34. If structural modifications are made to the ve- ● OR: switch the system on and off in Easy hicle, for example, if the suspension is low- Operating the Front Assist monitoring Connect using the  button and the ered or the front spoiler is modified, Front As- system SETTINGS and Driver assistance function but- sist operation may be affected. So structural tons ›››  page 30. modifications should only be made by specialised workshops. SEAT recommends visiting When Front Assist is switched off, the instru- a SEAT dealership for this purpose. ment panel will inform that it has been switched off with the following indicator  If work is done incorrectly on the front of the ››› Fig. 213. vehicle, the radar sensor could be damaged or lose its settings, and Front Assist opera- Switching the advance warning function on tion may be affected. So repair work should or off only be made by specialised workshops. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership The pre-warning function (advance warning) for this purpose. can be switched on or off in the Easy Connect Fig. 213 On the instrument panel display: system with the  button and the SETTINGS Front Assist switched off message. CAUTION and Driver assistance function buttons ›››  page 30. If you have the sensation that the radar sen- The Front Assist is active whenever the igni- sor is damaged or has lost its settings, dis- tion is switched on. The system will store the setting for the next connect the Front Assist. This will avoid pos- time the ignition is switched on. sible damage. If this occurs have it adjusted. When the Front Assist is switched off, so too are the advance warning function (pre warn- SEAT recommends keeping the advance ● The sensor may become damaged or lose warning function switched on at all times. its settings when knocked, for example, during) and the distance warning. ing a parking manoeuvre. This may compro- SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist al- Depending on the infotainment system in- mise the system's efficacy or disconnect it. ways switched on. Exceptions ››› page 215, stalled in the vehicle, the advance warning ● Repairs to the radar sensor require special- Switching the Front Assist off temporarily in function may be adjusted as follows: ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom- the following situations. ● Ready 214 Driver assistance systems

● Medium ● If the vehicle is on a test bed. ● Pressing the accelerator all the way down. ● Delayed ● When the radar sensor is damaged. ● If the Front Assist is switched off or dam- ● Deactivated ● If the radar sensor takes a heavy knock, for aged. example in a rear collision. ● If the ASR has been manually disconnec- SEAT recommends driving with the function ted.

● data Technical in “Medium” mode. If it intervenes several times unnecessarily. ● If the radar sensor is covered temporarily ● If the ESC is controlling. Switching distance warning on and off with some kind of accessory, such as an ad- ● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec- ditional headlight or the like. trically connected trailer are damaged. If the safe distance with regard to the vehicle in front is exceeded, the relevant warning will ● When the vehicle is to be loaded on a lorry, ● If the radar sensor is dirty or covered. Advice appear on the instrument panel display ferry or train. ● If there are metal objects, e.g. rails on the . In this case, increase the safe dis- road or sheets used in road works. WARNING tance. ● If the vehicle is reversing. If the Front Assist is not switched off in the The distance warning can be switched on and ● situations described, serious accidents and If the vehicle over-accelerates. off in the Easy Connect system using the injuries may occur. ● In case of snow or heavy rain.  button and the SETTINGS and ● Switch off the Front Assist in critical situa- ● Driver assistance function buttons In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor- Operation ›››  page 30. tions. bikes. ● The system will store the setting for the next Misaligned vehicles. time the ignition is switched on. ● Vehicles crossing the other's path. System limitations SEAT recommends keeping the distance ● Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc- warning switched on at all times. The Front Assist has certain physical limita- tion.

tions inherent to the system. Thus, in certain ● Special loads and accessories of other ve- Emergencies circumstances some of the system's reac- hicles that jut out over the sides, backwards Switching the Front Assist off tempo- tions may be inopportune or be delayed from or over the top. rarily in the following situations the driver's standpoint. So pay attention in order to intervene if necessary.

In the following situations the Front Assist Safety Monitoring System should be deactivated The following conditions may cause the Front due to the system's limitations ››› : Assist not to react or to do so too late: ● On taking tight bends. ● When the vehicle is to be towed. 215 Operation

City Emergency braking function If the system detects a possible collision with in braking, such as in work areas or if there a vehicle in front of it, the vehicle prepares are metal rails. for a possible emergency braking . ››› ● If the operation of the City Emergency brak- If the driver fails to react to a possible colli- ing function is impaired, for example, by dirt sion, the system may brake the vehicle auto- or because the radar sensor has lost its set- matically, by progressively increasing braking tings, the system may issue unnecessary effect driving to reduce speed in the event of warnings and intervene inopportunely in the a collision. The system can thus help to re- braking. duce the consequences of an accident. ● During driving, the City Emergency braking function does not react to people or animals Status display or vehicles crossing your path or which approach you head-on in the same lane. Automatic deceleration by means of the City Fig. 214 On the instrument panel display: ad- Emergency braking function is displayed on vance warning message. Note the instrument panel by means of the ad- 1) ● The City Emergency braking function is part vance warning ››› Fig. 214 . When the City Emergency braking function causes a braking, the brake pedal is “hard- of Front Assist and is active whenever this er”. system is switched on. WARNING ● The smart technology included in the City Automatic interventions on the brakes by Depending on the equipment, the City emer- Emergency braking function cannot defy the the City Emergency braking function may be gency braking function can be switched on laws of physics. The driver is always respon- interrupted by pressing the clutch, accelera- and off in the Easy Connect system using the sible for braking in time. tor or moving the wheel.  button and the SETTINGS and ● ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to the The City Emergency braking function can Driver assistance function buttons vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi- brake the vehicle until it stops completely.  page 30. ››› bility, weather, road and traffic conditions. However, the brake system does not halt the vehicle permanently. Use the foot brake! The City Emergency braking function picks up ● The City Emergency braking function alone ● the traffic situation in front of the vehicle at cannot prevent accidents or serious injury. If several inopportune intervenes occur, switch off the Front Assist and with it the City speeds approximately between 4 km/h ● In complex driving situations, the City (2.5 mph) and 30 km/h (19 mph). Emergency braking function. Take it to a spe- Emergency braking function may issue unnec- cialised workshop, SEAT recommends visiting essary warnings and intervene inopportunely a SEAT dealership.

1) The symbol on the instrument panels with colour display is in colour. 216 Driver assistance systems

● If numerous unnecessary interventions oc- acoustic signal and a message on the dash WARNING cur, the City Emergency braking function may panel display ››› Fig. 215. The technology in the pedestrian monitoring switch off automatically. The pedestrian monitoring system, including system cannot defy the laws of physics and the advance warning, is automatically con- only works within the system's limits. The nected when the ignition is switched on driver is always responsible for braking in Pedestrian Monitoring*1) ››› page 171. time. If the pedestrian monitoring system is- data Technical sues a warning, brake the vehicle immediate- SEAT recommends always having the pedes- ly with the brake pedal or swerve to avoid the trian monitoring system connected. The ex- pedestrian, depending on traffic conditions. ceptions set out for the Front Assist system ● The pedestrian monitoring system alone

are equally valid for the pedestrian monitor- cannot avoid accidents or serious injury. Advice ing system ››› page 215. ● In complex driving situations, the pedestrian monitoring system may issue unneces- Switching the pedestrian monitoring system sary warnings and intervene unnecessarily in on and off braking, such as in main roads with turnings. With the ignition on, the pedestrian monitor- ● If the operation of the system is impaired, ing system can be switched on and off as fol- for example, because the radar sensor and

lows: camera are covered or have lost their set- Operation Fig. 215 On the instrument panel display:  tings, the system may issue unnecessary Advance warning message.  Pedestrian ● Switch the system on and off in the info- warnings and intervene inopportunely in the Monitoring deactivated. tainment system using the  button and braking. the SETUP and Driver assistance function but- The pedestrian monitoring system can help ● The driver must always be ready to take tons ›››  page 30. prevent accidents involving pedestrians or over the control of the vehicle. reduce the consequences of an accident. When the pedestrian protection system is Emergencies The system warns of danger of collision, pre- switched off, the dash panel display shows a Note pares the vehicle for emergency braking, as- message indicating this ››› Fig. 215 . The ● When the vehicle is braked via the pedes- sists in the braking and brakes automatically. pedestrian monitoring system is switched off trian monitoring system, the brake pedal be- with the Front Assist function. comes stiffer. » If the system detects a possible collision with a pedestrian, it warns the driver with an Safety

1) Depending on the vehicle equipment, pedestrian monitoring is not available in all countries. 217 Operation

● Automatic interventions by the pedestrian tures or objects in poor condition can be in- ● If there is a fault in the system, have it monitoring system on the brakes may be incorrectly detected as road markings under checked by a specialised workshop. terrupted by pressing the accelerator or mov- certain circumstances by the Lane Assist sys- ing the wheel. tem. In such situations, switch the Lane As- ● If the pedestrian monitoring system does sist system off immediately. not work as described in this chapter (e.g. if ● Please observe the indications on the in- it intervening unnecessarily several times), strument panel and act as is necessary. switch if off, contact a specialist workshop ● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur- immediately and request to have the system roundings. checked. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT ● dealership for this. When the area of vision of the camera becomes dirty, covered or is damaged, the Lane Assist system function can be affected.

Lane Assist system* CAUTION In order to avoid influencing the operation of Introduction the system, the following points must be taken into account: WARNING ● Regularly clean the area of vision of the The intelligent technology in the Lane Assist camera and keep it in a clean state, without system cannot change the limits imposed by snow or ice. the laws of physics and by the very nature of ● Do not cover the area of vision of the cam- the system. Careless or uncontrolled use of era. the Lane Assist system may cause accidents ● Check that the area of vision of the wind- and injury. The system is not a replacement screen camera is not damaged. for driver awareness. ● Always adapt your speed and the distance to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility, Note weather conditions, the condition of the road ● The Lane Assist system has been exclusive- and the traffic situation. ly developed for driving on paved roads only. ● Always keep your hands on the steering ● If the Lane Assist system does not work as wheel so it can be turned at any time. described in this chapter, do not use it and ● The Lane Assist system does not detect all contact a specialised workshop. road markings. The road surfaces, road struc- 218 Driver assistance systems

Indications on the display and lamps – The system is operational, the highlighted line A indicates that there was a risk of involuntarily crossing the lane line and that the steering is being adjusted to correct the angle ››› Fig. 217 C.

– The two lines A light up simultaneously data Technical when both lane lines are recognised and the Lane Assist function is active ››› Fig. 217 D.

Control lamps Advice  Blinks or lights up yellow: Lane Assist active but not available.

The system can not accurately recognise the lane. Please see page 220, the Lane Assist system is not available (the control lamp is lit up yellow). Operation  Blinks or lights up green:

Lane Assist system active and available. Fig. 217 On the instrument panel display: In- dication on the Lane Assist system display Fig. 216 On the instrument panel display: In- (example 2). WARNING dication on the Lane Assist system display Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning Emergencies (example 1). Status display and control lamps on page 113. – The system is active, but not available, either because the minimum speed has not been reached or because the lane lines are not recognised ››› Fig. 216 A. – The system is active and available, both Safety lane lines are recognised. The steering angle is not being corrected at this moment ››› Fig. 216 B. 219 Operation

Operation ● When the maximum rotational torque dur- motion through the brakes and, if the vehicle ing the corrective steering movement is not has it, activates the Emergency Assist func- enough to keep the vehicle inside the lane. tion ››› page 222. ● When no lane is detected during the correc- ● In vehicles without Emergency Assist, the tive steering movement. adaptive lane guidance function will be disabled after the corresponding warnings to the Switching the Lane Assist system on or off driver. Through the Easy Connect system The lane assist system is active but it is not ● Press the Easy Connect button  available (the control lamp is lit up yellow) ● Press the SETTINGS function button ● When driving at speeds below 65 km/h (38 ● Press the function button Driver assistance to mph). Fig. 218 In the windscreen: field of vision of open the menu. the Lane Assist system camera. ● When the Lane Assist system does not de- OR: through the driving assist button tect the dividing lines of the road. For exam- Using the camera located in the windscreen, on the turn signal level*. ple, in the event warnings indicating road the Lane Assist system detects the possible works, and snow, dirt, moisture or reflec- lines dividing the lanes. When the vehicle in- The Lane centring guide function is actions. tivated/deactivated in the Easy Connect sys- voluntarily approaches a dividing line it has ● When the radius of a curve is too small. tem using the  button and the SETTINGS detected, the system notifies the driver with ● When no road markings can be seen. a corrective steering movement. This move- function button ››› page 114. ● When the distance to the next marking to ment can be over-regulated at any time. Self-deactivation: the Lane Assist system can too great. No warning is produced with the turn signals be automatically deactivated if there is a sys- ● When the system does not detect any clear activated, given that the Lane Assist system tem malfunction. The control lamp disap- and active steering movement during a long understands that a lane change is required. pears. period of time. Steering wheel vibration Hands-Off Function ● Temporarily, in the event of very dynamic driving styles. The following situations can cause vibration ● In the absence of steering wheel activity in the steering wheel and require the driver the system alerts the driver with acoustic sig- ● If a turn signal is activated. to take active control of driving: nals and a text message on the dash panel ● With the stability control system (ESC) in asking to actively take over the steering. Sport mode or switched off. ● When the limits of the very nature of the ● If the driver does not react to this, the sys- system are reached. tem also alerts the driver with a little shaking 220 Driver assistance systems

Note Traffic Jam Assist To do this, the system automatically controls the accelerator, brakes and steering, and ● Before starting a journey, verify that the slows the vehicle, stopping it fully if neces- field of vision of the camera is not covered Related video sary, when faced with a vehicle in front that ››› Fig. 218. has stopped. It automatically moves off again ● Always keep the field of vision of the cam- when the vehicle ahead moves. data Technical era clean. Traffic Jam Assist is designed only for use on motorways and wide roads. Therefore, never use it in city traffic. Switching off the Lane Assist system

Fig. 219 Safety Advice in the following situations Switching Traffic Jam Assist on and off Due to the limits of the Lane Assist system, If Lane Assist ››› page 218 is on, Traffic Jam Assist can be switched on or off in the info- switch it off in the following situations: Description and operation tainment system using the  button and ● When more attention is required of the SETTINGS Driver Assistance Traffic Jam Assist helps the driver keep the the and function driver car within its lane and to move in convoy in buttons ›››  page 30.

● When driving in a sporty style case of traffic congestion or slow traffic. It is activated by switching on Lane Assist Operation ● In unfavourable weather conditions Traffic Jam Assist is an additional function of and the lane centring guide in the infotainment system. If the lane centring guide is not ● On roads in poor condition Lane Assist ››› page 218 and combines Lane active, the Traffic Jam Assist system is not ac- ● In areas of road works Assist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control tive (ACC) ››› page 201. Therefore, it is essential Note that you read these two chapters carefully Traffic Jam Assist may be disconnected using and note the limitations of the systems and the button for driver assistance systems to- The Lane Assist system deactivates when Emergencies the information about them. driving below 60 km/h (37 mph). gether with Lane Assist ›››  page 34.

Operation of Traffic Jam Assist Technical requirements for using Traffic Jam At speeds of below 60 km/h (40 mph), Traffic Assist ● Jam Assist can maintain a (temporary) dis- Lane Assist must be activated ››› page 218, Safety tance preset by the driver with respect to the Lane Assist system*. vehicle ahead and help stay within the lane ● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) must be con- ››› . nected and active ››› page 201. »

221 Operation

● The selector lever must be in the D/S posi- ● In sections with roadworks. ● If the vehicle continues to move when you tion or in the Tiptronic selection track. ● In city journeys. wish it to stop after a driver intervention ● The speed must be below 60 km/h prompt, brake the vehicle by applying the (38 mph). WARNING pedal. ● ● The lane centring guide must be active The smart technology incorporated into Traf- If driver intervention is requested on the ››› page 220. fic Jam Assist cannot defy the laws of phys- dash panel display, immediately resume con- ics; it only works within the limits of the sys- trol of the vehicle. Traffic Jam Assist is not active (the Lane As- tem. Accidents and severe injury may occur if ● Keep your hands on the wheel at all times sist control light turns yellow) Traffic Jam Assist is used negligently or invol- to be ready to intervene in the steering at any untarily. The system is not a replacement for time. The driver is always responsible for ● If any of the conditions mentioned on driver awareness. keeping the vehicle in its own lane. page 221, Technical requirements for using ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to the ● Always be prepared to take charge of driv- Traffic Jam Assist are no longer met. vehicle in front of you at all times to suit the ing (accelerating or braking) yourself. ● If any of the conditions required for opera- visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. tion of the Lane Assist are not met Note ››› page 218. ● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist in city jour- ● If Traffic Jam Assist does not work as de- ● neys. If any of the conditions necessary for the scribed in this chapter, stop using it and con- adaptive cruise control (ACC) to work are no ● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist if there is poor tact a specialised workshop. longer fulfilled ››› page 201. visibility, for example, in case of snow, ice, ● rain or loose gravel, or on steep or slippery If the system is faulty, take it to a specialised workshop and have it checked. Situations in which Traffic Jam Assist must sections or flooded roads. be switched off ● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist offroad or on roads where the surface is not firm. Traffic Due to the limitations of the system, Traffic Jam Assist has been designed for use on Emergency Assist Jam Assist must always be switched off in the paved roads only. following situations: ● Traffic Jam Assist does not react to people Description and operation ● When more attention is required by the or animals or vehicles crossing your path or driver. that approach you head-on down the same Emergency Assist detects whether there is in- lane. ● When driving in a very sporty style. activity by the driver and can automatically ● If Traffic Jam Assist does not reduce speed keep the car within the lane and stop it alto- ● In adverse weather conditions, e.g. in case sufficiently, brake the vehicle immediately by gether if necessary. This way the system can of snow or heavy rain. applying the pedal. actively help avoid an accident. ● When driving on roads in poor condition.

222 Driver assistance systems

Emergency Assist is an additional function of Switching the Emergency Assist on and off WARNING Lane Assist ››› page 218 and combines Lane The Emergency Assist is switched on auto- Assist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control The smart technology incorporated into the matically when the Lane Assist is switched on Emergency Assist cannot overcome the limits (ACC) ››› page 201. Therefore, it is essential ››› page 218. imposed by the laws of physics; it only works that you read these two chapters carefully within the limits of the system. The driver is and note the limitations of the systems and data Technical Technical requirements for using the Emer- responsible for driving the vehicle. the information about them. gency Assist ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit the Operation of Emergency Assist ● The adaptive cruise control (ACC) must be switched on ››› page 201. visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- Emergency Assist detects when the driver tions.

● The Lane Assist must be switched on Advice ceases to perform any activity and repeatedly ● Keep your hands on the wheel at all times page 218. requests that he/she regain active control of ››› to be ready to intervene in the steering at any the vehicle, through the use of optical and ● The selector lever must be at the D/S posi- time. acoustic warnings and by applying the tion or in the Tiptronic selection track. ● The Emergency Assist alone cannot always brakes. ● The system must have detected a lane sep- avoid accidents or serious injuries. If the driver continues to do nothing, the sys- aration line on both sides of the vehicle ● If the operation of the Emergency Assist is tem automatically takes over the accelerator, ››› Fig. 217. impaired, for example if the radar sensor of Operation brakes and steering in order to brake the ve- the adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the Lane hicle and keep it in its lane ››› . If the re- The following conditions may cause the Assist camera are covered or have lost their maining braking distance is sufficient, if nec- Emergency Assist not to react or to switch off settings, the system may intervene inopportunely in braking or in steering. essary the system slows down the vehicle un- automatically: ● til it stops completely and automatically ● If the driver accelerates, brakes or moves The Emergency Assist does not react to people or animal or vehicles crossing your switches on the electronic parking brake the steering wheel. path or which approach you head-on in the

››› page 177. Emergencies ● If any of the conditions mentioned in same lane. When the Emergency Assist is actively adjust- ››› page 223, Technical requirements for using, the hazard warning lights come on ing the Emergency Assist are not fulfilled. WARNING ››› page 140 and the vehicle makes slight zig- ● If any of the conditions required for opera- If the Emergency Assist Intervenes inoppor- zag movements in the lane in order to warn tion of the Lane Assist are not met tunely, serious accidents and injuries may oc- other drivers. Safety ››› page 218. cur. ● If any of the conditions necessary for the ● If the Emergency Assist does not operate adaptive cruise control (ACC) to work are no properly, switch off the Lane Assist » longer fulfilled ››› page 201. 223 Operation

››› page 218. Doing so will also switch off the SEAT Drive Profile* in harmony with the movements of the accel- Emergency Assist. erator. Additionally, when Eco mode is selected, the Start-stop function is automatically ● Have the system checked by a specialised Introduction workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT activated. dealership for this. SEAT Drive Profile enables the driver to In vehicles with automatic transmission, the choose between four profiles or modes, Nor- gear change points are modified to position Note mal, Sport, Eco and Individual, that them in lower or higher engine speed ranges. modify the behaviour of various vehicle func- Additionally, the Eco1) mode activates the In- ● Automatic interventions by the Emergency tions, providing different driving experiences. ertia function, enabling consumption to be Assist on the brakes may be interrupted by further reduced. pressing the accelerator or brake or by mov- In the FR and X-PERIENCE models equipped ing the wheel. with dynamic chassis control, the Comfort In manual gearbox vehicles, Eco1) mode cau- ● Hazard warning lights that come on auto- profile is also available. ses the gear change recommendation indica- matically can be switched off by pressing the In the Leon Cupra model the four profiles are tions that appear on the instrument panel to accelerator or the break, moving the steering Comfort, Sport, Cupra and Individual. vary, facilitating more efficient driving. wheel or pressing the hazard warning light switch. The Individual profile can be configured Dynamic chassis control (DCC) ● according to personal preferences. The other If this occurs, the Emergency Assist may DCC continuously adapts the shock absorb- decelerate the vehicle until it comes to a com- profiles are fixed. ers to the condition of the road and current plete stop. driving conditions, according to the pre-set ● When the Emergency Assist is activated, it programme. is only available again after the ignition has Description been switched off and back on again. In the event of a fault in the DCC, the follow- Depending on the equipment fitted in the ve- ing message is displayed on the instrument hicle, SEAT Drive Profile can operate on the screen Fault: damping setting. following functions: Address Engine Power steering becomes more robust in Depending on the profile selected, the en- Sport mode to enable a sportier driving gine responds more spontaneously or more style. In the Leon Cupra the power steering becomes more robust in Cupra mode.

1) In the Leon Cupra model, Eco mode is selected through the Individual profile. 224 Driver assistance systems

Air conditioning Setting driving mode Driving Characteristics In vehicles with Climatronic, this can operate profile in eco1) mode, especially restricting fuel con- Offers a balanced driving experience, suit- sumption. Normal able for everyday use.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)2) Provides a complete dynamic performance data Technical Sport in the vehicle, enabling the user a more According to the active driving profile, the ac- sporty driving style. celeration gradient of the adaptive cruise control varies. Places the vehicle in a particularly low state of consumption, facilitating a fuel-

Eco Advice 2) saving driving style that is respectful to Electronic self-locking differential the environment. The self-locking differential adapts its behav- Fig. 220 Centre console: MODE button. Enables some configurations to be modi- iour depending on the driving profile chosen. fied by pressing the Profile settings Individ- Normal mode or Cupra mode can be selected You can select from Normal, Sport, Eco button. The functions that can be adjusted ual to prioritise improved traction in sport driv- and Individual. depend on the equipment fitted in the ve- ing. hicle. You can select the required mode either by Operation repeatedly pressing the button MODE It permits more relaxed and comfortable Conven- driving, for example for long motorway ››› Fig. 220, or on the touch screen, in the a) menu that opens when the above button is ience journeys. Its main characteristic is the soft suspension setting (DCC). pressed. a) Only for FR and X-PERIENCE models equipped with dynamic An icon on the Easy Connect system display chassis control. informs about the active mode. Emergencies The MODE button light remains lit up yellow WARNING when the active mode is different to Normal. When operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay attention to all traffic: doing otherwise could cause an accident. » Safety

1) In the Leon Cupra model, Eco mode is selected through the Individual profile. 2) Applies to the Leon Cupra model. 225 Operation

Note You can select from Convenience, Sport, WARNING Cupra and Individual. ● When the vehicle is switched off it will al- When operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay atten- ways store the driving profile that was selection to all traffic: doing otherwise could cause Cupra Drive Profile button ted when the ignition key was removed. Nev- an accident. ertheless, when the engine is restarted, the You can select the required mode either by engine and the gear will not restart in the set- repeatedly pressing the button with the Cu- Note ting selected. For engine and gear to revert to pra logotype ››› Fig. 221, or on the touch the desired position, select the correspond- screen, in the menu that opens when the ● When the vehicle is switched off it will al- ing drive profile again or press the Easy Con- above button is pressed. ways store the driving profile that was selec- nect system button repeatedly. ted when the ignition key was removed. Nev- ● Your speed and driving style must always An icon on the Easy Connect system display ertheless, when the engine is restarted the be adjusted to visibility, weather, and traffic informs about the active mode. engine and the gear will not restart in its sportier mode in order to save fuel. For en- conditions. The light of the button with the Cupra logo- gine and gear to revert to a sportier mode, ● The Eco profile is not recommended when type remains lit up only when the Cupra pro- select the corresponding driving profile again towing a vehicle. file is active. on the Easy Connect system screen. ● Your speed and driving style must always Driving Characteristics be adjusted to visibility, weather, and traffic Setting driving mode profile conditions. 3 Applies to the model: Leon Cupra It permits more relaxed and comfortable Conven- driving, for example for long motorway ience journeys. Its main characteristic is the Kick-down soft suspension setting (DCC).

It represents the vehicle's default behav- The kick-down feature allows maximum ac- Sport iour, suitable for dynamic driving. celeration to be reached.

It gives the vehicle a decidedly sportier If the eco* ››› page 225 mode has been se- Cupra nature, and makes for maximum perform- lected in SEAT Drive Profile*, and the acceler- ance. ator is pressed beyond a hard point, the en- Enables some configurations to be modi- gine power is automatically controlled to give fied by pressing the Profile settings your vehicle maximum acceleration. Individ- button. The functions that can be adjus- ual ted depend on the equipment fitted in the Fig. 221 Centre console: Cupra Drive Profile vehicle. button.

226 Driver assistance systems

WARNING Please note that if the road surface is slippery or wet, the kick-down feature could cause the driving wheels to spin, which could result in skidding. Technical data Technical Advice Operation Emergencies Safety

227 Operation

Traffic sign detection system* kia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Note Turkey, the United Kingdom and the Vatican City. In order not to compromise the system's op- Introduction eration, please take the following points into account: WARNING The traffic sign detection system records the ● Regularly clean the area of vision of the standard traffic signs in front of the vehicle The technology in the traffic sign detection camera and keep it in a clean state, without with a camera located on the base of the in- system cannot change the limits imposed by snow or ice. the laws of physics and only works within the terior mirror and provides information about ● system's limits. Do not let the extra conven- Do not cover the field of vision of the cam- speed limits and overtaking prohibitions. era. Within its limitations, the system also dis- ience afforded by the traffic sign detection ● plays additional signals, such as time-specif- system tempt you into taking any risks when Always replace damaged or worn blades when required to avoid lines on the camera's ic prohibitions, signs for vehicles towing trail- driving. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. field of vision. ers ››› page 241 or limitations that only apply in the event of rain. Even on journeys without ● Adapt your speed and driving style to suit ● Check that the windscreen is not damaged signs, the system may display any applicable visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- in the area of the camera's field of vision. speed limits. tions. ● Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain and fog Note In Germany, on motorways and vehicle roads, may lead to the system failing to display traf- besides speed limits and overtaking provi- fic signs or not displaying them correctly. ● The use of outdated maps on the naviga- sions the system also displays the end of tion system may cause the system to show ● If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov- traffic signs incorrectly. prohibition signs. The valid speed limit at the ered or damaged, system operation may be time in other countries is always shown. impaired. ● In the waypoints mode of the navigation system, the traffic sign detection system is Countries in which it works only partly available. WARNING When this instruction manual went to print, the traffic sign detection system was operat- The driving recommendations and traffic indications shown on the traffic sign detection ing in the following countries: system may differ from the actual current Andorra, Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Croatia, traffic situation. Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, ● The system may not detect or correctly Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, show all the traffic signs. Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, ● Traffic signs and traffic regulations have Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Monaco, the priority over the recommendations and dis- Netherlands, Northern Ireland, Norway, Po- plays provided by the system. land, Portugal, Romania, San Marino, Slova- 228 Driver assistance systems

Indication on display Traffic sign detec- Cause and solution WARNING tion system mes- If messages are ignored, the vehicle may stall sages in traffic and cause accidents and severe injuries. There are no The system is booting up. ● Never ignore the messages displayed. traffic signs OR ELSE: the camera has not data Technical available recognised any obligation or ● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity prohibition signs. and in a safe place. Error: Detection There is a fault in the system. of traffic signs Have the system checked by a Note specialised workshop. Failure to heed the control lamps and corre- Advice Speed warning The speed warning function of sponding text messages when they light up currently un- the traffic sign detection sys- may result in damage to the vehicle. available. tem is faulty. Have the system checked by a specialised workshop. Operation Detection of The windscreen is dirty in the

traffic signs: camera area. Operation Clean the wind- Clean the windscreen. The traffic sign detection system does not screen! work in all countries ››› page 228, Countries in which it works. Keep this in mind when Detection of The navigation system is not travelling abroad. traffic signs: transmitting any data. Limited at the Check that the navigation sys- Fig. 222 On the instrument panel display: ex- moment tem's maps are up-to-date. Activating and deactivating traffic sign dis- amples of speed limits or overtaking prohibi- OR ELSE: the vehicle is cur- play on the instrument panel Emergencies tions with their respective additional signs. rently in a region that is not The permanent display of traffic signs on the included in the navigation The traffic signs detected by the system are system's map. instrument panel can be activated or deacti- displayed on the dash panel display vated in the infotainment system using the ››› Fig. 222 and, depending on the navigation No data available The traffic sign detection sys-  button and the SETTINGS and tem does not work in the cur- Driver Assistance function buttons. system fitted in the vehicle, on the infotain- rent country. Safety ment system as well ›››  page 30. Display of traffic signs When the traffic sign detection system is connected, a camera located on the base of the » 229 Operation

interior rear-view mirror records the traffic using the  button and the SETTINGS and Limited operation signs in front of the vehicle. After checking Driver Assistance function buttons The traffic sign detection system has certain and evaluating the information from the cam- ›››  page 30. The speed is adjusted in limitations. The following cases may lead the era, the navigation system and the current steps of 5 km/h (3 mph) within a range of be- system to operate with limitations or not at vehicle data, up to three valid traffic signs tween 0 km/h (mph) and 20 km/h (12 mph) all: are displayed ››› Fig. 222 B in conjunction above the maximum speed permitted. with their corresponding additional signs. ● In the case of poor visibility, e.g. in snow, Trailer mode rain, fog or intense mist. First: The sign that is currently valid for the driver is shown in the left side of the In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket ● In cases of dazzling, e.g. caused by head- screen For example, a maximum speed device from the factory and a trailer that is on traffic or by the sun. limit of 130 km/h (100 mph) electrically connected to the vehicle, it is pos- ● When driving at high speeds. sible to activate or deactivate the display of ››› Fig. 222 A. ● If the camera is covered or dirty. specific traffic signs for vehicles with trailer, Second: A sign valid only in certain circum- such as speed limits or overtaking prohibi- ● If the traffic signs are out of the camera's stances, e.g. 100 km/h (60 mph) is tions. Activation or deactivation is performed field of vision. shown second, together with the addi- on the infotainment system using the ● If the traffic signs are partially or totally tional rain sign.  button and the SETTINGS and covered, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other ve- Additional sign: If the windscreen wiper is Driver Assistance function buttons hicles. working while you are driving, the signal  . ››› page 30 ● In the case of traffic signs that do not fulfil with the additional rain sign will be the regulations. shown first, on the left, as it is the one For trailer mode, the display of speed limits that is applicable at the time. applicable to the type of trailer or to the legal ● In the case of damaged or bent traffic provisions can be adjusted. The speed is ad- signs. Third: A sign valid only with restrictions, e.g. justed in steps of 10 km/h (5 mph) within a ● In the case of variable messages on over- No overtaking at certain times, will be range of between 60 km/h (40 mph) and head or gantry signs (LED-based variable traf- displayed third ››› Fig. 222 C. 130 km/h (80 mph). If it is adjusted to a fic signs or other lighting units). speed greater than that which is permitted in Speed warning the country in question for driving with a ● If the maps on the navigation system are If the system detects that the permitted trailer, the system automatically displays the not up-to-date. speed is exceeded, it may warn the driver usual speed limits, e.g. in Germany 80 km/h ● In the case of adhesives affixed to vehicles with a “gong” and visually with a message (50 mph). that depict traffic signs, e.g. speed limits on on the dash panel display. If the speed warning for the trailer is deacti- lorries. The speed warning can be adjusted or deactivated, the system displays the speed limits vated completely in the infotainment system as if there were no trailer hitched. 230 Driver assistance systems

Fatigue detection (break rec- Note shown for approximately 5 seconds, and depending on the case, is repeated. The system ommendation)* ● Fatigue detection has been developed for stores the last message displayed. driving on motorways and well paved roads Introduction only. The message on the instrument panel display ● If there is a fault in the system, have it can be switched off by pressing the  Technical data Technical The Fatigue detection informs the driver checked by a specialised workshop. button on the windscreen wiper lever or the when their driving behaviour shows signs of button  on the multi function steering fatigue. wheel ›››  page 33. Function and operation The message can be recalled to the instru- WARNING ment panel display using the multifunction Advice Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fatigue display ›››  page 33. detection system tempt you into taking any risks when driving. Take regular breaks, suffi- Conditions of operation cient in length when making long journeys. Driving behaviour is only calculated on ● The driver always assumes the responsibil- speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to ity of driving to their full capacity. around 200 km/h (125 mph).

● Never drive if you are tired. Operation ● The system does not detect the tiredness of Switching on and off the driver in all circumstances. Consult the in- Fatigue detection can be activated or deacti- formation in the section ››› page 231, System vated in the Easy Connect system with the limitations. Fig. 223 On the instrument panel display: fa-  button and the SETTINGS function button tigue detection symbol. ● In some situations, the system may incor- ››› page 114. A mark indicates that the ad- rectly interpret an intended driving manoeu- justment has been activated. vre as driver tiredness. Fatigue detection determines the driving be- Emergencies haviour of the driver when starting a journey, ● No warning is given in the event of the ef- making a calculation of tiredness. This is System limitations fect called microsleep! constantly compared with the current driving The Fatigue detection has certain limitations ● Please observe the indications on the in- behaviour. If the system detects that the driv- inherent to the system. The following condi- strument panel and act as is necessary. er is tired, an audible warning is given with a

tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre- Safety sound and an optic warning is shown with a vent it from functioning. symbol and complementary message on the instrument panel display ››› Fig. 223. The ● At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph) message on the instrument panel display is ● At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph) » 231 Operation

● When cornering General information CAUTION ● On roads in poor condition Assorted assistance systems – which vary Parking Aid functions may be negatively af- ● In unfavourable weather conditions depending on the equipment fitted in the car fected by different factors that may lead to damage to the vehicle or its immediate sur- ● When a sporty driving style is employed – will help you when parking or manoeu- rounds: ● In the event of a serious distraction to the vring. ● Under certain circumstances, the system driver The rear parking aid is an audible assistant does not detect or display certain objects: that warns about obstacles located behind Fatigue detection will be restored when the – Objects such as chains, trailer draw bars, the vehicle page 233. vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes, ››› fences, posts and thin trees. when the ignition is switched off or when the During parking, Parking System Plus assists – Objects that are located above the sen- driver has unbuckled their seat belt and the driver by visually and audibly warning sors, such as protrusions in a wall. opened the door. them about obstacles detected in front and – Objects with certain surfaces or struc- behind the vehicle page 234. In the event of slow driving during a long pe- ››› tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow- riod of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the der snow. WARNING system automatically re-establishes the tired- ● Certain surfaces of objects and garments ness calculation. When driving at a faster ● Always pay attention, also when looking do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig- speed the driving behaviour will be recalcula- straight ahead, to traffic and the vehicle sur- nals. The system cannot detect, at least cor- ted. roundings. The assistance systems are not a rectly, these objects or people wearing such replacement for driver awareness. When in- clothes. serting or removing the vehicle from a park- ● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affected ing space, or when performing similar ma- by external sound sources. In certain circum- Parking aid noeuvres the driver always assumes the re- stances this may prevent them from detect- sponsibility. ing people or objects. Related video ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all ● Please note that low obstacles detected by times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf- the system may no longer be registered by fic conditions. the sensors as the car moves closer, so the ● The ultrasound sensors have blind spots in system will not give any further warning. In which obstacles and people are not regis- certain circumstances, objects such as high tered. Pay special attention to children and kerbs that could damage the bottom of the animals. vehicle are not detected either. ● Always keep visual control of the vehicle ● If the first warning from the ParkPilot is ig- Fig. 224 Safety surroundings: use the mirrors for additional nored, the vehicle could suffer considerable help. damage.

232 Driver assistance systems

● The knocks or damage on the radiator ● In order to familiarise yourself with the sys- The approximate measurement range of the grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle under- tem, it is advised that you practice parking in rear sensors is: body can adjust the orientation of the sen- an area or car park that is free from traffic. sors. This can affect the parking aid function. There must be good weather and light condi- side area 0.60 m Have the function checked by a specialised tions. central area 1.60 m workshop. ● The volume and tone of the warnings can data Technical be modified, in addition to the indications As you approach the obstacle, the time inter- Note ››› page 236. val between the audible warnings will be re- ● ● In certain situations, the system can give a In vehicles without a driver information duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the warning even though there is no obstacle in system, these parameters can be modified in warning will be constant: Do not continue to the detected area, e.g: a SEAT Official Service or in a specialised move forward (or backward) ››› in General Advice workshop. – with rough or cobbled floors or ground information on page 232, ››› in General in- ● with long grass; Please observe information on towing a formation on page 232 ! trailer ››› page 237. – with external ultrasound sources, such as If you maintain separation from the obstacle, ● cleaning vehicles or other vehicles; The display on the Easy Connect screen the volume of the warning begins to reduce shows a slight time delay. – In downpours, intense snow or dense ex- after four seconds (does not affect the tone of the constant warning). haust gases; Operation – if the registration plate (front or rear) is not properly affixed to the bumper sur- Rear parking aid* Activating/Deactivating face; The rear Parking Aid assists the driver in When engaging reverse gear, the parking aid – or in locations such as the brow of a hill. parking by means of audible warning is automatically switched on. This is con- ● In order to guarantee good system opera- sounds. firmed with a short warning. tion, keep the ultrasound sensors clean, free On disengaging reverse gear, the Parking Aid Emergencies of snow or ice, and do not cover them with Description system is disconnected immediately. adhesives or other objects. There are sensors integrated in the rear ● If you use high-pressure or vapour equipment to clean the ultrasound sensors, apply bumper. When the sensors detect an obsta- it directly only very briefly and always from a cle, you are alerted by audible warnings. distance of more than 10 cm. Make particularly sure that the sensors are Safety ● Retrofitting of accessories to the vehicle, not covered by adhesives, residues and the such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with the like, as this could affect the system's opera- operation of the Parking Aid. tion. Cleaning instructions ››› page 254.

233 Operation

Parking system plus* like, as this could affect the system's opera- Parking Aid operation tion. Cleaning instructions ››› page 254. The approximate measurement range of the sensors is:

A 1.20 m B 0.60 m C 1.60 m D 0.60 m

As you approach the obstacle, the time interval between the audible warnings will be re- Fig. 225 Represented area. duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the Fig. 226 Centre console: parking aid button. warning will be constant: do not continue to Parking system plus assists you audibly and Manual connection of Parking Aid move forward (or backward)! visually when parking. ● Press the  button once. If you maintain separation from the obstacle, There are sensors integrated in the front and the volume of the warning begins to reduce rear bumpers. When they detect an obstacle, Manual disconnection of Parking Aid after four seconds (does not affect the tone you are alerted by audible warnings and visu- of the constant warning). ● Press the  button again. ally on the Easy Connect system. In the event of danger of a frontal collision, Manual disconnection of Parking Aid display the audible warnings come from the front of (the audible sounds remain active) the vehicle, and in the event of the danger of ● Press a button on the main menu of the fac- a rear-end collision they come from the rear. tory-assembled infotainment system. Make particularly sure that the sensors are ● OR: press the BACK function button. not covered by adhesives, residues and the

234 Driver assistance systems

Automatic connection of Parking Aid ● OR: depending on the equipment, if the ve- Automatic activation 1) ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector hicle rolls back . lever to position R. ● OR: press the car icon in reduced view. ● OR: depending on the equipment, if the vehicle rolls back1). If necessary, switch to the rear-assist image (Rear View Camera “RVC”) data Technical ● OR: If the vehicle approaches an obstacle that is in its forwards path at a speed below ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector 10 km/h (6 mph) ››› page 235, Automatic ac- lever to position R. tivation. The obstacle is detected as of a dis- ● OR: Press the RVC function button.

tance of approx. 95 cm if the automatic con- Advice nection is activated in the infotainment sys- A short confirmation signal will be heard and tem. A reduced display is shown. the button symbol will light up yellow when the system is switched on. Fig. 227 Miniature indication of automatic activation. Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid ● Move the selector lever to position P. When the Parking System Plus is switched on automatically, a miniature of the vehicle will ● OR: accelerate to more than approx. be displayed and the segments will be Operation 10 km/h (6 mph) forward. shown on the left side of the screen ››› Fig. 227. Temporary suppression of sound in Parking Aid Automatic activation occurs when slowly approaching an obstacle located in front of the ● Press the  function button. vehicle. It only operates every time the speed is reduced below approximately 10 km/h (6 Change from reduced view to full view Emergencies mph) for the first time. » ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever to position R. Safety 1) With certain equipment, the system will be activated automatically when the vehicle reverses for a certain distance (about 10 cm if an obstacle is detected in the rear area and about 20 cm if no obstacle is detected in the rear area). 235 Operation

If the parking aid is switched off using the  CAUTION Yellow segments: obstacles located in the button, the following actions must be carried vehicle's trajectory and which are more out in order for it to automatically switch on: The automatic connection of the Parking Aid than 30 cm away from the vehicle are only works when you are driving slowly. If displayed in yellow. ● Switch off the ignition and switch it on driving style is not adapted to the circum- obstacles that are less than again. stances, an accident and serious injury or Red segments: damage may be caused. 30 cm away from the vehicle are dis- ● OR: accelerate above 10 km/h (6 mph) be- played in red. fore reducing speed below this number again. Moreover, with the SEAT Media System Segments of the visual indication ● OR: place the selector lever in position P Plus/Navi System radios, a yellow trail indi- and then move it from this position. cates the vehicle's expected journey based on the steering wheel angle. ● OR: switch on and off the automatic activation in the Easy Connect system menu. Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehicle’s direction of travel, the corresponding The automatic activation with parking aid audible warning will sound. miniature indication can be switched on and off from the Easy Connect system menu As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the ›››  page 30: segments are displayed closer to the vehicle. When the penultimate segment is displayed, ● Switch the ignition on. this means that the vehicle has reached the collision zone. In the collision zone, the ob- ● Select: CAR button > Settings > Parking Fig. 228 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con- and manoeuvring. stacles are represented in red, including nect system screen. those out of the path. Do not continue to ● Select the Automatic activation op- move forward (or backward) ››› in General The distance of separation from the obstacle tion. When the function button check box is information on page 232, ››› in General in-  can be estimated using the segments around activated , the function is on. formation on page 232 ! the vehicle. If the system has been activated automatically, an audible sound warning will only be giv- The optical indication of the segments works en when obstacles in front are at a distance as follows: Adjusting the display and audible of less than 50 cm. White segments: a white segment is dis- warnings played when the obstacle is not within the vehicle's trajectory or the direction The settings for the display and audible of travel is in the opposite direction to warnings are controlled via the Easy Con- its location. nect*. 236 Driver assistance systems

Automatic activation ing aid error is displayed on the instrument Parking System Plus  on – activates the Automatic activa- panel, there is a fault in the system. The distance to possible obstacles at the rear tion option ››› page 235. If the fault doesn't disappear before discon- of the vehicle will not be displayed on the screen and nor will it be indicated by means  off – deactivates the Automatic ac- necting the ignition, next time that parking aid is engaged in reverse, it will not be indi- of audible sound signals. tivation option ››› page 235. data Technical cated. The Easy Connect system screen will only dis- Front volume* play objects detected at the front, and the ve- Parking System Plus* hicle's trajectory will be hidden. Volume in the front and rear area. If there is a fault in the parking aid system a

message will appear on the instrument panel Advice Front sound settings/sharpness* indicating the error. In addition the  key Braking while manoeuvring function* Frequency (tone) of the sound in the front LED will blink. area. 3 Only valid with Parking System Plus If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol  is As soon as an obstacle is detected while re- Rear volume* displayed on the Easy Connect display in front of/behind the vehicle. If a rear sensor is versing, the braking while manoeuvring func- Volume in the rear area. faulty, only the obstacles in the areas A and tion activates the emergency braking. De-

B are displayed ››› Fig. 225. If a front sensor pending on the equipment, the braking while Operation Rear sound settings/sharpness* is faulty, only the obstacles in the areas C manoeuvring function can also activate emergency braking while moving forwards. Frequency (tone) of the sound in the rear and D are displayed. area. Have the fault corrected by a specialised The emergency braking function is used to workshop without delay. minimise collisions. Vehicle speed must not Adjust volume be higher than 10 km/h.

With the parking aid switched on, the active The braked manoeuvre function is active or Emergencies audio/video source volume will be reduced Towing bracket inactive when the parking light is lit or off, re- to the intensity of the selected setting. spectively. If an emergency braking is activa- In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket ted, the function will remain inactive until the device from the factory, when the trailer is gear is changed. connected electrically, the Parking Aid rear Error messages The Parking System’s limitations apply. Safety sensors will not be activated when reverse When the Parking Aid is activated or when it gear is engaged, when the selector lever is The braking while manoeuvring function is is switched on, if a message reporting a Park- turned to position R or when the button  is controlled in the Easy Connect system with » pressed.

237 Operation

the  button and the SETTINGS and Operating and safety warnings at all times to suit visibility, weather, road Park and manoeuvre function buttons. and traffic conditions. WARNING ●  on – permits the use of the braking ● Do not be distracted from the traffic by while manoeuvring function. ● The Rear Assist does not make it possible looking at the screen. to precisely calculate the distance from ob- ● The images on the rear assist screen are ●  off – does not permit the use of the stacles (people, vehicles, etc.) and nor can it only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spatial braking while manoeuvring function. overcome the system's own limits, hence us- depth, protruding parts or holes in the road, ing it may cause serious accidents and inju- for example, are more difficult to detect or Temporary suppression of emergency brak- ries if used negligently or without due care. may not be seen at all. ing The driver should be aware of his/her sur- ● Vehicle load modifies the representation of ● When the function is deactivated with the roundings at all times to ensure safe driving. the orientation lines displayed. The width Braking while manoeuvring button that appears ● The camera lens expands and distorts the represented by the lines diminishes with ve- on the Parking System screen of the Easy field of vision and displays the objects on the hicle load. Pay special attention to the vehi- Connect system. screen in a different, vague manner. The per- cle's surroundings when the inside of the ve- ception of distances is also distorted by this hicle of the luggage compartment is carrying ● Whenever any of the car doors, rear lid or effect. a heavy load. bonnet are opened. ● Due to the screen resolution or insufficient ● In the following situations, the objects or light conditions, some items may be dis- other vehicles shown in the navigation sys- played in an unsatisfactory manner or not at tem display appear to be further away or Rear Assist “Rear View Cam- all. Take special care with thin posts, fences, closer than they really are: Pay special atten- railings or trees that might not be displayed tion: era”* on screen and could damage the vehicle. – On moving from a horizontal plane to a ● The rear assist has blind spots where it is slope. Related video not possible to represent people or objects – On moving from a slope to a horizontal (small children, animals and certain objects plane. cannot be detected in its field of vision). Mon- itor the vehicle's surrounding area at all – If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the times. rear. ● Keep the camera lens clean, free of ice and – When the vehicle approaches objects snow, and do not cover it. that are not on the ground surface or are jutting out from it. These objects may al- ● The system is not a replacement for driver Fig. 229 Safety so be outside the camera's angle of vi- awareness. Supervise the parking operation sion when reversing. at all times, as well as the vehicle's surrounding area. Adapt your speed and driving style

238 Driver assistance systems

Note Rear assist settings ● If the position and installation angle of the camera have been changed, e.g. after a rear- ● Rear assist offers the user the possibility to It is important to take great care and pay end collision. Have the system checked by a special attention if you are not yet familiar change the image's brightness, contrast and specialised workshop. with the system. colour settings. ● Rear assist will not be available if the vehi- To change these settings: Familiarising yourself with the system data Technical cle's rear lid is open. ● Park the vehicle in a safe place. To familiarise yourself with the system, the orientation lines and their function, SEAT rec- ● Apply the parking brake. ommends practising parking and manoeu- Instructions for use ● Switch the ignition on. vring with the rear assist in a place without ● If necessary, switch on the Easy Connect too much traffic or in a car park when there Advice system. are good weather and visibility conditions. ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever to position R. Cleaning the camera lens ● Press the  function button displayed on Keep the camera lens clean and clear of snow the right of the image. and ice:

● Make the desired adjustments on the menu ● Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol- Operation by pressing the –/+ function buttons or by based glass cleaning product and clean the moving the corresponding scroll button. lens with a dry cloth. ● Remove snow using a small brush. Fig. 230 On the rear bumper: location of the Necessary conditions for parking and ma- rear assist camera. noeuvring with the rear assist ● Use de-icing spray to remove any ice. The system should not be used in the follow- A camera on the rear bumper aids the driver CAUTION Emergencies during reverse parking or manoeuvring ing cases: ● Never use abrasive cleaning products to ››› Fig. 230. The camera image is viewed to- ● If the image displayed is not very reliable or clean the camera lens. gether with orientation lines projected by the is distorted, for example low visibility or dirty ● Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice system on the Easy Connect system screen. lens. or snow from the camera lens. Doing so could The bottom of the screen displays part of the damage the camera. Safety bumper corresponding to the number plate ● If the area behind the vehicle is not dis- area that will be used as reference by the played very clearly or is incomplete. driver. ● If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear.

239 Operation

Parking and manoeuvring with the ● The camera will stop transmitting images Meaning of the orientation lines rear assist above the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with re- ››› Fig. 231 verse engaged. 1 Side lines: extension of the vehicle (the In combination with the Parking System Plus approximate width of the vehicle plus the ››› page 232, the camera image will cease to rear view mirrors) on the road surface. be transmitted immediately when reverse 2 End of the side lines: the area marked in gear is disengaged or when the selector lever green ends approximately 2 m behind is moved from the R position, and the optical the vehicle on the road surface. information provided by the Parking Aid sys- 3 Intermediate line: indicates a distance of tem will be displayed. approximately 1 m behind the vehicle on Also in combination with the system, the rear the road surface. assist image can also be concealed: 4 Red horizontal line: indicates a safe dis- Fig. 231 Display on the Easy Connect system ● By pressing one of the Infotainment system tance of approximately 40 cm at the rear screen: orientation lines. buttons on the display. of the vehicle on the road surface. ● Switching the system on and off OR: By pressing the miniature vehicle that Parking manoeuvre appears on the left of the screen (which ● The rear assist will switch on when the igni- switches to the full-screen mode of the Park- ● Place the vehicle in front of the parking tion is on or the engine running, on engaging ing System Plus's optical system). space and engage reverse gear (manual reverse gear (manual gearbox) or on chang- gearbox) or move the selector to the R posi- ing the selector lever to the R position (auto- If you wish to display the rear assist image tion (automatic gearbox). matic gearbox). again: ● Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheel ● The system switches off 8 seconds after ● Disengage reverse, or change the selector so that the side orientation lines lead to- disengaging reverse gear (manual gearbox) wards the parking space. or removing the selector lever from the R po- lever's position, engage reverse again or ● Guide the vehicle into the parking space so sition (automatic gearbox). The system will move the selector lever to position R. that the side orientation lines run parallel to also disconnect immediately after the igni- ● OR: Press the RVC function button1) it. tion is switched off.

1) WARNING: the RVC function button will only be activated and available when the reverse gear is engaged or the selector lever is set to position R. 240 Towing bracket device

Towing bracket device CAUTION Depending on the country or version, the towing bracket device's detachable ball joint Handle the detachable ball joint with care in is located: Towing bracket device* order to avoid damaging the bumper paintwork. ● underneath the floor panel of the luggage compartment. Introduction data Technical Note ● or else on the surface of the floor panel of The towing bracket device fitted to your vehi- Towing the vehicle with the detachable ball the luggage compartment in a bag secured cle, be it factory-fitted or a genuine SEAT ac- joint ››› page 95. to the fastening rings. cessory, meets all the national technical and The ball joint is fitted and removed by hand.

legal requirements for towing. Advice Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin connector Description The towing device bracket is supplied with a for the electrical connection between the key. trailer and the vehicle. If the trailer is equip- Key to Fig. 232 ped with a 7-pin connector you can use the ››› corresponding adaptor, which is available as 1 13-pin connector a genuine SEAT accessory. 2 Safety lug Operation The maximum authorised towing load is 3 Hook housing 80 kg. 4 Hook housing cap 5 Ball protective cover WARNING 6 Detachable ball ● Before each journey, make sure that the detachable ball joint is properly fitted and se- 7 Locking lever

cured in its housing. 8 Lock cover Emergencies ● If the detachable ball joint is not properly 9 Release bolt fitted and secured, do not use it. 10 Lock ● Do not use the towing bracket device for towing if it is damaged or has missing parts. 11 Locking balls

● Do not modify or adapt the towing device 12 Key » Safety connection. ● Never unhook the detachable ball joint when the trailer is hitched. Fig. 232 Towing bracket device support / detachable ball joint / key. 241 Operation

Note Before assembling it, place the detachable Standby position ball in the standby position with the follow- Contact an Authorised Service Partner if you ing two steps. lose your key. Step 1. ● Turn the key in the direction of arrow 1 un- Placing in standby position til the part of the key with the holes reaches the top position ››› Fig. 233.

Step 2. ● Grip the detachable ball below the protective cover. ● Press the release bolt B in the direction of arrow 2 , and at the same time press lever C in the direction of arrow 3 as far as it will go ››› Fig. 234.

Fig. 233 Step 1. The lever will remain blocked in this position.

Fig. 235 Standby position: Position of the lever and the release bolt.

Standby position adjusted properly ● Key A ››› Fig. 235 is in the released position (the part of the key with the holes is facing upwards). ● Lever B ››› Fig. 235 is in the bottom position. Fig. 234 Step 2. ● The release bolt C ››› Fig. 235 can be moved.

242 Towing bracket device

Thus adjusted, the detachable ball is ready ing following the direction of arrow 1 until it Assembling the detachable ball - Step for installation. engages audibly ››› . 2

CAUTION Lever A turns automatically in the direction of arrow 2 upwards, and the release bolt B The key cannot be removed or turned in the moves outwards (the red and green part will Technical data Technical standby position. be visible) ››› . If lever A does not turn automatically or the Assembling the detachable ball - Step release bolt B does not come out, the detachable ball should be removed by turning 1 the lever as far as possible downwards from Advice the housing cavity, and the detachable ball's support surfaces and the cavity should then be cleaned. Fig. 237 Locking the lock.

WARNING ● When attaching the detachable ball, keep your hands well away from the reach of the Operation lever's rotation. There is a risk of injuring your fingers! ● Never try to pull the lever upwards by force to turn the key. The detachable ball would not Fig. 236 Fitting the detachable ball / Release be secured properly! bolt in the deployed position. Emergencies Fitting the detachable ball Fig. 238 Placing the cover over the lock. ● Remove the hook housing cap 4 ››› Fig. 232 downwards. Do not omit this first step ››› page 243, As- ● Set the detachable ball to its standby posi- sembling the detachable ball - Step 1! tion ››› page 242. Safety ● ● Grip the detachable ball from below Turn key A in the direction of arrow 1 un- ››› Fig. 236 and insert it into the hook hous- til the part of the key with the holes reaches the bottom position ››› Fig. 237. »

243 Operation

● Remove the key in the direction of arrow Checking proper attachment Removing the detachable ball - Step 1 2 . ● Place cover B in the lock in the direction of arrow 3 ››› Fig. 238 ››› . ● Check that the detachable ball is secure ››› page 244.

CAUTION ● After removing the key, always place the cover over the lever's lock. If the lock becomes soiled it will be impossible to insert the key. Fig. 239 Detachable ball properly attached. Fig. 240 Removing the lock cover. ● Keep the towing bracket device's housing cavity clean at all times. Dirtiness can pre- Whenever you go to use the detachable ball, vent the detachable ball from being properly make sure that it is properly attached first. secured! ● If the detachable ball is removed, always Detachable ball properly attached. place the cap on the hook's housing. ● The detachable ball will not fall out of the housing cavity after a major “knock or jerk”. ● Lever A ››› Fig. 239 is fully raised. ● The release bolt B ››› Fig. 239 is sticking fully out (the red and green part is visible). ● The key has been removed. Fig. 241 Releasing the lock. ● Cover C ››› Fig. 239 is placed over the lock. ● Remove cover A from the lock in the direc- WARNING tion of arrow 1 ››› Fig. 240. ● The towing bracket device should only be Insert key B into the lock in the direction used if the detachable ball has been properly of arrow 2 ››› Fig. 241. locked! ● Turn the key in the direction of arrow 3 until the part of the key with the holes is facing upwards. 244 Towing bracket device

WARNING time press lever B in the direction of arrow ● When operating the lever, do not apply too 2 as far as it will go. much pressure (for example, do not stand on Never remove the detachable ball joint when it)! the trailer is hitched. In this position, the detachable ball is loose and will fall/drop freely downwards. If this does not occur when you release it, press it Note Note data Technical with the other hand from above. Remove any dirt from the detachable ball be- Before you remove the detachable ball, you fore you put it away with the vehicle tools. are advised to place the protective cover on The detachable ball locks into the standby the ball coupling. position at the same time and is therefore ready to be reinserted into the hook housing

››› . Operation and care Advice Removing the detachable ball - Step 2 ● Fit the cap 4 ››› Fig. 232 onto its housing. Put the cover on the housing cavity so that dirt cannot get in. WARNING Before hooking up a trailer, always check the Never leave the detachable ball loose in the ball coupling and apply suitable grease if luggage compartment. It could cause damage necessary.

in the luggage compartment in the case of Operation abrupt braking, and even jeopardise passen- Use the protective cover when putting the de- ger safety! tachable ball away to keep the luggage compartment clean. CAUTION Remove any dirt from the housing cavity sur- ● If you hold the lever and do not press down faces and use a suitable cleaning product. Fig. 242 Releasing the detachable ball. on it as far as you can, after you remove the detachable ball, the latter will continue up- CAUTION Emergencies Do not omit this first step ››› page 244, Re- wards and will not lock into the standby posi- The top part of the hook housing is greased. moving the detachable ball - Step 1! tion. The detachable ball should be placed in Make sure that the grease has not been re- this position before the next assembly. moved. Releasing the detachable ball ● Keep the detachable ball in the standby po-

sition, with the key inserted into the box Safety ● Grip the detachable ball from below. while you place it facing downwards with the ● Press the release bolt A in the direction of side opposite to the one where the key is in- arrow 1 as far as it will go, and at the same serted. The key could get damaged!

245 Operation

Trailer towing duced by 10% for every further 1000 m (or Exterior mirrors part thereof). The gross combination weight Check whether you can see enough of the What do you need to bear in mind is the actual weight of the laden vehicle plus road behind the trailer with the standard rear the actual weight of the laden trailer. When when towing a trailer? vision mirrors. If this is not the case, you possible, operate the trailer with the maxi- should have additional exterior mirrors fitted. mum permitted drawbar load on the ball joint Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer Both exterior mirrors should be mounted on of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the when fitted with the correct equipment. hinged extension brackets. Adjust the mirrors specified limit. to give sufficient vision to the rear. If you wish to retrofit a towing bracket, con- The figures for trailer weights and drawbar sult ››› page 249. loads that are given on the data plate of the Tow rope towing bracket are for certification purposes Connectors Always use a cable between the vehicle and only. The correct figures for your specific the trailer ››› page 247. Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin connector model, which may be lower than these fig- for the electrical connection between the ures for the towing bracket, are given in the Trailer rear lights trailer and the vehicle. vehicle documentation or in ››› chapter Tech- nical Data. The trailer's rear lights should comply with If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to the statutory safety regulations ››› page 247. use an adapter cable. It is available at any Distributing the load Technical Service. WARNING Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy Trailer weight/drawbar load objects are as near to the axle as possible. Never transport people in a trailer. This could result in fatal accidents. Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If Loads carried in the trailer must be secured you do not load the trailer up to the maxi- to prevent them moving. Note mum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb correspondingly steeper slopes. Tyre pressure ● Towing a trailer places additional demands Set tyre pressure to the maximum permissi- on the vehicle. We recommend additional The maximum trailer weights listed are only ble pressure shown on the sticker on the in- services between the normal inspection inter- applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above side of the fuel tank flap. Set the tyre pres- vals if the vehicle is used frequently for tow- sea level. With increasing altitude the engine sure of the trailer tyres in accordance with the ing a trailer. power and therefore the vehicle climbing trailer manufacturer's recommendations. ● Find out whether special regulations apply ability are impaired because of the reduced to towing a trailer in your country. air density. The maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The weight of the vehicle and trailer combination must be re-

246 Towing bracket device

Hitching and connecting the trailer Key of the Schematic diagram ››› Fig. 243: Trailer maximum electricity consumption Pin Meaning Brake lights (total) 84 Watts Turn signal, on each side 42 Watts 12 Unassigned Side lights (total) 100 Watts 13 Earth, pin 9 data Technical Rear lights (total) 42 Watts Electrical socket for trailer Rear fog light 42 Watts The vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power socket for the electrical connection between Never exceed the values indicated! the trailer and the vehicle. If the system de- Advice Fig. 243 Schematic diagram: assignment of tects that a trailer has been connected elec- Note the pins of the trailer's electrical socket. trically, the electrical equipment on the trailer ● If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor- will receive voltage through this connection. rectly connected, the vehicle electronics may Key of the Schematic diagram ››› Fig. 243: Pin 9 has a permanent live. This powers, for be damaged. ● Pin Meaning example, the trailer's interior lighting. Pin 10 If the trailer absorbs excessive electric current, the vehicle electronics may be dam- is only powered when the engine is running. Operation 1 Left turn signal The charge wire (pin 10) charges, for exam- aged. ● Never connect the trailer's electric system 2 Rear fog light ple, a caravan battery. directly to the electrical connections of the Pin 9 and 10 should not be connected to 3 Earth, pins 1, 2, 4 to 8 tail lights or any other power sources. Only each other to avoid discharging or damaging use the connections intended for providing 4 Right turn signal the vehicle's battery. electric current to the trailer.

5 Rear light, right The earth wires, pin 3, pin 11 and pin 13, Emergencies should never be connected to each other to 6 Brake lights avoid overloading the electrical system. Ball coupling of towing bracket de- 7 Rear light, left If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you vice* will need to use an adapter cable. In this case 8 Reverse lights The ball coupling is provided with instruc- the function corresponding to pin 10 will not Safety 9 Permanent live be available. tions on fitting and removing the ball coupling of the towing bracket. » 10 Cable without positive charge

11 Earth, pin 10 247 Operation

WARNING Before driving WARNING The towing bracket ball coupling must be ● Grip the 13-pin connector at area A and ● Never use the safety lug to tow! remove it in the direction of the arrow stored securely in the luggage compartment ● Adjust your speed to suit the road and traf- Fig. 244. to prevent them being flung through the vehi- ››› fic conditions. cle and causing injury. ● Remove the protective cover 5 ››› Fig. 232 ● All work on the electrical system must be upwards. carried out only by specialised workshops. Note ● Never connect the trailer's electric system After driving ● By law, the ball coupling must be removed to the electrical connections of the rear lights if a trailer is not being towed if it obscures ● Grip the 13-pin connector at area A and or any other power sources. the number plate. insert it in the opposite direction to the arrow ● After hooking up the trailer and connecting ››› Fig. 244. the socket, check that all the trailer's rear ● Fit the protective cover 5 ››› Fig. 232 on lights are working properly. Driving with a trailer the ball coupling. Note Safety lug ● If there is any fault in the trailer's lighting, The safety lug B ››› Fig. 244 is used to hook check the fuses in the instrument panel fuse up the trailer's retainer cable. box ›››  page 58. On hooking it up to the safety lug, the retain- ● The contact between the retainer cable and the safety lug may give rise to mechanical er cable should have slack in all the trailer wear in the lug's surface protection. This positions with respect to the vehicle (sharp wear will not prevent the safety lug from op- bends, reverse gear, etc.). erating properly or cause any fault and is ex- cluded from the warranty. Headlights ● When connecting and disconnecting the Fig. 244 Turn the 13-pin connector. The front part of the vehicle may be raised trailer, the towing vehicle's handbrake when the trailer is connected and the light should be applied. may dazzle the rest of the traffic. ● When the tow hitch ball has not been fitted, Adapt the height of the headlights using the the socket should remain concealed in its housing on the bumper. headlight range rotary adjuster1).

1) This does not apply for vehicles with bi-xenon headlights. 248 Towing bracket device

Anti-theft alarm system Weight distribution Electronic stability control* The weight distribution of a loaded trailer The ESC* system helps to stabilise the trailer When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig- with an unladen vehicle is very unfavourable. in case of skidding or rocking. gered when the electrical connection be- However, if this cannot be avoided, drive ex- tween vehicle and trailer is interrupted. tra slowly to allow for the unbalanced weight Always turn off the anti-theft alarm system distribution. Retrofitting a towing bracket* data Technical before connecting or disconnecting a trailer ››› page 128. Speed The stability of the vehicle and trailer is re- Conditions for the integration of a trailer in duced with increasing speed. For this reason, Advice the anti-theft alarm system. it is advisable not to drive at the maximum ● The vehicle is factory-equipped with an an- permissible speed in an unfavourable road, ti-theft alarm system and a towing bracket weather or wind conditions. This applies es- device. pecially when driving downhill. ● The trailer is connected electrically to the You should always reduce speed immediately towing vehicle by the trailer connector. if the trailer shows the slightest sign of snak-

● The electrical system of the vehicle and the ing. Never try to stop the “snaking” by in- Operation trailer are prepared for operation. creasing speed. ● The vehicle is locked with the ignition key Always brake in due course. If the trailer has and the anti-theft alarm system is activated. an overrun brake, apply the brakes gently at first and then, firmly. This will prevent the CAUTION jerking that can be caused by locking of trailer wheels. Select a low gear in due course For technical reasons, trailers fitted with rear Emergencies LED lights are not integrated in the anti-theft before going down a steep downhill. This en- alarm system. ables you to use the engine braking to slow down the vehicle.

Reheating

Driving tips Safety At very high temperatures and during pro- Driving with a trailer always requires extra longed slopes, driving in a low gear and high care. engine speed, always monitor the coolant Fig. 245 Attachment points for towing brack- temperature gauge ››› page 113. et. » 249 Operation

If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the ve- ● The legal requirements in your country your SEAT dealer in case additional modifica- hicle is purchased, this must be completed must be observed (e.g. the fitting of a sepa- tions to your vehicle are necessary. according to the instructions of the towing rate control lamp). ● Due to the specific design of the exhaust, bracket manufacturer. ● Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear the fitting of a conventional towing hook is The attachment points for the towing bracket bumper, must be removed and reinstalled. not recommended for some sportier versions. A are on the lower part of the vehicle. The towing bracket securing bolts must be Please consult your Technical Service. tightened using a torque wrench, and a pow- The distance between the centre of the ball er socket must be connected to the vehicle coupling and the ground should never be electrical system. This requires specialised lower than the indicated value, even with a knowledge and tools. fully loaded vehicle and including the maximum drawbar load. ● Figures in the illustration show the elevation value and the attachment points which Elevation values for securing the towing must be considered if you are retrofitting a bracket: towing bracket.

B 65 mm (minimum) WARNING

C 350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle) The towing brackets should be fitted at a specialised workshop. D 1040 mm ● If the towing bracket is incorrectly instal- E 317 mm led, there is a serious danger of accident. ● LEON/LEON SC LEON ST For your own safety, please observe the tow F bracket manufacturer's instructions. 319 mm 596 mm CAUTION Fitting a towing bracket ● If the power socket is incorrectly installed, ● Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort this could cause damage to the vehicle elec- for the vehicle. Therefore, before fitting a trical system. towing bracket, please contact a Technical Service to check whether your cooling system Note needs modification. ● SEAT recommends that the towing hooks be fitted at a specialised workshop. Consult

250 Care and maintenance

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a direct wear of components, and also invalidate your Advice effect on the vehicle and/or the way it is driv- vehicle registration documents. en, such as a cruise control system or elec- You will appreciate that your SEAT dealership tronically-controlled suspension, must be Care and maintenance cannot be held liable for any damage caused approved for use in your vehicle and bear the by modifications and/or work performed in- e mark (the European Union's authorisation data Technical correctly. Accessories and modifications symbol). We therefore recommend that all work should to the vehicle If any additional electrical devices are fitted be performed by a SEAT Official Service using which do not serve to control the vehicle it- genuine SEAT parts®. Accessories, replacement parts and self (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop or repair work ventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the  Advice WARNING sign (manufacturer conformity declaration in Always ask your dealer or specialist retailer the European Union). Incorrectly performed modifications or other for advice before purchasing accessories and work on your vehicle can lead to malfunctions replacement parts. WARNING and cause accidents. Your vehicle is designed to offer a high Accessories, for example telephone holders standard of active and passive safety. For this or cup holders, should never be fitted on the reason, we recommend that you ask a SEAT covers, or within the working range of the air- Radio transmitters and office equip- Operation Official Service for advice before fitting ac- bags. Otherwise, there is a danger of injury if ment cessories or replacement parts. Your SEAT Of- the airbag is triggered in an accident. ficial Service has the latest information from Radio transmitters (fixed installation) the manufacturer and can recommend acces- Any retrofit installations of radio transmitters sories and replacement parts which are suita- Modifications in the vehicle require prior approval. SEAT ble for your requirements. They can also an-

generally authorises in-vehicle installations Emergencies swer any questions you might have regarding Modifications must always be carried out ac- of approved types of radio transmitters provi- official regulations. cording to our specifications. ded that: We recommend you to use only SEAT acces- Unauthorised modifications to the electronic ● The aerial is installed correctly. sories and Genuine SEAT parts®. SEAT has components, software, wiring or data transfer tested these parts and accessories for suita- ● The aerial is installed on the exterior of the in the vehicle may cause malfunctioning. Due Safety bility, reliability and safety. SEAT Official to the way the electronic components are vehicle (and shielded cables are used togeth- Services have the necessary experience and linked together in networks, other indirect er with non-reflective aerial trimming). facilities to ensure that the parts are installed systems may be affected by the faults. This ● The effective transmitting power does not correctly and professionally. can seriously impair safety, lead to excessive exceed 10 Watts at the aerial base. » 251 Advice

A SEAT Official Service and specialised work- WARNING WARNING shop will be able to inform you about options for installing and operating radio transmitters Mobile telephones or radio equipment which ● Cleaning products and other materials used with a higher transmitting power. is operated inside the vehicle without a prop- for car care can be damaging to your health if erly installed external aerial can create exces- misused. sive magnetic fields that could cause a health Mobile radio transmitters ● Always keep care products in a safe place, hazard. out of the reach of children. Failure to comply Commercial mobile telephones or radio could result in poisoning. equipment might interfere with the electron- Note ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions. For the sake of the environment This may be due to: ● The posterior fitting of electric and electronic equipment in this vehicle affects its li- ● If possible, use environmentally friendly ● No external aerial. cence and could lead to the withdrawal of the products. vehicle registration document under certain ● ● External aerial incorrectly installed. circumstances. The remains of car care products should not ● Transmitting power more than 10 W. be disposed of with ordinary household ● Please use the mobile telephone/radio op- waste. erating instructions. You must, therefore, do not operate portable mobile telephones or radio equipment inside the vehicle without a properly installed exter- Vehicle exterior care nal aerial ››› . Care and cleaning Please note also that the maximum range of Washing the vehicle the equipment can only be achieved with an General information external aerial. The longer substances such as insects, bird Regular and careful care helps to maintain droppings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, in- Business equipment the value of the vehicle. This may also be one dustrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt and of the requirements for upholding any war- Retrofit installation of business or private other aggressive materials remain on the ve- ranty claims in the event of corrosion or paint equipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi- hicle, the more damage they do to the paint- defects. ded the equipment cannot interfere with the work. High temperatures (for instance due to driver's immediate control of the vehicle and SEAT Official Services and specialist retailers strong sunlight) further intensify the corro- that any such equipment carries the  mark. carry stocks of suitable car care materials. sive effect. Any retrofit equipment that could influence Please follow the instructions for use on the After the period when salt is put on the roads the driver's control of the vehicle must have a packaging. it is important to have the underside of the type approval for your vehicle and must carry vehicle washed thoroughly. the e mark. 252 Care and maintenance

Automatic car washes ● Do not use scrapers to remove ice or snow ● When washing the car during the winter Before going through a car wash, be sure to from the sheets. season: water and ice in the brake system take the usual precautions such as closing ● Do not polish the adhesive sheets. can reduce braking effectiveness: risk of accident! the windows and roof. If the vehicle has spe- ● Do not use dirty cloths or sponges. cial accessories such as spoilers or a roof

● It is preferable to wash them with a soft data Technical rack or two-way radio aerial, etc., it is advisa- CAUTION sponge and gentle neutral soap. ble to consult the car wash tunnel operator. ● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight – It is best to use a car wash without revolving Washing the car by hand otherwise the paint can be damaged. bristles if possible. When washing the car by hand, use plenty of ● Do not use sponges, abrasive household

sponges or similar to clean insect remains. Advice water to soften the dirt first, and rinse off as Washing the vehicle with a high pressure This could damage the surface. well as possible. cleaner ● Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from Then clean the vehicle with a soft sponge, When washing the vehicle with a high-pres- the headlights at regular intervals, for in- glove or brush using only slight pressure. sure cleaner, always follow the operating instance when filling the fuel tank. The head- You should start on the roof and work down. lights should only be washed with water, do structions for the equipment. This applies Special car soap should only be used for very not wipe them with a dry cloth or sponge. It particularly to the operating pressure and the persistent dirt. is best to use soapy water. spraying distance. Do not hold the nozzle too Operation close to soft materials such as rubber hoses Rinse the sponge or glove thoroughly and of- ● Never wash tyres with a jet that sprays the water out in a direct stream. This could dam- or seals. The same applies to the parking aid ten. age the tyres even if the spray is kept at a sensors*, which are located in the rear bump- Wheels, sills and similar should be cleaned distance and only used for a very short time. er. last. Use a second sponge for this. ● Before washing the vehicle in an automatic Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out car wash, please make sure to retract the ex- in a direct stream or one that has a rotating WARNING terior mirrors to prevent them from being Emergencies damaged. Electrically retractable exterior jet for forcing off dirt. ● The vehicle should only be washed with the mirrors must not be folded in or out by hand, ignition switched off. Failure to follow this in- always use the electrical power control. Factory-fitted adhesive sheets struction could result in an accident. The following indications should be taken in- ● Do not clean the underside of chassis, the to account to avoid damaging adhesive inside of wheel arches or wheel trims without CAUTION Safety sheets: protecting your hands and arms. You may cut ● Before washing the vehicle in an automatic yourself on sharp-edged metal parts. Other- car wash, please proceed as follows to lock ● Do not use high pressure cleaners. wise, there is a risk of sustaining cuts. the wiper arms so that they are not moved towards the top of the windscreen: » 253 Advice

– the bonnet must be closed. – Stay a suitable distance from the sensors If the polish does not contain wax, a wax product should be applied after polishing. – switch the ignition on and off. on the front and rear bumpers. – Do not clean the camera lenses or sur- – press the windscreen wiper lever forward CAUTION briefly (windscreen washer function). rounding area with the pressure washer. This will lock the wiper arms. ● Never use warm or hot water to remove ● Do not use polishes and hard wax on pain- snow and ice from the reverse camera lens, ted parts with a matt finish or on plastic as it could crack the lens. parts. For the sake of the environment ● Never use abrasive cleaning agents on the ● Do not apply paint polishes to the side trim The car should only be washed in special lens. that runs around the panoramic roof and ends wash bays. These areas are prepared to pre- on the windscreen. However, it can be treated vent oily water from getting into the public with hard wax. drains. In some places, washing vehicles outside the areas intended for this purpose is Waxing and polishing prohibited. Care Trims Waxing protects the paintwork. It is time to In respect for the environment, the silver- Camera sensors and lenses apply a coat of good wax when water no lon- plated trims on the body are made of pure ger forms droplets and rolls off the clean aluminium (they do not contain chrome). ● Use a small brush to remove snow and a paintwork. de-icer spray to remove ice. Dirt or marks on the trim mouldings should Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the be removed with a cleaning product with a ● Clean the sensors with a solvent-free prod- vehicle washing tunnel, it is advisable to pro- neutral PH (do not use a chrome cleaner). uct and a soft, dry cloth. tect the paint with a hard wax coating at least Body polish is also unsuitable for use on trim ● Moisten the camera lens using a standard twice a year. mouldings. The intensive cleaning fluids of- alcohol-based glass cleaning agent and In the summer, you will find it is much easier ten used before the car goes into a car wash clean the lens with a dry cloth. In the active to remove dead insects (which accumulate may contain alkaline substances, which can lane assist*, the area in front of the lens is on the bumper and the front of the bonnet) if cause dull or milky patches when they dry normally cleaned with the windscreen wash- the car has been treated with care products out. er. recently. SEAT Official Services carry stocks of cleaning CAUTION products which have been tested for use on Polishing your vehicle and are not harmful to the envi- ● When you clean the vehicle with a pressure Polishing is only necessary if the paint has ronment. washer: lost its shine, and the gloss cannot be brought back by putting on wax. 254 Care and maintenance

Plastic parts Windows avoid scratches caused by dirt on the glass, the scraper should only be pushed in one di- Plastic parts are cleaned with a power wash- Clear vision is an essential safety factor. rection and not moved to and fro. er. If this is not sufficient, plastic parts The windscreen must not be cleaned with in- ● The heating element for the rear window is should only be treated with a special solvent- sect remover or wax, otherwise the wind- located on the inner side of the window. To free plastic cleaning agent. Do not use paint- data Technical screen wipers will not function properly (jud- avoid damaging them, do not apply stickers work cleaners, polishes or wax on plastic dering). to these heating elements. parts. ● Never use warm or hot water to remove Traces of rubber, oil, grease or silicone can snow and ice from windows and mirrors. This be removed with a window cleaning solution could cause the glass to crack!

Carbon parts or a silicone remover. Wax residue can only Advice be removed with a special cleaner. Your SEAT Official Service will be able to provide you The carbon parts on your vehicle have a pain- Wheels ted surface. They do not need any special with more detailed information. care and are cleaned just like any other pain- The windows should also be cleaned on the The wheels require regular attention to pre- ted part ››› page 252. inside at regular intervals. serve their appearance. It is important to re- Use a separate cloth or chamois to dry the move road salt and brake dust by washing the wheels at regular intervals, otherwise the Operation Paint damage windows. Cloths used for waxing and polishing contain residues that will cause smears finish will be impaired. Minor damage to the paint, such as scratches on the glass. After washing, the wheels should only be or stone chips, should be touched up without cleaned with an "acid-free" cleaning agent delay before the metal starts to corrode. Suit- WARNING for alloy wheels. This is available from SEAT able touch-up brushes or sprays for your car Do not use water-repellent coatings on the Official Services and specialist retailers. Nev- can be obtained from a SEAT Official Service. windscreen. In bad visibility conditions (e.g. er leave the cleaning agent on the rims for Emergencies in the rain, dark or with a low sun), these any longer than specified in the instructions The number of the original paint finish on the coatings may cause dazzle: risk of accident! before rinsing it off. If the wheel cleaner fluid vehicle is given on the data sticker Such coatings can also cause the windscreen contains acid it can attack the surfaces of the ››› page 287. wiper blades to make noise. wheel bolts. If corrosion is already visible it must be thor- Car polish or other abrasive agents should Safety oughly removed by a specialised workshop. CAUTION not be used for maintaining the rims. If the ● Remove snow and ice from windows and ex- protective coating is damaged, e.g. by flying terior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To stones, the damaged area should be repaired immediately. » 255 Advice

WARNING The Easy Connect control panel* should first Normal cleaning be cleaned with a brush so that no dirt goes Please note when cleaning the wheels that We recommend that you use a soft sponge or into the device or between the keys and a commercially available lint-free, micro-fibre water, ice and road salt can impair the effec- housing. Next, we recommend cleaning the tiveness of the brakes; this can cause an acci- cloth for normal cleaning. Only use brushes Easy Connect control panel* using a cloth dent. on floor coverings and mats, as other textile dampened with water and washing-up liquid. surfaces could become damaged.

CAUTION In the case of normal surface dirt you can use Exhaust tail pipe a foam cleaner. Use a sponge to spread the ● To avoid scratching the screen, do not wipe foam on the textile surface and to work it into the display with a dry cloth. It is important to remove road salt and brake the material lightly. However, make sure that dust by washing the wheels at regular inter- ● To avoid damage, ensure that no liquid the textile material does not become soaking vals, otherwise the exhaust tail pipe material goes into the Easy Connect control panel*. wet. Then dab off the foam with a dry and ab- could be damaged. To remove impurities, do sorbent cloth (e.g. a micro-fibre cloth) and not use rim, paint or chrome cleaners or oth- vacuum off any residue once the surface is er abrasive products. Clean the exhaust tail Plastic and leatherette parts completely dry. pipes with cleaning products that are suitable for stainless steel. Plastic parts and leatherette can be cleaned Cleaning stains with a damp cloth. If this is not sufficient, SEAT Official Services carry stocks of cleaning Treat drink stains (such as coffee or fruit plastic parts and leatherette should only be products that have been tested and ap- juice, etc.) with a cleaning solution for deli- treated with a special solvent-free plastic proved for use on your vehicle. cate fabrics. This solution should be applied cleaner. with a sponge. If the stains are difficult to remove, a washing paste can be applied directly onto the stain and worked into the fabric. Caring for the vehicle interior Textile covers and trim parts The surface will then have to be wiped with clear water to remove any residue left by the Textile covers and trim parts (e.g. seats, door Radio display/Easy Connect* and con- paste. To do so, use a damp cloth or sponge trim) should be cleaned regularly with a vac- trol panel* and then dab the stain with an absorbent uum cleaner. This will remove surface dirt cloth. The display can be cleaned with a soft cloth which could otherwise be rubbed into the and a professionally available “LCD cleaner”. textile material during use. Do not use steam Remove chocolate or make-up stains with a Moisten the cloth with a small amount of the cleaners, as the steam could carry the dirt cleaning paste (for e.g., soft soap). Then re- cleaning fluid. deeper into the textile material. move the soap with water (wet sponge).

256 Care and maintenance

A spirit-based cleaner can be used to remove ing remain visible; these are the characteris- To maintain the value of natural leather you grease, oil, lipstick or ball point pen. Then tic features of genuine natural leather. should note the following points: dab the dissolved grease or colour particles Natural napped leather does not have a pro- off with an absorbent cloth or similar. You CAUTION tective surface coating of dye. It is therefore may also have to treat the stain once more somewhat more prone to damage. This ● Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight using washing paste and water. data Technical should be borne in mind if children or pets for long periods, otherwise it may tend to If the covers or textile trim panels are badly often travel in the car, or if there are other lose some of its colour. If the car is left for a soiled we recommend that you have them factors that could lead to damage. prolonged period in the bright sun, it is best cleaned by a professional cleaning company to cover the leather. Types of leather with a coloured surface coat- with a shampoo and spray. ● Sharp-edged objects on clothing, such as

ing are likely to be more resistant to damage. belts, zip fasteners, rivets or similar, can also Advice This has a great advantage for day-to-day Note leave permanent scratches and rough marks use. However, this means that the typical on the surface of the leather. Open Velcro fasteners on clothes can damage natural characteristics of the surface are less the seat upholstery. Make sure they are apparent, though this does not affect quality. closed. Note Cleaning and care ● Use a suitable impregnating cream with ultra-violet protection at regular intervals and Due to the natural properties of the specially Operation Natural leather after cleaning. The cream nourishes and selected hides employed, the finished leath- moisturises the leather, keeps it supple and er has a certain sensitivity to grease and dirt, General information able to breathe. A protective film will also etc. so a degree of care is required in every- form. Our range of leathers is large. The main type day use and when looking after the leather. ● Clean the leather every 2 to 3 months and used is particularly nappa in various forms, Dark clothing (especially if damp or incorrect- remove fresh dirt as soon as possible. that is, leather with a smooth surface in dif- ly dyed) may stain leather upholstery on the ● Remove stains from fresh ball-pen and oth- ferent colours. Emergencies seats. Dust and grit in the pores and seams er inks, lipstick, shoe cream and similar The amount of dye used determines the ap- can scratch and damage the surface. There- stains as soon as possible. fore leather should be cleaned at regular in- pearance and properties of leather. If the ● Preserve the colour of the leather. A special tervals, depending on the actual amount of leather is left in a more natural state, it re- coloured cream will renew the colour of the use. When they have been in use for a certain tains its typical natural napped appearance leather when required and will eliminate dif- and confers excellent all-weather properties time, your car seats will acquire a typical and ferences in colour. Safety to the seats. Fine veins, healed scars, insect unmistakable patina. This is characteristic for bites, wrinkles and a subtle variation in shad- leather as a natural product and is a sign of genuine quality.

257 Advice

Cleaning and care of leather uphols- – Treat fat-based, dried-in stains with grease- CAUTION dissolving spray. tery On no account use solvents (such as petrol, – Treat less common stains on leather, such turpentine), wax polish, shoe cream or simi- Natural leather requires an extra degree of at- as ball-pen and other inks, felt-tip pens, lar materials. tention and care. nail polish, dispersion paint, shoe cream etc. with a special leather stain remover. Normal cleaning Cleaning Alcantara upholstery – Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with wa- Leather maintenance ter and wipe over the leather surfaces. – The leather should be treated regularly Removing dust and dirt (about twice a year) with a special leather- – Moisten a cloth just a little and wipe down More stubborn dirt care product. the seat covers. – More stubborn dirt can be removed using a – Apply these products very sparingly. mild soap solution (pure liquid soap: two Removing stains tablespoons dissolved in one litre of wa- – Then wipe off with a soft cloth. – Moisten a cloth with lukewarm water or di- ter). Should you have questions regarding the luted white spirits. – Do not let the water soak through the leath- care and cleaning of the leather upholstery in – Dab at the stain. Start at the outside and er or penetrate into the seams. your vehicle, we recommend that you contact work inwards. – Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth. your SEAT Official Service. Our representa- tives will be happy to advise you and tell you – Dry the clean area with a soft cloth. about the product range for leather conserva- Removal of stains tion, for example: Do not use leather cleaning products on Al- – Remove fresh water-based stains such as cantara seat covers. ● coffee, tea, juices, blood etc. with an ab- Cleaning and care set. You may use a suitable soap on dust and dirt. sorbent cloth or kitchen roll, or use the ● Coloured leather-care cream. cleaning agent from the care set for dried- Dust and grit in the pores and seams can ● Stain remover for ball-pen inks, shoe cream on stains. scratch and damage the surface. If the car is etc. left standing in the sun for long periods, Al- – Remove fresh grease-based stains that ● Grease dissolving spray. cantara leather should be protected against have not penetrated the surface such as ● New products and further developments direct sunlight to prevent it from fading. How- butter, mayonnaise, chocolate, etc. with an ever, slight colour variations will arise in nor- absorbent cloth or kitchen roll or with the mal use. cleaning agent from the care set.

258 Intelligent technology

CAUTION the belt in question must be replaced by a Intelligent technology specialised workshop. ● Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers, leather cleaning prod- Electromechanical steering ucts or any similar products on Alcantara. ● To avoid damage, stubborn stains should Electro-mechanical power steering assists Technical data Technical be removed by a specialised workshop. the driver when steering. ● On no account use brushes, hard sponges Electro-mechanical power steering adapts or similar utensils. electronically to the speed of the car, torque and turning angle.

If the power steering should fail at any time Advice Seat belts or the engine is switched off (for instance when being towed), the car can still be – Keep the seat belts clean. steered. However, more effort than normal – For cleaning, use a mild solution of soap will be required to turn the steering wheel. and water. Driver warning lamps and messages

– Check the condition of the seat belts at reg- Operation ular intervals.  (in red) Faulty steering! To park the vehicle The retract function may not operate properly in very dirty belts. Make sure that the inertia If the warning lamp remains on and the driver reel seat belts are completely dry before al- indication appears, the power steering could lowing them to retract. be faulty. Do not continue driving. Seek specialist as- Emergencies CAUTION sistance. ● Do not remove the seat belts from the vehi-  (in yellow) Steering: System cle to clean them. fault! You may continue driving. ● Do not use chemical cleaning agents on the seat belts, as this can damage the webbing. If the warning lamp comes on, the steering Safety Ensure that the seat belts do not come into could react with more difficultly or more sen- contact with corrosive fluids. sitivity than normal. In addition, when driving in a straight line the steering wheel may be ● If you find any damage to the belt webbing, off-centre. belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle, » 259 Advice

Drive slowly to a specialised workshop and sportier, more direct and noticeably more dy- Snow chains have the fault repaired. namic driving sensation. On roads where snow chains are mandatory,  (in yellow) Steering lock: this also applies to cars with four-wheel drive fault! Go to an Official Service ›››  page 64. Four-wheel drive The electronic steering lock is malfunction- Changing tyres ing. 3 Valid for vehicles: with four-wheel drive On vehicles with four-wheel drive, all four On four-wheel drive models, the engine pow- Go to a specialised workshop as soon as tyres must have the same rolling circumfer- er is distributed to all four wheels possible and have the fault repaired. ence. Also avoid using tyres with varying tread depths ››› page 279. WARNING General notes Take it immediately to a specialised work- On four-wheel drive vehicles, the engine Off-roader? shop and have the fault repaired: risk of acci- power is distributed to all four wheels. The Your SEAT is not an off-road vehicle: it does dent! distribution of power is controlled automati- not have enough ground clearance to be cally according to your driving style and the used as such. It is therefore best to avoid road conditions. Also see ››› page 181, Brak- Note rough tracks and uneven terrain as much as ing and stability systems. If the lamp  (in red) or else  (in yellow) possible. lights up briefly, you may continue driving. The four-wheel drive is specially designed to complement the superior engine power. This WARNING combination gives the vehicle exceptional ● Even with four-wheel drive, you should al- handling and performance capabilities, both Progressive steering ways adjust your speed to suit the condi- on normal roads and in more difficult conditions. Do not let the extra safety features tions, such as snow and ice. Even so (or per- Depending on the vehicle equipment, the tempt you into taking any risks when driving. haps especially for this reason), it is impor- progressive steering can adapt steering hard- Risk of accident! tant to observe certain safety points . ness to the current driving situation. The ››› ● The braking capability of your vehicle is power steering only works when the engine limited by the tyres' grip. It is therefore no is running. Winter tyres different from a car without four-wheel drive. Thanks to four-wheel drive, your vehicle will So do not be tempted to drive too fast on firm In city traffic you do not need to turn so much have plenty of traction in winter conditions, or slippery roads just because the vehicle on parking, manoeuvring or in very tight even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless, still has good acceleration in these condi- turns. tions. Risk of accident! we still recommend that winter tyres or all- On the road or on the motorway, progressive season tyres be fitted on all four wheels to ● On wet roads bear in mind that the front steering transmits, for example, in bends, a give even better braking response. wheels may start to “aquaplane” and lose 260 Intelligent technology

contact with the road if the car is driven too The main functions incorporated in the power sume more electrical power than the alterna- fast. If this should happen, there will be no management system are battery diagnosis, tor can supply, and thus maintains the maxi- sudden increase in engine speed to warn the residual current management and dynamic mum possible battery power level. driver, as occurs with a front-wheel drive car. power management. For this reason you should always choose a Note

driving speed suitable for the road condi- data Technical Battery diagnosis ● Neither is the power management system tions. Risk of accident! The battery diagnosis function constantly able to overcome the given physical limits. registers the condition of the battery. Sen- Please remember that the power and useful sors detect the battery voltage, battery cur- life of the battery are limited. Power Management rent and battery temperature. This enables ● When there is a risk that the vehicle will the system to calculate the current power lev- not start, the alternator power failure or low Advice el and charge condition of the battery. battery charge level warning lamp will be This system helps to ensure reliable shown  ››› page 113. starting Residual current management The power management controls the distribu- The residual current management reduces tion of electrical energy and thus helps to en- power consumption while the vehicle is Flat battery sure that there is always enough power avail- parked. It controls the supply of power to the Starting ability has first priority. Operation able to start the engine. various electrical devices while the ignition is switched off. The system takes the battery di- Short trips, city traffic and low temperatures If a vehicle with a conventional electrical sys- agnosis data into consideration. all place a heavy load on the battery. In these tem is left parked for a long time, the battery conditions a large amount of power is con- will gradually lose its charge because certain Depending on the power level of the battery, sumed, but only a small amount is supplied. electrical devices, such as the electronic switch off the individual electrical devices The situation is also critical if electrical devi- gearbox lock continues to draw current even one after the other to prevent the battery ces are in use when the engine is not run- when the ignition is off. In some cases there from losing too much charge and to ensure Emergencies ning. In this case power is consumed when may not be enough power available to start that the engine can be started reliably. none is being generated. the engine. Dynamic power management In these situations you will be aware that the Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent power management system is intervening to power management system to control the While the vehicle is moving, this function dis-

control the distribution of electrical power. » Safety distribution of electrical energy. This signifi- tributes the available power to the various cantly improves reliability when starting the electrical devices and systems according to engine, and also prolongs the useful life of their requirements. The power management the battery. ensures that on-board systems do not con-

261 Advice When the vehicle is parked for long periods especially if the battery is not fully charged Checking and refilling levels If you do not drive your vehicle for a period of initially. several days or weeks, the power manage- To restore the necessary energy balance, the Filling the tank ment will gradually shut off the electrical de- system will then temporarily shut off the elec- vices one by one or reduce the amount of cur- trical devices that are using a lot of power, or Filling up rent they are using. This limits the amount of reduce the current they are consuming. Heat- power consumed and helps to ensure relia- ing systems in particular use a large amount Read the additional information carefully ble starting even after a long period. Some of electrical power. If you notice, for instance, ›››  page 53 convenience functions, such as remote vehi- that the seat heating* or the rear window cle opening, may not be available under cer- heater is not working, they may have been If the automatic filler nozzle is operated cor- tain circumstances. These functions will be temporarily switched off or regulated to a rectly, it will switch itself off as soon as the restored when you switch on the ignition and lower heat output. These systems will be fuel tank is “full”. Do not try to put in more start the engine. available again as soon as sufficient electri- fuel after the nozzle cuts out, as this will fill cal power is available. the expansion chamber in the fuel tank. With the engine switched off You may also notice that the engine runs at a The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv- For example, if you listen to the sound sys- slightly faster idling speed when necessary. en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank tem with the engine switched off the battery This is quite normal, and no cause for con- flap. Further notes on fuel can be found at will run down. cern. The increased idling speed allows the ››› page 264. If the energy consumption means there is a alternator to meet the greater power require- The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is giv- risk that the engine will not start, a text will ment and charge the battery at the same en in ›››  page 53. appear in vehicles with a driver information time. system*. Vehicles with natural gas engines and hy- This driver indicator tells you that you must brids start the engine so that the battery can re- Every 6 months it is necessary to run on pet- charge. rol until the control lamp switches off  and then the tank must be refilled. This is neces- When the engine is running sary to ensure that the system works properly, as well as the fuel quality required for driv- Although the alternator generates electrical ing with petrol. power, the battery can still become discharged while the vehicle is being driven. This can occur when a lot of power is being consumed but only a small amount supplied, 262 Checking and refilling levels

WARNING – Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the Note luggage compartment. Fuel vapour is ex- Fuel is highly flammable and can cause seri- Diesel vehicles are fitted with a protective de- plosive. Risk of fatal accident! ous burns and other injuries. vice that prevents the insertion of the wrong 1) ● Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank or a fuel hose . It is only possible to refuel with canister. Naked flames are forbidden in the CAUTION Diesel nozzles. Technical data Technical vicinity due to the risk of explosion. ● If any fuel is spilt onto the vehicle, it ● If the pump nozzle is worn, damaged, or if ● Observe legislation governing the use, should be removed immediately. It could oth- it is very small, it is possible that it will not storage and carrying of a spare fuel canister erwise damage the paintwork. be able to open the protective device. Before trying to insert the pump nozzle by turning it, in the vehicle. ● Never run the tank completely dry. An irreg- try a different pump or request specialist

● ular fuel supply could cause misfiring. As a Advice For safety reasons we do not recommend help. carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehicle. result, unburnt fuel could enter the exhaust In an accident the canister could be damaged system and damage the catalytic converter. ● If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel canister, the protective device will not open. One and could leak. ● When filling the fuel tank after having run it way to resolve this is to pour the fuel in very ● completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel en- If, in exceptional circumstances, you have slowly. to carry a spare fuel canister, please observe gine, the ignition must be switched on for at the following points: least 30 seconds before starting the engine. When you then start the engine it may take

– Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canister Operation if it is inside or on top of the vehicle. An longer than normal (up to one minute) to Refuelling with natural gas electrostatic charge could build up during start firing. This is because air needs to be filling, causing the fuel vapour to ignite. bled from the fuel system while starting. Danger of explosion. Always place the canister on the ground to fill it. For the sake of the environment – Insert the filling nozzle as far as possible Do not overfill the fuel tank, it may cause the into the spare fuel canister. fuel to overflow if it becomes warm. Emergencies – If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must be in contact Note with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electrostatic charge There is no emergency mechanism for the building up. manual release of the fuel tank flap. If neces- Safety sary, request assistance from specialised per- Fig. 246 Tank flap open: gas filler mouth 1 , sonnel. filler mouth retainer 2 »

1) Depending on country 263 Advice

Before refuelling, the engine and the igni- ● If you wish to finish refuelling in advance, do not know, ask a qualified employee at the tion, mobile telephone and heating must be press the button on the pump to stop the petrol station to do the refuelling. switched off separately . flow. ››› ● Noises heard when refuelling are normal Read the instructions on how to use the natu- and do not indicate the presence of a fault in ral gas pump carefully. Closing the fuel tank cap the system. ● Check that the gas filler mouth retainer 2 ● The vehicle is not prepared for refuelling with The vehicle natural gas system is prepared is not trapped with the filler nozzle. If neces- both for refuelling with a small compressor liquefied natural gas (LNG) ››› . Before refu- sary, place it in the filler mouth again. (slow refuel) and a large compressor (fast re- elling with natural gas, make sure you add fuel) in natural gas service stations. the appropriate type of fuel ››› page 264. ● Insert the plug in the filler mouth. ● Close the tank flap. Make sure you hear it Opening the fuel tank cap click into place. The natural gas filler mouth is behind the fuel Fuel tank cap, next to the petrol filler mouth. WARNING Natural gas is a highly explosive, easily flam- Types of petrol ● Unlock the vehicle with the key or with the mable substance. Incorrect handling of the central locking button  situated on the driv- natural gas can cause accidents serious The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the er door ››› page 120. burns and other injuries. fuel tank flap. ● Press on the rear area of the flap and open ● Before refuelling with natural gas, engage The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con- it. the filling mouth correctly. If you can smell verter and must only be run on unleaded pet- gas, stop refuelling immediately. rol. The petrol must comply with European Refuelling Standard EN 228 or German standard DIN Special feature: if the ambient temperature is WARNING 51626-1 and must be unleaded. You can re- very high, the natural gas pump protection The vehicle is not prepared to use liquefied fuel with a maximum ethanol proportion of against overheating disconnects this auto- natural gas (LNG), and this fuel must not be 10 % (E10). The types of petrol are differenti- matically. added under any circumstances. Liquefied ated by their octane rating (RON). natural gas can cause the natural gas tank to The following titles appear on the corre- ● Remove the plug from the gas filler mouth explode, resulting in serious injury. sponding adhesive on the fuel tank flap: ››› Fig. 246 1 . ● Connect the pump filling nozzle to the gas Note filler mouth. ● The filling nozzles of natural gas pumps ● The fuel tank will be full when the pump can differ in the way they are operated. If you compressor automatically cuts the supply. 264 Checking and refilling levels

Super unleaded 95 octane or normal 91 oc- petrol industry, free of metals. These addi- ● Just filling one full tank of leaded fuel or tane unleaded petrol tives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the fuel containing other metal additives would We recommend you use super 95 octane pet- fuel system clean and prevent deposits from seriously impair the efficiency of the catalytic rol. If this is not available: normal 91 octane building up in the engine. converter. petrol, with a slight decrease in power. If good-quality petrol with metal-free addi- ● Only use fuel additives that have been ap- tives is not available or engine problems proved by SEAT. Octane boosting or anti- data Technical Super unleaded petrol with a minimum of 95 arise, the necessary additives must be added knock additives may contain metal additives octanes when refuelling ››› . that could seriously damage the engine or the catalytic converter. These additives must You should use super petrol with a minimum Not all petrol additives have been shown to not be used. of 95 octanes. be effective. The use of unsuitable petrol ad- ● High engine speed and full throttle can Advice If super is not available, in an emergency you ditives may cause significant damage to the damage the engine when using petrol with an may refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. In engine and the catalytic converter. Metal ad- octane rating lower than the correct grade for this case only use moderate engine speeds ditives should never be used. Metal additives the engine. and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon may also be contained in petrol additives for as possible. improving anti-detonation ratings or octane Note ratings ››› . ● You may use petrol with a high octane num- Super unleaded 98 octane or super 95 oc- SEAT recommends “genuine Volkswagen ber than the one recommended for your en- Operation tane unleaded petrol Group Fuel Additives for petrol engines”. gine. We recommend you use super plus 98 octane These additives can be bought at SEAT deal- ● In those countries where unleaded petrol is petrol. If this is not available: super 95 oc- ers, where information on how to use them not available, you may refuel with a fuel with tane petrol, with a slight decrease in power. can also be obtained. a low lead content.

If super is not available, in an emergency you CAUTION may refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. In Emergencies ● this case only use moderate engine speeds Do not refuel if the filler indicates that the Diesel fuel fuel contains metal. LRP (lead replacement and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of as possible. Please note the information on the inside of metal additives. Using them may damage the the fuel tank flap. engine!

Petrol additives Safety ● Never refuel with fuels containing a large We recommend the use of diesel fuel which The quality of the fuel influences the behav- proportion of ethanol (for example, E50, E85). complies to European standard EN 590. If iour, power and service life of the engine. This could damage the fuel system. diesel fuel which meets European standard This is why the petrol you use should carry EN 590 is not available, the Cetane number suitable additives already included by the (CZ) must, at minimum, be 51. If the engine » 265 Advice

is equipped with a particulate filter, the sul- Programme. We recommend having this done the natural gas, the lower the consumption phur content of the fuel must be below 50 by a specialised workshop. If water is allowed will be. parts per million. to collect in the filter, this can cause engine However, the heating power and the propor- performance problems. tion of nitrogen and carbon dioxide can fluc- Winter-grade diesel tuate within the quality groups. Therefore, ve- Summer fuel becomes thicker in winter and it hicle consumption can also vary when using is more difficult to start the engine. For this Natural gas a single type of gas only. reason, petrol stations in some countries al- The engine management automatically so offer winter diesel with improved fluidity Natural gas can be compressed or in liquid adapts to the natural gas used according to when cold (winter-grade diesel). form, addition to others. its quality. Therefore, different quality gases Liquefied natural gas (LNG) is the result of can be mixed in the tank, without the need Water in the fuel filter1) heavy cooling of natural gas. Therefore its for comprehensive draining before applying a If your vehicle has a diesel engine and is volume is considerably reduced compared different quality gas. equipped with a fuel filter with a water sepa- with compressed natural gas (CNG). In vehi- Updated information relating to natural gas rator, the instrument panel may display the cles with a natural gas engine, liquefied nat- quality is displayed on the instrument panel following warning:  Water in the ural gas cannot be directly refilled, as the gas would expand excessively in the vehicle gas ›››  page 33. fuel filter. If this is the case, take the tank. vehicle to a specialised workshop so that Natural gas and safety they can drain the fuel filter. Therefore, vehicles with a natural gas engine If you can smell gas or suspect that there is a must only be refuelled using compressed leak : CAUTION natural gas ››› . ››› ● The vehicle is not designed for the use of ● Stop the vehicle immediately. Natural gas quality and consumption FAME fuel (biodiesel). The fuel system would ● Switch the ignition off. be damaged if you used biodiesel. Natural gas is divided into the groups H and ● Open the doors to appropriately ventilate ● Do not mix fuel additives, the so-called L depending on its quality. the vehicle. “thinners”, petrol or similar additives with diesel fuel. Gas type H has a superior heating power and ● Extinguish cigarettes immediately. inferior nitrogen and carbon dioxide content ● If poor-quality diesel fuel is used, it may be ● Move away from the vehicle or switch off than type L. The higher the heating power of necessary to drain the fuel filter more fre- objects that may cause sparks or a fire. quently than is specified in the Maintenance

1) Valid for the market: Algeria. 266 Checking and refilling levels

● If you continue to smell gas, do not contin- added under any circumstances. Liquefied ue driving! natural gas can cause the natural gas tank to ● Seek specialist assistance. Have the fault explode, resulting in serious injury. repaired. WARNING Regular checks of the natural gas system data Technical Damaged, corroded or rusted tanks can result The natural gas tanks may be damaged or in serious injury or even death. corroded by external factors. The walls of the ● Have the natural gas deposits checked at gas tanks are weakened by deformations, least every 4 years (visual check). damage or corrosion. As a result, the tanks ● Natural gas tanks have a limited service Advice could burst and result in serious injuries or life. Have the natural gas tanks replaced even death. For this reason, the vehicle own- when required. You can obtain further infor- er must have a specialised workshop check mation about this at SEAT dealers or special- (visual check) the gas system every 4 years at ised workshops. least. The vehicle owner must have a specialised workshop replace the natural gas tanks WARNING before they reach the end of their service life. For further information about the service life If the vehicle underbody touches the ground Operation of gas tanks, go to a SEAT dealer service or a or in the event of a rear collision, there could specialised workshop be damage to the natural gas tanks. ● Check whether there is a smell of gas. WARNING ● If you do not notice the smell of gas, take Failure to act when you can smell gas in the the vehicle to a specialised workshop immediately and have the natural gas system

vehicle or when refuelling can cause serious Emergencies injuries. checked. ● Carry out the necessary operations. ● Leave the danger zone. Note ● If necessary, warn the emergency services. Have the natural gas system checked regular-

ly by a specialised workshop, according to Safety the Maintenance Programme. WARNING The vehicle is not prepared to use liquefied natural gas (LNG) and this fuel must not be 267 Advice

Engine compartment

Checking levels

Fig. 247 Diagram for the location of the various elements.

From time to time, the levels of the different Overview gine compartment of the vehicle is a poten- fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never You will find further explanations, instruc- tially hazardous area ››› . fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious tions and restrictions on the technical speci- damage to the engine may be caused. fications as of ››› page 287. WARNING ● 1 Coolant expansion tank Switch the engine off, remove the key from the ignition and apply the hand brake. If the 2 Engine oil dipstick Work in the engine compartment vehicle has a manual gearbox, place the lever 3 Engine oil filler cap in neutral; if it has an automatic gearbox, place the selector lever in position P. Wait for 4 Read the additional information carefully Brake fluid reservoir the engine to cool down. ›››  page 15 5 Vehicle battery (underneath the cover) ● Keep children away from the engine com- 6 Windscreen washer reservoir Always be aware of the danger of injury and partment. scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire ● Never spill liquids used for vehicle opera- The checking and refilling of service fluids when working in the engine compartment tion on the engine compartment, as these are carried out on the components men- (e.g. when checking and refilling fluids). Al- may catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in coolant). tioned above. These operations are descri- ways observe the warnings listed below and bed in ››› page 268. follow all general safety precautions. The en-

268 Checking and refilling levels

● Take care not to cause short circuits in the CAUTION WARNING electrical system, especially when working When topping up fluids make sure the correct Never open the bonnet if you see steam or on the battery. fluid is put into the correct filler opening, oth- drips of coolant being released from the en- ● If working inside the engine compartment, erwise this can cause serious malfunctions or gine compartment. Failure to comply could remember that, even when the ignition is engine damage. result in burns. Wait until no steam or coolant switched off, the radiator fan may start up au- can be seen before opening the bonnet. data Technical tomatically, and therefore there is a risk of injury. For the sake of the environment Inspect the ground underneath your vehicle ● Never cover the engine with additional in- Closing the bonnet sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of regularly so that any leaks are detected at an fire! early stage. If you find spots of oil or other Advice fluids in the area where it was parked, have – Slightly lift the bonnet. ● Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant ex- your vehicle inspected at the workshop. pansion tank when the engine is hot. The – Release the bonnet stay before pressing it cooling system is under pressure. back into its support. ● Protect face, hands and arms by covering Note – Carefully close the bonnet. the cap with a large, thick rag to protect In right-hand drive vehicles* some brake flu- – Press the bonnet down until it locks into against escaping coolant and steam. id reservoirs are on the other side of the en-

place. Operation ● If it is necessary to work in the engine com- gine compartment ››› Fig. 247. partment while the engine is running, the ro- – Make sure that the bonnet catches onto its tating components (for example, poly-V belt, clasp. Do not press down too hard ››› . alternator, radiator fan) and the high voltage Opening the bonnet ignition system are an additional hazard. WARNING ● Observe the following additional warnings Read the additional information carefully ● For safety reasons the bonnet must always if work on the fuel system or the electrical ›››  page 15 be completely closed when the vehicle is system is necessary: Emergencies moving. Therefore, after closing the bonnet, The bonnet is released from inside the vehi- – Always disconnect the battery from the always check that the locking element is cle. on-board network. properly engaged. This is the case if the bon- – Do not smoke. Check that the windscreen wiper arms are net is flush with the adjacent body panels. – Never work near naked flames. not unfolded. Otherwise the paint may be ● Should you notice that the bonnet is not damaged. safely secured when the vehicle is moving, Safety – Always keep an approved fire extinguish- stop the vehicle immediately and close the er immediately available. The bonnet can only be unlocked when the bonnet. Failure to follow this instruction driver door is open. could result in an accident.

269 Advice

Engine oil this means that your vehicle has the LongLife miles)(whatever comes first) ››› Booklet service programmed. If it lists the codes QI1, Maintenance Programme. General notes QI2, QI3, QI4 or QI7, the interval service is dependent on time/distance travelled. ● In exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low ››› page 271 and you can- The engine comes with a special, multi-grade not obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, oil that can be used all year round. Flexible service intervals (LongLife service intervals*) you can add a small quantity of oil conform- Because the use of high-quality oil is essen- ing to the specification ACEA A2 or ACEA A3 tial for the correct operation of the engine Special oils and processes have been devel- (petrol engines) or ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 (die- and its long useful life, when topping up or oped which, depending on the characteris- sel engines) (up to 0.5 l). changing oil, use only those oils that comply tics and individual driving profiles, enable with VW standards. the extension of the oil change service (Long- Vehicles with diesel particulate filter* Life service intervals). The specifications (VW standards) set out in The Maintenance Programme states whether the following page should appear on the con- Because this oil is essential for extending the your vehicle is fitted with a diesel particulate tainer of the service oil; when the container service intervals, it must only be used ob- filter. serving the following indications: displays the specific standards for petrol and Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash diesel engines together, it means that the oil ● Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service information, may be used in diesel engines can be used for both types of engines. tervals. equipped with particulate filter. Using other We recommend that the oil change indicated ● Only in exceptional circumstances, if the types of oil will cause a higher soot concen- in the Maintenance Programme, be per- engine oil level is too low ››› page 271 and tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There- formed by a technical service or specialised LongLife oil is not available, it is permitted to fore: workshop. top up (once) with oil for fixed service inter- ● Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils. The correct oil specifications for your engine vals ›››  page 55 (up to a maximum of 0.5 litres). ● Only in exceptional circumstances, if the are listed in the ›››  page 55, Engine oil engine oil level is too low ››› page 271 and specifications. Fixed service intervals* you cannot obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil Service intervals If your vehicle does not have the “LongLife (once) conforming to the VW 506 00, Service intervals can be flexible (LongLife service interval” or it has been disabled (by VW 506 01, VW 505 00, VW 505 01 or service) or fixed (dependent on time/dis- request), you may use oils for fixed service ACEA B3/ACEA B4 specification. (up to 0.5 l). tance travelled). intervals, which also appear in ›››  page 55, Engine oil specifications. In If the PR code that appears on the back of the this case, your vehicle must be serviced after Maintenance Programme booklet is PR QI6, a fixed interval of 1 year/15,000 km (10,000 270 Checking and refilling levels

Checking engine oil level Depending on how you drive and the condi- Topping up engine oil  tions in which the vehicle is used, oil consumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil consumption is likely to be higher for the first 5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level

must be checked at regular intervals, prefera- data Technical bly when filling the tank and before a journey.

WARNING

Any work carried out in the engine compart- Advice ment or on the engine must be carried out Fig. 248 Engine oil dipstick. cautiously. Fig. 249 In the engine compartment: Engine ● When working in the engine compartment, oil filler cap. Read the additional information carefully always observe the safety warnings ›››  page 54 ››› page 268. Read the additional information carefully ›››  page 54 The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of Operation the oil. CAUTION Before opening the bonnet, read and observe If the oil level is above the area A do not the warnings ››› in Work in the engine Checking oil level start the engine. This could result in damage compartment on page 268. to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact – Park the vehicle in a horizontal position. The position of the oil filler opening is shown a Technical Service. – Briefly run the engine at idle speed until in the corresponding engine compartment il- the operating temperature is reached and lustration ››› page 268. Emergencies then stop. Engine oil specification ›››  page 55. – Wait for about two minutes. WARNING – Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil comes into contact with hot engine compo- in as far as it will go. Safety nents when topping up. » – Then pull it out once more and check the oil level ››› Fig. 248. Top up with engine oil if necessary. 271 Advice

CAUTION WARNING ● Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It must be large enough to hold all If the oil level is above the area A do not Only change the engine oil yourself if you the engine oil. start the engine. This could result in damage have the specialist knowledge required! to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact ● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob- a specialised workshop. serve the warnings ››› page 268. ● Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil Cooling system For the sake of the environment may cause burn injuries. The oil level must never be above area A . ● Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, such Topping up coolant Otherwise oil can be drawn in through the as acid burns, caused by splashes of oil. crankcase breather and escape into the at- ● When removing the oil drain plug with your Read the additional information carefully mosphere via the exhaust system. fingers, keep your arm horizontal to help pre- ›››  page 55 vent oil from running down your arm. Top up coolant when the level is below the Note ● Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into MIN (minimum) mark. contact with engine oil. Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the correspond- ● Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be Checking coolant level stored in a safe place out of the reach of chil- ing VW specifications and recommend keep- – Park the vehicle in a horizontal position. ing it in the vehicle. This way, the correct en- dren. gine oil will always be available for a top-up if – Switch the ignition off. needed. CAUTION – Read off the coolant level on coolant ex- No additives should be used with engine oil. pansion tank. When the engine is cold, the This could result in engine damage. Any dam- coolant level should be between the marks. Changing engine oil age caused by the use of such additives When the engine is hot, it may be slightly would not be covered by the factory warranty. above the upper mark. Read the additional information carefully ›››  page 54. For the sake of the environment Topping up coolant The engine oil must be changed at the inter- ● Because of disposal problems and the spe- – Wait for the engine to cool down. vals given in the service schedule. cial tools and specialist knowledge required, – Cover the coolant expansion tank cap with We recommend that you have the engine oil we recommend that you have the engine oil a cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left changed by a Technical Service. and filter changed by a Technical Service. ››› . ● The oil change intervals are shown in the Never pour oil down drains or into the ground. – Top up the coolant only if there is still cool- Maintenance Programme. ant in the expansion tank, otherwise you 272 Checking and refilling levels

could damage the engine. If there is no tomatically, and therefore there is a risk of in- that the G13 additive has been mixed with an coolant in the expansion tank, do not con- jury. inadequate coolant. The coolant must be tinue driving. You should obtain professio- changed as soon as possible if this is the nal assistance ››› . case! This could result in serious faults and WARNING engine damage. – If there is still some coolant in the expan-

If there is not enough anti-freeze in the cool- data Technical sion tank, top up to the upper mark. ant system, the engine may fail leading to se- For the sake of the environment – Top up with coolant until the level becomes rious damage. stable. ● Please make sure that the percentage of Coolants and additives can contaminate the additive is correct with respect to the lowest environment. If any fluids are spilled, they – Screw the cap back on correctly. should be collected and correctly disposed

expected ambient temperature in the zone in Advice of, with respect to the environment. Any loss of coolant fluid normally indicates a which the vehicle is to be used. leak in the cooling system. Take the vehicle ● When the outside temperature is very low, straight to a specialised workshop to have the coolant could freeze and the vehicle the cooling system examined. If there are no would be immobilised. In this case, the heat- Brake fluid leaks in the engine cooling system, a loss of ing would not work either and inadequately dressed passengers could die of cold. coolant can only occur if the coolant boils Topping up brake fluid and is forced out of the system as a result of Operation overheating. CAUTION Read the additional information carefully Do not top up the expansion tank with cool- ›››  page 56 WARNING ant fluid if it is empty! Air could enter the ● The cooling system is under pressure. Do cooling system. In this case, stop driving. Checking the brake fluid level Seek specialist assistance. Otherwise, there not unscrew the cap on the coolant expan- The brake fluid level must be between the sion tank when the engine is hot: risk of is a risk of engine damage. MIN and MAX markings. burns! Emergencies ● The antifreeze and coolant fluid can be a CAUTION However, if the brake fluid level goes down health hazard. Therefore, the antifreeze noticeably in a short time, or drops below the The original additives should never be mixed should be stored in the original container in a MIN mark, there may be a leak in the brake with coolants which are not approved by safe place out of reach of children. Failure to system. Seek specialist assistance. A warn- SEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk of causing comply could result in poisoning. ing light on the instrument panel display Safety severe damage to the engine and the engine ● If working inside the engine compartment, cooling system. monitors the brake fluid level ››› page 113. » remember that, even when the ignition is ● If the fluid in the expansion tank is not pur- switched off, the radiator fan may start up au- ple but is, for example, brown, this indicates

273 Advice

In right-hand drive vehicles the brake fluid Windscreen washer reservoir proportion of mixture in the washer fluid reservoir is on the other side of the engine tank. compartment. Checking and topping up the wind- Capacity screen washer reservoir Changing brake fluid The reservoir holds approximately 3 litres in The regular intervals at which the brake fluid Read the additional information carefully versions without headlight washer and 5 li- should be replaced are listed in the Mainte- ›››  page 56 tres in versions with headlight washer. nance Programme. We recommend you have Check the water level in the windscreen it replaced at a SEAT Official Service, during WARNING washer reservoir regularly and top up as re- an Inspection Service. quired. If the water from the windscreen washer does not contain enough anti-freeze, it may freeze WARNING The container for the windscreen washer con- on the windscreen and rear window, reducing ● Brake fluid should be stored in the closed tains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen, forward and rear visibility. original container in a safe place out of reach the rear window and the headlight washer ● In winter, ensure the windscreen washer of children. Risk of poisoning! system*. contains enough anti-freeze. ● If the brake fluid is left in the system for ● Open the bonnet  ››› page 268. ● In cold conditions, you should not use the too long and the brakes are subjected to windscreen wiper system unless you have ● heavy use, vapour bubbles may form in the The windscreen washer reservoir is marked warmed the windscreen with the ventilation brake system. This would seriously affect the with the symbol  on the cap. system. The antifreeze could freeze on the efficiency of the brakes and the safety of the ● Check there is enough windscreen water in windscreen and reduce visibility. vehicle. This may cause an accident. the reservoir. WARNING CAUTION Recommended windscreen wipers Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other Brake fluid should not come into contact with ● For the hottest seasons we recommend similar additives with the windscreen washer the vehicle paintwork, as it is abrasive. summer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor- water. A greasy layer may be formed on the tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank: windscreen which will impair visibility. 1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa- ● Use clean water with a window cleaner rec- ter). ommended by SEAT. ● All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear ● If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to glass. Approximate proportion of the winter the water in the reservoir. mixture, up to -18°C (0°F): 1:2 (1 part concentrate per 2 parts water); otherwise, a 1:4

274 Checking and refilling levels

CAUTION connected, some of the vehicle's functions Winter conditions are “lost” (››› table on page 275). These ● Do not mix cleaning products recommen- During the winter, the starting power may be functions will require resetting after the bat- reduced, and if necessary, the battery should ded by SEAT with other products. This could tery is reconnected. lead to flocculation and may block the wind- be charged ››› in Important safety warn- screen washer jets. Deactivate the anti-theft alarm* before you ings for handling a vehicle battery on Technical data Technical ● When topping up service fluids, make abso- disconnect the battery Otherwise the alarm page 276 lutely certain that you fill the fluids into the will be triggered. correct reservoirs. Using the wrong fluids could cause serious malfunctions and engine Function Reprogramming Important safety warnings for han- damage! dling a vehicle battery One-touch function of ››› page 133, One-touch Advice ● Not having windscreen wiper fluid reduces the electric windows opening and closing*. visibility through the windscreen, and leads All work on batteries requires specialist to loss of visibility in headlights in models If the vehicle does not re- knowledge. Please refer to a SEAT Official with headlight washer. spond to the key, they Remote control key Service or a workshop specialising in batter- should be synchronised ies: risk of burns or exploding battery! ››› page 127. The battery must not be opened. Never try to Digital clock ››› page 109. Battery change the fluid level of the battery. Other- Operation After driving for a few me- wise explosive gas is released from the bat- General information ESC warning lamp tres, the warning lamp goes tery that could cause an explosion. out again. Read the additional information carefully  Wear eye protection. ›››  page 56. If the vehicle is not used for long periods  Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Wear The battery is located in the engine compart- The vehicle has a system for monitoring the protective gloves and eye protection. In the event Emergencies ment and is almost maintenance-free. It is current consumption when the engine is left of electrolyte splashes, rinse off with plenty of water. checked as part of the Inspection Service. unused for long periods of time ››› page 261. Nevertheless, check the terminals are clean Some functions, such as the interior lights, or  Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are pro- and have the correct tightening torque, espe- the remote door opening, may be temporarily hibited. cially in summer and winter. disabled to prevent the battery from running The battery should only be charged in a well-ven- flat. These functions will come back on as  Safety tilated zone. Risk of explosion! Disconnecting the battery soon as the ignition is switched on and the engine started. Keep children away from acid and batteries! » The battery should only be disconnected in  exceptional cases. When the battery is dis- 275 Advice

WARNING – Note the warnings ››› in Important safety WARNING warnings for handling a vehicle battery on ● When repairing or working on the electrical page 276 and ››› . Never charge a battery that has frozen: re- system, proceed as follows: place battery! Failure to do so may lead to an – 1. Remove the key from the ignition. The – Switch off all electrical devices. Remove the explosion. negative cable on the battery must be ignition key. disconnected. – Raise the bonnet ››› page 269. Note – 2. When the repair is finished, reconnect – Open the battery cover. Use only the terminals in the engine compart- the negative pole of the battery. ment to charge the battery. ● Switch off all electrical devices before re- – Connect the charger clamps as described connecting the battery. Reconnect first the to the positive pole of the battery (+) and positive cable and then the negative cable. exclusively to an earth on the bodywork Never reverse the polarity of the connections. (–). Replacing the battery This could cause an electrical fire. – Only use a charger which is compatible for The new battery should have the same speci- ● Ensure that the vent hose is always connec- use with 12 V nominal voltage batteries. fications (amperage, load and voltage) as the ted to the battery. The charge must not exceed a voltage of 15 used battery. ● Never use damaged batteries. This could V. cause an explosion! Replace a damaged bat- Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent tery immediately. – Now connect the battery charger to the power management system to control the power socket and switch on. distribution of electrical energy ››› page 261. The power management function ensures CAUTION – After charging the battery: switch off the that the battery is charged much more effi- battery charger and disconnect the power ● Never disconnect the battery if the ignition ciently than on vehicles without a power socket cable. is switched on or if the engine is running. management system. To maintain this func- This could damage the electrical system or – Finally disconnect the charger cables from tion after replacing the battery, we recom- electronic components. the battery. mend that the replacement battery used is of – Replace the battery cover correctly. the same make and type as the original fitted battery. To make proper use of the power Charging the battery – Close the bonnet ››› page 269. management function after the battery has been changed, have the battery coded to the Important: Before you charge the battery Terminals for charging the battery are fitted power management mode at a specialised make sure you read the manufacturer's in- in the engine compartment. workshop. structions for using the battery charger.

276 Wheels

CAUTION Wheels driving carefully and at moderate speeds for about the first 500 km (300 miles). This will ● Some vehicles, for example those with the also increase the useful life of the tyres. Start-Stop system* are fitted with a special Wheels and tyres battery (AGM-type or EFB-type battery). If any The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac- other type of battery is fitted, the Start-Stop cording to the type and make of tyre and the General notes data Technical function may be considerably reduced and tread pattern. the vehicle may not stop on repeated occa- sions. – When driving with new tyres, be especially careful during the first 500 km (300 miles). Concealed damage ● Make sure that the vent hose is always at- Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily tached to the original opening on the side of – If you have to drive over a kerb or similar

visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the Advice the battery. Gases or battery acid can other- obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as car pulling to one side, this may indicate that wise escape and possibly cause damage. possible at a right angle to the obstacle. one of the tyres is damaged. Reduce speed ● The battery holder and clamps must always – Check from time to time if the tyres are immediately if there is any reason to suspect be correctly secured. damaged (punctures, cuts, cracks or that damage may have occurred. Inspect the ● Before starting any work on the battery, al- dents). Remove any foreign objects embed- tyres for damage. If no external damage is ways observe the warnings listed under ded in the treads. visible, drive slowly and carefully to the near- page 275, Important safety warnings for ››› est specialised workshop and have the car handling a vehicle battery. – Damaged wheels and tyres must be re- Operation inspected. ● Do not forget to replace the battery cover- placed immediately. ings, where applicable. It is a protection for – Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres. Tyres with directional tread pattern high temperatures. This in turn extends the vehicle service life. – Replace any missing valve caps as soon as An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di- possible. rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al- ways note the direction of rotation indicated For the sake of the environment – Mark the wheels before taking them off so when mounting the wheel. This guarantees Emergencies  Batteries contain toxic substances includ- that they rotate in the same direction when put back. optimum grip and helps to avoid aquaplaning sulphuric acid and lead. They must be ing, excessive noise and wear. disposed of appropriately and must not be – When removed, the wheels or tyres should disposed of with ordinary household waste. be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark Retrofitting accessories Make sure disconnected batteries cannot tip place. over. Sulphuric acid could be spilt! If you wish to change or fit wheels, rims or Safety New tyres wheel trims, we recommend that you consult with a SEAT Official Service centre for advice New tyres do not give maximum grip straight regarding current techniques. away and should therefore be “run in” by 277 Advice

Tyre useful life – In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator, Do not forget the spare wheel when checking save the modified tyre pressure the tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheel in- ››› page 281. flated to the highest pressure required for the road wheels. – Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration. In the case of a minimised temporary spare – Inspect the tyres for irregular wear from wheel (125/70 R16 or 125/70 R18) inflate to time to time. a pressure of 4.2 bar as indicated on the tyre The useful life of your tyres depends on the pressure label on the fuel tank flap. following factors: Driving style Tyre pressure Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard Tyre pressure values are indicated on the braking (squealing tyres) all increase tyre sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap wear. ››› Fig. 250. Wheel balance Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly reduces the useful life of the tyres and adverse- The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. ly affects vehicle performance and ride. Cor- However, certain circumstances may lead to rect inflation pressures are very important, imbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi- Fig. 250 Location of the tyre pressure sticker. especially at high speeds. brations in the steering wheel. Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv- Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as ing habits will increase the useful life of your be adjusted to medium load to improve driv- they otherwise cause excessive wear on tyres. ing comfort (tyre pressure ). When driving steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must with comfort tyre pressure fuel consumption also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted – Check tyre pressure at least once a month, or if a tyre is repaired. and also prior to any long trip. may increase slightly. – The tyre pressure should only be checked The tyre pressure must be adjusted according Incorrect wheel alignment to the load the vehicle is carrying. If the vehi- when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex- pressure of warm tyres. cle is going to carry the maximum load, the tyre pressure should be increased to maxi- cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the – Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car- mum value indicated on the sticker on the in- vehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, you ried by the vehicle. side of the fuel tank flap. should check wheel alignment at a SEAT Offi- cial Service.

278 Wheels

WARNING The original tyres on your vehicle have Changing wheels 1.6 mm high “tread wear indicators” running ● Always adapt the tyre pressure accordingly across the tread. Depending on the manufac- when the vehicle load changes. turer, there will be 6 to 8 of them spaced at ● A tyre with low air pressure has to flex a lot equal distances around the tyre. Markings on more when the vehicle is heavily loaded or at the tyre sidewall (for instance the letters data Technical high speeds, therefore causing overheating “TWI” or a triangle) indicate the positions of to occur. Under these conditions, the tyre the tread wear indicators. bead may be released or the tyre may burst. Risk of accident! The minimum tread depth required by law is 1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next Advice For the sake of the environment to the tread wear indicators). (Different figures may apply in other countries.) Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con- Fig. 252 Interchanging tyres. sumption. WARNING To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres The tyres must be replaced at the latest when the wheels should be changed round from the tread is worn down to the tread wear indi- time to time according to the system Wear indicators cators. Failure to follow this instruction could result in an accident. ››› Fig. 252. The useful life of all the tyres will Operation then be about the same time. ● Especially in difficult driving conditions such as wet or icy roads. It is important that the tyre tread be as deep as possible and be approximately the same on the tyres of both New tyres or new wheels the front and the rear axles. – ● The scant driving safety due to insufficient All four wheels must be fitted with tyres of Emergencies tread depth is particularly evident in vehicle the same type, size (rolling circumference) handling, when there is a risk of “aquaplan- and preferably the same tread pattern. ing” in deep puddles of water and when driv- – Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs ing through corners, and braking is also ad- and not individually (i.e. both front tyres or versely affected. Fig. 251 Tyre tread: tread wear indicators both rear tyres together). ● The speed has to be adapted accordingly, Safety Tread wear indicators indicate if a tyre is otherwise there is a risk of losing control over – Do not use tyres whose effective size ex- worn. the vehicle. ceeds the dimensions of the factory-approved makes of tyre. »

279 Advice

– If you wish to fit the vehicle with rims or 91 Load rating code sions will be correct for your vehicle. If you tyres different to those installed in manu- decide to fit a different type of tyre, you must facture, it is advisable to consult a SEAT Of- V Speed index obtain the appropriate manufacturer's certif- ficial Service before purchasing them. icate from the tyre retailer to confirm that The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyres are suitable for your vehicle. Keep The tyres and wheel rims are an essential the tyre sidewall (possibly only on the inner this certificate in a safe place. part of the vehicle's design. The tyres and part): rims approved by SEAT are specially matched Your SEAT Official Service will be able to ad- DOT ... 2212 ... to the characteristics of the vehicle and make vise you on which tyres may be fitted to your a major contribution to good roadholding it means, for example, that the tyre was man- vehicle. and safe handling ››› . ufactured in the 22nd week of 2012. It is best to have all servicing of wheels and The sizes of the rims and tyres approved for But note that with some types of tyre, the ac- tyres performed by a specialised workshop. your vehicle are listed in the vehicle docu- tual tyre size can differ from the nominal size They are familiar with the procedure and mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or marked on the tyre (for instance 205/55 R 16 have the necessary special tools and spare COC document1)). The vehicle documentation 91 W), and there may be significant differen- parts as well as the proper facilities for dis- varies depending on the country of resi- ces in the contours of the tyres, even though posing of the old tyres respecting the envi- dence. the tyres are marked with the same nominal ronment. size designation. When replacing the tyres, A knowledge of tyre designations makes it it is therefore important to make sure that WARNING easier to choose the correct tyres. The follow- the actual size of the new tyres does not ex- ing wording can be read on the sides of the ● It is very important to ensure that the tyres ceed the dimensions of the factory-approved tyre: you have chosen have adequate clearance. makes of tyre. When selecting replacement tyres, do not re- 205/55 R16 91V ly entirely on the nominal tyre size marked on Failure to observe this requirement can af- the tyre, since the effective tyre size can dif- This contains the following information: fect the clearance needed for the tyres. If the fer significantly depending on the manufac- tyres rub against the bodywork, in certain turer. Inadequate tyre clearance can result in 205 Tyre width in mm circumstances the tyres, running gear or damage to the tyres or the vehicle, causing a bodywork and pipes may be damaged, and serious safety risk. Risk of accident! It may 55 Height/width ratio in % vehicle safety could be severely impaired also invalidate the vehicle's registration for R Tyre construction: Radial ››› . use on public roads.

16 Rim diameter in inches If you use tyres that are approved by SEAT you can be sure that the actual tyre dimen-

1) COC = certificate of conformity. 280 Wheels

● Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that are the right length and correctly shaped bolt ● Regularly check your tyres for damage and more than 6 years old. If you have no heads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se- wear. curely and that the brake system functions alternative, you should drive slowly and with ● Never exceed the maximum permitted extra care at all times. correctly. speed or loads specified for the type of tyre ● If wheel trims are fitted after the car is pur- The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easi- fitted on your vehicle. chased, ensure that there is an adequate flow ly. data Technical of air for cooling the brake system. A special adapter is required to turn the anti- For the sake of the environment theft wheel bolts* ›››  page 62. Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel For the sake of the environment consumption and tyre wear.

Old tyres must be disposed of according to Advice the laws in the country concerned. Tyre monitoring systems Note ● Driving for the first time with new tyres at a Note Introduction high speed can cause them to slightly ex- ● A SEAT Service Centre should be consulted pand, which could then produce an air pres- to find out whether wheels or tyres of differ- sure warning. WARNING ent sizes to those originally fitted by SEAT ● Only replace used tyres with those author- can be fitted, and to find out about the com- Unsuitable handling of the wheels and tyres ised by SEAT for the corresponding type vehi- Operation binations allowed between the front axle may lead to sudden tyre pressure losses, to cle. (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2). tread separation or even to a blow-out. ● Do not only rely on the tyre monitoring sys- ● Never mount used tyres if you are not sure ● Check tyre pressures regularly and ensure tem. Regularly check your tyres to ensure of their “previous history”. they are maintained at the pressures indica- that the tyre pressure is correct and that the ● For technical reasons, it is not generally ted. Tyre pressure that is too low could cause tyres are not damaged due to puncture, cuts, possible to use the wheels from other vehi- overheating, resulting in tread detachment or tears and impacts/dents. Remove objects cles. In some cases, this may also be true for even burst tyres. from the tyres only when they have not Emergencies the same model of wheel. ● Tyre pressure should be that indicated on pierced the tyres. the label when the tyres are cold at all times ››› page 289. Wheel bolts ● Regularly check the cold inflation pressure

of the tyres. If necessary, change the tyre Safety The wheel bolts are matched to the rims. pressure of the vehicle tyres while they are When installing different wheels (for instance cold. alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it is important to use the correct wheel bolts with 281 Advice

Tyre monitoring control lamp control of the vehicle and a serious or fatal ● Tyre pressures which are too high or too accident. low reduce the useful life of the tyre, affect- If a light appears ● If the warning lamp  lights up, stop im- ing vehicle performance. The pressure in one or more tyres has mediately and check the tyres. ● If a tyre has not been punctured and it does clearly reduced in comparison to the ● If the tyres are inflated at different pres- not have to be changed immediately, drive to  the nearest specialised workshop at a moder- tyre pressure set by the driver or the sures or if a tyre pressure is too low, this will ate speed and have the tyre checked and in- tyre has structural damage. increase tyre wear, negatively affecting vehicle stability and increasing braking distan- flated to the correct pressure. Additionally, an audible warning can be heard and a text ces. message can be seen on the instrument panel display. ● If tyres are inflated at different pressures or WARNING Stop! Reduce speed immediately! Stop the vehicle a tyre pressure is too low, a tyre may be dam- safely as soon as possible. Avoid sudden manoeuvres Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning and braking! Check all tyres and pressures. Replace any aged and burst resulting in a loss of control and control lamps on page 113. damaged tyres. of the vehicle. ● The driver is responsible for ensuring that Note If flashing all of the vehicle tyres are correctly inflated to the right pressure. The recommended tyre ● If excessively low tyre pressure is detected  System malfunction pressure is indicated on the label with the ignition on, an audible warning will ››› page 289. sound. In the event that there is a fault in the The control lamp flashes for approximately one minute ● The tyre monitoring system can only oper- system, an audible warning will sound. and then lights up permanently. ate correctly if all of the tyres are inflated to ● If tyre pressure is correct, switch the ignition off and on Driving on dirt tracks for a long period of again. If the control lamp remains lit up, the tyre moni- the correct pressure when cold. time or driving in a sporty style can tempora- toring indicator can be calibrated. Have the system ● Driving with tyres at the wrong pressure rily deactivate the TPMS. The control lamp checked by a specialised workshop. can damage them and result in an accident. shows a fault, but disappears when road con- Ensure that the tyre pressures of all the tyres ditions or the driving style change. Several warning and control lamps light up correspond to the vehicle load. for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ● Before starting a journey, always inflate ed on while the function is verified. They will tyres to the correct pressure. switch off after a few seconds. ● Tyres with insufficient pressure are subjected to more flexing. Due to this, the tyre WARNING could become excessively hot, causing tread When the tyres are inflated at different pres- separation and also tyre blow-out. sures or at a pressure that is too low then a ● With an overloaded vehicle at high speed, tyre may be damaged resulting in a loss of the tyres can overheat and burst resulting in a loss of vehicle control. 282 Wheels

Tyre monitoring indicator ● Tyre pressure is manually changed Calibrating the tyre monitoring indica- ● Tyre pressure is insufficient tor ● Tyre structure is damaged ● The vehicle is unbalanced because of a

load data Technical ● The wheels on an axle are subject to a heavier load (e.g. with a heavy load). ● The vehicle is fitted with snow chains ● The temporary spare wheel is fitted Advice ● The wheel on one axle is changed

Fig. 253 Instrument panel: warning of loss of There may be a delay in the reaction of the tyre pressure. tyre  monitoring indicator or it may not in- Fig. 254 Glove compartment: tyre control dicate anything under certain circumstances switch. The tyre monitor indicator compares wheel (e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered or un- revolutions and, with this information, the After changing the tyre pressure or replacing paved roads, or when driving with snow tread of each wheel using the ABS sensors. If one or more wheels, the tyre monitoring indi- Operation chains). the rolling circumference of one or more cator must be recalibrated. Do the same, for wheels has changed, the tyre monitoring in- example, when the front and rear wheels are dicator will indicate this on the instrument swapped. panel through a warning lamp and a warning to the driver ››› Fig. 253. When only one spe- ● Switch the ignition on. cific tyre is affected, its position within the ● Store the new tyre pressure in the Easy vehicle will be indicated. Connect system with the  button and the Emergencies  Loss of pressure: Check left function button Setup ›››  page 30 or us- tyre pressure! ing the switch located in the glove compart- ment1) ››› Fig. 254. Wheel tread change ● In vehicles without radio: press and hold down the   button with the ignition on, Safety The wheel tread changes when: until an acoustic signal is heard. »

1) In vehicles without the Infotainment system: 283 Advice

When driving, the system self-calibrates the Temporary spare wheel – Turn the thumb wheel anti-clockwise. tyre pressure provided by the driver and the – Take out the temporary spare wheel. wheels fitted. After a long journey with varied General information speeds the programmed values are collected Chains and monitored. For technical reasons, snow chains must not With the wheels under very heavy loads, the be used on the temporary spare wheel. tyre pressure must be increased to the total If you have a puncture on one of the front recommended tyre pressure before the cali- wheels when using snow chains, fit the tem- bration ››› page 289. porary spare wheel in place of one of the rear wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel Note that you have removed and replace the punc- ● The tyre monitoring indicator does not tured front wheel with this wheel. function when there is a fault in the ESC or ABS ››› page 181. WARNING ● An erroneous indication may be given when Fig. 255 Compact temporary spare wheel: ● After fitting the temporary spare wheel, snow chains are in use because they increase raised floor panel. check the tyre pressures as soon as possible. the tread of the wheel. The temporary spare wheel has been de- Failure to do so may cause an accident. The tyre pressures are listed on the inside of the signed to be used for short periods of time. fuel tank flap. Have the tyres checked, and if necessary, replaced as soon as possible at a SEAT Official ● Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph) Service or at a specialised workshop. when the temporary spare wheel is fitted on the vehicle: risk of accident! Please note the following restrictions when ● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and using the compact temporary spare wheel. fast cornering: risk of accident! The compact temporary spare wheel is de- ● Never use more than one temporary spare signed specifically for this model. For this wheel at the same time, risk of accident. reason, do not use a temporary spare wheel from a different type of vehicle. ● No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact temporary spare wheel rim. Removing the temporary spare wheel ● If you are driving using the spare wheel, – Lift and hold up the floor panel to remove the ACC system could automatically switch the temporary spare wheel ››› Fig. 255. off during the journey. Switch off the system when starting off. 284 Wheels

Extraction of the spare wheel in vehi- – Turn the securing wheel anti-clockwise 2 . – After fitting the wheels you must always check the tyre pressures. When doing so, cles with SEAT SOUND 10 speakers – Remove the subwoofer speaker and the take into account the correct tyre pressures (with subwoofer)* spare wheel. listed on the rear of the front left door – When re-mounting the spare tyre, place the frame ››› page 278.

subwoofer on the base of the wheel rim data Technical with care. When doing so, the tip of the In winter road conditions winter tyres will “FRONT” arrow on the subwoofer should considerably improve vehicle handling. The point forward. design of summer tyres (width, rubber com- pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice – Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro- and snow. This applies particularly to vehi- Advice tate the securing wheel clockwise so that cles equipped with wide section tyres or with the subwoofer system and wheel are firmly high speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y on in place. the sidewall). Only use winter tyres of the correct type approved for your vehicle. The sizes of these Fig. 256 In the luggage compartment: re- Winter service tyres are specified in the vehicle's docu-

move the subwoofer. ments (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or Operation Winter tyres COC1)). The vehicle documentation varies de- To remove the spare wheel, you must first re- pending on the country of residence. See al- move the subwoofer. – Winter tyres must be fitted on all four so ››› page 279. wheels. – Disassemble the subwoofer's floor panel Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper- (carpet) as follows: – Only use winter tyres that are approved for ties when the tread is worn down to a depth your vehicle. of 4 mm. – LEON/LEON SC model: first, pull the carpet Emergencies in the direction of the backrest and then – Please note that the maximum permissible The performance of winter tyres is also se- pull it upwards to remove it. LEON ST mod- speed for winter tyres may be lower than verely impaired by ageing, even if the tread is el: lift and secure the floor storage com- for summer tyres. still much deeper than 4 mm. partment as explained in page 164. ››› – Also note that winter tyres are no longer ef- Winter tyres are subject to the following max-

– Disconnect the subwoofer’s speaker cable fective when the tread is worn down. imum speed limits according to speed rating Safety ››› Fig. 256 1 . code letter: ››› »

1) COC = certificate of conformity. 285 Advice

Speed rating weights for your car and on the listed weight code letter Maximum speed limit rating of the tyres being used. ››› page 279 It is best to contact a SEAT Official Service to check the maximum speed which is permissi- Q 160 km/h (100 mph) ble for the V-rated tyres fitted on your car on S 180 km/h (112 mph) the basis of this information.

T 190 km/h (118 mph) WARNING H 210 km/h (130 mph) Exceeding the maximum speed permitted for 240 km/h (149 mph) (please note the winter tyres fitted on your car can cause V relevant restrictions) tyre failure, resulting in a loss of control of the vehicle – risk of accident. W 270 km/h (168 mph)

Y 300 km/h (186 mph) For the sake of the environment Summer tyres should be fitted again as soon Vehicles capable of exceeding these speeds as possible after the winter period; they give must have an appropriate sticker attached so better handling on roads which are free of that it is visible to the driver. Suitable stickers snow and ice. Summer tyres perform with are available from the SEAT Official Service less rolling noise, tyre wear and – most im- and specialised workshop. Please note the portant – reduce fuel consumption. regulations to this effect in your country. “All-weather” tyres can also be used instead of winter tyres. Using winter tyres with V-rating Please note that the generally applicable 240 km/h (150 mph) speed rating for winter tyres with the letter V is subject to technical restrictions; the maximum permissible speed for your vehicle may be significantly lower. The maximum speed limit for these tyres depends directly on the maximum axle

286 Technical specifications

Abbreviations used in the Technical Specifi- Technical data cations section Technical specifications kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement. Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly used PS Important to denote engine power. data Technical rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed. The information in the vehicle documentation always takes precedence over the informa- Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque. tion in this Instruction Manual. Cetane number, indication of the diesel

CZ Advice All technical specifications provided in this combustion power. Fig. 258 Chassis number. documentation are valid for the standard Research octane number, indication of RON VIN in the Easy Connect model in Spain. The vehicle data card inclu- the knock resistance of petrol. ded in the Maintenance Programme or the ● Select:  button > SETTINGS function vehicle registration documents shows which button > Service > Chassis number. engine is installed in the vehicle. Vehicle identification data Chassis number The figures may be different depending Operation whether additional equipment is fitted, for The VIN is located in the Easy Connect, on the different models, for special vehicles and for vehicle data sticker and under the wind- other countries. screen, on the driver side ››› Fig. 258. Addi- tionally, the chassis number is located in the engine compartment, on the right-hand side. The number is engraved on the top side rail,

and is partially covered. Emergencies

Type plate The type plate is located on the right side door pillar. Vehicles for certain export coun-

tries do not have a type plate. » Safety

Fig. 257 Vehicle data sticker (luggage compartment).

287 Technical data

Vehicle data sticker Information on fuel consump- Weights The vehicle data sticker is under the carpet tion trim in the luggage compartment, in the Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a spare wheel well. A sticker with the vehicle fuel tank filled to 90% capacity and without uel data is attached to the inside cover of the F consumption optional extras. The figure quoted includes Maintenance Programme. 75 kg to allow for the weight of the driver. Approved consumption values are derived The following information is provided on the from measurements performed or supervised Special versions, optional equipment fittings vehicle data sticker: ››› Fig. 257 by certified EU laboratories, according to the or retro-fitting accessories will increase the legislation in force at the time (for more infor- weight of the vehicle ››› . 1 Vehicle identification number (chassis mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu- number) ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: © Eu- WARNING 2 Vehicle type, model, capacity, engine ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and ● Please note that the centre of gravity may type, finish, engine power and gearbox apply to the specified vehicle characteristics. shift when transporting heavy objects; this type may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac- The values relating to fuel consumption and cident. Always adjust your speed and driving 3 Engine code, gearbox code, external CO2 emissions can be found in the documen- style to suit road conditions and require- paint code and internal equipment code tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi- ments. cle at the time of purchase. 4 Optional extras and PR numbers ● Never exceed the gross axle weight rating

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions depend or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the per- Identifying letters on the equipment/features of each individual missible axle load or the permissible total The identifying letters of the engine can be vehicle, as well as on the driving style, road weight is exceeded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, which could viewed on the instrument panel when the en- conditions, traffic conditions, environmental conditions, load or number of passengers. lead to accidents, injuries and damage to the gine is switched off and the ignition is on. vehicle. ● Hold down the 0.0/SET 4 ››› Fig. 120 but- Note ton for more than 15 seconds. In practice, and considering all the factors mentioned here, consumption values can differ from those calculated in the current Euro- pean regulations.

288 Technical specifications

Trailer mode WARNING 195/65 R15 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm ● For safety reasons, you should not drive at 205/55 R16 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm Trailer weights speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph) when towing a trailer. This also applies in countries where 205/50 R17 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm Trailer weight higher speeds are permitted.

225/45 R17 Chains with links of maximum 9 mm data Technical The trailer weights and drawbar loads ap- ● Never exceed the maximum trailer weights proved are selected in intensive trials accord- or the drawbar load. If the permissible axle 225/40 R18 Chains with links of maximum 9 mm load or the permissible total weight is excee- ing to precisely defined criteria. The ap- 225/35 R19 Chains with links of maximum 7 mm proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in ded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50 may change, leading to accidents, injuries 205/55 R17 Snow chains are not permitted and damage to the vehicle. Advice mph) (in certain circumstances up to 100 225/45 R18 Snow chains are not permitted km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be different in other countries. All data in the official vehi- Wheel bolts cle documentation takes precedence over Wheels these data at all times ››› . After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts should Tyre pressure, snow chains, wheel Drawbar loads be checked as soon as possible with a torque bolts wrench . The tightening torque for steel Operation The maximum permitted drawbar load on the ››› and alloy wheels is 120 Nm. ball joint of the towing bracket must not ex- Tyre pressures ceed 80 kg. The sticker with the tyre pressure values can WARNING In the interest of road safety, we recommend be found on the back of the left front door ● Check the tyre pressure at least once per that you always tow approaching the maxi- frame. The tyre pressure values given there month. Checking the tyre pressure is very im- mum drawbar load. The response of the trail- are for cold tyres. The slightly raised pres-

portant. If the tyre pressure is too high or too Emergencies er on the road will be poor, if the drawbar sures of warm tyres must not be reduced. low, there is an increased danger of accidents load is too small. ››› - particularly at high speeds. If the maximum permissible drawbar load The pressure for winter tyres is 0.2 bar ● If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts cannot be met (e.g. with small, empty and (2.9 psi / 20 kPa) higher than that of summer is too low, they could loosen while the vehi- light-weight single axle trailers or tandem tyres. cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tight- Safety axle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1 ening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged. » metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer Snow chains weight is legally required for the drawbar Snow chains may be fitted only to the front load. wheels, and only for the following tyres: 289 Technical data

Note We recommend that you ask your Technical Service for information about appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.

290 Technical specifications

Engine data

Petrol engine 1.2 63 kW (86 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel Technical data Technical

63 (86)/4,300-5,300 160/1,400-3,500 4/1,197 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa) a) Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights LEON LEON SC LEON ST Advice

Top speed (km/h) 178 (V) 178 (V) 178 (V)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.6 7.5 7.8

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.9 11.8 12.1

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,700 1,700 1,800

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,188 1,168 1,233 Operation

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 890 880 870

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 860 870 980

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 590 580 610 Emergencies

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,300 1,300 1,300

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,100 1,100 1,100 Safety

291 Technical data

Petrol engine 1.2 TSI 81 kW (110 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

81 (110)/4,600-5,600 175/1,400-4,000 4/1,197 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)

a) Slight power loss.

LEON LEON LEON LEON SC LEON SC LEON ST LEON ST LEON ST Outputs and weights Manual Start-Stop Automatic Manual Start-Stop Manual Start-Stop Automatic

Top speed (km/h) 194 (V) 194 (V) 194 (V) 194 (V) 194 (V) 194 (V) 194 (V) 194 (V)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.7 6.5 6.7 6.7 6.7

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.9 9.9 9.9 10.1 9.8 10.1 10.1 10.1

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,740 1,740 1,760 1,720 1,730 1,790 1,800 1,820

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,213 1,213 1,241 1,186 1,193 1,240 1,247 1,275

Maximum authorised weight on front axle 900 900 930 890 890 880 890 910 (kg)

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 890 890 880 880 890 960 960 960

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 600 600 620 590 590 620 620 630

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 8% (kg)

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 1,300 1,300 1,300 1,300 1,300 1,300 1,300 1,300 12% (kg)

292 Technical specifications

Petrol engine 1.6 MPI 81 kW (110 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

81 (110)/5,800 155/3,800-4,000 4/1,598 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa) Technical data Technical a) Slight power loss.

LEON LEON LEON SC LEON SC LEON ST LEON ST Outputs and weights manual automatic manual automatic manual automatic

Top speed (km/h) 189 (IV) 185 (V) 189 (V) 185 (V) 189 (V) 185 (V) Advice

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.7 7.4 6.6 7.5 6.9 7.6

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.5 11.4 10.4 11.6 10.8 11.8

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,740 1,770 1,710 1,730 1,790 1,830

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,192 1,230 1,175 1,210 1,228 1,275 Operation Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 880 920 880 910 870 910

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 910 900 880 870 970 970

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 590 610 580 600 610 630

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,400 1,400 1,400 1,400 1,400 1,400 Emergencies

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 Safety

293 Technical data

Petrol engine 1.0 TSI 85 kW (115 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

85 (115)/5,000-5,500 200/2,000-3,500 3/999 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)

a) Slight power loss.

LEON LEON LEON SC LEON SC LEON ST LEON ST Outputs and weights manual automatic manual automatic manual automatic

Top speed (km/h) 202 202 202 202 202 202

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.6 6.6 6.5 6.5 6.8 6.8

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.6 9.6 9.5 9.5 9.8 9.8

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,720 1,740 1,710 1,740 1,770 1,800

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,202 1,225 1,180 1,203 1,236 1,259

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 890 910 880 900 870 900

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 880 880 880 890 950 950

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 600 610 590 600 610 620

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,300 1,300 1,300 1,300 1,300 1,300

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000

294 Technical specifications

Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 PS) Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

92 (125)/5,000-6,000 200/1,400-4,000 4/1,395 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa) Technical data Technical a) Slight power loss.

LEON ST Outputs and weights LEON LEON SC LEON ST X-PERIENCE

Top speed (km/h) 203 (V&VI) 203 (V&VI) 203 (V&VI) 200 (V&VI) Advice

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.2 6.1 6.4 6.6

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.1 8.9 9.4 9.7

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,770 1,750 1,830 1,820

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,233 1,213 1,257 1,263 Operation Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 920 910 900 890

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 900 890 980 980

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 610 600 620 630

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,700 1,700 1,700 1,700 Emergencies

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,400 1,400 1,400 1,400 Safety

295 Technical data

Petrol engine 1.4 TSI 110 kW (150 PS) ACT®

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

110 (150)/5,000-6,000 250/1,500-3,500 4/1,395 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)

a) Slight power loss.

LEON LEON LEON SC LEON SC LEON ST LEON ST Outputs and weights manual automatic manual automatic manual automatic

Top speed (km/h) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.6 5.6 5.5 5.5 5.8 5.8

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8 8 7.9 7.9 8.2 8.2

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,770 1,790 1,750 1,770 1,840 1,860

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,241 1,263 1,223 1,243 1,277 1,297

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 930 950 910 930 910 930

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 890 890 890 890 980 980

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 620 630 610 620 630 640

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,700 1,700 1,700 1,700 1,700 1,700

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500

296 Technical specifications

Petrol engine 1.4 TSI 110 kW (150 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

110 (150)/5,000-6,000 250/1,500-3,500 4/1,395 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa) Technical data Technical a) Slight power loss.

LEON LEON LEON SC LEON SC LEON ST Outputs and weights manual automatic manual automatic automatic

Top speed (km/h) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) Advice

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.6 5.6 5.5 5.5 5.8

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8 8 7.9 7.9 8.2

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,770 1,790 1,750 1,760 1,850

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,241 1,263 1,223 1,238 1,297 Operation Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 930 950 910 930 930

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 890 890 890 880 970

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 620 630 610 610 640

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,700 1,700 1,700 1,700 1,700 Emergencies

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 Safety

297 Technical data

Petrol engine 1.8 132 kW (180 PS) Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

132 (180)/5,100-6,200 250/1,250-5,000 4/1,798 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)

a) Slight power loss.

LEON LEON SC LEON LEON LEON SC LEON SC LEON ST LEON ST Outputs and weights Without Without Manual Automatic Manual Automatic Manual Automatic Start-Stop Start-Stop

Top speed (km/h) 226 (VI) 224 (VI) 224 (VI) 226 (VI) 224 (VI) 224 (VI) 226 (VI) 224 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.5 5.3 5.3 5.4 5.2 5.2 5.7 5.6

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 7.5 7.2 7.2 7.4 7.1 7.1 7.8 7.7

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,830 1,850 1,850 1,830 1,840 1,840 1,900 1,890

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,310 1,327 1,322 1,290 1,307 1,302 1,355 1,372

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 970 990 980 960 980 970 960 980

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 910 910 920 920 910 920 990 960

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 650 660 660 640 650 650 670 680

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 8% (kg)

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 12% (kg)

298 Technical specifications

Petrol engine 1.8 TSI 132 kW (180 PS) All-wheel drive

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

132 (180)/4,500-6,200 280/1,350-4,500 4/1,798 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa) Technical data Technical a) Slight power loss.

LEON ST Outputs and weights X-PERIENCE 4WD

Top speed (km/h) 221 (V&VI) Advice

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 4.9

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 7.2

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 2,000

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,486 Operation Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,000

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 1,050

Permitted roof load (kg) 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 740

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,700 Emergencies

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,500 Safety

299 Technical data

Petrol engine 2.0 213 kW (290 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

213 (290)/5,900-6,400 350/1,700-5,800 4/1,984 Super 98 RON/Super 95 RONa)

a) Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights LEON LEON SC LEON ST automatic automatic automatic

Top speed (km/h) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 4.4 4.2 4.4

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 5.7 5.6 5.9

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,910 1,890 2,010

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,421 1,395 1,466

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,050 1,020 1,020

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 910 920 1,040

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) – – –

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) – – –

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) – – –

300 Technical specifications

Petrol engine 2.0 221 kW (300 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

221 (300)/5,500-6,200 380/1,800-5,500 4/1,984 Super 98 RON/Super 95 RONa) Technical data Technical a) Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights LEON LEON LEON SC LEON SC LEON ST LEON ST LEON ST manual automatic manual automatic manual automatic Automatic all-wheel drive Advice

Top speed (km/h) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 4.7 4.4 4.5 4.2 4.7 4.4 3.5

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 5.8 5.7 5.7 5.6 6.0 5.9 4.9

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,890 1,910 1,870 1,890 1,980 2,000 2,040 Operation Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,395 1,421 1,375 1,395 1,440 1,466 1,545

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,020 1,050 1,000 1,020 990 1,020 1,040

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 920 910 920 920 1,040 1,030 1,050

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) – – – – – – – Emergencies

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) – – – – – – –

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) – – – – – – – Safety

301 Technical data

Petrol/CNG engine 1.4 TSI 81 kW (110 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

Super 95 RON/Nor- 81 (110)/4,800-6,000 200/1,500-3,500 4/1,395 CNG mal 91 RONa)

a) Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights LEON LEON LEON ST LEON ST manual automatic manual automatic

Top speed (km/h) 194 (V) 194 (VII) 194 (VI) 194 (VII)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.1 7.1 7.3 7.3

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.9 10.9 11 11

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,840 1,870 1,870 1,900

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,359 1,388 1,395 1,421

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 920 950 870 900

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 970 970 1,050 1,050

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 670 690 690 710

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,700 1,700 1,700 1,700

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,400 1,400 1,400 1,400

302 Technical specifications

Diesel engine 1.6 66 kW (90 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 66 (90)/2,750-4,800 230/1,400-2,750 4/1,598

51 CN data Technical

Outputs and weights LEON LEON SC LEON ST

Top speed (km/h) 180 (IV) 180 (V) 180 (V)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 8.2 8.0 8.5 Advice

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 12.6 12.4 13.0

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,780 1,760 1,860

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,260 1,240 1,305

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 960 960 950 Operation Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 870 850 960

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 630 620 650

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,700 1,700 1,800

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,400 1,400 1,500 Emergencies Safety

303 Technical data

Diesel engine 1.6 77 kW (105 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 77 (105)/3,000-4,000 250/1,500-2,750 4/1,598 51 CN

LEON LEON LEON ST LEON ST Outputs and weights Manual Automatic Manual Automatic

Top speed (km/h) 191 (V) 191 (VI) 191 (V) 191 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.3 7.3 7.5 7.4

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.7 10.7 11.1 11.0

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,800 1,820 1,880 1,910

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,281 1,306 1,326 1,351

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 980 1,000 960 990

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 870 870 970 970

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 640 650 660 670

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500

304 Technical specifications

Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 81 kW (110 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 81 (110)/3,250-4,500 250/1,500-3,000 4/1,968

51 CN data Technical

Outputs and weights LEON ST

Top speed (km/h) 189 (V)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.1 Advice

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.7

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,910

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,358

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 990 Operation Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 970

Permitted roof load (kg) 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 670

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,800

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,500 Emergencies Safety

305 Technical data

Diesel engine 1.6 85 kW (115 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 85 (115)/3,250-4,000 250/1,500-3,250 4/1,598 51 CN

LEON ST LEON LEON LEON SC LEON SC LEON ST LEON ST Outputs and weights X-PERIENCE manual automatic manual automatic manual automatic manual

Top speed (km/h) 197 (V) 197 (VII) 197 (V) 197 (VII) 197 (V) 197 (VII) 193 (V)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.8 6.8 6.5 6.8 6.8 6.9 6.5

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.8 9.8 9.5 9.9 9.9 10.0 9.5

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,810 1,830 1,750 1,770 1,870 1,890 1,890

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,260 1,280 1,240 1,261 1,305 1,326 1,331

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 960 980 960 980 950 970 950

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 900 900 840 840 970 970 990

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 630 640 620 630 650 660 660

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500

306 Technical specifications

Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 105 kW (143 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 105 (143)/3,500-4,000 320/1,750-3,000 4/1,968

51 CN data Technical

Outputs and weights LEON LEON SC

Top speed (km/h) 211 (V) 211 (V)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.2 6.1 Advice

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8.7 8.6

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,830 1,800

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,301 1,281

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 990 990 Operation Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 890 860

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 650 640

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,800 1,800

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,600 1,600 Emergencies Safety

307 Technical data

Diesel engine 2.0 110 kW (150 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 110 (150)/3,500-4,000 340/1,750-3,000 4/1,968 51 CN

LEON ST LEON LEON LEON SC LEON SC LEON ST LEON ST LEON ST LEON ST X-PERIENCE Outputs and weights Start- Automat- Start- Automat- Start- Automat- All-wheel X-PERIENCE 4WD Stop ic Stop ic Stop ic drive 4WD automatic

Top speed (km/h) 215 (VI) 211 (VI) 215 (VI) 211 (VI) 215 (VI) 213 (VI) 211 (VI) 208 (VI) 205 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.1 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.2 6.2 6.3 6.3 5.8

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (sec- 8.4 8.4 8.3 8.3 8.6 8.6 8.7 8.7 8.9 onds)

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,820 1,850 1,810 1,810 1,910 1,940 2,010 2,010 2,040

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,305 1,335 1,285 1,305 1,358 1,388 1,474 1,491 1,519 (kg)

Maximum authorised weight on front 1,000 1,030 990 1,010 990 1,020 1,010 1,010 1,040 axle (kg)

Maximum authorised weight on rear 870 870 870 850 970 970 1,050 1,050 1,050 axle (kg)

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes 650 660 640 650 670 690 730 740 750 (kg)

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,900 2,000 2,000 up to 8% (kg)

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients 1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 1,700 2,000 2,000 up to 12% (kg) 308 Technical specifications

Diesel engine 2.0 130 kW (177 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 130 (177)/3,600-4,000 350/1,750-3,000 4/1,968

51 CN data Technical

Outputs and weights LEON LEON SC

Top speed (km/h) 223 (VI) 223 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.9 5.8 Advice

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 7.8 7.6

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,880 1,860

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,365 1,345

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,020 1,010 Operation Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 910 900

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 680 670

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,800 1,800

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,600 1,600 Emergencies Safety

309 Technical data

Diesel engine 2.0 135 kW (184 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 135 (184)/3,500-4,000 380/1,750-3,000 4/1,968 51 CN

Outputs and weights LEON LEON LEON SC LEON SC LEON ST LEON ST LEON ST Start-Stop Automatic Start-Stop Automatic Start-Stop Automatic X-PERIENCE 4WD

Top speed (km/h) 228 (VI) 226 (VI) 228 (VI) 226 (VI) 228 (VI) 226 (VI) 224 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.7 5.7 5.6 5.6 5.9 5.9 4.9

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 7.5 7.5 7.4 7.4 7.8 7.8 7.1

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,880 1,900 1,860 1,890 1,970 1,990 2,050

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,370 1,390 1,350 1,370 1,415 1,435 1,529

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,020 1,040 1,010 1,030 1,010 1,030 1,050

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 910 910 900 910 1,010 1,010 1,050

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 680 690 670 680 700 710 750

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 2,000 8% (kg)

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 2,000 12% (kg)

310 Technical specifications

Dimensions Technical data Technical Advice

Fig. 259 Dimensions.

LEON LEON SC LEON ST LEON ST X-PERIENCE Operation A/B Front and rear projection (mm) 861/785 861/785 861/1,052 861/1,060

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,636 2,601 2,636 2,630

D Length (mm) 4,282 4,247 4,549 4,551

1,533/1,504 1,541/1,504 E/F Front/reara) track width (mm) 1,549/1,520 1,547/1,510 Emergencies G Width (mm) 1,816 1,810 1,816 1,816

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,459 1,446 1,454b) 1,481b)

Turning radius (m) 10.9 a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim. Safety b) Dimension to the roof bars.

311

Index

Airbag system ...... 19, 80 Auto Hold function ...... 199 Index activation ...... 81 cruise control system ...... 200 deactivation of front airbag ...... 84 Emergency Assist ...... 222 A description ...... 81 Front Assist ...... 212 ABS front airbags ...... 19, 82 parking aid ...... 232, 233 see Anti-lock brake system ...... 181 functioning ...... 81 pedestrian monitoring system ...... 217 ACC ...... 201 head-protection airbags ...... 21 traffic jam assist ...... 221 radar sensor ...... 204 knee airbags ...... 20 traffic sign detection system ...... 228 Accessories ...... 154, 251 side airbags ...... 21 tyre monitoring ...... 282 Adaptive cruise control ...... 201 Air conditioning tyre monitoring indicator ...... 283 function for preventing overtaking in an inside Climatronic ...... 48, 167 Assistance Systems lane ...... 209 heating and fresh air ...... 51 fatigue detection ...... 231 indications on the display ...... 203 manual air conditioning ...... 50 tyre monitoring systems ...... 281 malfunction ...... 202 user instructions ...... 169 Assisted starting ...... 65 radar sensor ...... 204 Air outlets ...... 170 Audible signal special driving situations ...... 210 Air recirculation ...... 170 lights ...... 135 warning and control lamp ...... 203 Alcantara: cleaning ...... 258 Audible warning signal Adaptive Cruise Control Anchoring seat belt not fastened ...... 75 deactivating temporarily ...... 209 the front tow line...... 94 warning and control lamps ...... 113 operating ...... 205 Anti-freeze ...... 55 Auto Hold function ...... 199 Additional electrical appliances (efficiency pro- Anti-lock brake system ...... 181 Auto Lock (central locking) ...... 120 gramme) ...... 40 Anti-puncture ...... 60, 90 Automatic car washes Adjusting Anti-puncture kit ...... 60, 90 switching the Auto Hold function off ...... 200 front head restraints ...... 73 check after 10 minutes ...... 92 Automatic dipped beam control ...... 136 front seats ...... 147 Anti-theft alarm system ...... 128 Automatic gear lights ...... 141 trailer ...... 249 safety interlock for ignition key ...... 171 Adjusting the head restraints vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow sys- Automatic gearbox ...... 185 front head restraints ...... 148 tem ...... 130 backup programme ...... 191 Adjustment see also Anti-theft alarm system ...... 120 downhill speed control ...... 190 CAR menu ...... 114 Anti-theft security system ...... 13, 120, 126 driving tips ...... 188 front head restraints ...... 148 Anti-tow protection ...... 130 kick-down feature ...... 189 rear head restraints ...... 73, 148 Aspects to take into account before starting the launch control programme ...... 189 seats ...... 70 vehicle ...... 69 manual release of selector lever ...... 47 Airbag covers ...... 19 ASR selector lever lock ...... 186 Airbags ...... 80 see Traction control system ...... 181 selector lever positions ...... 185 description ...... 81 Assistance systems steering wheel with gearshift paddles ...... 187 ACC ...... 201 tiptronic ...... 185, 187 adaptive cruise control ...... 201 313 Index

AUX-IN ...... 119 Central locking Checking levels anti-theft alarm ...... 128 engine compartment ...... 268 B central locking switch ...... 123 Child-proof locking Battery ...... 127 electric windows ...... 132 electric windows ...... 131 Before starting the vehicle ...... 69 Keyless Access ...... 124 Child seats ...... 22, 88 Belt tightening ...... 79 manual locking ...... 14 categorisation in groups ...... 88 Bench seat ...... 151 programming ...... 123 ISOFIX system ...... 24 Biodiesel ...... 265 remote control key ...... 122 safety instructions ...... 22, 87 Bonnet ...... 15, 268 selective unlocking system ...... 122 securing with seat belt ...... 23 opening the bonnet ...... 269 sliding/tilting sunroof ...... 132 Top Tether system ...... 24, 26 Brake assist system ...... 181 Central locking system ...... 120 City Emergency braking function ...... 216 Brake fluid ...... 56 Centre console ...... 9 Cleaning ...... 252 Brakes ...... 179 Cetane number (diesel fuel) ...... 265 alcantara ...... 258 brake fluid ...... 273 Changing carbon parts ...... 255 brake servo ...... 179 parts ...... 251 Easy Connect control panel ...... 256 electronic parking brake ...... 177 Changing a wheel ...... 61 exhaust pipe ...... 256 emergency braking function ...... 178 subsequent work ...... 63 fabrics ...... 256 new brake pads ...... 179 Changing bulbs ...... 98 leather ...... 257 Braking fog light ...... 101 natural leather ...... 258 brake assist system ...... 181 number plate light ...... 105 plastic parts ...... 255, 256 moving off ...... 183 rear bulb in the side panel ...... 103 radio display ...... 256 rear bulbs ...... 102 seat belts ...... 259 C Changing gear trims ...... 254 engaging gears (manual gearbox) ...... 184 washing the vehicle ...... 252 Camera Changing main headlight wheels ...... 255 cleaning ...... 254 turn signal ...... 100 windows ...... 255 cleanliness ...... 228 Changing settings Climatronic ...... 48 Lane Assist ...... 220 CAR menu ...... 30 Close ...... 120 Capacities ...... 53 Changing the blades ...... 92 Closing ...... 120 fuel tank ...... 112 Changing the main beam headlight bulb bonnet ...... 269 natural gas tank ...... 263 main beam headlight ...... 101 panoramic sliding sunroof ...... 133 windscreen washer water ...... 274 Changing the main headlight bulb windows ...... 131 Car-care products ...... 252 day light ...... 100 Clutch (warning lamp) ...... 191 Catalytic converter ...... 194 dipped headlight ...... 100 Coming Home ...... 138 malfunction ...... 194 Changing the wiper blades ...... 67 Connectivity Box ...... 119 CCS ...... 42 Charging the battery ...... 276 CD-ROM player (navigation) ...... 153

314 Index

Control and warning lamps placing in standby position ...... 242 Driver information system diesel particulate filter ...... 194 removing ...... 244, 245 CD/radio indication ...... 33 emission control ...... 195 standby position ...... 242 engine oil temperature display ...... 40 Controls and displays Diesel operation with the windscreen wiper lever . . . . 33 general instrument panel ...... 107 diesel particulate filter ...... 194 Driving Controls on the steering wheel engine oil ...... 270 driving abroad ...... 141 operating the audio system ...... 116 preheating ...... 171 with a trailer ...... 241, 246, 248, 249 operating the telephone and audio system . . 117 refuelling ...... 265 Driving abroad Convenience closing Diesel particulate filter headlights ...... 141 panoramic sliding sunroof ...... 134 malfunction ...... 194 Driving data ...... 33 Convenience opening Digital clock ...... 108 data summary ...... 36 panoramic sliding sunroof ...... 134 Dimensions ...... 311 memories ...... 35 Cooling system Direction of rotation Driving mode ...... 225, 226 checking coolant ...... 272 tyres ...... 63 Driving profile ...... 225, 226 checking level ...... 272 Display ...... 108, 109 Driving safety ...... 69 coolant temperature gauge ...... 111 Display of traffic signs on the instrument panel Driving through water ...... 195 topping up coolant ...... 272 activate ...... 229 DSG ...... 185 Cornering deactivate ...... 229 Duplicate keys ...... 121 lights ...... 138 Disposal Dust and pollen filter ...... 167 Correct position ...... 70 seat belt tensioners ...... 79 Dynamic lights range control ...... 141 Correct sitting position Distance control front passenger ...... 71 see Adaptive cruise control ...... 201 E rear seat passengers ...... 72 Door cylinder ...... 13 E10 Cruise control system ...... 42, 200 Door handle ...... 13 see Ethanol (fuel) ...... 264 operation ...... 201 Door lock ...... 13 Easy Connect ...... 30, 114 warning and indication lamp ...... 200 Door release lever ...... 107 Economical Doors driving ...... 193 D childproof locks ...... 128 Efficiency programme Dangers in not using the seat belt ...... 77 opening and closing ...... 13 additional electrical appliances ...... 40 Dash panel ...... 43 Downhill speed control function ...... 190 saving tips ...... 40 Data sticker ...... 287 Drawer ...... 152 Electrical accessories Deactivating the front passenger front airbag 20, 84 Drink holders ...... 153 see Power socket ...... 154 Defective bulbs Driver Electrical socket changing a bulb ...... 98 see Correct sitting position ...... 70, 71, 72 trailer ...... 247 Detachable ball Driver-side general instrument panel Electric windows ...... 16, 131 assembling ...... 243 left-hand drive ...... 7 convenience opening and closing ...... 132 checking attachment ...... 244 right-hand drive ...... 8 315 Index

Electromechanical steering ...... 259 running-in ...... 192 oil properties ...... 55 lamp ...... 259 Start-Stop system ...... 196 specifications ...... 270 Electronic differential lock (EDL) ...... 181 starting ...... 171 temperature display ...... 40 Electronic immobiliser ...... 13 starting up (driver messages with the mechan- topping up ...... 271 Electronic self-locking ...... 181 ical contact) ...... 172 Environment Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...... 181 switching off (key) ...... 173 ecological driving ...... 193 Electronic torque management (XDS) ...... 181 Engine and ignition environmental compatibility ...... 192 Emergencies ...... 90 automatic ignition switch-off ...... 174 Environmental tips anti-puncture kit ...... 90 My Beat ...... 176 filling the tank ...... 263 automatic gearbox backup programme . . . . . 191 preheating the engine ...... 175 refuelling ...... 262 bulbs ...... 59 starting the engine ...... 175 Equipment ...... 154, 251 changing a wheel ...... 61 starting the engine with Press & Drive ...... 175 ESC emergency towing of the vehicle ...... 64 stopping the engine ...... 176 electronic stability control ...... 181 fuses ...... 58 Engine compartment ...... 15, 268 multi-collision brake ...... 182 hazard warning lights ...... 140 battery ...... 56, 275 Sport Mode ...... 183 jump leads ...... 65 brake fluid ...... 56, 273 Ethanol (fuel) ...... 264 manual unlocking and locking ...... 92 closing the bonnet ...... 269 Event Data Recorder ...... 89 puncture ...... 59 coolant ...... 55, 272 Exhaust gas purification system replacing a blown fuse ...... 58 engine oil ...... 54, 271 catalytic converter ...... 194 replacing the battery ...... 276 opening the bonnet ...... 269 diesel particulate filter ...... 194 vehicle tool kit ...... 90 safety notes ...... 268 Exhaust pipe: Cleaning ...... 256 Emergency Assist ...... 222 windscreen washer reservoir ...... 56, 274 Extending see Emergency Assist ...... 222 Engine coolant ...... 55 the luggage compartment ...... 150 switching off ...... 223 G 12 plus-plus ...... 55 Exterior lighting switching on ...... 223 G 13 ...... 55 changing a bulb ...... 98 Emergency braking function ...... 178 specifications ...... 55 Exterior mirrors Emergency braking warning ...... 140 Engine data ...... 291 adjusting ...... 18 Emergency operation Engine fault Exterior rear view mirrors passenger door ...... 14 control lamp ...... 195 exterior ...... 146 selector lever ...... 47 Engine management ...... 194 heated ...... 146 Emission control system control lamp ...... 195 Exterior view ...... 5, 6 control lamp ...... 195 Engine oil ...... 54, 270 External aerial ...... 251 Emissions data ...... 287 changing ...... 270, 272 Engine checking oil level ...... 271 F assisted starting ...... 65 consumption ...... 271 Fastening rings ...... 161 noises ...... 176 dipstick ...... 271 Fatigue detection ...... 231 preheating ...... 171 inspection service ...... 270 Filling the tank ...... 262 maintenance intervals ...... 270 316 Index

Floor mats ...... 74 Full-LED Headlights ...... 98 Head-protection airbags Fluid Level control ...... 53 Function Coming Home ...... 138 description ...... 21 Fog light bulb ...... 101 Function Leaving Home ...... 139 safety instructions ...... 83 Folding table ...... 153 Fuses ...... 58, 96 Headlights Four-wheel drive ...... 260 fuse box ...... 97 changing a bulb ...... 98 snow chains ...... 260 identifying blown fuses ...... 58 driving abroad ...... 141 winter tyres ...... 260 identifying by colours ...... 58 headlight washers ...... 144 Front airbags ...... 19, 82 preparation before replacing ...... 58 Head restraints ...... 17 Front armrest ...... 150 replacing ...... 58 adjustment ...... 148 Front Assist monitoring system ...... 212 front ...... 73 City Emergency braking function ...... 216 G front head restraints ...... 73 malfunction ...... 213 Gear-change indicator ...... 39 rear head restraints ...... 73 on-screen messages ...... 213 Gearbox DSG Heated rear window ...... 49, 51 operating ...... 214 see Automatic gearbox ...... 185 Heating and fresh air ...... 51 radar sensor ...... 213 Gearbox lever ...... 46 Hill driving assistant ...... 183 switching off temporarily ...... 215 Gear change ...... 46 Horn ...... 107 system limitations ...... 215 automatic ...... 46 How to jump start ...... 65 Front passenger front airbag Kick-down ...... 226 description ...... 66 control lamp ...... 85 manual gearbox ...... 184 deactivation ...... 20, 85 manual gear change ...... 46 I Front seat Gear engaged ...... 46 Identifying letters on engine ...... 287 manual adjustment ...... 17 Gear recommendation ...... 39 Ignition lock ...... 27, 171 Fuel ...... 53, 264 Gearshift paddles (automatic gearbox) ...... 187 see Starter button ...... 174 consumption ...... 288 General instrument panel Incorrect sitting position ...... 72 diesel ...... 265 control lamps ...... 43 Indications on display ethanol ...... 264 controls and displays ...... 107 traffic signs ...... 229 fuel gauge ...... 112 engine compartment ...... 268 Indications on the display ...... 109 natural gas ...... 266 warning lamps ...... 43 ACT ...... 193 refuelling ...... 264 Glove compartment ...... 153 adaptive cruise control ...... 203 saving ...... 193 assist systems submenu ...... 37 Fuel consumption H compass ...... 110 switching off using inertia ...... 193 Handbrake ...... 177 distance travelled ...... 109 why does fuel consumption increase? ...... 194 see Parking brake ...... 177 doors, bonnet and rear lid open ...... 38 Fuel tank cap warning lamp ...... 179 driver information system ...... 33 opening and closing ...... 53 Hazard warning lights ...... 28, 140 driving data ...... 35 Fuel tank flap Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . . . 77 ECO ...... 110 opening and closing ...... 53 engine oil ...... 40 317 Index

MKB ...... 110 Keyless-Entry Lights ...... 27, 135 outside temperature ...... 39 see Keyless Access ...... 124 audible signals ...... 135 recommended gear ...... 110 Keyless-Exit AUTO ...... 136 second speed display ...... 110 see Keyless Access ...... 124 changing a bulb ...... 98 selector lever positions ...... 110, 185 Keyless Access coming home ...... 138 service intervals ...... 41 Keyless-Entry ...... 124 cornering lights ...... 138 speed warning ...... 110 Keyless-Exit ...... 124 daytime running lights ...... 135 Start-Stop ...... 110 Press & Drive ...... 174 dipped beam headlight ...... 135 time ...... 109 special characteristics ...... 126 fog light ...... 138 tyre monitoring ...... 283 starting the engine ...... 175 hazard warning lights ...... 28 warning and control lamps ...... 203 unlocking and locking the vehicle ...... 124 interior lights ...... 142 warning and information messages ...... 38 Keyless Access locking and ignition system leaving home ...... 139 Indications on the screen see Keyless Access ...... 124 light control ...... 135 SEAT Drive Profile ...... 224 Keys lighting of instruments ...... 142 Inertia mode ...... 190 assign key ...... 121 lighting of the controls ...... 142 Infotainment system ...... 30 car key ...... 121 lights range control ...... 141 Inspection service ...... 270 driver messages (mechanical contact) ...... 172 main beam lever ...... 136 Instrument cluster ...... 108 remote control ...... 121 main beam lights ...... 135 Instrument panel ...... 108 replacing the battery ...... 127 main beams ...... 28 display ...... 108, 109 spare key ...... 121 motorway light ...... 141 instruments ...... 108 synchronising ...... 127 parking lights ...... 140 menus ...... 33 unlocking and locking ...... 13, 122 reading lights ...... 142 odometer ...... 111 Kick-down side lights ...... 135 service interval indication ...... 41 automatic gearbox ...... 189 switch ...... 27 warning and control lamps ...... 113 manual gear change ...... 226 turn signal lever ...... 136 Interior lights ...... 29 Knee airbags Lights range control ...... 141 Interior view ...... 12 safety information ...... 20 Load compartment in the luggage compartment ISOFIX system ...... 24, 26 see Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . 155 L Loading the luggage compartment ...... 155 J Lane Assist system ...... 218 Loading the vehicle Jack ...... 61, 90 cleaning the camera area ...... 254 fastening rings ...... 161 mounting points ...... 62 Launch control programme (automatic gearbox) 189 luggage compartment ...... 14 Jump leads ...... 65 Leather: care ...... 257 roof carrier system ...... 166 Leaving Home ...... 139 tailboard for transporting long items ...... 160 K Lifting the vehicle ...... 62 Locking and unlocking in the door cylinder ...... 13 Key-operated switch ...... 84 Light Assist ...... 137 Lighting of the instrument panel ...... 142 318 Index

with Keyless Access ...... 124 Mobile telephones ...... 251 Odometer ...... 111 with the central locking switch ...... 123 Model plate ...... 287 partial ...... 108 Luggage ...... 155 Modifications ...... 251 reset button ...... 111 Luggage compartment ...... 14 Moving off total ...... 108 automatic lock ...... 130 hill driving assistant ...... 183 Oil change ...... 272 luggage compartment lighting ...... 142 Multi-collision Brake ...... 182 Oil properties ...... 55 luggage compartment variable floor . . . 163, 164 Multimedia ...... 119 On-screen messages net bag ...... 162 My Beat ...... 176 Front Assist monitoring system ...... 213 net partition ...... 158, 159 One-touch opening and closing rear shelf ...... 156 N electric windows ...... 133 retractable rear shelf ...... 156 Natural gas ...... 266 Open and close ...... 120 storing the rear shelf ...... 157, 158 fuel gauge ...... 112 panoramic sliding sunroof ...... 133 unlocking manually ...... 15 fuel tank cap ...... 263 Opening ...... 120 see also Loading the luggage compartment . 155 LNG ...... 264 bonnet ...... 269 Luggage compartment variable floor . . . . 163, 164 refuelling ...... 263, 266 fuel tank flap ...... 262, 263 Luggage net smell ...... 266 panoramic sliding sunroof ...... 133 luggage compartment ...... 162 special features ...... 264 windows ...... 131 Lumbar support ...... 147 Natural leather Opening and closing ...... 13 cleaning ...... 258 bonnet ...... 269 M Navigation system by remote control ...... 122 Main beam assist ...... 137 CD-ROM player ...... 153 fuel tank flap ...... 262, 263 Main beam lever ...... 136 Net bag in the door cylinder ...... 13 Main panel luggage compartment ...... 162 rear lid of the luggage compartment ...... 14 turn signal and main beam lever ...... 136 Net partition ...... 158, 159 windows ...... 131 Maintenance intervals ...... 270 Noises with the central locking switch ...... 123 Malfunction adaptive cruise control ...... 202 Opening manually adaptive cruise control ...... 202 brakes ...... 180 rear lid ...... 15 catalytic converter ...... 194 ESC ...... 182 Outside temperature ...... 39 clutch ...... 191 parking brake ...... 178 diesel particulate filter ...... 194 refuelling natural gas ...... 264 P Front Assist ...... 213 tyres ...... 63, 277 Paint ...... 254 front assist monitoring system ...... 213 Number of seats ...... 75 care ...... 254 gearbox ...... 191 damage ...... 255 Manual air conditioning ...... 50 O Paintwork Manual gearbox ...... 184 Octane rating (petrol) ...... 264 code ...... 287 Manual unlocking and locking ...... 92 Mirror ...... 145 319 Index

Panoramic sliding sunroof Passenger-side instrument panel Radar sensor ...... 204, 213 closing ...... 133 left-hand drive ...... 10 Radio-operated remote control convenience closing ...... 134 right-hand drive ...... 11 see Keys ...... 121 convenience opening ...... 134 Passenger door manual locking ...... 14 Radio display: cleaning ...... 256 convenience opening and closing ...... 132 Passenger seat backrest Radio transmitters ...... 251 fault ...... 133 folding down ...... 150 Rain sensor ...... 145 opening ...... 133 lifting ...... 150 control of the function ...... 145 roll-back function ...... 134 Pedals ...... 74 Raising the vehicle ...... 62 Parking ...... 179, 188 Pedestrian Monitoring system ...... 217 Rear Parking aid ...... 232 Pedestrian protection headrests ...... 73 adjusting the display and audible warnings . 236 see Pedestrian Monitoring system ...... 217 Rear Assist system ...... 238 automatic activation ...... 235 Petrol instructions for use ...... 239 fault ...... 237 additives ...... 264 parking ...... 240 parking system plus ...... 234 refuelling ...... 264 screen ...... 239 rear parking aid ...... 233 Plastic parts: cleaning ...... 255, 256 special characteristics ...... 239 sensors and camera: cleaning ...... 254 Polishing ...... 254 Rear bulbs ...... 102 surroundings warning ...... 234 Positioning seat belts Rear bulbs in the side panel towing bracket ...... 237 during pregnancy ...... 79 disassembling the rear light ...... 103 visual indication ...... 236 seat belts ...... 79 Rear LED light bulb in the rear lid Parking aid system Power ...... 154 disassembling the bulb holder ...... 104 see Parking aid ...... 232 Power Management ...... 261 Rear lid ...... 14, 15 Parking brake ...... 177 Power socket ...... 154 see also Luggage compartment ...... 130 activate ...... 177 Power steering Rear light bulbs in the rear lid automatic activation ...... 178 see Electromechanical steering ...... 259 disassembling the bulb holder ...... 104 automatic release ...... 177 Pre-heating system Rear lights on the side panel emergency braking function ...... 178 control lamp ...... 195 summary ...... 102 release ...... 177 Preheating ...... 171 Rear seat backrest Parking distance warning system Preheating the engine ...... 175 folding down ...... 151 see Parking aid ...... 232 Press & Drive folding down and lifting the backrest ...... 151 Parking (automatic gearbox) ...... 188 starter button ...... 174 folding down and raising the backrest ...... 150 ParkPilot starting the engine ...... 175 lifting ...... 151 see Parking aid ...... 232 Progressive steering ...... 260 Rear seat passengers Particulate filter (diesel) ...... 194 Puncture see Correct sitting position ...... 70, 71, 72 Parts ...... 251 action ...... 59 Rear shelf Passenger storing ...... 157, 158 see Correct sitting position ...... 70, 71, 72 R Rear View Camera ...... 238 Racks ...... 154 320 Index

Rear view mirrors S safety notes ...... 76 adjusting the exterior rear view mirrors . . . . . 146 unfastened ...... 77 anti-dazzle ...... 145 Safe Seat belt tensioners ...... 18, 79 Refuelling driving safe ...... 69 SEAT Drive Profile ...... 224 fuel gauge ...... 112 Safelock ...... 126 Seat heating ...... 149 gas gauge ...... 112 see also Anti-theft security system ...... 120 Seats natural gas ...... 263 Safety ...... 69 adjustment ...... 147 opening fuel tank flap ...... 262 child safety ...... 86 rear seat backrest ...... 151 Remote control key child seats ...... 86 Selective unlocking system ...... 122 unlocking and locking ...... 122 deactivating the front passenger front airbag . 20 Selector lever lock ...... 186 Removing and attaching head restraints ...... 148 safe driving ...... 69 Selector lever (automatic gearbox) Repair work ...... 251 Safety equipment ...... 69 malfunction ...... 186 Replacement parts ...... 251 Safety information manual release ...... 47 Replacing the battery knee airbags ...... 20 positions ...... 185 of the vehicle key ...... 127 Safety instructions Service intervals ...... 41 Reset the trip recorder ...... 111 head-protection airbags ...... 83 Service notification: read ...... 41 Retaining hooks ...... 162 side airbags ...... 82 Side airbags Retractable rear shelf ...... 156 using child seats ...... 22, 87 description ...... 21 Reverse gear (automatic gearbox) ...... 185 Safety interlock for ignition key ...... 171 safety instructions ...... 82 Revolution counter ...... 108, 111 Safety notes Signal lever ...... 28 Rims seat belt tensioners ...... 79 Sitting position changing a wheel ...... 61 using seat belts ...... 76 driver ...... 70 Roll-back function Saving fuel Sliding panoramic sunroof ...... 16 panoramic sliding sunroof ...... 134 inertia mode ...... 190 Smell of gas ...... 266 sun blind ...... 134 Saving tips (efficiency programme) ...... 40 Snow chains ...... 64, 289 windows ...... 132 Seat four-wheel drive ...... 260 Roof carrier system ...... 164 electric seat ...... 17 Spanner symbol ...... 41 Roof load ...... 166 heating ...... 149 Special characteristics technical data ...... 166 Seat belt position tow-starting ...... 94 Roof luggage rack for pregnant women ...... 18 Speed limiter ...... 200 attach the cross bars ...... 165 seat belts ...... 18 Speed warning device ...... 40 Roof rack ...... 164 Seat belts ...... 75 Sport Mode ...... 183 Running-in adjustment ...... 18, 78 Start-Stop system ...... 196 new brake pads ...... 179 cleaning ...... 259 driver messages ...... 198 new engine ...... 192 control lamp ...... 75 lamps ...... 197 new tyres ...... 277 protective function ...... 76 operation ...... 196 purpose ...... 75, 80 stopping and starting the engine ...... 197

321 Index

switching off and on ...... 198 Taking care of your vehicle ...... 252 Traffic sign detection system ...... 228, 229 the engine does not switch off ...... 197 exterior ...... 252 indication on display ...... 229 the engine starts by itself ...... 197 interior ...... 256 limited operation ...... 230 Starter button ...... 174 Technical data operation ...... 229 Starting the engine ...... 171 capacity ...... 274 speed warning ...... 230 Starting the vehicle ...... 27 roof load ...... 166 trailer ...... 230 Steering Technical specifications ...... 287 windscreen damage ...... 228 electromechanical steering ...... 259 Tightening torques of wheel bolts ...... 289 Traffic signs engaging the steering lock ...... 173 Timer ...... 37 indication on display ...... 229 Steering wheel lap times ...... 37 Trailer ...... 241 adjustment ...... 19 menu ...... 37 connecting ...... 247, 248 gearshift paddles (automatic gearbox) ...... 187 statistics ...... 37 driving with a trailer ...... 248 setting ...... 71 Tiptronic (automatic gearbox) ...... 185, 187 electrical socket ...... 247 Steering wheel controls ...... 115 Tire Mobility Set hitching ...... 247 Storage area inflating a tyre ...... 91 mode ...... 289 front seat ...... 152 Top speed ...... 40 parking Aid ...... 237 Storage compartments ...... 152, 154 Top Tether system ...... 24, 26 rear lights ...... 246 glove compartment ...... 153 Tow-starting ...... 65 safety lug ...... 248 glove compartment lighting ...... 142 Tow-starting the engine ...... 93, 94 tow rope ...... 246 Sun blind ...... 134, 143 Tow-starting the vehicle ...... 93 Trailer weights ...... 289 roll-back function ...... 134 Towing a trailer ...... 246 Transporting children ...... 86 Sun protection ...... 143 Towing bracket Transporting items Sun visors ...... 143 retrofitting ...... 249 fastening rings ...... 161 Switch Towing bracket device ...... 241 net bag ...... 162 hazard warning lights ...... 140 ball coupling ...... 247 retaining hooks ...... 162 Switching off the engine description ...... 241 roof carrier ...... 164 with the key ...... 173 operation and care ...... 245 roof carrier system ...... 164, 166 Switching off the lights ...... 135 Towing the vehicle ...... 64 tailboard for transporting long items ...... 160 Switching on the lights ...... 135 Towline anchorages ...... 65, 90 Trim parts: cleaning ...... 256 Switching the ignition on and off ...... 27, 171 rear ...... 95 Trims System Easy Connect ...... 114 Tow rope ...... 246 cleaning ...... 254 Traction control system ...... 181 Turn signal convenience function ...... 136 T Traffic Jam Assist ...... 221 Turn signal lever ...... 136 Tailboard for transporting long items ...... 160 malfunctions ...... 222 Tyre mobility set ...... 60 Tail lights situations in which Traffic Jam Assist must be components ...... 91 changing a bulb ...... 102 switched off ...... 222 sealing a tyre ...... 91 switching off ...... 221 switching on ...... 221 322 Index

Tyre Mobility System Vehicle ESC ...... 182 see Anti-puncture kit ...... 90 chassis number ...... 287 for seat belts ...... 75 Tyre monitoring systems ...... 281 data label ...... 287 gear change ...... 191 tyre monitoring indicator ...... 283 identification data ...... 287 instrument panel ...... 43, 45 Tyre pressure monitoring system ...... 278 identification number ...... 287 instrument panel display ...... 45 Tyre pressures ...... 289 raising ...... 62 Lane Assist ...... 219 Tyre profile ...... 279 unlocking and locking with Keyless Access . . 124 lights ...... 135 Tyre repair kit ...... 90 Vehicle battery ...... 56, 275 refuelling ...... 262 see also Anti-puncture kit ...... 90 assisted starting ...... 65 Start-Stop ...... 197 Tyres ...... 277 charge level ...... 261 tyre monitoring system ...... 282 accessories ...... 277 charging ...... 276 Warning symbols changing ...... 61 connecting and disconnecting ...... 275 see Warning and control lamps ...... 113 dimensions ...... 279 disconnect and connect ...... 42 Warning triangle ...... 140 new tyres ...... 279 power management ...... 261 Washing the vehicle ...... 252 repair kit ...... 90 replacing ...... 276 Weights ...... 288 tyre pressure ...... 278 winter conditions ...... 275 Wheel useful life ...... 278 Vehicle care changing ...... 279 wear indicators ...... 279 natural leather ...... 258 Wheel balance ...... 278 with compulsory direction of rotation ...... 63 windscreen wipers service position ...... 67 Wheel bolts ...... 289 with directional tread pattern ...... 277 Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow system 130 anti-theft ...... 62 Tyre tread depth ...... 279 activation ...... 129 caps ...... 61 Tyre wear ...... 279 Vehicle seats ...... 75 loosening ...... 62 Vehicle tool kit ...... 61 tightening torque ...... 281 U Vehicle tools ...... 90 Wheel cover ...... 61 Unfastening the seat belt ...... 18, 78 Ventilation slits ...... 155 removing ...... 61 Unlocking and locking ...... 13 Wheels ...... 277, 289 by remote control ...... 122 W chains ...... 289 with Keyless Access ...... 124 Warning and control lamps ...... 43, 113 changing ...... 61, 63 with the central locking switch ...... 123 adaptive cruise control ...... 203 cleaning ...... 255 Upholstery: cleaning airbag system ...... 84 new wheels ...... 279 alcantara ...... 258 applying the brake ...... 203, 213 snow chains ...... 64 fabrics ...... 256 ASR ...... 182 temporary spare wheel ...... 284 USB ...... 119 audible warning signal ...... 113 wheel cover ...... 61 USB/AUX-IN Port ...... 119 cruise control system (CCS) ...... 200 Wheel spanner ...... 90 electromechanical steering ...... 259 Windows V engine management ...... 195 electric ...... 16, 131 removing ice ...... 255 Vanity mirror ...... 143 engine pre-heating/fault system ...... 195 323 Index

Window wiper ...... 143 X Window wiper blade ...... 29 Windscreen and rear window wiper blades . . . . . 92 XDS ...... 181 changing ...... 68 cleaning ...... 68 Windscreen washer ...... 56, 143 Windscreen washer water capacity ...... 274 checking ...... 274 topping up ...... 274 Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper systems service position ...... 67 Windscreen wipers ...... 29, 143 functions ...... 144 headlight washer system ...... 144 heated windscreen washer jets ...... 144 lifting the wiper blade ...... 67 rain sensor ...... 145 replacing the wiper blades ...... 67 service position ...... 67 special characteristics ...... 144 window wiper lever ...... 143 Winter conditions battery ...... 275 defrosting the windows ...... 255 diesel ...... 265 snow chains ...... 64 taking care of your vehicle ...... 252 tyres ...... 285 Winter operation headlight washers ...... 144 heated windscreen washer jets ...... 144 salt on the roads ...... 145 Winter tyres ...... 285 four-wheel drive ...... 260 Wireless Charger ...... 119

324 About this manual The equipment marked with an aster- For the sake of the environment isk* is fitted as standard only in certain versions, and is only supplied as op- Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele- This manual contains a description of the vant information concerning environmental tional extras for some versions, or are equipment supplied with the vehicle at the protection. time this manual was published. Some of the only offered in certain countries. units described herein will not be available ® All registered marks are indicated with Note until a later date or are only available in cer- ®. Although the copyright symbol does tain markets. not appear, it is a copyrighted mark. Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information. Because this is a general manual for the LEON >> The section is continued on the follow- range, some of the equipment and functions ing page. that are described in this manual are not in- This manual is divided into six large parts, Important warnings on a given page which are: cluded in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modified depending on Detailed contents on a given page 1. The essentials the technical requirements and on the mar- 2. Safety ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising. General information on a given page 3. Emergencies The illustrations are intended as a general Emergency information on a given page 4. Operation guide and may vary from the equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details. 5. Tips WARNING The steering indications (left, right, forward, 6. Technical data Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor- reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the mation on safety. They warn you about possi- At the end of this manual, there is a detailed SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under- normal driving movements of the vehicle ex- ble dangers of accident or injury. alphabetical index that will help you quickly stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason cept when otherwise indicated. find the information you require. no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. The audiovisual material only is intended to All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error CAUTION help users to understand certain car function- or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print. Texts with this symbol draw your attention to alities better. It does not replace the instruc- potential sources of damage to your vehicle. Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. tion manual. Please use the instruction manu- SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act. al to obtain more comprehensive information and indications. All rights on changes are reserved. ❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose. © SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.05.17 OWNER’S MANUAL Leon 5F0012720BH Inglés (05.17)

5F0012720BH (05.17)

SEAT recommends SEAT recommends

Inglés SEAT GENUINE OIL Castrol EDGE Professional Leon